United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
Office of Research and
Development
Washington DC 20460
EPA/60(VR-93f'174
September 1993
I
&EPA
Hydrological Simulation
Program- FORTRAN
User's Manual for
Release 10
-------
-------
EPA/600/R-93/174
September 1993
HYDROLOGICAL SIMULATION PROGRAM -- FORTRAN
USER'S MANUAL FOR RELEASE 10
Brian R. Bicknell1, John C. Imhoff1, John L. Kittle, Jr.1
Anthony S. Donigian, Jr.1, and Robert C. Johanson2
1AQUA TERRA Consultants
Mountain View, California 94043
University of the Pacific
Stockton, California 95204
Project Officer
Thomas 0. Ban-well
. Assessment Branch
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia 30605
In Cooperation With
Office of Surface Water
Water Resources Division
U.S. Geological Survey
Reston, Virginia 22092
ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
ATHENS, GEORGIA 30605
Printed on Recycled Paper
-------
DISCLAIMER
The information in this document has been funded by the United States
Environmental Protection Agency under Contract Number 68-03-3513 to AQUA TERRA
Consultants. It has been subjected to the Agency's peer and administrative
review and has been approved as an EPA document. Mention of trade names or
commercial products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.
n
-------
FOREWORD
become more costly to implement and the penalties of
T? TT5' *nvi>onmental quality management requires
hpnmn K "l tools based on greater knowledge of the environmental
phenomena to be managed.. As part of this Laboratory's research on the
occurrence, movement, transformation, impact, and control of environmental
hS^iffifin^nnf??8^-*.8^^*10^ Bana9en*'* '* engineering tools to
management officials achieve water quality goals through watershed
The development and application of mathematical models to simulate the movement
Pblln ?hP%nhl°U?h f "%terS-6d SS thUS t0 ant^1pate environment"? p?obS
5 ?ul?Je^;.of int?nsive EPA research for a number of years. An
?S«J? thl? !"odelin9 approach is the Hydrological Simulation Program
(HSPF), which uses computer technology to simulate hydrology and
S- t in "J^f1 a"d,man-made water s^stems- HSPF ^ designed for easy
iJ SV° m°S* watersheds US1"9 existing meteorologic and hydrologlc data
Although data requirements are extensive and running costs are significant HSPF
IvJSV0 S thS ?St 3CCUrate and aPProP^ate management too?presently
watersheds continuous simulation of hydrology and water quality in
Rosemarie C. Russo, Ph.D.
Director
Environmental Research Laboratory
Athens, Georgia
iii
-------
ABSTRACT
The Hydro!ogical Simulation Program -- FORTRAN (HSPF) is a set of computer codes
that can simulate the hydrologic, and associated water quality, processes on
pervious and impervious land surfaces and in streams and well-mixed
impoundments. The manual discusses the modular structure of the system, and
presents a detailed discussion of the algorithms used to simulate various water
quantity and quality processes. Data useful to those who need to install,
maintain, or alter the system or who wish to examine its structure in greater
detail are also presented.
The original version of this report was submitted in fulfillment of Grant No.
R804971-01 by Hydrocomp, Inc., under the sponsorship of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency. That work was completed as of January 16, 1980.
Extensive, revisions, modifications, and corrections to the original report and
the HSPF code were performed by Anderson-Nichols and Co. under Contract No.
68-03-2895, also sponsored by the U.S. EPA. That work was completed in January
1981. Releases 7.0 and 8.0 of HSPF and the corresponding documents were
prepared by Linsley, Kraeger Associates, Ltd. and Anderson-Nichols under
Contract No. 68-01-6207, the HSPF maintenance and user support activities
directed by the U.S. EPA laboratory in Athens, GA.
The HSPF User Manual for Release 10.0 was prepared by AQUA TERRA Consultants of
Mountain View, CA, incorporating code modifications, corrections, and
documentation of selected algorithm enhancements sponsored by the U.S.
Geological Survey, the U.S. EPA Chesapeake Bay Program, and the U.S. EPA Athens
ERL. Except for additions and revisions of the manual reflecting the recent
changes and deletion of outdated introductory material in Part C and Part D,
much of the document is identical to the earlier Release 9.0 version. The
Release 10.0 manual is available on diskette in WordPerfect format.
IV
-------
CONTENTS
Foreword
Abstract
iii
iv
Part
A
B
C
D
E
F
Introduction.
General Principles 8
Standards and Conventions (not included1) .... 24
Visual Table of Contents (not included1) ........ 24
Functional Description ......
Format for the Users Control Input. !!!!!!!*'""'.'*" 260
Appendices
I Glossary of Terms ... 643
II Sample Runs ' 653
III Program NEWTSS (not included1). . , , .' .' .' .'• .' .' .' .' .' .' * .' .' .* 555
IV Guide to the Programmers Supplement (not included1) . ! ! . 656
V Time Series Concepts. . .... 657
Parts C and D, the NEWTSS Appendix and the Guide to the
Programmers Supplement are not included in this document. Much of
the material in these sections is outdated and not relevant to
Release 10.
-------
-------
Introduction
PART A
INTRODUCTION
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
CONTENTS
Purpose and Scope of the HSPF Software ..... ?
Requirements for HSPF ..............!.' i | -" * '* 4
Purpose and Organization of this Document ...['"' 5
Definition of Terms ...!.*'* 6
Notice of User Responsibility .....' 6
Acknowledgments !!!.'!! 6
-------
Introduction
1.0 PURPOSE AND SCOPE OF THE HSPF SOFTWARE
The use of models which simulate continuously the quantity/quality processes
occurring in the hydrological cycle is increasing rapidly. Recently there has
been a proliferation in the variety of models and in the range of processes they
simulate. This has been a mixed blessing to a user. To get the benefits of
simulation, he has to select a model from a bewildering array and then spend
much effort amassing and manipulating the huge quantities of data which the
model requires. If he wishes to couple two or more subprocess models to
simulate a complete process, he often encounters further difficulties. The
underlying assumptions and/or structures of the subprocess models may make them
somewhat incompatible. More frequently, the data structures are so different
that coupling requires extensive data conversion work.
One reason for these problems is that the boom in modeling work has not included
enough work on the development of good model structures. That is, very few
software packages for water resource modeling are built on a systematic
framework in which a variety of process modules can fit.
With HSPF we have attempted to overcome these problems as far as possible. HSPF
consists of a set of modules arranged in a hierarchical structure, which permit
the continuous simulation of a comprehensive range of hydrologic and water
quality processes. Our experience with sophisticated models indicates that much
of the human effort is associated with data management. This fact, often
overlooked by model builders, means that a successful comprehensive model must
include a sound data management component. Otherwise, the user may become so
entangled in data manipulation that his progress on the simulation work itself
is drastically retarded. Consequently, the HSPF software is planned around a
time series management system operating on direct access principles. The
simulation modules draw input from time series storage files and are capable of
writing output to them. Because these transfers require very few instructions
from the user, the problems referred to above are minimized.
The system is designed so that the various simulation and utility modules can be
invoked conveniently, either individually or in tandem. A top down approach
emphasizing structured design has been followed. First, the overall framework
and the Time Series Management System were designed. Then, work progressed down
the structure from the highest, most general level to the lowest, most detailed
one. Every level was planned before the code was written. Uniform data
structures, logic figures, and programming conventions were used throughout.
Modules were separated according to function so that, as much as possible, they
contained only those activities which are unique to them. Structured design has
made the system relatively easy to extend, so that users can add their own
modules with relatively little disruption of the existing code.
-------
Introduction
Now, a note on the initial contents of the system. Presently, it includes
modules which can handle almost all the functions which are available in the
following existing models:
(1) HSP (LIBRARY, UTILITY, LANDS, CHANNEL, QUALITY)
(3) NFS
(4) SERATRA
The HSPF software is not merely a translation of the above models, but a new
system with a framework designed to accommodate a variety of simulation modules-
the modules described above are the initial contents. Many extensions have been
made to the above models in the course of restructuring them into the HSPF
system.
It is hoped that HSPF will become a valuable tool for water resource planners
Because it is more comprehensive than most existing systems, it should permit'
m°re effec*1ve Planni"9- More specifically, the package can benefit the user in
the following ways:
(1) The time-series-oriented direct access data system and its
associated modules can serve as a convenient means of inputting,
organizing, and updating the large files needed for continuous
simulation.
(2) The unified user-oriented structure of the model makes it relatively
simple to operate. The user can select those modules and options
that he wishes to execute in one run, and the system will ensure
that the correct sets of code are invoked and that internal and
external transfers of data are handled. This is achieved with a
minimum of manual intervention. Input of control information is
simplified because a consistent system is used for this data for all
the modules.
(3) Because the system has been carefully planned using top-down
programming techniques, it is relatively easy to modify and extend.
The use of uniform programming standards and conventions has
assisted in this respect.
(4) Since the code is written almost entirely in ANSI standard Fortran,
implementation on a wide variety of computers is possible.
-------
Introduction
2.0 REQUIREMENTS FOR HSPF
In awarding the grant for development of HSPF, the EPA set the following
requirements:
(1) It must manage and perform deterministic simulation of a variety of
aquatic processes which occur on and under land surfaces and in
channels and reservoirs.
(2) It must readily accommodate alternate or additional simulation
modules.
(3) It must permit easy operation of several modules in series, and thus
be capable of feeding output from any operation to subsequent
operations.
(4) It must be in ANSI Fortran with minor specified extensions.
With the concurrence of the EPA, we expanded on these requirements:
(1) It must have a totally new design. Existing modules should not
merely be translated, but should be fitted into a new framework.
(2) It must be designed from the top down, using some of the new
improved programming techniques, such as Structured Design and
Structured Programming.
(3) Duplication of blocks of code which perform similar or identical
functions should be avoided.
(4) The user's control input must have a logically consistent structure
throughout the package.
(5) Uniform standards and practices must be followed throughout the
design, development and documentation of the system.
(6) It must have a conveniently operated disk-based time series storage
file built on the principle of direct access.
(7) The design must be geared to implementation on larger models of the
current generation of "minicomputers." It must be compatible with
Operating Systems which share memory using either the virtual memory
approach or a conventional overlay technique.
-------
Introduction
3.0 PURPOSE AND ORGANIZATION OF THIS DOCUMENT
This report contains all the documentation of the HSPF system. It is designed
(1) introduce new users to the principles and concepts on which the
system is founded
(2) describe the technical foundations of the algorithms in the various
application (simulation) modules
(3) describe the input which the user supplies to run the system
To meet these needs and, at the same time, to produce a document which is
reasonably easy to use we have divided this report into several distinct parts,
each with its own organization and table of contents. p«"",
Part A (this one) contains introductory material.
Part B outlines the general principles on which the HSPF system is based This
In«™enr«dlSJU?2.0n °f t^/fond view" which our simulation modules embody
properly understood5 matenal 1s necessary befo^ the detailed material can be
Part C Standards and Conventions (not included)
Part D Visual Table of Contents (not included)
n the.fun?t1on of /ach part of the software. The organization
part follows the layout of the software itself. The relationship
between, and the functions of, the various modules are described, starting at
the highest most general level and proceeding down to the lowest most detailed
level The algorithms used to simulate the quantity and quality processes which
occur in the real world are described in this part.
Part F describes the User's Control Input; that is, the information which the
user must provide in order to run HSPF.
Hh1Ci! Ji9ht °bS*Ure the structure of this document if it were included
to™ 2 X °f ^.rePolrt aPPfiars ™ Appendices. These include a glossary of
terms and descriptions of sample runs.
-------
Introduction
4.0 DEFINITION OF TERMS
In this document, terms which have a special meaning in HSPF, are enclosed in
quotes the first time they occur. Usually an explanation follows immediately. A
glossary of terms can be found in Appendix I.
5.0 NOTICE OF USER RESPONSIBILITY
This product has been carefully developed. Although the work included testing
of the software, the ultimate responsibility for its use and for ensuring
correctness of the results obtained, rests with the user.
The EPA and the developers of this software make no warranty of any kind with
regard to this software and associated documentation, including, but not limited
to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. They shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or use of this material.
While we intend to correct any errors which users report, we are not obliged to
do so. We reserve the right to make a reasonable charge for work which is
performed for a specific user at his request.
6.0 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This work was sponsored by the Environmental Research Laboratory in Athens,
Georgia. David Duttweiler was the laboratory director and Robert Swank the head
of the Technology Development and Applications Branch, which supervised the
project during the code development period.
Mr. Jim Falco was the Project Officer initially on the HSPF development work; he
was succeeded by Mr. Tom Barnwell who continues to oversee HSPF support
activities for EPA.
The initial HSPF and user manual development work was performed by Hydrocomp,
Inc.; members of the entire project team are acknowledged in the original
(Release 5.0) version of the user manual (EPA Publication No. EPA-600/9-80-015)
published in April 1980. Subsequent revisions and extensions to the HSPF code
and user manual were performed by Anderson-Nichols in their application of HSPF
in Iowa. Preparation of this document was performed by Anderson-Nichols and
Linsley, Kraeger Associates, Ltd. under the HSPF maintenance and user support
work. The primary participants in the work noted above, and their contributions,
are discussed below.
Robert Johanson was Project Manager for Hydrocomp on the initial development
work, and provided consulting assistance to Anderson-Nichols and Linsley,
Kraeger Associates on the subsequent application and maintenance work. For
Hydrocomp, he was responsible for project coordination, development of the
standards and practices and much of the application modules and wrote the SNOW
and PWATER sections of the PERLND module, and the HYDR section of the RCHRES
module. He was also responsible for the Run Interpreter. As consultant to
Anderson-Nichols, Dr. Johanson assisted in the design and developed much of the
pseudo code for the new SEDTRN and GQUAL sections.
-------
Introduction
John Imhoff worked on the RCHRES module both during the initial development work
Z K?CSt± dfri"I Hsubse^nt modifications and develojmen? of T* SEDTRH
and GQUAL sections for Anderson-Nichols. He analyzed the HSP QUALITY code
performed the detailed design of the new RCHRES module and wrote the cSde and
documentation for it. He also coordinated the production of thl functional
lSSffPdl2ctSarh El °t alVhe/Ppl 1Cat1°n moSules' FSr An5e?son S?cKSl , Mr.
Imhoff directed the task of developing the SEDTRN and GQUAL modules, Including
tf^^
the
des19ned and coded most sections of the PERLND module and all
*"
Jack Kittle, for Hydrocomp, assisted in assembling the code into the
tnl'cOMSoN'hi'n ^etFUP flthne syste^.fr arranging data in the numerou^ vl of
the COMMON block. For Anderson-Nichols, Mr. Kittle directed the comoilat on and
assembling of new and modified subroutines for Releases 7?0 and 8 0 of HSPF He
also developed and documented the MUTSIN (Multiple Tlmeserles Seqientlal Input)
SSoSif' f°r,interface w^h other models, and the lethality analysis code of the
?n ?ha ^Pple'H ^"onany. he directed the removal of 111 haff-word integers
P ^-e-tS the USGS-sP°»sored code maintenance and uJdaS
1 HSPF code development and
Tony Donigian participated in the initial design of the PERLND algorithms and
reviewed the functional descriptions (Part E) for technical Tccurlcy in the
nitia project by Hydrocomp. For Anderson-Nichols, he was Principal
nvestigator/Project Manager on the HSPF Application Project in JSwa that
comP1l1"9 »«• ""I
subroutnes and
nei
interactio"s <» "CHRES (under EPA Chesapeake B^ Jrogram
Dan Meier performed the updates to the code and documentation for Release 8 0
He also developed a set of comprehensive test runs for Release 8 0 and
significantly improved the OSV section of the programmer's supplement
-------
General Principles
PART B
GENERAL PRINCIPLES
CONTENTS
1.0 View of the Real World 9
1.1 General Concepts '. • 9
1.2 Nodes, Zones, and Elements 9
1.3 Processing Units and Networks 11
2.0 Software Structure '• 14
2.1 Concept of an "Operation" 14
2.2 Time Series Storage 16
2.3 Times Series Management for an Operation 17
2.4 HSPF Software Hierarchy 17
3.0 Structure of a Job 20
3.1 Elements of a Job 20
3.2 Groups of Operations 20
4.0 Conventions Used in Functional Description . 23
5.0 Method of Documenting Data Structures 23
5.1 Structure of Data in Memory . 23
5.2 Structure of Data on Disk Files . • • • 23
6.0 Method of Handling Diagnostic Messages ...... 24
FIGURES
Number page
1-1 Nodes, zones and elements 10
1-2 Directed and non-directed graphs 12
1-3 Single- and multi-element processing units 13
2-1 Logical structure of the internal scratch pad 15
2-2 Activities involved in an operation 18
2-3 Overview of HSPF software 19
3-1 Schematic of data flow and storage in a single run . 21
3-2 Extract from typical User's Control Input, showing how
grouping of operations is specified 22
8
-------
1.0 VIEW OF THE REAL WORLD
General Principles
1.1 General Concepts
To design a comprehensive simulation system, one must have a consistent means of
representing the prototype; in our case, the real world We 5leW It Is a set of
nt°h^ltUSn*tS W-ich m°Ve through a fixed environment and interaaw th lacV
other. Water is one constituent; others are sediment, chemicals, etc The
motions and interactions are called processes. 'e»"cdis, etc. me
1.2 Nodes, Zones, and Elements
A node corresponds to a point in space. Therefore, a particular value of a
2araliUaJiiable functio".ca"1be associated with'it, for example, channel flow
rate and/or flow cross sectional area. A zone corresponds to a finite portion
fU 1S usVally associ*ted with the integral of * sjatlil J
•
An element is a collection of nodes and/or zones. Figure 1-1 illustrates thesp
concepts. We simulate the response of the land phaseof the hydrolog?cal cycle
using elements called "segments." A segment is a portion of the land assumed to
rlii f" Jy U-lf°T P™Penies. A segment of land with a pervious surface is
called a Pervious Land-segment" (PLS). Constituents in a PLS are represented as
resident in a set of zones (Fig. 1-la). A PLS has no nodes. As a fSrlher
example, consider our formulation of channel routing. We model a channel reach
as a one dimensional element consisting of a single zone situated between [wo
dsF- the flow rate and depth a ™
The conventions of the finite element technique also fall within the scooe of
these concepts. Figure 1-lc shows a two dimensional finite element used in t
simulation of an estuary. Three nodes define the boundaries of the triangular
P pSt'- ? f?!!rth n°de' Sltuated inside' mW be viewed .as subdividing The
6 1*0
bv HSPF
by HSPF.
the
.
z?nens- This last type of element is not presently used in any
HP v,t inClUded 1n ihis discussio» to show thegenera nj proJldiT
The system can accommodate a wide variety of simulation modules
-------
General Principles
Snow Zone
Surface Zone
Upper Zone
Lower Zone
Ground-Water
Zone
PLS Element
(a)
Zone (storage)
<
Upst.
Node
Downst.
Node
Reach Element
(b)
Nodel
ode 4
Node 3 Node 2
Estuary Finite Element
(c)
Figure 1-1 Nodes, zones and elements
10
-------
General Principles
There are no fixed rules governing the grouping of zones and nodes to form
elements. The model builder must decide what grouping is reasonable and
meaningful, based on his view of the real world processes being simulated In
the foregoing material we presented some elements used in HSP and other systems
In general, it is convenient to define elements so that a large portion of the
real world can be represented by a collection of conceptually identical
elements. In this way, a single parameter structure can be defined which
applies to every element in the group. Thus, each element is a variation on the
basic theme. It is then meaningful to speak of an "element type." For example
elements of type "PLS" all embody the same arrangement of nodes and are
represented by sets of parameters with identical structure. Variations between
segments are represented only by variations in the values of parameters The
same applies to any other element, such as a Reach, layered lake or a triangular
finite element.
As illustrated in the above discussion, nodes are often used to define the
boundaries of zones and elements. A zone, characterized by storage, receives
inflows and disperses outflows; these are called "fluxes." Note that if the
nodal values of a field variable are known, it is often possible to compute the
zonal values (storages). The reverse process does not work.
1.3 Processing Units and Networks
To simulate a prototype we must handle the processes occurring within the
elements and the transfer of information and constituents between them. The
simulation of large prototypes is made convenient by designing a single
application module" for a given type of element or element group, and applying
1: rn£nnrtively to fll1 similar members in the system. For example, we may use
the RCHRES module to simulate all the reaches in a watershed using storage
routing. This approach is most efficient computationally if one element or
group of elements, called a "processing unit" (PU), is simulated for an extended
period of time before switching to the next one. To permit this, we must be
able to define a processing sequence such that all information required by any
PU comes from sources external to the system or from PU's already simulated
This can only happen if the PU's and their connecting fluxes form one or more
networks which are "directed graphs." In a directed graph there are no bi-
directional paths and no cycles. Figure 1-2 shows some directed and non-
directed graphs.
The requirement that PU's form directed graphs provides the rule for grouping
elements into PU's. Any elements interacting with each other via loops or bi-
directional fluxes must be grouped into a single PU because none of them can be
simulated apart from the others.
Thus, we can have both single element and multi-element PU's. A PLS is an
example of the former and a channel network simulated using the full equations
of flow exemplifies the latter (Fig. 1-3). A multi-element PU is also known as
a feedback region." The collection of PU's which are simulated in a given run
is called a network.
11
-------
General Principles
(a) (b)
Directed Graphs
(c)
Cycle
(Bidirectional
flux)
Non-directed Graphs
(d)
Processing unit, with feasible
processing sequence no.,
where applicable
Flux (arrow shows direction)
Figure 1-2 Directed and Non-directed Graphs
12
-------
General Principles
I I
I I
PLS
Reach
Single-element PU's
General channel
network (simulated
using full equations
of motion)
Multiple-element PU
Figure 1-3 Single- and multi-element processing units
13
-------
General Principles
The processes which occur Vithin a PU are represented mathematically in an
"application model." The corresponding computer code is called an "application
module" or "simulation module."
2.0 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE
2.1 Concept of an "Operation"
A great variety of activities are performed by HSPF; for example, input a time
series to the WDM or TSS file, find the cross correlation coefficient for two
time series, or simulate the processes in a land segment. They all incorporate
two or more of the following functions: get a set of time series, operate on
the set of input time series to produce other time series, and output the
resulting time series. This applies both to application modules (already
discussed) and to "utility modules," which perform operations ancillary or
incidental to simulation. Thus, a simulation run may be viewed as a set of
"operations" performed in sequence. All operations have the following
structure:
SUPERVISE
OPERATIONS
(subroutine OSUPER)
GET TIME
SERIES
(subroutine group
TSGET)
OPERATE
(utility
or
application
module)
PUT TIME
SERIES
(subroutine group
TSPUT)
The OPERATE function is the central activity in the operation. This work is
done by an "operating module" (OM) and its subordinate subprograms. They
operate for a specified time on a given set of input time series and produce a
specified set of output time series, under control of the "operations super-
visor" (OSUPER). All of the pieces of time series involved in this internal
operation have the same interval and duration. They are therefore viewed as
written on an "internal scratch pad" (INPAD), resident in the memory of the
computer (Fig. 2-1). The operating module receives the scratch pad with some
rows filled with input and, after its work is done, returns control to the
supervisor with another set of rows filled with output. The operating module
may overwrite an input row with its own output. The computing module being
executed, together with the options being invoked, will determine the number of
rows required in the INPAD. For example, simulation of the hydraulic behavior
of a stream requires relatively few time series (eg. inflow, depth and outflow)
but the inclusion of water quality simulation adds many more time series to the
list. Now, the total quantity of memory space available for storage of time
series is also fixed (specified in a COMMON block) by the options in effect;
this is the size ("area") of the INPAD. Since both the size (N*M) and number of
rows (M) in the INPAD are known, the "width" (no. of intervals,N) can be found.
The corresponding physical time is called the "internal scratch pad span
(INSPAN)."
14
-------
General Principles
Row
Number
1
2
3
4
5
M
1
Time Interval Numbers
23 4 5 6 - - N
NOTE: there is one time series per row.
Figure 2-1 Logical
Structure on the interna
1 scratch pad
15
-------
General Principles
The "get time series" function prepares the input time series. This work is
done by a subroutine group called TSGET. It obtains the correct piece of a time
series from the appropriate file, aggregates or disaggregates it to the correct
time interval, multiplies the values by a user specified constant (if required),
and places the data in the required row of the internal scratch pad. Subroutine
group TSPUT performs the reverse set of operations. TSGET and TSPUT are some-
times bypassed if a required time series is already in the INPAD when the opera-
tion is started, or if the output is being passed to the next operation via the
internal scratch pad. Modules TSGET and TSPUT are part of the "time series
management system" (TSMS).
2.2 Time Series Storage
The time series used and produced by an operation can reside in four types of
storage.
(1) The Watershed Data Management (WDM) File
The WDM file has replaced the TSS (see below) as the principal library for
storage of time series. As far as the computer's operating system is
concerned, it consists of a single large direct access file. This space
is subdivided into many data sets containing individual time series. Each
is logically self-contained but may be physically scattered through the
file. A directory keeps track of data sets and their attributes. Before
time series are written to the WDM file, the file and its directory must
be created using the interactive program ANNIE, which is documented
separately.
(2) The Time Series Store (TSS)
The TSS was the original time series storage file. It is similar in
design and function to the WDM file; however, it provides a less flexible
set of options for time series data storage and attribute maintenance.
While the TSS capability is still contained in the program, it is not
actively maintained and supported. Creation and initialization of TSS
files requires the separate program NEWTSS. Beginning with Release 11,
all TSS capability will be removed from HSPF.
(3) Sequential Files
These are ASCII, formatted disk files with a constant logical record
length. Time series received from agencies such as the National Weather
Service are typically stored in sequential files.
(4) Internal Scratch Pad (INPAD)
If two or more operations performed in sequence use the same internal time
step, time series may be passed between them via the INPAD. Successive
operations may simply pick up the data written by the previous ones,
without any external (disc) transfer taking place. This is typically done
when time series representing the flow of water (and constituents) are
routed from one stream reach to the one next downstream.
16
-------
General Principles
2.3 Time Series Management For An Operation
Any operation involves a subset of the activities shown in Fig. 2-2 The
operating module expects a certain set of time series in the INPAD. The
operations supervisor, acting under user control, ensures that the appropriate
input time series are loaded from whichever source has been selected, and
informs the computing module of the rows in the INPAD where it will find its
input. Similar arrangements hold for output of time series.
2.4 HSPF Software Hierarchy
The hierarchy of functions in HSPF is shown in Fig. 2-3. Some explanatory notes
follow.
The "Run Interpreter" is the group of subprograms which reads and interprets the
Users Control Input." It sets up internal information instructing the system
regarding the sequence of operations to be performed. It stores the initial
conditions and the parameters for each operation in the appropriate file on disc
and creates an instruction file which will ensure that time series are correctly
passed between operations, where necessary.
The "TSS management" modules are those used to create, modify, or remove data
sets in the time series store file.
"Operations Supervisor" is a subroutine which acts on information provided
the Run Interpreter, invoking the appropriate "application" or "utility"
jleS. It DrOVl'deS t.hpm With tho <-nvva<~t woliinc- fn~ ~-,x~-,„„-!-_ i _j._i-
The
by the , 7 a
modules. It provides them witlTthe correct values for parameters and state
variables by reading the files created by the Run Interpreter.
Operating modules are either "application modules" or "utility modules " They
perform the operations which make up a run. Each time one of those modules is
called, an operation is performed for a period corresponding to the span of the
internal scratch pad (INSPAN). The Operations Supervisor ensures that the
correct module is invoked.
"Service subprograms" perform tasks such as reading from and writing to time
series storage areas, adding T minutes to a given date and time, to get a new
date and time, etc. •
The "Time Series Management System" (TSMS) consists of all the modules which are
only concerned with manipulation of time series or the files used to store time
series. It includes the TSS management functions, and TSGET and TSPUT
17
-------
I
General Principles
Operations
Supervisor
Operating
Module
^ ^fJme ^'
N Series Ur
VstoreV
Sub-Routine Call
Time Series Transfer Path
Figure 2-2 Activities involved in an operation
18
-------
General Principles
MAIN Program
Run
Interpreter
Service
Subprograms
Operations
Supervisor
TSGET
TSS
Management
Operating
Module
#1
Operating
Module
#N
Application and utility modules
TSPUT
TSS Time Series Store
Figure 2-3 Overview of HSPF software
19
-------
General Principles
3.0 STRUCTURE OF A JOB
3.1 Elements of a Job
A "JOB" is the work performed by HSPF in response to a complete set of Users
Control Input. It consists of one or more "RUNs" and/or "Time Series Store
Management" activities. A RUN is a set of operations which can be performed
serially, and which all cover the same period of time (span). The operations are
performed in a sequence specified in the Users Control Input. To avoid having
to store large quantities of intermediate data on disc, operations may be
collected in a group in which they share a common INPAD (INGRP).
3.2 Groups Of Operations
In most runs, time series have to be passed between operations. As described in
Section 2.2, each operation can communicate with four different time series
storage areas: the WDM file, TSS file, the INPAD, and sequential files. This is
illustrated in Fig. 3-1.
Potentially, any time series required by or output by any operation can be
stored in the WDM file, TSS, or a sequential file. The user simply specifies
the exact origin or destination for the time series, and the HSPF system moves
the data between that device and the appropriate row of the INPAD. This system
can also be used to transfer data between operations. However, it does require
that all transferred data be written to the WDM file, TSS, or a sequential file.
This may be very cumbersome and/or inefficient and it is better to transfer data
via the INPAD, where possible.
To transfer data via the INPAD, operations must share the same pad. This means
that all time series placed in the pad have the same time interval and span.
This requirement provides a logical basis for grouping operations; those sharing
a common INPAD are called an INGRP (Fig. 3-1). The user specifies the presence
of groups in his "Users Control Input (UCI)." A typical sequence of input is
shown in Fig. 3-2.
The user also indicates (directly or indirectly) in his control input the source
and disposition of all time series required by or output by an operation. If he
indicates that a time series must be passed to another operation then the system
assumes that the transfer will be made via the scratch pad. If they are not in
the same INGRP there is an error. Without a common INPAD, the data must go via
the WDM file or TSS. The structure of the Users Control Input is documented in
Part F.
20
-------
General Principles
OPN 1
INGRP1
i
i
i
OPN 4
INPAD
OPN 5
OPN 11
INPAD
OPN 12
OPN 14
INPAD
INGRP2
INGRP/V
TSS
TSS Time Series Store
OPN Operation
INGRP Internal Scratch
Pad Group
INPAD Internal Scratch Pad
Figure 3-1 Schematic of data flow and storage for a single run
21
-------
General Principles
The sequence of events in a run is as follows (refer to Fig.3-1).
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
Operation 1 is performed until its output rows in the INPAD are
filled.
Data are transferred from those rows to other time series storage
areas, as required. If any of these data are not required by other
operations in INGRP1, their INPAD rows are available for reuse by
other operations in INGRP1.
Steps (a) and (b) are repeated for each operation in INGRP1.
Steps (a), (b), and (c) are repeated, if necessary, until the run
span is complete.
The INPAD is reconfigured and work on operations 5 through 11
proceeds as in steps (a-d) above. The step repeats until all INGRP's
have been handled. The run is now complete.
Note that reconfiguration of a scratch pad implies that its contents will be
overwritten.
OPN SEQUENCE
INGRP
COPY 1
PERLND 1
END INGRP
PERLND 2
PERLND 3
INGRP
COPY 2 -
RCHRES 1
RCHRES 3
RCHRES 5
RCHRES 20
RCHRES 22
RCHRES 23
RCHRES 7
RCHRES 8
RCHRES 50
RCHRES 100
RCHRES 200
END INGRP
INGRP
DURANL 1
PLTGEN 1
END INGRP
END OPN SEQUENCE
INDELT = 00:30
INDELT = 00:30
INDELT = 00:20
INDELT - 00:30
INDELT = 00:10
Figure 3-2 Extract from typical Users Control Input showing
how grouping of operations is specified
22
-------
General Principles
4.0 CONVENTIONS USED IN FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The primary purpose of the Functional Description (Part E) is:
(1) to describe the functions performed by the various subprograms
(2) to explain the technical algorithms and equations which the code
implements.
Subprograms are described in numerical order in the text. This system provides
a logical progression for the descriptions. General comments regarding a group
of subprograms can be made when the "top" subprogram is described, while details
specific to an individual subordinate subprogram can be deferred until that part
is described. For example, a general description of the PERLND module (Section
4.2(1)) is followed by more detailed descriptions of its twelve sections, ATEMP
(Section 4.2(l).l) through TRACER (Section 4.2(1).12).
5.0 METHOD OF DOCUMENTING DATA STRUCTURES
5.1 Structure of Data in Memory
The way in which we arrange the variables used in our programs is important. We
structure them, as far as possible, using techniques like those used in
Structured Program Design. We try to group data items that logically belonq
together.
Most of the variables in an Operating Module are contained in the Operation
Status Vector (OSV). The OSVs for the application modules are shown in the
Programmer's Supplement (Johanson, et al. 1979). The format used to document a
data structure is similar to that used to declare a "structure" in PL/1. We do
this because the technique is logical and convenient, not because of language
considerations.
5.2 Structure of Data on Disk Files
The HSPF system makes use of several different classes of disk-based data files:
(1) Watershed Data Management (WDM) file and Time Series Store (TSS)
files contain time series data input and output.
(2) The instruction files (OSUPFL, TSGETF, TSPUTF) and the OSVFL are
documented in the Programmer's Supplement.
(3) The information file (INFOFL), error message file (ERRFL) and
warning message file (WARNFL) are self documenting. One need only
list the file and read it to understand its contents.
23
-------
General Principles
6.0 METHOD OF HANDLING DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
HSPF makes use of two kinds of diagnostic message; error messages and warnings.
These messages are all stored on two files; ERRFL and WARNFL. This system has
at least two advantages:
(1) Because the messages are not embedded in the Fortran, they do not
normally occupy any memory. This reduces the length of the
executable code.
(2) The files are self documenting. They contain not only all the
messages, but other explanatory material. A user need only obtain a
line printer listing of the files to get an up-to-date copy of this
documentation.
Each message has been given a "maximum count". If the count for a message
reaches this value, HSPF informs the user of the fact. Then:
(1) If it is an error message, HSPF quits.
(2) If it is a warning, HSPF continues but suppresses any future
printing of this message.
In addition to the above features, the Run Interpreter has been designed to:
(1) Stop if 20 errors of any kind have been detected. This gives the
user a fair number of messages to work on, but avoids producing huge
quantities of error messages, many of which may be spurious (say, if
the code could not recover from early error conditions).
(2) Stop at the end of its work if any errors have been detected by it.
Thus, HSPF will not enter any costly time loop if the Run
Interpreter has found any errors in the User's Control Input.
PART C
STANDARDS AND CONVENTIONS
This section has been omitted.
PART D
VISUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
This section has been omitted.
24
-------
Functional Description
PART E
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
General Comments 30
1.0 MAIN Program 30
2.0 Manage the Time Series Store (Module TSSMGR) 30
3.0 Interpret a RUN Data Set in the User's Control Input
(Module INTERP) 31
4.0 Supervise and Perform Operations (Module OSUPER) 33
4.03 Perform Special Actions (Subroutine SPECL) . 34
4.1 Get Required Input Time Series (Module TSGET) 35
4.2 Perform an Operation '. 35
4.2(1) Simulate a Pervious Land Segment (Module PERLND)! .' 38
4.2(l).l Correct Air Temperature for Elevation
Difference (Section ATEMP) 38
4.2(1).2 Simulate Accumulation and Melting of
Snow and Ice (Section SNOW) 40
4.2(1).3 Simulate Water Budget for a Pervious
Land Segment (Section PWATER) 54
4.2(1).4 Simulate Production and Removal of
Sediment 73
4.2(1).5 Estimate Soil Temperatures
(Section PSTEMP) ..... , . . 79
4.2(1).6 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved
Gas Concentrations (Section PWTGAS) ... 80
4.2(1).7 Simulate Quality Constituents Using
Simple Relationships with Sediment and
Water Yield (Section PQUAL) ....... 81
4.2(1).8 Estimate Moisture Content of Soil Layers
and Fractional Fluxes (Section MSTLAY) . 89
4.2(1).9 Simulate Pesticide Behavior in Detail
(Section PEST) 92
4.2(1).10 Simulate Nitrogen Behavior in Detail
(Section NITR) 99
4.2(1).11 Simulate Phosphorous Behavior in Detail
(Section PHOS) . 100
4.2(1).12 Simulate Movement of a Tracer
(Section TRACER) ............ 102
25
-------
Functional Description
4.2(2) Simulate an Impervious Land Segment (Module IMPLND) 104
4.2(2).3 Simulate the Water Budget for an Imper-
vious Land Segment (Section IWATER) ... 104
4.2(2).4 Simulate Accumulation and Removal of
Solids (Section SOLIDS) 108
4.2(2).5 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved
Gas Concentrations (Section IWTGAS) ... 112
4.2(2).6 Simulate Washoff of Quality Constituents
Using Simple Relationships with Solids
and Water Yield (Section IQUAL) 113
4.2(3) Simulate a Free-flowing Reach or Mixed Reservoir
(Module RCHRES) 117
4.2(3).l Simulate Hydraulic Behavior (Section HYDR) 121
4.2(3).2 Prepare to Simulate Advection of Fully
Entrained Constituents (Section ADCALC) . 139
4.2(3).3 Simulate Conservative Constituents
(Section CONS) 141
4.2(3).4 Simulate Heat Exchange and Water
Temperature (Section HTRCH) 145
4.2(3).5 Simulate Behavior of Inorganic Sediment
(Section SEDTRN) 150
4.2(3).6 Simulate the Behavior of a Generalized
Quality Constituent (Section GQUAL) ... 166
4.2(3).7 Simulate Constituents Involved in
Biochemical Transformations
(Section RQUAL) 187
4.2(3).7.1 Simulate Primary DO and BOD
Balances (Subroutine Group OXRX) ... 189
4.2(3).7.2 Simulate Primary Inorganic
Nitrogen and Phosphorous Balances
(Subroutine Group NUTRX) 197
4.2(3).7.3 Simulate Plankton Populations
and Associated Reactions
(Subroutine Group PLANK) 209
4.2(3).7.4 Simulate Ph, Carbon Dioxide,
Total Inorganic Carbon, and Alkalinity
(Subroutine Group PHCARB) 232
4.2(11) Copy Time Series (Utility Module COPY) 238
4.2(12) Prepare Time Series for Display on a Plotter
(Module PLTGEN) 238
4.2(13) Display Time Series in a Convenient Tabular
Format (Utility Module DISPLY) 240
4.2(14) Perform Duration Analysis on a Time Series
(Utility Module DURANL) 245
4.2(15) Generate a Time Series from One or Two Other
Time Series (Utility Module GENER) 253
4.2(16) Multiple Sequential Input of Time Series from
a HSPF Stand-Alone Plotter File (Utility
Module MUTSIN) 254
4.3 Module TSPUT 255
References 256
26
-------
Functional Description
FIGURES
Page
Number
3.0-1 Functions and data transfers involved in the operations
portion of HSPF 32
4.2(1)-1 Structure chart for PERLND Module. ...!!!!!'.'!•! 39
4.2(1).2-1 Snow accumulation and melt processes '.'.'. 41
4.2(1).2-2 Flow diagram of water movement, storages and phase
changes modeled in the SNOW section of the PERLND and
IMPLND Application Modules . . 43
4.2(1).3-1 Hydrologic cycle !.'!!!! 55
4.2(1).3-2 Flow diagram of water movement and storages modeled'in '
the PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module. . . 57
4.2(l).3-3 Determination of infiltration and interflow inflow . . . 61
4.2(1).3-4 Fraction of the potential direct runoff retained by the
upper zone (FRAC) as a function of the upper zone soil
moisture ratio (UZRAT) 64
4.2(1).3-5 Fraction of infiltration plus percolation entering
lower zone storage 69
4.2(1).3-6 Potential and actual evapotranspiration from the lower
zone 72
4.2(1).4-1 Erosion processes 74
4.2(1).4-2 Flow diagram for SEDMNT section of PERLND Application'
Module 75
4.2(1).7-1 Flow diagram for PQUAL section of PERLND Application
Module 83
4.2(1).8-1 Flow diagram of the transport of moisture'and'solutesi
as estimated in the MSTLAY section of the PERLND
Application Module .... 90
4.2(1).9-1 Flow diagram showing modeled movement of chemicals in'
solution 94
4.2(1).9-2 Freundlich isotherm calculations ............ 97
4.2(1).10-1 Flow diagram for nitrogen reactions. .......... 101
4.2(1).11-1 Flow diagram for phosphorus reactions '. 103
4.2(2)-l Impervious land segment processes ' 105
4.2(2)-2 Structure chart for IMPLND Module ] 106
4.2(2).3-1 Hydrologic processes *
4.2(2).4-1 Flow diagram of the SOLIDS section of the IMPLND
Application Module
4.2(2).6-1 Flow diagram for IQUAL section of IMPLND Application
Module
4.2(3)-l Flow of materials through a RCHRES ...... us
4.2(3)-2 Structure chart for RCHRES Module ' ' 119
4.2(3).1-1 Flow diagram for the HYDR Section of the RCHRES
Application Module 122
4.2(3).1-2 Graphical representation of the equations used to'compute
outflow rates and volume 125
4.2(3).1-3 Typical RCHRES configurations and the method used to
represent geometric and hydraulic properties 126
4.2(3).1-4 Graphical representation of the work performed by
subroutine ROUTE 12g
27
-------
Functional Description
FIGURES (continued)
Number Page
4.2(3).1-5 Graphical representation of the work performed by
subroutine NOROUT 134 .
4.2(3).1-6 Illustration of quantities involved in calculation of
depth 136
4.2(3).2-1 Determination of weighting factors for advection
calculations 140
4.2(3).3-1 Flow diagram for conservative constituents in the CONS
section of the RCHRES Application Module 141
4.2(3).4-1 Flow diagram for HTRCH section of the RCHRES Application
Module 146
4.2(3).5-1 Flow diagram of inorganic sediment fractions in the
SEDTRM section of the RCHRES Application Module 152
4.2(3).5-2 Toffaleti's Velocity, Concentration, and Sediment
Discharge Relations 159
4.2(3)'.5-3 Factors in Toffaleti Relations 161
4.2(3).5-4 Colby's Relationship for Discharge of Sands in Terms
of Mean Velocity for Six Median Sizes of Bed Sands,
Four Depths of Flow, and Water Temperature of 60 F . . . 163
4.2(3).5-5 Colby's Correction Factors for Effect of Water
Temperature, Concentration of Fine Sediment, and
Sediment Size to be Applied to Uncorrected
Discharge of Sand Given by Figure 4.2(3).5-4 164
4.2(3).6-1 Flow diagram for generalized quality constituent in the
GQUAL section of the RCHRES Application Module 167
4.2(3).6-2 Simplified flow diagram for important fluxes and
storages of sediment and associated qua! used in
subroutine ADVQAL 181
4.2(3).7.1-1 Flow diagram for dissolved oxygen in the OXRX subroutine
group of the RCHRES Application Module 190
4.2(3).7.1-2 Flow diagram for biochemical oxygen demand in the OXRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module. ... 190
4.2(3).7.2-1 Flow diagram for inorganic nitrogen in the NUTRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module. ... 198
4.2(3).7.2-2 Flow diagram for ortho-phosphate in the NUTRX group of
the RCHRES Application Module 199
4.2(3).7.3-1 Flow diagram for phytoplankton in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module 210
4.2(3).7.3-2 Flow diagram for dead refractory organics in the PLANK
section of the RCHRES Application Module 210
4.2(3).7.3-3 Flow diagram for zooplankton in the PLANK section of the
RCHRES Application Module 211
4.2(3).7.3-4 Flow diagram for benthic algae in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module 211
4.2(3).7.3-5 Relationship of parameters for special advection of
plankton 213
4.2(3).7.3-6 Zooplankton assimilation efficiency 225 v
4.2(3).7.4-1 Flow diagram of inorganic carbon in the PHCARB group
of the RCHRES Application Module 233
28
-------
Number
4.2(13)-!
4.2(13)-2
4.2(13)-3
4.2(14)-!
4.2(14)-2
4.2(14)-3
FIGURES (continued)
Functional Description
Page
Sample Short-Span Display (First Type) . 242
Sample Short-Span Display (Second Type) !'!.'! 243
Sample Long-Span (Annual) Display 244
Definition of Terms Used in Duration Analysis Module '.* ' 246
Sample Duration Analysis Printout 248
Sample Lethal Concentration (LC) Function for
Global Exceedance Calculation 252
29
-------
Functional Description
GENERAL COMMENTS
For a discussion on how this part of the documentation is organized, refer to
Section 4 in Part B "General Principles".
1.0 MAIN Program
The MAIN program stands at the head of the system and calls, directly or
indirectly, all the other modules in the system. The functions performed are:
(1) Preprocess the Users Control Input (UCI). Subroutine USRRDR transfers the
UCI to a direct access file, appends a value at the end of each record which
points to the next non-comment record, and recognizes input set headings and
delimiters: RUN, END RUN, TSSM, END TSSM.
(2) Call TSSMGR if a TSSM input set has been found.
(3) If a RUN input set has been found, call INTERP to interpret it and then call
OSUPER to supervise execution of it.
2.0 Manage the Time Series Store (Module TSSMGR)
Note: In the current release (No. 10) of HSPF, TSS files and TSSMGR are still
operational; however, beginning with Release 11, the TSS-related functions
will not be available. Therefore, use of the WDM file instead of the TSS is
recommended. Management of WDM files is handled by the interactive program
ANNIE.
General Description of Module TSSMGR
This module maintains a user's Time Series Store (TSS) and performs some
housekeeping chores associated with the data sets in it. From the point of view
of the computer's operating system, the TSS is a single file (which may be very
large). However, the HSPF software can store many distinct time series in this
file. This permits a user easily to keep track of the various time series with
which he is dealing. Furthermore, he need only refer to a single disc file for all
his time series input and output needs, no matter how many time series are
involved. This simplifies communication with the computer system.
Time series are arranged within the TSS in one or more "data sets". The contents
of each data set and its physical location in the TSS are recorded in a directory
located at the start of the TSS. The primary function of module TSSMGR is to
maintain this directory, from input supplied by the user. He can add a new data
set label to the directory, update certain parts of the label, scratch a data set
label (and, thus, the data set contents), extend the space allocated to a data set,
or show the contents of one or all of the labels in the directory. The commands
used to achieve this are documented in Part F, Section 2.
30
-------
Module TSSMGR
Ihe4.uesifnv°r.the TSS is based on our experience with HSPX and HSPII. Extensions
to the HSPX time series management system include:
(1) The storage of data in compressed form. Disk space is saved by improving the
method of encoding values which occur in a sequence, such as a strinq of
zeros. 3
(2) A TSS may contain 9999 data sets.
Once the label for a data set has been created and space reserved for it in the
TSS, time series data can be stored in the data set. This is done by an operating
72 « if??!.1™" ); 6lther a utility modu1e (e-9-> COPY) or an application module
\6.g., rtKLIMUJ .
3.0 Interpret a RUN Data Set in the User's Control Input (Module INTERP)
General Description of Module INTERP
This module, known as the Run Interpreter, translates a RUN data set in the User's
Control Input (documented in Section 4 of Part F) into many elementary
instructions, for later use by other parts of the system, when the time series are
operated on. To do this, the Run Interpreter performs such tasks as:
(1) Check and augment the data supplied by the user.
(2) Decide which time series will be required and produced by each operation
based on the user's data and built-in tables which contain information on the
various operations.
(3) Allocate INPAD rows to the various time series.
(4) Read the control data, parameters, and initial conditions supplied for each
operation, convert them to internal units, and supply default values where
required.
The output of the Run Interpreter is stored in disk-based files containing
instructions to be read by the Operations Supervisor, TSGET and TSPUT (Fiqure
3.0-1). The instruction files are:
31
-------
.X1 Operations
>^ ^ Supervisor
/ '
/ OSU. \ / ^*~ ' i IT - ^
i f— *i 1 In t~\c?\ tocrt • H
V File / / 1 UoUrrLI ^
^^~~\ 1 ^Xi^_«^
\ /
\ 1
TqGFT Operating
^ lbC3tl Module
* ^
« *
III , '
r i \ \ \ ,i
IjSGETFf ' u.
V Xx'*.
\ **• INPAD
\ .,..,.
\
x f Time /
-*•{ Series L
V Store \
^^ r- *• r* ii
— — •>- Time Series data flow
••••>• Instruction data flow
••-•>• Flow of other information
Module TSSM6R
X
N-\
OSVFL ( \
^ \ \ _
\
\ psWSi
i •
i •
^m *
TSPUT "^'
/ ' 1
/ ; «
// l
^'s 1
* ' f
/
t -* ^
_
r unction
(Module Group)
/^:,;VY Disc-based
V *>." iA instruction file
/" / Other Disc-based
I V files
(
Figure 3.0-1
Functions and data transfers involved in the operations portion
of HSPF
32
-------
(1) The Operations Supervisor Instruction File (OSUPFL) .
reads to
(3)
Run Interpreter
This file contains
the
(a) the configuration of the scratch pads (time intervals and widths)
(b) the configuration of the EXGROUPs and INGROUPs (number of EXGROUPs
?Spn,,pINGhR°UPS ^ I3!*1 EXGROUP' 'Potions in each INGROUP, etc )
(EXGROUPs have not yet been implemented)
(2) The Operation Status Vector File (OSVFL). The operations in a run are
interrupted every time an INPAD span is completed (Part B, Section 3 2) To
ime,,2II?!!ter mem°ry' ^ System is designed so that the 'vaHous operations
all use the same area of memory. This requires that upon Interruption all
information necessary to restart an operation be stored' in a disk f Vie ' The
data, called the "Operation Status Vector" (OSV), reside in a strinq of
contiguous locations in memory and have a structure specified 7n the
Programmer's Supplement (Johanson, et al., 1979), The disc file OSVFL
contains an exact copy of the OSV for each operation. It is used to restore
the OSV in memory when the operation is resumed after interruption.
The Input Time Series Instruction File (TSGETF) and the Output Time Series
J™n (TSPJJ1F.)- Th6Se files C0nta1n instructions which govern ihe
transfer of pieces of time series into and out of the INPAD, respectively
Each instruction enables module TSGET to retrieve a specified pie°e of t me
series from one of the source volumes (Figure 3.0-1), transform it to thl
;hoeTNplnandTf°7,requ1red/or the INPAD> and insert I* 1" the desired row of
delcHbed' C3Se F' th6 sec'uence is the Averse of that just
Each operation has its own set of instructions in TSGETF and TSPUTF which are
'
(4) The Special Action Instruction File (SPACFL). Each record of this file
ronn?^ ? single special action instruction, which specifies the action
required to be taken in a given operation at a specific time, e q report
operation state, modify a state variable. • P
The structures of these files are documented in the Programmer's Supplement.
4.0 Supervise and Perform Operations (module OSUPER)
Function of Operations Group
The Operations group of modules handles all the manipulations of time series and
ftnlv.?er m°Sr ?f tje work 1n a run- Subroutine OSUPER controls the g
do KTaskr °f the taSkS USelf' bUt U inv°kes sub°^nate modules to8
33
-------
Operations Group
General Description of Subroutine OSUPER
The primary tasks of subroutine OSUPER are to ensure that the various operations
in the run are called in the correct sequence and that the associated time series
and OSVs are input and/or output at the required junctures (see Part B, Section
3.2). OSUPER uses a nest of DO-loops to control the sequencing. The instruction
file OSUPFL specifies the ranges of the loops and supplies information ("keys")
which enable OSUPER, TSGET and TSPUT to correctly access the other instruction
files. OSUPER reads an instruction from disc each time an operation starts a new
INSPAN. Using this information, it then:
(1) calls TSGET, to supply the required input time series (using TSGKST, TSGKND)
(2) reads the OSV from disc (using keys OSVKST, OSVKND)
(3) calls the operating module (OMCODE indicates which one is to be called)
When the INSPAN is over, OSUPER:
(1) writes the OSV to disc (using keys OSVKST, OSVKND)
(2) calls TSPUT, to output time series (using keys TSPKST, TSPKND)
4.03 Perform Special Actions (Subroutine SPECL)
HSPF permits the user to perform certain "Special Actions" during the course of a
run. A special action instruction specifies the following:
1. The operation on which the action is to be performed (e.g., PERLND 10)
2. The date/time at which the action is to be taken.
3. The variable name and element (if the variable is an array) or the type and
location within COMMON block SCRTCH of the data item to be updated.
4. The action to be performed. Two choices are available:
a) Reset the variable to a specified value
b) Increment the variable by a specified value
The special action facility is used to accommodate things such as:
34
-------
1.
2.
Operations Group
Human intervention in a watershed! Events such as plowing, cultivation,
fertilizer and pesticide application, and harvesting are simulated in this way!
Changes to^ parameters. For example, a user may wish to alter the value of a
parameter for which 12 monthly values cannot be supplied. He can do this by
specifying a special action for that variable. He could reset the parameter
lat<£St°me9 specifying another special action, to be taken at a
anH
and
ni T,?" ^ P*r.f0rrd °n variables ™ the PERLND, IMPLND,
modules. The input is documented in Section 4.10 of Part F.
4.1 Get Required Input Time Series (module TSGET)
The task of this module is to insert in the INPAD all input time series
ss n^toTfhVf1* 'J ft1"?' 6aCh ?? an oP^ationmisSetoieco
passing to it the keys of the first and last records in TSGETF which must
•? Up-°n'+ !a-ch inst™ction causes a row of the INPAD to be filled.
urn fn T«W ltS 'TV™6 serjes from an^ of the following source "volumes":
WDM file, TSS, sequential file and INPAD (Figure 3.0-1).
eary> ^tomatically transform the time interval and "kind"
"J* i$ b-1r.°Ugflt from the source Iocat1o« to the
Perform a linear transformation on the values in
C and
NPAD
4.2 Perform an Operation
Function of an Operating Module
An operating module (OM) is at the center of every operation (Part B, Section 2 1)
When the Operations Supervisor calls an OM the time series which 1t requires ari
(1) updated state variables. The OM constantly updates any state variables
SS;t-are l°Cate^ in thue- SSV' Thus' when the OM ret^ns control to the
Operations Supervisor, which copies the OSV to disc, the latest values of all
state variables are automatically preserved. vaiueborau
(2) printed output. The OM accumulates values, formats them and routes these data
1,0 une line printer.
35
-------
Operations Group
(3) output time series. The OM places these in the INPAD but is not concerned
with their ultimate disposition; this is handled by module TSPUT.
Note that all time series simultaneously present in an INPAD have the same constant
time interval. This implies that, internally, all time series involved in an
operation have the same time interval. Externally, the time series may have
differing time intervals. Part of the function of modules TSGET and TSPUT is to
convert time series from external to internal time intervals and vice versa.
Sub-divisions in an Operating Module
An operating module may be divided into several distinct "sections," each of which
may be selectively activated in a given run, under the user's control, e.g., the
Pervious Land-segment module (PERLND) contains twelve sections, the first being air
temperature correction,and the last is tracer (conservative substance) simulation.
The operating procedure is as follows: in each time interval of the INSPAN, the
operating module calls each of its active sections in the order in which they are
built into the code (the sequence can not be altered by the user). When the INSPAN
has been covered the operating module returns control to OSUPER which determines
the next action to be taken. This procedure implies that an operating module must
be arranged so that a section is called after any others from which it requires
information. For example, in the Pervious Land-segment module, the sediment
calculation section may use data computed by the snow and water balance sections
but not by sections listed after sediment. This kind of information flow is called
an inter-section data transfer (ISDT).
Partitioning of an Operation
A user may activate one group of module sections in an initial run and other groups
in subsequent runs. Thus, he may "partition" an operation. For example, he may
wish to calibrate the hydraulic response of a set of river reaches before moving
on to simulate the behavior of constituents contained in the water. If this type
of work involves ISDT's between the sections handled in different runs, it follows
that:
(1) The time series involved in the ISDT's must be stored between runs, probably
in the WDM file or TSS.
(2) In the second run the system will expect the user to specify external sources
for all these time series.
36
-------
Operations Group
Some users will be confused by the rules for partitioning operations, but our
experience indicates this will be outweighed by the flexibility which it brings.
Numbering of Operating Modules
In principle, there is no limit to the number of operating modules which the system
can accommodate. Ultimately, we expect a large number of modules ranging from very
SSfJm lltl m°uUluS ( ••"•«
(4) Make minor changes to subroutines OPNBLK and OSUPER.
Types of Operating Modules
There are two types of operating modules; utility modules and application modules.
Utility modules perform any operations involving time series which are essentially
a.™1i-1ary ° apPJJl5atio? ^fa^ons, e.g., input time series data from cards to the
WDM file using COPY, multiply two time series together to obtain a third one, plot
several time series on the same graph. The utility modules perform many of the
functions which were previously part of HSP LIBRARY or HSP UTILITY. They are given
numbers starting with 4.2(11). Application (simulation) modules represent
processes, or groups of processes, which occur in the real world. They have been
4'2(10) alth°U9h' at '-ant, Ly three
37
-------
Module PERLND
4.2(1) Simulate a Pervious Land Segment (Module PERLND)
A land segment is a subdivision of the simulated watershed. The boundaries are
established according to the user's needs, but generally, a segment is defined as
an area with similar hydrologic characteristics. For modeling purposes water,
sediment, and water quality constituents leaving the watershed move laterally to
a downslope segment or to a reach/reservoir. A segment of land which has. the
capacity to allow enough infiltration to influence the water budget is considered
pervious. In HSPF, PERLND is the module that simulates the water quality and
quantity processes which occur on a pervious land segment.
The primary module sections in PERLND simulate snow accumulation and melt (Section
SNOW), the water budget (section PWATER), sediment produced by land surface erosion
(section SEDMNT), and water quality constituents by various methods (section PQUAL
and the agri-chemical sections). Other sections perform the auxiliary functions
of correcting air temperature (section ATEMP) for use in snowmelt and soil
temperature calculations, producing soil temperatures (section PSTEMP) for
estimating the outflow temperatures and influencing reaction rates in the
agri-chemical sections, and determining outflow temperatures which influence the
solubility of oxygen and carbon dioxide. The structure chart for the PERLND module
(Figure 4.2(1)-1) shows these sections and their relationships to each other and
to PPTOT, PBAROT, and PPRINT. These last three sections manipulate the data
produced. Section PPTOT places state variables (point values) and PBAROT places
flux variables which are actually averages over the interval (bar values) into the
INPAD. PPRINT produces the printable results in the quantity and frequency that^
the use specifies. The sections in the structure chart are executed from left to'
right.
4.2(l).l Correct Air Temperature for Elevation Difference
(Section ATEMP of Modules PERLND and IMPLND)
Purpose
The purpose of ATEMP is to modify the input air temperature to represent the mean
air temperature over the land segment. This module section is part of both PERLND
or IMPLND. Air temperature correction is needed when the elevation of the land
segment is significantly different than the elevation at the temperature gage. If
no correction for elevation is needed, this module section can be skipped.
Method
The lapse rate for air temperature is dependent upon precipitation during the time
interval. If precipitation occurs, a wet lapse rate of 0.0035 degrees F per foot
difference in elevation is assumed. Otherwise, a dry lapse rate, that varies with
the time of day, is used. A table of 24 hourly dry lapse rates varying between
0.0035 to 0.005 is built into the system. A different, user-defined lapse rate may
be implemented by modifying the HSPF Information File (INFOFL). The corrected
temperature is:
38
-------
PERLND
Perform
computations
on a segment
of previous
land
4.2(1)
Module PERLND
ATEMPl
SNOW I
Correct air
temperature
for elevation
difference
Simulate the
accumulation
and melting
of snow and
ice
| 4.2(1).
PWATERl
SEDMNT
Simulate
water budget
for previous
land
segment
1 A 9/*l '.
Produce and
remove
sediment
Estimate
soil
temperature
Estimate
water
temperature
and dissolved
gas cone.
Simulate
quality
constituents
using simple
relationships
with sediment &
water yield
4.2(1).5
4.2(1).6
Agri-Chemical Sections
MSTLAY
PEST
Estimate the
moisture & the
fractions of
solutes being
transported in
the soil layers
Simulate
the pesticide
behavior in
detail
NITR
PHOS
Simulate
nitrogen
behavior in
detail
Simulate
phosphorus
behavior in
detail
TRACER
Simulate the
movement of
a tracer
(conservative)
\4.2(1).W
4.2(1 ).1
PDTOTl
PBAROT
Place point-
valued output
in INPAD
Place bar-
valued output
in INPAD
PPRINTl
Produce
printed
output
4.2(1 ).1
\4.2(1).15
Figure 4.2(1)-1 Structure chart for PERLND Module
39
-------
AIRTHP - GATMP - LAPS*ELDAT
where:
AIRTMP
GATMP
LAPS
ELDAT
Module Section ATEMP
(1)
corrected air temperature in degrees F
air temperature at gage in degrees F
lapse rate in degrees F/ft
elevation difference between the land segment and the
gage in ft
4.2(1).2 Simulate Accumulation and Melting of Snow and Ice
(section SNOW of modules PERLND and IMPLND)
"•"' ',*
Purpose
SNOW deals with the runoff derived from the fall, accumulation and melt of snow.
This is a necessary part of any complete hydrologic package since much of the
runoff, especially in the northern half of the United States, is derived from snow
conditions.
Approach
Figure 4 2(1) 2-1 illustrates the processes involved in snow accumulation and melt
on a land segment. The algorithms used are based on the work by the Corps of
Engineers (1956), Anderson and Crawford (1964), and Anderson (1968). Empirical
relationships are employed when physical ones are not well known. The snow
algorithms use meteorologic data to determine whether precipitation is rain or
snow, to simulate an energy balance for the snowpack, and to determine the effect
of the heat fluxes on the snowpack.
Five meteorologic time series are required by SNOW for each land segment simulated.
They are:
precipitation
air temperature
solar radiation
dewpoint
wind velocity
A value from each of these time series is input to SNOW at the start of each
simulation interval. However, some of the meteorological time series are only used
intermittently for calculating rates, such as in the calculation of the potential
rate of evaporation from the snowpack.
Air temperature is used to determine when snow is falling. Once snow begins to
accumulate on the ground, the snowpack accumulation and melt calculations take
place. Five sources of heat which influence the melting of the snowpack are
simulated:
40
-------
Module Section SNOW
+ RAIN/SNOW
++++ DETERMINATION
++++ +
, . , . DEWPOIN7 ,
..- .-; / TEMPERATURE /'
WPACK
FACE
LIQUID STORAGE
IN SNOWPACK
WIND
GROUNDMELT
LAND SURFACE
AREAL EXTENT
OF SNOW COVER
Figure 4.2(1).2-1 Snow accumulation and melt processes
41
-------
Module Section SNOW
1. net radiation heat (RADHT), both longwave and shortwave
2. convection of sensible heat from the air (CONVHT)
3. latent heat transfer by condensation of moist air on the snowpack (CONDHT)
4. heat from rain, sensible heat from rain falling (RNSHT) and latent heat
from rain freezing on the snowpack
5. conduction of heat from the underlying ground to the snowpack (GMELTR)
Other heat exchange processes such as latent heat from evaporation are considered
less significant and are not simulated.
The energy calculations for RADHT, CONVHT, and CONDHT are performed by subroutine
HEXCHR while GMELTR is calculated in subroutine GMEILT. Latent heat from rain
freezing is considered in subroutine WARMUP. RNSHT is computed in the parent
subroutine SNOW. For uniformity and accounting, energy values are calculated in
terms of the water equivalent which they could melt. It takes 202.4 calories per
square cm on the surface to melt one inch water equivalent of snow at 32 degrees
F. All the sources of heat including RNSHT are considered to be positive (incoming
to the pack) or zero, except RADHT which can also be negative (leaving the pack).
Net incoming heat from the atmosphere (the sum of RADHT, CONVHT, CONDHT, and RNSHT)
is used to warm the snowpack. The snowpack can be further warmed by the latent
heat released upon rain freezing. Any excess heat above that required to warm the
snowpack to 32 degrees F is used to melt the pack. Likewise, net loss of heat is
used to cool the snowpack producing a negative heat storage. Furthermore, incoming
heat from the ground melts the snowpack from the bottom independent of the
atmospheric heat sources except that the rate depends on the temperature of the
snowpack.
Figure 4.2(1).2.2 gives a schematic view of the moisture related processes modeled
in section SNOW. Precipitation may fall as rain or snow on the snowpack or the
ground. Evaporation only occurs from the frozen portion of the pack (PACKF). The
frozen portion of the pack is composed of snow and ice. The ice portion of PACKF
is considered to be in the lower part of the snowpack, so it is the first to melt
when heat is conducted from the ground. Similarly, the snow portion of PACKF is
the first to melt when atmospheric heat increases. Melted PACKF and rain falling
on the snowpack produce the water portion of the total snowpack which may overflow
the capacity of the pack. The water yield and rain on the bare ground becomes
input to module section PWATER or IWATER. These moisture related processes as well
as the heat exchange processes are discussed later in more detail.
Heat transfer from incoming rain (RNSHT) to the snowpack is calculated in the
parent subroutine SNOW (Section 4.2(1).2). The following physically based equation
is used:
RNSHT = (AIRTMP - 32.0)*RAINF/144.0 (2)
42
-------
Module Section SNOW
t
/ PREC
\^ precipitation
SNOWE
evaporation
from PACKF
SNOWF
snowfall
on
PACKF
total snowpack
- - _, .
PRAIN
rainfall
entering
PACKW
rainfall
on ground
GMELTR
ground
heat melt
from
pack
(ice
first)
PACKW
liquid
water
FREEZE
freezing
of
PACKW
to
PACKI
ground
heat melt
from
pack
(ice
PACKF frozen portion
WYIELD
water
yield
from
PACKW
Figure 4.2(1).2-2
Flow diagram of water movement, storages and phase changes
modeled in the SNOW section of the PERLND and IMPLND
Application Modules
43
-------
Module Section SNOW
where:
AIRTMP
RAINF
144.0
32.0
temperature of the air in degrees F
rainfall in inches
factor to convert to equivalent depth of melt
freezing point in degrees F
Other characteristics of the snowpack are also determined in the main subroutine
SNOW. The fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack is estimated by
merely dividing the depth of the snowpack by a cover index (COVINX) which is a
function of the parameter COVIND and the history of the pack as explained in
subroutine EFFPRC. The temperature of the snowpack is estimated by:
PAKTMP = 32.0 - NEGHTS/(0.00695*PACKF)
(3)
where:
PAKTMP
NEGHTS
PACKF
0.00695
mean temperature of the snowpack in degrees F
negative heat storage in inches of water equivalent
frozen contents of the snowpack in inches of water equivalent
physically based conversion factor
4. 2(1). 2.1 Estimate Meteorological Conditions (subroutine METEOR)
Purpose
Subroutine METEOR estimates the effects of certain meteorological conditions
specific snow-related processes by the use of empirical equations. It determines
whether precipitation is falling as snow or rain. The form of precipitation is
critical to the reliable simulation of runoff and snowmelt. When snow is falling,
the density is calculated in order to estimate the depth of the new snowpack. The
fraction of the sky which is clear is also estimated for use in the radiation
algorithms, and the gage dewpoint is corrected if it is warmer than air
temperature.
Method
The following expression is used to calculate hourly the effective air temperature
below which snowfall occurs:
SNOTMP - TSNOW + (AIRTMP - DEWTMP)*(0.12 + 0.008*AIRTMP) (4)
where:
SNOTMP - air temperature below which snowfall occurs in degrees F
TSNOW - parameter in degrees F
AIRTMP = air temperature in degrees F
DEWTMP - dewpoint in degrees F
SNOTMP is allowed to vary in this calculation by a maximum of one degree F from
TSNOW. When AIRTMP is equal to or greater than SNOTMP, precipitation is assumed^
to be rain.
44
-------
Module Section SNOW
When snowfall occurs, its density is estimated as a function of air temperature
according to: r
(5)
RDNSN = RDCSN + (AIRTMP/100.0)**2
where:
RDNSN = density of new snowfall (at zero degrees F or greater)
relative to liquid water
RDCSN = parameter designating density of new snow at an air temperature
of zero degrees F and lower, relative to liquid water
RDNSN is used in subroutine EFFPRC to calculate the new depth of the snowpack
resulting from the addition of the snow. Jhis and all other snow density terms are
in water equivalent (inches) per depth of the snowpack (inches).
The fraction of the sky which is clear (SKYCLR) is needed for the calculation of
HF?rHD?9WawvnS • radiatl°" ti0 th.e.snowPack from the clouds (done in subroutine
nth*™ • .JC!-R .1S set t.0 tne. minimum value of 0.15 when precipitation occurs.
Otherwise, it is increased each simulation time interval as follows-
SKYCLR = SKYCLR + (0.0004*DELT)
where:
DELT = simulation time interval in min
(6)
SKYCLR increases until either it reaches unity or precipitation causes it to be
* c ocU•
A gage dewpoint higher than air temperature is not physically possible and will
give erroneous results in the calculation of snowpack evaporation. Therefore
dewpoint is set equal to the air temperature when this situation occurs. Otherwise
the gage dewpoint is used.
4. 2(1). 2. 2 Determine the Effect of Precipitation on the Pack
(subroutine EFFPRC)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is to add the falling snow to the pack, determine
°" "" ™"
Method
The amount of P^ci>itat1on falling as snow or rain is determined in subroutine
nn tha i Sriubroutin.e E™C accounts for the influence that snowfall and rain have
on the land segment The subroutine begins by increasing the snowpack depth by the
amount of snow falling on the pack divided by its density.
45
-------
Module Section SNOW
The fraction of the land segment which is a covered by the snowpack (SNOCOV) is
determined by re-evaluating the index to areal coverage (COVINX). When the frozen
contents of the pack (PACKF) exceeds the value of the parameter describing the
maximum PACKF required to insure complete areal coverage by snow cover (COVIND),
then COVINX is set equal to COVIND. Otherwise, COVINX is equal to the largest
previous value of PACKF. SNOCOV is PACKF/COVINX if PACKF < COVINX. The amount of
rain falling on the snowpack is that fraction of the precipitation which falls as
rain multiplied by the SNOCOV. Rain falling on the snowpack will either freeze,
adding to the frozen portion of the pack and produce heat used to warm the pack
(see subroutine WARMUP), or it will increase the liquid water content of the pack
(see subroutine LIQUID). Any rain not falling on the pack is assumed to land on
bare ground.
When snowfall occurs, the index to the dullness of the snowpack (DULL) is decreased
by one thousand times the snowfall for that interval. However, if one thousand
times the snowfall is greater than the previous value for DULL, then DULL is set
to zero to account for a new layer of perfectly reflectable snow. Otherwise, when
snowfall does not occur, DULL is increased by one index unit per hour up to a
maximum of 800. Since DULL is an empirical term used as an index, it has no
physical units. DULL is used to determine the albedo of the snowpack which in turn
is used in the shortwave energy calculations in subroutine HEXCHR.
4.2(1).2.3 Compact the Pack (subroutine COMPAC)
Purpose
The addition of new snow will reduce the density as well as increase the depth of
the snowpack as in subroutine EFFPRC. The pack will tend to compact with age until
a maximum density is reached. The purpose of subroutine COMPAC is to determine the
rate of compaction and calculate the actual change in the depth due to compaction.
Method
When the relative density is less than 55 percent compaction is assumed to occur.
The rate of compaction is computed according to the empirical expression:
COMPCT - 1.0 - (0.00002*DELT60*PDEPTH*(0.55 - RDENPF)) (7)
where:
COMPCT = unit rate of compaction of the snowpack per interval
DELT60 » number of hours in an interval
PDEPTH = depth of the snowpack in inches of total; snowpack
RDENPF - density of the pack relative to liquid water
The new value for PDEPTH is COMPCT times PDEPTH. PDEPTH is used to calculate the
relative density of the snowpack which affects the liquid water holding capacity
as determined in subroutine LIQUID.
46
-------
Module Section SNOW
4.2(1).2.4 Simulate Evaporation from the Pack (subroutine SNOWEV)
Purpose
The SNOWEV subroutine estimates evaporation from the snowpack (sublimation).
Method
Evaporation from the snowpack will occur only when the vapor pressure of the air
is less than that of the snow surface, that is, only when the air vapor pressure
is less than 6.108 mbar which is the maximum vapor pressure that the thin surface
film of air over the snowpack can attain. When this condition is met the
evaporation is computed by the empirical relationship:
SNOWEP = SNOEVP*0.0002*WINMOV*(SATVAP - VAP)*SNOCOV (8)
where:
SNOWEP = potential rate of evaporation from the frozen part of the
snowpack in inches of water equivalent/interval
SNOEVP = parameter used to adjust the calculation to field conditions
WINMOV = wind movement in miles/interval
SATVAP = saturated vapor pressure of the air at the current air
temperature in mbar
VAP = vapor pressure of the air at the current air temp, in mbar
SNOCOV = fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack
The potential (SNOWEP) will be fulfilled if there is sufficient snowpack.
Otherwise, only the remaining pack will evaporate. For either case, evaporation
occurs only from the frozen content of the snowpack (PACKF).
4.2(1).2.5 Estimate Heat Exchange Rates (except ground melt and rain heat)
(subroutine HEXCHR)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is to estimate the heat exchange from the atmosphere
due to condensation, convection, and radiation. All heat exchanges are calculated
in terms of equivalent depth of melted or frozen water.
Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Condensation c
Transfer of latent heat of condensation can be important when warm moist air masses
travel over the snowpack. Condensation occurs when the air is moist enough to
condense on the snowpack. That is, when the vapor pressure of the air is greater
than 6.108 mbar. This physical process is the opposite of snow evaporation; the
heat produced by it is calculated by another empirical relationship-
47
-------
Module Section SNOW
CONDHT - 8.59*(VAP - 6.108)*CCFACT*0.00026*WINMOV (9)
where:
CONDHT « condensation heat flux to the snowpack in inches of water
equivalent/interval
VAP - vapor pressure of the air at the current air temp, in mbar
CCFACT = parameter used to correct melt values to field conditions
WINMOV - wind movement in miles/interval
CONDHT can only be positive or zero, that is, incoming to the pack.
Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Convection
Heat supplied by turbulent exchange with the atmosphere can occur only when air
temperatures are greater than freezing. This convection of heat is calculated by
the empirical expression:
CONVHT » (AIRTMP - 32.0)*(1.0 - 0.3*MELEV/10000.0)* (10)
CCFACT*0.00026*WINMOV
where:
CONVHT = convective heat flux to the snowpack in inches of water
equivalent/interval
AIRTMP = air temperature in degrees F
MELEV - mean elevation of the land segment above sea level in ft
In the simulation, CONVHT also can only be positive or zero, that is, only
incoming.
Method of Determining Heat Supplied by Radiation
Heat supplied by radiation is determined by:
RADHT - (SHORT + LONG)/203.2 (11)
where:
RADHT - radiation heat flux to the snowpack in inches of
water equivalent/interval
SHORT » net solar or shortwave radiation in langleys/interval
LONG - net terrestrial or longwave radiation in langleys/interval
The constant 203.2 is the number of langleys required to produce one inch of melt
from snow at 32 degrees F. RADHT can be either positive or negative, that is,
incoming or outgoing.
SHORT and LONG are calculated as follows. Solar radiation, a required time series,
is modified by the albedo and the effect of shading. The albedo or reflectivity
of the snowpack is a function of the dullness of the pack (see subroutine EFFPRC
for a discussion of DULL) and the season. The equation for calculating albedo
(ALBEDO) for the 6 summer months is:
48
-------
ALBEDO = 0.80 - 0.10*(DULL/24.0)**0.5
The corresponding equation for the winter months is:
ALBEDO = 0.85 - 0.07*(DULL/24.0)**0.5
Module Section SNOW
(12)
(13)
ALBEDO is allowed a minimum value of 0.45 for summer and 0.60 for winter. The
hemispheric location of the land segment is taken into account for determining
summer and winter in using the above equation. This is done through the use of the
latitude parameter which is positive for the northern hemisphere.
Once the albedo of the pack is found then solar radiation (SHORT) is modified
according to the equation:
SHORT = SOLRAD*(1.0 - ALBEDO)*(1.0 - SHADE) (14)
where:
SOLRAD = solar radiation in langleys/interval
SHADE = parameter indicating the fraction of the land segment which
is shaded
Unlike shortwave radiation which is more commonly measured, longwave radiation
(LONG) is estimated from theoretical consideration of the emitting properties of
the snowpack and its environment. The following equations are based on Stefan's
law of black body radiation and are linear approximations of curves in Plate 5-3,
Figure 6 in Snow Hydrology (Corps of Engineers, 1956). They vary only by the
constants which depend on air temperature. For air temperatures above freezing:
LONG = SHADE*0.26*RELTMP + (1.0 - SHADE)*(0.2*RELTMP - 6.6)
And for air temperatures at freezing and below:
LONG = SHADE*0.20*RELTMP + (1.0 - SHADE)*(0.17*RELTMP - 6.6)
(15)
(16)
where:
RELTMP
6.6
air temperature minus 32 in degrees F
average back radiation lost from the snowpack in open
areas in langleys/hr
Since the constants in these equations were originally based on hourly time steps,
both calculated values are multiplied by DELT60, the number of hours per interval,
so that they correspond to the simulation interval. In addition, LONG is
multiplied by the fraction of clear sky (SKYCLR) when it is negative to account for
back radiation from clouds.
49
-------
Module Section SNOW
4.2(1).2.6 Simulate Loss of Heat from Pack (subroutine COOLER)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to cool the snowpack whenever it is warmer than the
ambient air and thus loses heat. This is accomplished by accumulating negative
heat storage which increases the capacity of the pack to later absorb heat without
melting as simulated in subroutine WARMUP.
Method
In every interval where there is heat loss to the atmosphere and the temperature
of the snowpack is greater than the air temperature, the negative heat storage will
increase; that is, the pack will cool. However, there is a maximum negative heat
storage. The maximum negative heat storage that can exist at any time is found by
assuming a linear temperature distribution from the air temperature which is
considered to be above the pack to 32 degrees at the bottom of the snowpack. This
maximum negative heat storage is calculated hourly as follows:
MNEGHS - 0.00695*(PACKF/2.0)*(-RELTMP) (17)
where:
MNEGHS « maximum negative heat storage (inches of water equivalent)
PACKF - water equivalent of the frozen contents of the snowpack (inches)
RELTMP » air temperature above freezing (degrees F)
The accumulation of the negative heat storage is calculated hourly from the
following empirical relationship:
NEGHT - 0.0007*(PAKTMP - AIRTMP)*DELT60 (18)
where:
NEGHT = potential rate of cooling of the snowpack in inches of water
equivalent per interval
PAKTMP » mean temperature of the snowpack in degrees F
AIRTMP - air temperature in degrees F
DELT60 * number of hours per interval
NEGHT is added to the negative heat storage (NEGHTS) every interval except when
limited by MNEGHS. NEGHTS is used in the parent subroutine SNOW to calculate the
temperature of the snowpack and in subroutine WARMUP to determine the extent that
the pack must be warmed to reach 32 degrees F.
4.2(1).2.7 Warm the Snowpack if Possible (subroutine WARMUP)
Purpose
This subroutine warms the snowpack to as much as 32 degrees F when possible.
50
-------
Module Section SNOW
Method
When there " negative heat storage in the pack (see subroutine COOLER for a
discussion of NEGHTS) and there is net incoming energy as calculated in previous
subroutines, then NEGHTS will decrease resulting in a warmer snowpack and possible
Illc I L • •
The calculations in this subroutine are merely accounting. They decrease NEGHTS
to a minimum of zero by subtracting the net incoming heat. If any negative heat
storage remains, then the latent heat released by the freezing of any incoming rain
is added to the pack. Since NEGHTS and all other heat variables are in units of
^nieMF?uT? *;h th? inches °f ra1n falling on the Pack and feezing is subtracted
from NEGHTS without any conversion.
4. 2(1). 2. 8 Melt the Pack Using Any Remaining Heat (subroutine MELTER)
Purpose
MELTER simulates the actual melting of the pack with whatever incoming heat
remains. Any heat which was not used to heat the snowpack in subroutine WARMUP can
now be used to melt the snowpack.
Method
This subroutine is also merely an accounting subroutine. The net incoming heat has
already been calculated in terms of water equivalents of melt. Hence, any
remaining incoming heat is used directly to melt the snowpack either partially or
entirely depending on the size of the snowpack.
4. 2(1). 2. 9 Handle Liquid Water in the Pack (subroutine LIQUID)
Purpose
* LIQ-UID I1rst determines the liq^d storage capacity of the snowpack.
It then determines how much liquid water is available to fill the storage capacity
Any liquid water above the capacity will leave the snowpack unless it freezes (see
subroutine ICING). *
Method
The liquid water holding capacity of the snowpack can be at the maximum as
specified by the parameter MWATER, at zero, or somewhere in between depending on
r^nJ^ yrh * IT Pack: nthe less dense the snowpack the greater the holding
capacity. The following relationships define the capacity:
for RDENPF > 0.91,
PACKWC =0.0
for 0.6 < RDENPF < 0.91,
PACKWC = MWATER*(3.0 - 3.33*RDENPF)
(19)
(20)
51
-------
Module Section SNOW
for RDENPF < 0.61,
PACKWC - MWATER (21)
where:
PACKWC - liquid water holding capacity of the snowpack in
in./in.
MWATER » parameter specifying the maximum liquid water content of
the snowpack in./in.
RDENPF » density of the snowpack relative to liquid water
MWATER is a function of the mass of ice layers, the size, the shape, and spacing
of snow crystals and the degree of channelization and honeycombing of the snowpack.
Once PACKWC is calculated, it is compared to the available liquid water in the pack
PWSUPY. PWSUPY is calculated by summing any storage remaining at the start of the
interval, any melt, and any rain that fell on the pack which did not freeze. If
PWSUPY is more than PACKWC, then water is yielded to the land surface from the
snowpack.
4.2(1).2.10 Simulate Occurrence of Ice in the Pack (subroutine ICING)
Purpose
The purpose of subroutine ICING is to simulate the possible freezing of water which
would otherwise leave the snowpack. This freezing in turn produces ice or frozen
ground at the bottom of the snowpack. In this subroutine, the ice can be
considered to be at the bottom of the pack or frozen in the ground below the snow
portion of the pack thus extending the total pack into the soil. This subroutine
may only be applicable in certain areas; therefore, it is user optional.
Method
The freezing of the water yield of the snowpack depends on the capacity of the
environment to freeze it. Every day at approximately 6 a.m. the capacity is
reassessed. A new value is estimated in terms of inches of melt by multiplying the
Fahrenheit degrees of the air temperature below 32.0 by 0.01. This estimate is
compared with the freezing capacity if any which remains from the previous 24-hr
period. If it is greater, then the new estimated capacity replaces the old, else
the old value remains as the potential. Any water yield that occurs freezes and
is added to the ice portion of the snowpack until the capacity is met. Any
subsequent water yield is released from the snowpack.
52
-------
Module Section SNOW
4.2(1).2.11 Melt the Pack Using Heat from the Ground
(subroutine GMELT)
Purpose
The purpose of the GMELT subroutine is to simulate the melt caused by heat
conducted from the surface underlying the snowpack. This ground heat melts the pack
only from below. Therefore, melt from this process is considered independent of
other previously calculated heat influences except for an indirect effect via the
temperature of the snowpack. Unlike the other melt processes, ground heat melts the
ice portion of the snowpack first since ice is considered to be located at the
lower depths of the pack.
Method
The potential rate of ground melt is calculated hourly as a function of snowpack
temperature (PAKTMP) and a lumped parameter (MGMELT). MGMELT is the maximum rate
of melt in water equivalent caused by heat from the ground at a PAKTMP of 32
degrees F. MGMELT would depend upon the thermal conductivity of the soil and the
normal depth of soil freezing. The potential ground melt is reduced below MGMELT
by 3 Percent for each degree that PAKTMP is below 32 degrees F to a minimum of 19
percent of MGMELT at 5 degrees F or lower. As long as a snowpack is present, around
melt occurs at this potential rate.
4. 2(1). 2. 12 Reset State Variables When Snowpack Disappears
(subroutine NOPACK)
Purpose
This code resets the state variables (for example, SNOCOV) when the snowpack
completely disappears. K
Method
™,™. contents of the snowpack required for complete area! cover of snow
(COVINX) is set to a tenth of the maximum value (COVIND). All other variables are
either set to zero or the "undefined" value of -1.0E30
53
-------
Module Section PWATER
4.2(1).3 Simulate Water Budget for a Pervious Land Segment
(Section PWATER of Module PERLND)
Purpose
PWATER is used to calculate the components of the water budget, primarily to
predict the total runoff from a pervious area. PWATER is the key component of
module PERLND; subsequent major sections of PERLND (eg. SEDMNT) depend on the
outputs of this section.
Background
The hydro!ogic processes that are modeled by PWATER are illustrated in Figure
4.2(1).3-1. The algorithms used to simulate these land related processes are the
product of over 15 yr of research and testing. They are based on the original
research for the LANDS subprogram of the Stanford Watershed Model IV (Crawford and
Linsley, 1966). LANDS has been incorporated into many models and used to
successfully simulate the hydro!ogic responses of widely varying watersheds. The
equations used in module section PWATER are nearly identical to the ones in the
current version of LANDS in the' PTR Model (Crawford and Donigian, 1973), HSP
(Hydrocomp, 1976), and the ARM and NPS Models (Donigian and Crawford, 1976 a,b).
However, some changes have been made to LANDS to make the algorithms internally
more amenable to a range of calculation time steps. Also, many of the parameter
names have been changed to make them more descriptive, and some can be input on a
monthly basis to allow for seasonal variations.
Data Requirements and Manipulation
The number of time series required by module section PWATER depends on whether snow
accumulation and melt are considered.
When such conditions are not considered, only potential evapotranspiration and
precipitation are required.
However, when snow conditions are considered, air temperature, rainfall, snowcover,
water yield, and ice content of the snowpack are also required. Also, the
evaporation data are adjusted when snow is considered. The input evaporation values
are reduced to account for the fraction of the land segment covered by the snowpack
(determined from the generated time series for snow cover), with an allowance for
the fraction of area covered by coniferous forest which, it is assumed, can
transpire through any snow cover. Furthermore, PET is reduced to zero when air
temperature is below the parameter PETMIN. If air temperature is below PETMAX but
above PETMIN, PET will be reduced to 50% of the input value, unless the first
adjustment already reduced it to less than this amount.
The estimated potential evapotranspiration (PET) is used to calculate actual ET in
subroutine group EVAPT.
54
-------
Module Section PWATER
Approach
Figure 4.2(1).3-2 represents the fluxes and storages simulated in module section
PWATER. The time series SUPY representing moisture supplied to the land segment
includes rain, and when snow conditions are considered, rain plus water from the
snowpack. SUPY is then available for interception. Interception storage is water
retained by any storage above the overland flow plane. For pervious areas,
interception storage is mostly on vegetation. Any overflow from interception
storage is added to the optionally supplied time series of surface external lateral
inflow to produce the total inflow into the surface detention storage.
Inflow to the surface detention storage is added to existing storage to make up the
water available for infiltration and runoff. Moisture which directly infiltrates
moves to the lower zone and groundwater storages. Other water may go to the upper
zone storage, may be routed as runoff from surface detention or interflow storage,
or may stay on the overland flow plane, from which it runs off or infiltrates at
a later time.
The processes of infiltration and overland flow interact and occur simultaneously
in nature. Surface conditions such as heavy turf on mild slopes restrict the
velocity of overland flow and reduce the total quantity of runoff by allowing more
time for infiltration. Increased soil moisture due to prolonged infiltration will
in time reduce the infiltration rate producing more overland flow. Surface
detention will modify flow. For example, high intensity rainfall is attenuated by
storage and the maximum outflow rate is reduced. The water in the surface
detention may also later infiltrate reoccurring as interflow, or it can be
contained in upper zone storage.
Water infiltrating through the surface and percolating from the upper zone storage
to the lower zone storage may flow to active groundwater storage or may be lost by
deep percolation. Active groundwater eventually reappears as baseflow, but deep
percolation is considered lost from the simulated system.
Lateral external inflows to interflow and active groundwater storages are also
possible in section PWATER. One may wish to use this option if an upslope land
segment is significantly different to merit separating it from a downslope land
segment and no channel exists between them. This capability was not included in
the previous models.
Not only are flows important in the simulation of the water budget, but so are
storages. As stated, soil storage affects infiltration. The water holding
capacity of the two soil storages, upper zone and lower zone, in module section
PERLND is defined in terms of nominal capacities. Nominal, rather than absolute
capacities, serve the purpose of smoothing any abrupt change that would occur if
an absolute capacity is reached. Such capacities permit a smooth transition in
hydro!ogic performance as the water content fluctuates.
56
-------
Module Section PWATER
( INFIL \
\ infiltration /
LZET
lower
zone
ET
X" IPERC \
/ infiltration & \
\ percolation to /
\Jower zones /
o
AGWET
ground
water
ET
IGWI
deep
percolation
UZI
upper
zone
inflow
uzs
upper zone
storage
/ PERC \
V percolation )
LZI
lower
zone
inflow
AGWI
active
ground
water
inflow
LZS
lower zone
storage
AGWS
active
ground water
storage
AGWO
ground
water
outflow
w
AGWLI
external
lateral
ground
water
inflow
Figure 4.
.3-2 Flow diagram of water movement and storages modelpd in th^
PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module
57
-------
Module Section PWATER
i/" TAET \
( total actual )
\_EL_y
CEPE
inter-
ception
evapo-
ration
XSUPY\
/ precip or rain I
\ +snowpack I
X.water yield /
CEPS
interception
storage
external
lateral
surface
inflow
VX
CEPO
interception
outflow
sum
surface
inflow
SURO
surface
outflow
SURS
surface
detention
storage
externa
lateral
inter-
flow
inter-
flow
input
from
surface
IFWS
interflow
storage
IFWO
inter-
flow
outflow
Figure 4.2(1).3-2
Flow diagram of water movement and storages modeled in the
PWATER section of the PERLND Application Module (continued)
58
-------
Module Section PWATER
Storages also affect evapotranspi ration loss. Evapotranspi ration can be simulated
e "
affect the adsorption and transformations of pesticides and nutrients So 1
moisture contents may vary greatly over a land segment. Therefore, a iSre detail id
representation of the moisture contents and fluxes may be needed to simulate the
transport and reaction of agricultural chemicals. simulate tne
Ifeth?J2?T?5l Su.br1out1ne Descriptions will explain in more detail the algorithms
™lllStl0n- F Code
4. 2(1). 3.1 Simulate Interception (subroutine ICEPT)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to simulate the interception of moisture by veqetal or
9COVer- tU is supplied by precipitation, or ^undfr snow
Method
The user may supply the interception capacity on a monthly basis to account for
seasonal variations, or may supply one value designating a fixed SpJcltJ The
interception capacity parameter can be used to designate any retention of/oisture
which does not infiltrate or reach the overland flow plane. Typical y for pervious
yPe°
Moisture exceeding the interception capacity overflows the storage and is ready for
either infiltration or runoff as determined by subroutine group SURFAC Water held
is removed by evaporation; the amount is determined in
59
-------
Module Section PWATER
4.2(1).3.2 Distribute the Water Available for Infiltration and Runoff
(subroutine SURFAC)
Purpose
Subroutine SURFAC determines what happens to the moisture on the surface of the
land. It may infiltrate, go to the upper zone storage or interflow storage, remain
in surface detention storage, or run off.
Method
The algorithms which simulate infiltration represent both the continuous variation
of infiltration rate with time as a function of soil moisture and the areal
variation of infiltration over the land segment. The equations representing the
dependence of infiltration on soil moisture are based on the work of Philip (1957)
and are derived in detail in the previously cited reports.
The infiltration capacity, the maximum rate at which soil will accept infiltration,
is a function of both the fixed and variable characteristics of the watershed.
Fixed characteristics include primarily soil permeability and land slopes, while
variables are soil surface conditions and soil moisture content. Fixed and
variable characteristics vary spatially over the land segment. A linear probability
density function is used to account for areal variation. Figure 4.2(1).3-3
represents the infiltration/interflow/surface runoff distribution function of
section PWATER. Careful attention to this figure and Figure 4.2(1).3-2 will
facilitate understanding of subroutine SURFAC and the subordinate subroutines
DISPOS, DIVISN, UZINF, and PROUTE.
The infiltration distribution represented by Figure 4.2(1).3-3 is focused around
the two lines which separate the moisture available to the land surface (MSUPY)
into what infiltrates and what goes to interflow. A number of the variables that
are used to determine the location of lines I and II are calculated in subroutine
SURFAC. They are calculated by the following relationships:
IBAR - (INFILT/(LZS/LZSN)**INFEXP)*INFFAC
IMAX - INFILD*IBAR
IMIN - IBAR - (IMAX - IBAR)
RATIO = INTFW*(2.0**(LZS/LZSN))
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
where:
IBAR
- mean infiltration capacity over the land segment in
in./interval
INFILT - infiltration parameter in in./interval
60
-------
Module Section PWATER
I
at
0)
MSUPY
IfflfllN
IMIN
block number
line II (interflow +
infiltration capacity)
50
% of Area
potential surface
detention/runoff
potential
interflow inflow
100
potential direct runoff
Figure 4.20T.3-3 Determination of infiltration and interflow inflow
61
-------
Module Section PWATER
LZS
LZSN
INFEXP
INFFAC
IMAX
INFILD
IMIN
RATIO
INTFW
lower zone storage in inches
parameter for lower zone nominal storage in inches
exponent parameter greater than one
factor to account for frozen ground effects, if applicable
maximum infiltration capacity in in./interval
parameter giving the ratio of maximum to mean infiltration
capacity over the land segment
minimum infiltration capacity in in./interval
ratio of the ordinates of line II to line I
interflow inflow parameter
The factor that reduces infiltration (and also upper zone percolation) to account
for the freezing of the ground surface (INFFAC) is 1.0 if icing is not simulated.
When icing occurs, the factor is 1.0 minus the water equivalent of ice in of the
snowpack to a minimum of 0.1.
The parameter INTFW can be input on a monthly basis to allow for variations
throughout the year.
4.2(1)3.2.1 Dispose of Moisture Supply
(subroutine DISPOS)
Purpose
Subroutine DISPOS determines what happens to the moisture supply (MSUPY) on the
land segment.
Method
This subroutine calls subordinate routines DIVISN, UZINF, and PROUTE. DIVISN is
called to determine how much of MSUPY falls above and below line I in Figure
4 2(1).3-3. The quantity under this line is considered to be infiltrated. The
amount over the line but under the MSUPY line (the entire shaded portion) is the
potential direct runoff (PDRO), which is the combined increment to interflow, and
upper zone storage plus the quantities which will stay on the surface and run off.
PDRO is subdivided by line II. The ordinates of line II are found by multiplying
the ordinates of line I by RATIO (see subroutine SURFAC for definition). The
quantity underneath both line II and the MSUPY line but above line I is called
potential interflow inflow. This consists of actual interflow plus an increment
to upper zone storage. Any amount above line II but below the MSUPY (potential
surface detention/runoff) is that portion of the moisture supply which stays on the
surface and is available for overland flow routing, plus a further increment to
upper zone storage. The fractions of the potential interflow inflow and potential
surface detention/runoff which are combined to compose the upper zone inflow are
determined in subroutine UZINF.
62
-------
Module Section PWATER
4. 2(1). 3. 2. 1.2 Compute Inflow to Upper Zone (subroutines UZINF1 and UZINF2)
Purpose
^
Method
The fraction of the potential direct runoff which is inflow to the
FRAC = 1 - (UZRAT/2)*(l/(4 - UZRAT))**(3 - UZRAT)
for UZRAT less than or equal to two. For UZRAT greater than two,
FRAC = (0.5/(UZRAT-l))**(2*UZRAT-3)
where:
UZRAT = UZS/UZSN °f PDRO reta1ned by the
(7)
(8)
zone
Since UZS and FRAC are dynamically affected by the inflow process it
' VB-.
d(UZS)/dt = (d(UZRAT)/dt)*UZSN = PDRO*FRAC
Thus
d(UZRAT)/FRAC = (PDRO/UZSN)*dt
Now taking the definite integral of both sides of the equati
(9)
(10)
on
INTGRL =
UZRATt2
UZRATt1
d(UZRAT)
FRAC
(PDRO/UZSN)(t2-tl)
(11)
63
-------
Module Section PWATER
where:
tl - time at start of interval
t2 - time at end of interval
The integral on the left side must be evaluated numerically. Subroutine UZINF1
uses tabulated corresponding values of INTGRL and UZRAT to evaluate it. This
relationship, plus Equations 9 and 11, enable one to find the change in UZRAT over
the interval and, hence, the quantity of inflow.
Subroutine UZINF2, which is an alternative to UZINF1, uses the same algorithm as
HSP, ARM and NPS. That is, Equations 7 and 8 are used directly to estimate the
fraction of PDRO retained by the upper zone. Only the value of UZRAT at the start
of the simulation interval is used; thus, no account is taken of the possible
steady reduction in inflow to the upper zone within a single time step, due to its
being filled (Figure 4.2(1).3-4).
1.00
0.80
0.60
O
£
UL
0.40
0.20
0.00
0
V,
^X
X
\
\
\
\
\
'
'
1.0 2.0 3.0
UZRAT
Figure 4.2(1).3-4
Fraction of the potential direct runoff retained by the upper
zone (FRAC) as a function of the upper zone soil moisture
ratio (UZRAT)
64
-------
Module Section PWATER
4,2(1). 3.2. 1.3 Determine Surface Runoff (subroutine PROUTE)
Purpose
Method of Routing
Overland flow is treated as a turbulent flow process. It is simulated usina the
^Sf^T^ ^^S^^^^^&^
xx™MJr$3S3$s%..d1scuss1on- The «»•"' ^ ««s
for SURSM < SURSE
SURO = DELT60*SRC*(SURSM*(1.0 -f 0.6(SURSM/SURSE)**3)**1.67
for SURSM >= SURSE
SURO = DELT60*SRC*(SURSM*1.6)**1.67
(12)
where:
SURO =
DELT60 =
SRC
SURSM =
SURSE =
surface outflow in in./interval
DELT/60.0 (hr/interval)
routing variable, described below
mean surface detention storage over the time interval in
inches
equilibrium surface detention storage (inches) for current
equations applicable to a range of time steps (DELT)
't.s the case where the overland flow rate is
at equilibrium or
SURSE = DEC*SSUPR**0.6
where:
DEC
SSUPR
(13)
calculated routing variable, described below
rate of moisture supply to the overland flow surface
ways of determining SSUPR and SURSM. One option
nV* mOdel'' *^CD AHM - — J tLtnr~ , . . T .
inches per interval. SURSM is estimated as the mean ofSURS and " PSUR
""
65
-------
Module Section PWATER
SURSM is set equal to SURS. This option has not been used in prior models, but is
dimensionally consistent for any time step.
The variables DEC and SRC are calculated daily in subroutine SURFAC, but their
equations will be given here since they pertain to routing. They are:
DEC - 0.00982*(NSUR*LSUR/SQRT(SLSUR))**0.6 (14)
SRC = 1020.0*(SQRT(SLSUR)/(NSUR*LSUR)) (15)
wheret
NSUR - Manning's n for the overland flow plane
LSUR - length of the overland flow plane in ft
SLSUR - slope of the overland flow plane in ft/ft
NSUR can be input on a monthly basis to allow for variations in roughness of the
overland flow plane throughout the year.
4.2(1).3.3 Simulate Interflow (subroutine INTFLW)
Purpose
Interflow can have an important influence on storm hydrographs particularly when
vertical percolation is retarded by a shallow, less permeable soil layer.
Additions to the interflow component are retained in storage or routed as outflow
from the land segment. Inflows to the interflow component may occur from the
surface or from upslope external lateral flows. The purpose of this subroutine is
to determine the amount of interflow and to update the storage.
Method of Determining Interflow
The calculation of interflow outflow assumes a linear relationship to storage. Thus
outflow is a function of a recession parameter, inflow, and storage. Moisture that
remains will occupy interflow storage, interflow discharge is calculated by:
IFWO - (IFWK1*INFLO) + (IFWK2*IFWS) " ' (16)
where:
IFWO = interflow outflow in in./interval
INFLO - inflow into interflow storage in in./interval
IFWS - interflow storage at the start of the interval in inches
IFWK1 and IFWK2 are variables determined by:
IFWK1 - 1.0 - (IFWK2/KIFW) ' (17)
IFWK2 - 1.0 - EXP(-KIFW) (18)
66
-------
and
KIFW = -ALOG(IRC)*DELT60/24.0
Module Section PWATER
(19)
where:
IRC
DELT60
24.0
EXP
ALOG
interflow recession parameter, per day
number of hr/interval
number of hours per day
Fortran exponential function
Fortran natural logarithm function
,-l,thff?htio of the Present rate of interflow outflow to the value 24 hours
uaJlF' .ther^was no 1n.flow. IRC can be input on a monthly basis to allow for
variations in soil properties throughout the year.
4.2(1).3.4 Simulate Upper Zone Behavior (subroutine UZONE)
Purpose
31d th!usubsidi^y subroutine UZONES are used to calculate the
sor n f0m the ?Per Z0ne' Water not Plated remains in upper zone
storage available for evapotranspi ration in subroutine ETUZON.
*, .
Method of Determining Percolation
j "/I ow. calculated in DISPOS is first added to the upper zone storage
rom the upper zone". 16rV '" ^ t0tal Water available fo^ Percolat??n
Percolation only occurs when UZRAT minus LZRAT is greater than 0.01. When this
' ^ *he UPP6r Z°ne St°rage ^ calcul^ed by the empirical
(20)
PERC = 0.1*INFILT*INFFAC*UZSN*(UZRAT - LZRAT)**3
where:
PERC
INFILT
INFFAC
UZSN
UZRAT
LZRAT
percolation from the upper zone in in./interval
infiltration parameter in in./interval
factor to account for frozen ground, if any,
parameter for upper zone nominal storage in inches
ratio of upper zone storage to UZSN
ratio of lower zone storage to lower zone
nominal storage (LZSN)
The upper zone nominal capacity can be input on a monthly basis to allow for
variations throughout the year. The monthly values are interpolatedI to obtainfdallj
67
-------
Module Section PWATER
4.2(1).3.5 Simulate Lower Zone Behavior (subroutine LZONE)
Purpose
This subroutine determines the quantity of infiltrated and percolated water which
enters the lower zone. The infiltrated moisture supply is determined in subroutine
DISPOS. The percolated moisture from the upper zone is found in subroutine UZONE.
Method
The fraction of the direct infiltration plus percolation that enters the lower zone
storage (LZS) is based on the lower zone storage ratio of LZS/LZSN where LZSN is
the lower zone nominal capacity. The inflowing fraction is determined empirically
by:
LZFRAC - 1.0 - LZRAT*(1.0/(1.0 + INDX))**INDX (21)
when LZRAT is less than 1.0, and by
LZFRAC - (1.0/(1.0 + INDX))**INDX (22)
when LZRAT is greater than 1.0. INDX is defined by:
INDX - 1.5*ABS(LZRAT - 1.0) + 1.0 (23)
wherei
LZFRAC - fraction of infiltration plus percolation entering LZS
LZRAT - LZS/LZSN
ABS = function for determining absolute value
These relationships are plotted in Figure 4.2(1).3-5. The fraction of the moisture
supply remaining after the surface, upper zone, and lower zone components are
subtracted is added to the groundwater storages.
4.2(1).3.6 Simulate Groundwater Behavior (subroutine GWATER)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is to determine the amount of the inflow to
groundwater that is lost to deep or inactive groundwater and to determine the
amount of active groundwater outflow. These two fluxes will in turn affect the
active groundwater storage.
Method of Determining Groundwater Fluxes
The quantity of direct infiltration plus percolation from the upper zone which does
not go to the lower zone (determined in subroutine LZONE) will be inflow to either
inactive or active groundwater. The distribution to active and inactive
68
-------
Module Section PWATER
Fraction of Infiltration
Plus Percolation Entering
Lower Zone Storage
0 P p e> o -i
8 8 £ 8 § g
^N
s
\
\
V
\
N
^
0 0.5 1.0 1.6 2.0 2.5
UZRAT
Figure 4. 2(1). 3-5 Fraction of infiltration
plus percolation entering lower zone storage
It
umpt xC-tiVu6 9roundwater storage is based on a simplified model
assumes that the discharge of an aquifer is proportional to the ornHurt nf tho
Thus, the groundwater outflow is estimated by:
AGWO = KGW*(1.0 + KVARY*GWVS)*AGWS
where:
AGWO = active groundwater outflow in in. /interval
KVARY = n^±Serh-Uifl°W rePess1on Parameter, per interval
- Pfrfmeter »*"<* can make active groundwater storage to outflow
ruuc relation nonlinear in per inches uumuw.
nr-i.c = index to gr°undwater slope in inches
AGWS = active groundwater storage at the start of the interval in inches
(24)
1« also
69
-------
Module Section PWATER
'" • • • i'1'1'1 , , • ' '
The parameter KGW is calculated by the Run Interpreter using the relationship:
KGW - 1.0 - (AGWRC)**(DELT60/24.0) (25)
where:
AGWRC
DELT60
daily recession constant of groundwater flow,
if KVARY or GWVS =0.0
That is, the ratio of current groundwater discharge
to groundwater discharge 24-hr earlier
hr/interval
4.2(1).3.7 Simulate Evapotranspiration
(subroutine EVAPT)
Purpose
The purpose of EVAPT and its subordinate subroutines is to simulate evaporation and
evapotranspiration fluxes from all zones of the pervious land segment. Since in
most hydro!ogic regimes the volume of water that leaves a watershed as
evapotranspiration exceeds the total volume of streamflow, this is an important
aspect of the water budget.
Method of Determining Actual Evapotranspiration
There are two separate issues involved in estimating evapotranspiration (ET).
First, potential ET must be estimated. ET potential or demand is supplied as an
input times series, typically using U.S. Weather Bureau Class A pan records plus
an adjustment factor. The data are further adjusted for cover in the parent
subroutine PWATER. Second, actual ET must be calculated, usually as a function of
moisture storages and the potential. The actual ET is estimated by trying to meet
the demand from five sources in the order described below. The sum of the ET from
these five sources is the total actual evapotranspiration from the land segment.
• ' ' , i
Subroutine ETBASE
The first source from which ET can be taken is the active groundwater outflow or
baseflow. This simulates effects such as ET from riparian vegetation in which
groundwater is withdrawn as it enters the stream. The user may specify by the
parameter BASETP the fraction, if any, of the potential ET that can be sought from
the baseflow. That portion can only be fulfilled if outflow exists. Any remaining
potential not met by actual baseflow evaporation will try next to be satisfied in
subroutine EVICEP.
70
-------
Module Section PWATER
Subroutine EVICEP
ultoi " t-hen 6XertS 1tS demand on the water in interception storage.
Unlike baseflow, there is no parameter regulating the rate of ET from interception
dp2e: iThe ^mand,wi11 <*aw upon all of the i ntercept ion storage unless thS
demand is less than the storage. When the demand is greater than the storaae the
renaming demand will try to be satisfied in subroutine ETUZON. Stora9e> the
Subroutine ETUZON
II
Subroutine ETAGW
, basefl°w> ac^ evapotranspi ration from active groundwater is
?T +K Ptaranet.er- Thue parameter AGWETP is the fraction of the remaining
A ^ Canube SOUght from the act1ve groundwater storage. That port on
of *h| ET demand can be met only if there .is enough active groundwater storage tS
satisfy it. Any remaining potential will try to be met in subroutine CTLZON.
Subroutine ETLZON
The lower zone is the last storage from which ET is drawn. Evapotranspiration from
the lower zone is more involved than that from the other storages, n "from the
lower zone depends upon vegetation transpiration. Evapotranspiration ODoortunitv
will vary with the vegetation type, the depth of rooting, density Of The Sat on
•^^^^
If the LZETP parameter is at its maximum value of one, representing near comolete
s equCa0lVetroa9tehef dlZ/Thf Ve9e*atio"' the» the Potential • ET for'the lower'zoSe
is equal to the demand that remains. However, this is normal! v not thP ra^
W&iSfr^lSS ZX'E-F?1!' d-?th/ "11] Uary °"' ^ S land0tsegmen "?i
(Mau« 4 zm 3 s1 1 TM , y dhen?lty .fu."ct1on for ET opportunity is assumed
on^' °
71
-------
Module Section PWATER
The variable RPARM, the index to maximum ET opportunity, is estimated by:
RPARM = (0.25/(1.0 - LZETP))*(LZS/LZSN)*DELT60/24.0 (26)
where:
RPARM
LZETP
LZS
LZSN
DELT60
maximum ET opportunity in in./interval
lower zone ET parameter
current lower zone storage in inches
lower zone nominal storage parameter in inches
hr/interval
.2 «=
111
0. «•»••£ REMPET
f II
|||
"""
Q<:ill
RPARM
CD t3
CO O
O
3
100
Percent of Area with Evapotranspiration
Opportunity Equal to or less than the
Indicated Value
Figure 4.2(1).3-6 Potential and actual evapotranspiration from the lower zone
The quantity of water lost by ET from the lower zone storage, when remaining
potential ET (REMPET) is less than RPARM, is given by the cross-hatched area of
Figure 4.2(1).3-6. When REMPET is more than RPARM the lower zone ET is equal to
the entire area under the triangle, RPARM/2.
ET from the lower zone storage is further reduced when LZETP is less than 0.5 by
multiplying by LZETP*2.0. This is designed to account for the fraction of the land
segment devoid of any vegetation that can draw from the lower zone.
72
-------
Module Section SEDMNT
4. 2(1). 4 Simulate Production and Removal of Sediment
(Section SEDMNT of Module PERLND)
Purpose
Module section SEDMNT simulates the production and removal of sediment
Etra1#,ni!& « ^ ™°« *° ^ ^noMT
ar SSSTS-SSJ M: 13
of reservoirs. Nutritious and toxic cheilcals can be ?Jrrl2d
Approach
nim-- used t° Produce and remove sediment are based on the ARM and NPS
Models (Donigian and Crawford, 1976 a,b). The algorithms representing land surface
fEnl?1 iQ^636^^5 "^derived from a sediment model developed by Moshe Rlgev
19751' ™plfnl\n-flUena* by Me^r and Wischmeier (1969) and Onstad and Foster
detacLnt hv *ff?£f? mana9.ement Practice factor which has been added to the soil
detachment by rainfall equation was based on the "P" factor in the Universal Soil
Loss Equation (Wischmeier and Smith, 1965), It was introduced In order tobetter
evaluate agricultural conservation practices. The equation which represents the
r "
,,
schematically represents the fluxes and storages used to simulate these processes
Two of the sediment fluxes, SLSED and NSVI, are added directly to the detached
sediment storage variable DETS in the parent subroutine SEDMNT while thfothe?
fluxes are computed in subordinate subroutines. SLSED represents external lateral
input from an upslope land segment. It is a -time i serlel whlc ^ the user mai
optionally specify NVSI is a parameter that represents any net "external additions
or removals of sediment caused by human activities or wind. external addltlons
r0ufccmd1lBSnt by Wlter 1s simulated ^ washoff of detached sediment in
oSptP?^?; dr With.°Ut, i;ainfall; the rate of attachment Ms specified by
parameter AFFIX. Transport of detached sediment is by overland flow The scour 1 no
'11 1nClUd6S ^ -p1clc UP a"d tr^ort ^ over and' Ho' 9
73
-------
Module Section SEDMNT
SLSED
lateral
input of
sediment
to
^surface.
' NVSI
net vertical
sediment
input
DETS
detached
sediment
storage
WSSD
washoff
of
detached
sediment
by water
AFFIX
sediment
attachment
' DET
detachment
of soil by
rainfall
O
SOSED
total
removal
of soil &
sediment
from sur-
face by
V water /
soil matrix
(assumed to
have
unlimited
storage)
SCRSD
scour of
matrix
soil by
water
Figure 4.2(1).4-2Flow diagram for SEDMNT section of PERLND Application Module
75
-------
Module Section SEDMNT
Module section SEDMNT has two options for simulating washoff of detached sediment
and scour of soil. One uses subroutine SOSED1 which is identical to the method1
used in the ARM and the NFS Models. However, some equations used in this metho?
are dimensionally nonhomogeneous, and it has only been used with 15- and 5-min
intervals. The results obtained are,probably highly dependent on the simulation
time step. The other option uses subroutine SOSED2 which is dimensionally
homogeneous and is, theoretically, less dependent on the time step. However, n.
has not been tested.
4.2(1).4.1 Detach Soil By Rainfall
(subroutine DETACH)
Purpose »
The purpose of DETACH is to simulate the splash detachment of the soil matrix by
falling rain.
Method of Detaching Soil by Rainfall
Kinetic energy from rain falling on the soil detaches particles which are then
available to be transported by overland flow. The equation that simulates
detachment is:
DET - DELT60*(1.0 - CR)*SMPF*KRER*(RAIN/DELT60)**JRER (1)
where:
DET
» sediment detached from the soil matrix by rainfall in
tons/acre per interval
DELT60 = number of hr/interval
CR * fraction of the land covered by snow and other cover
SMPF - supporting management practice factor
KRER - detachment coefficient dependent on soil properties
RAIN - rainfall in in./interval
JRER = detachment exponent dependent on soil properties
The variable CR is the sum of the fraction of the area covered by the snowpack
(SNOCOV), if any, and the fraction that is covered by anything else but snow
(COVER). SNOCOV is computed by section SNOW. COVER is a parameter which for
pervious areas will typically be the fraction of the area covered by vegetation and
mulch. It can be input on a monthly basis.
4.2(1).4.2 Remove by Surface Flow Using Method 1
(subroutine SOSED1)
Purpose
Subroutines SOSED1 and SOSED2 perform the same task but by different methods. They
simulate the washoff of the detached sediment and the scouring of the soil matrix.
76
-------
Module Section SEDMNT
Method
When simulating the washoff of detached sediment, the transport capacity of
°v8I "M flT°HW ^ est1mated and ""Pared to th'e amount of ? detached
available. The transport capacity is calculated by the equation:
DELT60*KSER*((SURS + SURO)/DELT60)**JSER
STCAP
Wl I C i C •
DELT60 I hr/antervaT rem°Vln9 ******* Sedl'ment 1n tons/acre
cnn5 = Coetf1c1ent for transport of detached sediment
bURS == surface water storage in inches
SURO = surface outflow of water in in. /interval
JSER = exponent for transport of detached sediment
(2)
* *
Interval
Simulated
am°Unt °f detached Sed1ment in
WSSD = DETS*SURO/(SURS + SURO)
h!! 1s f«ff1^ent-to fulfill the transport capacity, then
the following relationship is used:
WSSD = STCAP*SURO/(SURS .+ SURO)
where:
WSSD - washoff of detached sediment in tons/acre per interval
DtTS = detached sediment storage in tons/acre
WSSD is then subtracted from DETS.
washoff is
(3)
(4)
SCRSD = SURO/(SURS + SURO)*DELT60*KGER*((SURS + SURO)/DELT60)**JGER (5)
where:
SCRSD
KGER
JGER
scour of matrix soil in tons/acre per interval
coefficient for scour of the matrix soil
exponent for scour of the matrix soil
total
Subroutine SOSED1 differs from SOSED2 in that it uses the dimensionallv
nonhomogeneous term (SURS + SURO)/DELT60 in the above equations, while SOSED2 uses
the homogeneous term SURO/DELT60. Muauiunb, wniie iubtu^ uses
77
-------
Module Section SEDMNT
4.2(1).4.3 Remove by Surface Flow Using Method 2
(subroutine SOSED2)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is the same as SOSED1. They only differ in method.
Method of Determining Removal
This method of determining sediment removal has not been tested. Unlike subroutine
SOSED1, it makes use of the dimensionally homogeneous term SURO/DELT60 instead of
(SURO+SURS)/DELT60.
The capacity of the overland flow to transport detached sediment is determined in
this subroutine by:
STCAP - DELT60*KSER*(SURO/DELT60)**JSER (6)
When STCAP is more than the amount of detached sediment in storage, the flow washes
off all of the detached sediment storage (DETS). However, when STCAP is less than
the amount of detached sediment in storage, the situation is transport limiting,
so WSSD is equal to STCAP.
Direct detachment and transport of the soil matrix by scouring (e.g., gullying) is
simulated with the equation:
SCRSD - DELT60*KGER*(SURO/DELT60)**JGER (7)
Definitions of the above terms can be found in subroutine SOSED2. The coefficients
and exponents will have different values than in subroutine SOSED1 because they
modify different variables.
4.2(1).4.4 Simulate Re-attachment of Detached Sediment
(subroutine ATTACH)
Purpose
Subroutine ATTACH simulates the re-attachment of detached sediment (DETS) on the
surface (soil compaction).
Method
Attachment to the soil matrix is simulated by merely reducing DETS. Since the soil
matrix is considered to be unlimited, no addition to the soil matrix is necessary
when this occurs. DETS is diminished at the start of each day that follows a day
with no precipitation by multiplying it by (1.0 - AFFIX), where AFFIX is a
parameter. This represents a first order rate of reduction of the detached soil
storage.
78
-------
Module Section PSTEMP
4. 2(1). 5 Estimate Soil Temperatures (Section PSTEMP of Module PERLND)
Purpose
c te,mp*eratures. for Pf surface> uPPer, and lower/groundwater
r £me1t for "se in module Action PWTGAS and the agri-chemical
f> + esiima*es °/ so11 temperatures are particularly important for
first order transformations in the agri-chemical sections.
Method
The two methods used for estimating soil temperatures are based on the regression
equation approach in the ARM Model (Donigian, et al., 1977) and the smooth nS
oflSbsSrflS flows ^ HSP QUALITY {HydrocomP> 1977> to simulate the tempe?aturef
-------
Module Section PSTEMP
where:
IMP s layer temperature at the end of the current interval in
degrees C
SMO » smoothing factor (parameter)
AIRTCS = air temperature at the start of the current interval, Deg C
TDIF - parameter which specifies the difference between the mean air
temperature and the mean temperature of the soil layer, Deg C
IMPS » layer temperature at the start of the current interval in
degrees C
The values of the parameters for any of the layer computations can be linearly
interpolated from monthly input values to obtain daily variations throughout the
year. If this variation is not desired, the user may supply yearly values.
4.2(1).6 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved Gas Concentrations
(Section PWTGAS of Module PERLND)
Purpose
PWTGAS estimates the water temperature and concentrations of dissolved oxygen and
carbon dioxide in surface, interflow, and groundwater outflows from a pervious land
segment.
Method
The temperature of each outflow is considered to be the same as the soil
temperature of the layer from which the flow originates, except that water
temperature can not be less than freezing. Soil temperatures must either be
computed in module section PSTEMP or supplied directly as an input time series.
The temperature of the surface outflow is equal to the surface layer soil
temperature, the temperature of interflow to the upper layer soil temperature, and
the temperature of the active groundwater outflow equals the lower layer and
groundwater layer soil temperature.
The dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the overland flow are
assumed to be at saturation and are calculated as direct functions of water
temperature. PWTGAS uses the following empirical nonlinear equation to relate
dissolved oxygen at saturation to water temperature (Committee on Sanitary
Engineering Research, 1960):
SODOX - (14.652 + SOTMP*(-0.41022 +
SOTMP*(0.007991 - 0.000077774*SOTMP)))*ELEVGC
(1)
80
-------
Module Section PWTGAS
where:
SODOX = concentration of dissolved oxygen in surface outflow in mq/1
SOTMP = surface outflow temperature in degrees C
ELEVGC = correction factor for elevation above sea level
(ELEVGC is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent upon
mean elevation of the segment)
The empirical equation for dissolved carbon dioxide concentration of the overland
flow (Harnard and Davis, 1943) is:
SOC02 = (10**(2385.73/ABSTMP - 14.0184 + 0.0152642*ABSTMP))
*0.000316*ELEVGC*12000.0
(2)
where:
SOC02
ABSTMP
concentration of dissolved carbon dioxide in
surface outflow in mg C/l
absolute temperature of surface outflow in degrees K
The concentrations of dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide in the interflow and the
active groundwater flow cannot be assumed to be at saturation. Values for these
concentrations are provided by the user. He may specify a constant value or 12
monthly values for the concentration of each of the gases in interflow and
groundwater. If monthly values are provided, daily variation in values will
automatically be obtained by linear interpolation between the monthly values
4. 2(1). 7 Simulate Quality Constituents Using Simple Relationships with
Sediment and Water Yield (Section PQUAL of Module PERLND)
Purpose
The PQUAL module section simulates water quality constituents or pollutants in the
outflows from a pervious land segment using simple relationships with water and/or
sediment yield. Any constituent can be simulated by this module section. The user
supplies the name, units and parameter values appropriate to each of the
constituents that he wishes to simulate. However, more detailed methods of
simulating sediment, heat, dissolved oxygen, dissolved carbon dioxide, nitroqen,
phosphorus, soluble tracers, and pesticide removal from a pervious land segment are
available, in other module sections.
Approach
The basic algorithms used to simulate quality constituents are a synthesis of those
?2?7iinu e M°del
-------
Module Section PQUAL.
Figure 4.2(1).7-1 shows schematically the fluxes and storages represented in module
section PQUAL. The occurrence of a water quality constituent in both surface and
subsurface outflow can be simulated. The behavior of a constituent in surface
outflow is considered more complex and dynamic than the behavior in subsurface
flow. A constituent on the surface can be affected greatly by adhesion to the soil
and by temperature, light, wind, and direct human influences. Section PQUAL is
able to represent these processes in a general fashion. It allows quantities in
the surface outflow to be simulated by two methods. One approach is to simulate
the constituent by association with sediment removal. The other approach is to
simulate it using basic accumulation and depletion rates together with depletion
by washoff; that is, constituent outflow from the surface is a function of the
water flow and the constituent in storage. A combination of the two methods may
be used in which the individual outfluxes are added to obtain the total surface
outflow. These approaches will be discussed further in the descriptions of the
corresponding subroutines. Concentrations of quality constituents in the subsurface
flows of interflow and active groundwater are supplied by the user. The
concentration may be linearly interpolated to obtain daily values from input
monthly values.
The user has the useful option of simulating the constituents by any combination
of these surface and subsurface outflow pathways. The outflux from the combination
of the pathways simulated will be the total outflow from the land segment. In
addition, the user is able to select the units to be associated with the fluxes.
These options give the user considerable flexibility. For example, he may wish
simulate coliforms in units of organisms/acre by association with sediment in
surface runoff and using a concentration in the groundwater which var
seasonally. Or he may want to simulate total dissolved salts in pounds per acre
by direct association with overland flow and a constant concentration in interflow
and groundwater flow.
PQUAL allows the user to simulate up to 10 quality constituents at a time. Each
of the 10 constituents may be defined as one or a combination of the following
types: QUALSD, QUALOF, QUALIF, and/or QUALGW. If a constituent is considered to
be associated with sediment, it is called a QUALSD. The corresponding terms for
constituents associated with overland flow, interflow, and groundwater flow are
QUALOF, QUALIF, and QUALGW, respectively. However, no more than seven of any one
of the constituent types (QUALSD, QUALOF, QUALIF, or QUALGW) may be simulated in
one operation. The program uses a set of flag pointers to keep track of these
associations. For example, QSDFP(3) = 0 means that the third constituent is not
associated with sediment, whereas QSDFP(6) = 4 means that the sixth constituent is
the fourth sediment associated constituent (QUALSD). Similar flag pointer arrays
are used to indicate whether or not a quality constituent is a QUALOF, QUALIF, or
QUALGW.
82
-------
Module Section PQUAL
(Removal "\ /" \
by cleaning, ) ( Accumulation 1
decay & wind / \ /
SOQO
> ' [direct
SQO
Storage of
QUAL on
surface for
direct wash-off
by
overland
flow
Storage of
QUAL
associated
with
soil
matrix
Storage of
QUAL
associated
with
interflow
Storage of
QUAL
associated
with
active
groundwater
by QUAL means quality constituent
over-
land
^K/
f^^iWASHQS
of QUAL
Storage of assoc.
QUAL witn
associated leSfrthed
With \*ed-)
detached ^**^^ ^
sediment ^
>.
. ,.. ^, ,, , .-,
AcourN outf^w
of QUAL rt,1}'. l<
assoe QUAL
^ "«gf-
soil *''h
matrix ^S^J
^ "^ SOQS
SCRQS
AOQUAL
OQUAL
total)
outflow
of QUAL
from
surface
W HOUUAL
total
outflow
DQUAL of
„ -^ QUAL
outflow |
of \ J
with *~
inter-
flow J
^^ ^
-*"*• ^
'outflow!
of
QUAL
with
active
ground
SJwater/
"^ ^
Figure 4.2(1).7-1 Flow diagram for PQUAL section of PERLND Application Module
83
-------
Module Section PQUAL
4.2(1).7.1 Remove by Association with Sediment
(subroutine QUALSD)
Purpose
QUALSD simulates the removal of a quality constituent from a pervious land surface
by association with the sediment removal determined in module section SEDMNT.
Method
This approach assumes that the particular quality constituent removed from the land
surface is in proportion to the sediment removal. The relation is specified with
user-input "potency factors." Potency factors indicate the constituent strength
relative to the sediment removed from the surface. Various quality constituents
such as iron, lead, and strongly adsorbed toxicants are actually attached to the
sediment being removed from the land surface. Some other pollutants such as
ammonia, organics, pathogens, and BOD may not be extensively adsorbed, but can be
considered highly correlated to sediment yield.
For each quality constituent associated with sediment, the user supplies separate
potency factors for association with washed off and scoured sediment (WSSD and
SCRSD). Typically, the washoff potency factor would be larger than the scour
potency factor because washed off sediment is usually finer than the scoured
material and thus has a higher adsorption capacity. Organic nitrogen would be a
common example of such a constituent. The user is also able to supply monthly
potency factors for constituents that vary somewhat consistently during the year.
For instance, constituents that are associated with spring and fall fertilization
may require such monthly input values.
Removal of the sediment associated constituent by detached sediment washoff is
simulated by:
WASHQS = WSSD*POTFW
where:
WASHQS « flux of quality constituent associated with
detached sediment washoff in quantity/acre per interval
WSSD » washoff of detached sediment in tons/acre per interval
POTFW - washoff potency factor in quantity/ton
Removal of constituents by scouring of the soil matrix is similar:
SCRQS = SCRSD*POTFS
where:
SCRQS = flux of quality constituent associated with scouring
of the matrix soil in quantity/acre per interval
(1)
(2)
84
-------
Module Section PQUAL
SCRSD = scour of matrix soil in tons/acre per interval
POTFS = scour potency factor in quantity/ton
WASHQS and SCRQS are combined to give the total sediment associated flux of the
constituent from the land segment, SOQS.
The unit "quantity" refers to mass units (pounds or tons in the English system) or
some other quantity, such as number of organisms for coliforms. The unit is user
specified.
4.2(1).7.2 Accumulate and Remove by a Constant Unit Rate and by Overland Flow
(subroutine QUALOF)
Purpose
QUALOF simulates the accumulation of a quality constituent on the pervious land
surface and its removal by a constant unit rate and by overland flow.
Method
This subroutine differs from the others in module section PQUAL in that the storage
of the quality constituent on the land surface is simulated. The constituent can
be accumulated and removed by processes which are independent of storm events such
as cleaning, decay, and wind erosion and deposition, or it can be washed off by
overland flow. The accumulation and removal rates can have monthly values to
account for seasonal fluctuations. A pollution indicator such as fecal coliform
from range land is an example of a constituent with accumulation and removal rates
which may need to vary throughout the year. The concentration of the coliform in
the surface runoff may fluctuate with the seasonal grazing density, and the
weather.
When there is surface outflow and some quality constituent is in storage, washoff
is simulated using the commonly used relationship:
SOQO = SQO*(1.0 - EXP(-SURO*WSFAC))
where:
SOQO = washoff of the quality constituent from the land
surface in quantity/acre per interval
SQO = storage of available quality constituent on the surface
in quantity/acre
SURO = surface outflow of water in in./interval
WSFAC = susceptibility of the quality constituent to washoff
in units of I/in.
EXP = Fortran exponential function
The storage is updated once a day to account for accumulation and removal which
occurs independent of runoff by the equation:
SQO = ACQOP + SQOS*(1.0 - REMQOP)
(4)
85
-------
Module Section PQUAL
where:
ACQOP - accumulation rate of the constituent, quantity/acre per day
SQOS « SQO at the start of the interval
REMQOP « unit removal rate of the stored constituent, per day
The Run Interpreter computes REMQOP and WSFAC for this subroutine according to:
REMQOP - ACQOP/SQOLIM (5)
where:
SQOLIM * asymptotic limit for SQO as time approaches infinity
(quantity/acre), if no washoff occurs
and
WSFAC - 2.30/WSQOP (6)
where:
WSQOP » rate of surface runoff that results in 90 percent washoff in
one hour, in./hr
Since the unit removal rate of the stored constituent (REMQOP) is computed from two
other parameters, it does not have to be supplied by the user.
4.2(1).7.3 Simulate by Association with Interflow Outflow (subroutine QUALIF)
Purpose
QUALIF is designed to permit the user to simulate the occurrence of a constituent
in interflow.
"'• , '''' ''
Method
The user specifies a concentration for each constituent which is a QUALIF. An
option permits him to supply 12 monthly values, to account for seasonal
fluctuations. In this case, the system interpolates a new value each day.
4,2(1).7.4 Simulate by Association with Active Groundwater Outflow
(subroutine QUALGW)
Purpose
"l',i , ' : ,
QUALGW is designed to permit the user to simulate the occurrence of a constituent
in ground water outflow.
Method
The method is identical to that for QUALIF.
86
-------
Introduction to the Agri-Chemical Sections
Introduction to the Agri-chemical Sections
The introduction of agricultural chemicals into streams, lakes, and groundwater
from agricultural land may be detrimental. For example, persistent fat soluble
pesticides, such as DDT, have been known to concentrate in the fatty tissue of
animals causing toxic effects. Nitrogen and phosphorus are essential plant
nutrients which when introduced into certain surface waters will increase
productivity. This may or may not be desirable depending upon management
objectives. Significant productivity results in algal blooms, but some increase
in productivity will increase fish production. Drinking water containing high
nitrate concentrations may cause methomoglobinemia in small children.
Pesticide, nitrogen, and phosphorus compounds are important to agricultural
production, but prediction of their removal from the field is necessary for wise
management of both land and water resources. HSPF can be used to predict such
outflows. The agri-chemical sections of the PERLND module of HSPF simulate in
detail nutrient and pesticide processes, both biological and chemical, and the
movement of any nonreactive tracer in a land segment. These chemicals can also be
simulated in module section PQUAL but in a simplified manner. The dynamic and
continuous processes that affect the storages and outflow of pesticides and of
nutrients from fertilized fields should be simulated in detail to fully analyze
agricultural runoff. If the situation does not require full representation of
these processes, or if data are not available, the PQUAL subroutines could be used.
The basic algorithms in the agri-chemical sections of HSPF were oriqinallv
developed for use on agricultural lands, but can be used on other pervious areas
where pesticides and plant nutrients occur, for example, orchards, nursery land
parks, golf courses, and forests. All pervious land contains nitrogen and
phosphorus in the soil; it is possible to use this module to simulate the behavior
of agricultural chemicals in any such area.
Comparison of HSPF and ARM
The methods used to simulate pesticide processes in the agri-chemical sections were
developed originally for the Pesticide Transport and Runoff (PTR) Model (Crawford
and Donigian, 1973), then expanded to include nutrients in the Agricultural Runoff
Management (ARM) Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976) and tested and modified in ARM
Version II (Donigian, et a!., 1977). In HSPF the ARM Version II algorithms were
recreated with some additional options. (For more detail on the basic methods,
refer to the above reports.)
The differences between HSPF and ARM Model Version II should, however, be
discussed. The biggest difference is the availability of new options to simulate
soil nutrient and pesticide adsorption and desorption. Ammonium and
87
-------
Introduction to the Agri-Chemical Sections
phosphate adsorption/desorption in HSPF can be accomplished by using Freundlich
Isotherms as well as by first order kinetics. Pesticides can be adsorbed and
desorbed by the two Freundlich methods used in the ARM Model or by first order
kinetics. In addition, the pesticide parameter values are now input for each
separate soil layer instead of inputting one parameter set for all the layers.
HSPF also allows the user to simulate more than one pesticide in a run. (The ARM
Model only simulates one per run). In addition to the percolation factors which
can still be used to retard any solute leaching from the upper layer and lower
layer, a multiplication factor has been introduced that can reduce leaching from
the surface layer. Also, in HSPF, nitrogen and phosphorus chemical and biochemical
transformations can each be simulated at different time steps to save computer
time. Plant uptake of ammonium is another new option in HSPF.
Units
The fluxes and storages of chemicals modeled in these module sections are in mass
"per area units. The user must supply his input in appropriate units; kg/ha if he
is using the Metric system, and Ib/ac for the English system. Internally, most of
the code does not differentiate between the unit systems. Fluxes are determined
by either proportionality constants, fractions of chemicals in storage, or unitless
concentrations. First order kinetics makes use of proportionality constants for
determining reaction fluxes. Chemicals are transported based on the fractions of
that in storage. Freundlich adsorption/desorption is based on ppm concentrations.
Module Sections
• , ,»' ••...' : : .1 . . .[.
There are five agri-chemical module sections. They are shown in the structure
chart of PERLND (Figure 4.2(1)-1). Module section MSTLAY manipulates water
storages and fluxes calculated in module section PWATER. This section must be run
before the following sections can be run, since it supplies them with data for
simulating the storage and movement of solutes. Module section PEST simulates
pesticide behavior while NITR and PHOS simulate the plant nutrients of nitrogen and
phosphorus. Simulation of a nonreactive solute (tracer) is accomplished in module
section TRACER.
88
-------
Module Section MSTLAY
4. 2(1). 8 Estimate Moisture Content of Soil Layers and Fractional Fluxes
(Section MSTLAY of Module PERLND)
Purpose
This module section estimates the storages of moisture in the four soil layers with
which the agricultural chemical sections deal (Figure 4. 2(1). 8-1); and the fluxes
of moisture between the storages. MSTLAY is required because the moisture storages
and fluxes computed by module section PWATER can not be directly used to simulate
?nim,arnSP°rt th7U&h the "J1' For examp1e» 1n PWATER' some moisture which
iil^i I?. Lcan reach the ground water in a single time step (Figure 4.2(1) 3-2)
While this phenomenon does not have any serious effect in simulating the hydroloqic
response of a land segment, it does seriously affect the simulation of solute
transport.
Thus, MSTLAY takes the fluxes and storages computed in PWATER and adapts them to
fit the storage/flow path picture in Figure 4.2(1). 8-1. The revised storages, in
inches of water, are also expressed in mass/area units (that is, Ib/acre or kg/ha)
for use in the adsorption/desorpti on calculations. «' *«/"«;
Method
Figure 4.2(1) 8-1 schematically diagrams the moisture storages and fluxes used in
subroutine MSTLAY. Note that the fluxes are represented in terms of both quantity
e.g., IFWI, in inches/interval) and as a fraction of the contributing storage
(e.g., FII, as a fraction of UMST/interval) .
The reader should also refer to Figure 4. 2(1). 3-2 in module section PWATER when
studying this diagram and the following discussion.
For the agri -chemical sections the moisture storages (the variables
4. 2(1). 8-1 ending in MST) are calculated by the general equation:
MST = WSTOR + WFLUX
in Figure
(1)
The
variable WSTOR is the related storage calculated in module section PWATER
t™ nJiV SUnDF°r ex.fpl?> 1n the calculation of the lower layer moisture
storage (LMST), WSTOR is the lower zone storage (LZS). The variable WFLUX
generally corresponds to the flux of moisture through the soil layer. For the
computation of LMST, WFLUX is the sum of water percolating from the lower zone to
the inactive (IGWI) and active groundwater (AGWI) as determined in section PWATER
A Sfe ^tions are dimensionally non-homogeneous, because storages
l t hTS (^^/Ijtarval) a™ added together. Thus, the results given
*Jy b+e.hl9hly dependent on the simulation time step. The ARM Model , from
.equatlon^c°«le> u,sesu a steP of 5 minutes. Extreme caution should be
, I agTUltUral chemical sections (including MSTLAY) are run with any
et.steP' Foif "I0™ details on the calculation of the layer moisture
storages, the reader should consult the pseudo code
89
-------
Module Section MSTLAY
Surface
Layer
SURO
to
V.
o
SK
«J
-4
SMST
surface
layer
storage
— .
"T / sbbwNi'X
0 Upper (percolating
w f .aimr \ moisture^
a * ^
o »
FSP
^
IFWl
moisture
going
1 .
•sur-
face
out-
. now A
F:SO
^™ *""""
IFWO
inter-
UWIST
upper layer
principal
storage
/
[percolating
Vrnoisture/
to
transitory
^storage,
ISIMST
upper layer
transitory
(interflow)
storage
flow
out-
,flow/
FUP
V.
O
o
o-
O)
Lower
Layer
IGW1
olsture deeo
percolating\
to inactive )
iroundwatei/
Ground-
water
Layer
•\
r
LMST
lower
layer
storage
FLOP
FLP
i
coniam;» ine tueninmr lur
the solute fluxes which
are expressed as fraction
of contributing storages
AGWI
tnnigfiiro
/pel
Ss4!I
f , .
AMST
active
ground-
water
storage
colatmgVo
active j . — — —
oundwatjtr I •
^
(AGWOJ
active
ground
water
[fluxes
Figure 4.2(1).8-1
Flow diagram of the transport of moisture and solutes, as
estimated in the MSTLAY section of the PERLND Application
Module
90
-------
Module Section MSTLAY
The upper layer has been subdivided into two storages, principal and transitory.
The transitory (interflow) storage is used to transport chemicals from the upper
layer to interflow outflow. The chemicals in it do not undergo any reactions
However, reactions do occur in the principal storage.
show.n in F19ure 4.2(1).8-1 are the same as those in Figure 4.2(1) 3-2
with the exceptions of SDOWN and UDOWN. SDOWN encompasses all the water that moves
downward from the surface layer storage. It is the combination of the water
infiltrating from the surface detention storage directly to the lower zone (INFIL)
r?™?? nnnuM^6 "iTCzoml {UZI)' and the water flowin9 into interflow storage
(IFWI). UDOWN is all the water percolating through the upper layer. It is INFIL
plus the percolation from the upper zone storage to the lower zone storage (PERC).
Each fractional solute flux is the appropriate moisture flux divided by the
contributing storage. For example, the fraction of chemical in solution that is
SM?!iI!,0,rf?!m™e!!-a"!i IT1 51le surtace 1ayer storage (FSO) is the surface moisture
outflow (SURO) divided by the surface layer moisture storage (SMST).
The above estimates are based on the assumption that the concentration of the
f?nw thronn9h ttrhanS?°rted 1SJ:he Sa'"e as that in Stora9e- They also assume uniform
flow through the layers and continuous mixing of the solutes. However these
assumptions may need to be revised or implemented differently for some of the
transport. Past testing has shown that the above method leads to excessive
ifro IHH H •S°\UKteSAD(£°2121ian,l>, et-al" 1977)' Factors that retard solute leaching
were added in the ARM Model Version II to remedy this problem. For the surface
layer, the percolation factor (SLMPF) affects the solute fraction percolating (FSP)
by the relationship: , y . '
FSP = SLMPF*SDOWN/SMST ,2\
s SDOWN and SMST are defined in Figure 4.2(1).8-1. FSP will typically
and 1.
For the upper or lower layer percolating fraction (FUP, FLOP, or FLP), the
retardation factor only has an influence when the ratio of the respective zonal
storage to the nominal storage times the factor (ZS/(ZSN*LPF)) is less than one.
The relationship under this condition is:
F = (ZS/(ZSN*LPF))*(PFLUX/MST)
(3)
where:
F
ZS
ZSN
LPF
PFLUX
MST
layer solute percolating fraction
zonal moisture storage, either UZS or LZS
zonal nominal moisture storage, either UZSN or LZSN
factor which retards solute leaching for the layer,
either ULPF or LLPF
percolation flux, either UDOWN, IGWI, or A6WI
layer moisture storage, either UMST or LMST
91
-------
Module Section PEST
4.2(1).9 Simulate Pesticide Behavior in Detail
(Section PEST of Module PERLND)
Purpose
Because of the complexity of pesticide behavior on the land, simulation of the
processes frequently requires considerable detail. Pesticide applications vary in
amount and time during the year. Various pesticides adsorb and degrade
differently. Some, like paraquat, attach themselves strongly to the soil thereby
appearing in low concentrations in water but in high concentrations on soil
particles. Others, like atrazine, undergo complex interactions with the soil and
are found in higher concentrations in the runoff water than on the eroded sediment.
Section PEST models pesticide behavior by simulating the processes of degradation
and adsorption as well as transport. The pesticides are simulated in the soil and
runoff in three forms: dissolved, adsorbed, and crystallized. These phases in the
soil affect the forms and amounts in the runoff.
Method
Pesticides are simulated by using the time series generated by other PERLND module
sections to transport and influence the adsorption and degradation processes.
Pesticides move with water flow or by association with the sediment. They also may
be adsorbed to the soil in varying degree as a function of the chemical
characteristics of the toxicant and the exchange capacity of the soil layer.
Pesticide degradation occurs to varying degrees depending upon the susceptibility
of the compound to volatilization and breakdown by light, heat, microorganisms and
chemical processes. The subroutines in module section PEST consider these
transport and reaction processes.
All the subroutines described in this module section except NONSV and DEGRAS are
accessed by other agri-chemical module sections because many of the basic transport
and reaction processes are similar. The subroutines are described here because
they are physically located in this subroutine group. Subroutine AGRGET is first
to be called. This subroutine has no computing function; it obtains any required
time series from the INPAD that is not already available.
Subroutine SDFRAC determines the fraction of the surface layer soil that has
eroded. The amount eroded is the total sediment removed by scour and washoff as
determined in module section SEDMNT. The mass of soil in the surface layer is a
parameter value which does not vary even when material is removed. The chemical
which is associated with the sediment is assumed to be removed from the surface
layer storage in the same proportion that the layer has eroded. Chemical removal
is simulated in subroutine SEDMOV. A sediment associated chemical is one that may
be attached to the eroding soil or one which may move with the soil. With
pesticides the adsorbed form will be attached to the soil particle, while the
crystalline form will move with the soil particle being eroded but will not be
attached to it.
92
-------
Module Section PEST
hfr fr°Pm their respective surface layer storages in proportion to
the fraction of the surface soil layer removed by overland flow.
l,« T°PP.and SUBMOV perform a function similar to SEDMOV except they move
the solutes. Chemicals in solution move to and from the storages according to the
fractions calculated in section MSTLAY. Figure 4.2(1) 9-1 schematlcallv
illustrates the fluxes .and storages used in these subroutines The frictions
letj*r "F1I) °f the Stora9es a™ Tsed to coiJSte ?K
used to compute the solute transport fluxes from the
hi -and c!;e?ical Actions are performed on the pesticides (and other
chemicals) in each layer storage. Chemicals in the upper layer principal storaae
undergo reactions while those in the transitory (^S^)sLKgBSLl^l
ayer \ransit°ry storage is a temporary storage of chemicals on their way to
4. 2(1). 9. 5 Perform Reactions on Pesticides
(subroutine PSTRXN)
Purpose
This code simulates the degradation and adsorption/desorption of pesticides This
subroutine is called for each of the four soil layers and each pesticide
Method of Reacting Pesticides
2?i,U,fer rtS the option of adsorbing/desorbing the pesticide by one of three
methods. The first method is by first order kinetics. This method assumes that
Lhd ^S^dQ ad+sorb! and des°r°s at a rate based on the amount in so 1 so ut?o5
and on the amount on the soil particle. It makes use of a proportionality constant
and is independent of the concentration. The second method is by use of the single
value Freundlich isotherm. This method makes use of a single adsorption/dLorDtion
2K«f?rlldeterBl;1nS the concentration on the soil and9in solution. ThTthS
method is by use of multiple curves based on a varying Freundlich K value. Further
details of these methods can be found in the discussion of the individual
t al! 197°7W)S. ^ ^ ^ *™ ^ r6P°rtS (D°nig1an and
VS P?rfbrmed once a day by subroutine DEGRAS for each of the four
5 Pesticide The amount degraded is determined simply by
a decay rate parameter specified for each soil layer by each of the
three forms (adsorbed, solution, and crystalline) of pesticide in storage The
degraded amounts are then subtracted from their respective storages .This method
of simulating degradation lumps complex processes in a simple parameter
93
-------
Module Section PEST
SQCM=SSCM * FSO
SSCM
dissolve
chemical
surface
storage
*• SSCM * FSP=SPCM
W / persolation X.
Sk. 1 to upper layer >
•** 1 princlpaf j
\ storage y
-1 >
7; USCM
, dissolve
10 chemical
°- upper la\
_o prin. store
USCM * FUP=UPCM
(percolation >.
to lower >
layer J
storage ^X
in
surface
d outflow
in \^J
IICM=USCM * Fll ISCM * FIO=IOCM
transfer chemical
f from in
principal inter-
— — to "IS'C'H' tlow
transitory dissolved ou'"
d \storagey chemical in V^flowy/ ^
.__ transitory
^r (interflow)
J9e storaqe
f .— . — — . — • •
LSCM
t/> dissolved
*- chemical in
-------
4.2(1).9.5.1 Adsorb/Desorb Using First Order Kinetics
(subroutine FIRORD)
Module Section PEST
Purpose
ptnnMv0! th;s,sub/out^e ^ to calculate the adsorption and desorption
reaction fluxes of chemicals using temperature dependent first order kinetics
lv wSSeSr¥? Cha\CUAated evely simulation ^terval when the subroutine is called
by section PEST, but they are determined only at the designated chemical reaction
frequency when called by sections NITR and PHOS. ".emicai reaction
Method
-i0if adso/Ption and desorption reaction fluxes by first order
for soil layer temperatures less than 35 degrees C takes the form:
DES = CMAD*KDS*THKDS**(TMP-35.0)
ADS = CMSU*KAD*THKAD**(TMP-35.0)
(1)
(2)
where:
DES
CMAD
KDS
THKDS
TMP
ADS
CMSU
KAD
THKAD
current desorption flux of chemical in mass/area per interval
storage of adsorbed chemical in mass/area
first order desorption rate parameter, per interval
temperature correction parameter for desorption
soil layer temperature in degrees C
current adsorption flux of chemical in mass/area per interval
storage of chemical in solution in mass/area
first order adsorption rate parameter, per interval
temperature correction parameter for adsorption
r\f1 TLJI/AA HUM. JL.._* *l *I . - ..i * « -. — *
THKDS and THKAD are typically about 1.06
All of the variables except the temperature coefficients may vary with the layer
?nput fe°a ^L^lH^ tTfe S0il.te?P?rJtures *™ "™ series wSichmay^be
input (e.g., using field data) or simulated in module section PSTEMP The
temperature correction of the reaction rate parameter is based on the Arrhen us
?Spat™n' tAt temPeratnu7s of 35 degrees C or above no correction is made
and' Sr^on'occurs ° d69reeS C Or ™™ °r the S011 layer 1s dry' no
The storage of the solution chemical is updated every simulation interval in the
nil*"* su^out?ne' tha* 1s» ^ PSTRXN, NITRXN, or PHORXN, by adding DES Snus ADS
ii n^n^ hl St^a95 °f ,th-e ads°rbed chei"i«l is updated there also by adding ADS
minus DES. An adjustment is made in the calling subroutine, if any of the fluxes
nr±rpHUaSeH % iSt°rage t0,9° n«?at1™- w^n this happens a warning message i I
produced and fluxes are adjusted so that no storage goes negative This usual!v
occurs when large time steps are used in conjunction with large KAD and KDS values
95
-------
Module Section PEST
4.2(1).9.5.2 Adsorb/Desorb Using the Single Value Freundlich Method
(subroutine SV)
Purpose
Subroutine SV calculates the adsorption and desorption and the resulting new
storages of a chemical using the single value Freundlich method.
Method
The Freundlich isotherm methods, unlike first order kinetics, assume instantaneous
equilibrium. That is, no matter how much chemical is added to a particular phase,
equilibrium is assumed to be established between the solution and adsorbed phase
of the chemical. These methods also assume that for any given amount of chemical
in the soil, the equilibrium distribution of the chemical between the soil solution
and on the soil particle can be found from an isotherm. Figure 4.2(1).9-2
illustrates such an isotherm.
Three phases of the chemical are actually possible; crystalline, adsorbed, and
solution. The crystalline form is assumed to occur only when the soil layer is
dry, or when there is more chemical in the layer than the combined capacity to
adsorb and hold in solution. When the soil is dry, all! the chemical is considered
to be crystalline salt. When there is more total chemical in the soil layer than
the soil adsorption sites can contain and more than that saturated in solution,
then the chemical content which exceeds these capacities is considered to be
crystalline salt. Module section PEST considers crystalline phase storage, but in
module sections NITR and PHOS this is not so. Instead, any crystalline phosphate
or ammonium predicted by an isotherm is added to the adsorbed phase storage.
The adsorbed and solution phases of the chemical are determined in this subroutine
by the standard Freundlich equation as plotted by curve 1 in Figure 4.2(1).9-2.
When the amount of chemical is less than the capacity of the soil particle lattice
to permanently bind the chemical (XFIX), then all the material is consider fixed.
All the fixed chemical is contained in the adsorbed phase of the layer storage.
Otherwise, the Freundlich equation for curve 1 is used to determine the
partitioning of the chemical into the adsorbed and solution phases:
X - KF1*C**(1/N1) + XFIX (3)
where:
X - chemical adsorbed on soil, in ppm of soil
KF1 » single value Freundlich K coefficient
C » equilibrium chemical concentration in solution,
in ppm of solution
Nl - single value Freundlich exponent
XFIX - chemical which is permanently fixed, in ppm of soil
The above equation is solved in subroutine ITER by an iteration technique. The
parameters used in the computation can differ for each layer of the soil.
96
-------
Module Section PEST
4,2(1).9.5.3 Adsorb/Desorb Using the Non-single Value Freundlich Method
(subroutine NONSV)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is to calculate the adsorption/desorption of a
chemical by the nonsingle value Freundlich method. The single value Freundlich
method was found to inadequately represent the division of some pesticides between
the soil particle and solution phases, so this method was developed as an option
in the ARM Model (Donigian and Crawford, 1976). This subroutine is only available
for use by the PEST module section.
Method
The approach in this code uses the same algorithms and solution technique as
subroutine SV for determining curve 1 in Figure 4.2(1).9-2. However, curve 1 is
used solely for adsorption. That is, only when the concentration of the adsorbed
chemical is increasing. When desorption occurs a new curve (curve 2) is used:
X - KF2*C**(1/N2) + XFIX (4)
KF2 - (KF1/XDIF)**(N1/N2) * XDIF (5)
Hi, ' j ,!• ;;!'",
where:
KF2 ^ nonsingle value Freundlich coefficient
N2 - nonsingle value Freundlich exponent parameter
XDIF - XJCT - XFIX
XJCT - the adsorbed concentration where curve 1 joins curve 2
(i.e., where desorption started)
as shown in Figure 4.2(1).9-2, in ppm of soil
The other variables are as defined for subroutine SV.
Once curve 2 is used, both desorption and adsorption follow it until the adsorbed
concentration is less than or equal to XFIX or until it reaches XJCT. Then,
adsorption will again take place following curve 1 until desorption reoccurs,
following a newly calculated curve 2. The solution of the Freundlich equations for
curves 1 and 2 utilizes the same iteration technique introduced in subroutine SV
(subroutine ITER).
98
-------
4.2(1).10 Simulate Nitrogen Behavior in Detail
(section NITR of module PERLND)
Module Section NITR
Purpose
Method of Simulating Nitrogen
son
°f
The
4. 2(1). 10.1 Perform Reactions on Nitrogen Forms
(subroutine NITRXN)
Purpose
Method of Nitrogen Transformations
99
-------
Module Section NITR
the temperature corrected reaction fluxes (Figure 4^2(1).10-1)are recomputed
intermittently, but the storages are updated every simulation interval.
The other reactions are a combination of biological and chemical transformations.
They are accomplished by first order kinetics only. The optimum first order
kinetic rate parameter is corrected for soil temperatures below 35 degrees C by the
generalized equation:
KK - K*TH**(TMP-35.0)
(1)
where:
KK
K
TH
TMP
temperature corrected first order transformation rate
in units of per simulation interval
optimum first order reaction rate parameter
temperature coefficient for reaction rate correction
(typically about 1.06)
soil layer temperature in degrees C
When temperatures are greater than 35 degrees C, the rate is considered optimum,
that is, KK is set equal to K. When the temperature of the soil layer is below 4
degrees C or the layer is dry, no biochemical transformations occur.
Identifiers with a leading "K" (e.g., KDNI) are the optimum rates; those for
corrected rates have both a leading and trailing "K (e.g., KDNIK).
The corrected reaction rate parameters are determined every biochemical reaction
interval and multiplied by the respective storages as shown in Figure 4.2(1).10-H
to obtain the reaction fluxes. Plant uptake can vary monthly and can be
distributed between nitrate and ammonium by the parameters N03UTF and NH4UIK
These parameters are intended to designate the fraction of plant uptake from each
species of N; the sum of N03UTF and NH4UTF should be 1.0.
''ipl'lli n I
The first order reaction rate fluxes that are shown in Figure 4.2(1).10-1 are
coupled, that is, added to and subtracted from the storages simultaneously. The
coupling of the fluxes is efficient in use of computer time but has a tendency to
produce unrealistic negative storages when large reaction intervals and large
reaction rates are used jointly. A method has been introduced which will modify
the reaction fluxes so that they do not produce negative storages. A warning
message is issued when this modification occurs.
4.2(1).11 Simulate Phosphorous Behavior in Detail
(Section PHOS of Module PERLND)
Purpose
Module section PHOS simulates the behavior of phosphorus in a pervious land
segment. This involves modeling the transport, plant uptake, adsorption/
desorption, immobilization, and mineralization of the various forms of phosphorus.
Because phosphorus is readily tied to soil and sediment, it is usually scarce in
100
-------
Module Section NITR
Harvesting •
To atmosphere
NO3*KDNIK=DENI
t i
Denitrifi-
cation
PLTN
Plant
Nitrogen
NO3UTF*NO3*KPLNK=UTNI
AMSU*KNIK=NITRF
NO3
Nitrate
(plus
nitrate)
Plant ^
uptake of
nitrate
IMMNI=N03*KIMNIK
/Immobilizatio
of
nitrate
Nitrification
AMSU*KIMAWIK=1MMAM
ORGN
Organic
nitrogen
Mineral-
ization
of
organic
nitrogen
f Plant
uptake
vpf ammonium
AMSU
Ammonium
in
solution
UTAM=AMSU*KPLNK*NH4UTF
DESAWI=AMAD*KDSAMK
or
single value
Freundlich method
(instantaneous)
ORGN*KAMK=AMMIF
AMAD
Ammonium
adsorbed
ADSAM=AMSU*KADAMK
or
single value
Freundlich method
(instantaneous)
Figure 4.Z(1).10-1 Flow diagram for nitrogen reactions
101
-------
Module Section PHOS
streams and lakes. In fact, in many cases it is the limiting nutrient in the
eutrophication process. Because of its scarcity, accurate simulation is
particularly important.
Method of Simulating Phosphorus
The method used to transport and react phosphorus is the same as that used for
nitrogen in module section NITR. The subroutines used to transport phosphorus are
described in module section PEST. Organic phosphorus and adsorbed phosphate are
removed on or with sediment by calling subroutine SEDMOV. Phosphate in solution
is transported in the moving water using subroutines TOPMOV and SUBMOV. Phosphorus
reaction is simulated in the soil by subroutine PHORXN.
In subroutine PHORXN, phosphate is adsorbed and desorbed by either first order
kinetics or by the Freundlich method. The mechanics of these methods are described
in module section PEST. As with the simulation of ammonium adsorption/desorption,
the frequency of this chemical reaction for phosphate can also be specified.
Unlike ammonium, typically phosphate includes a large portion which is not attached
to the soil particle but is combined with cations. This is because phosphate is
much less soluble with the ions found in soils than ammonium.
Other reactions performed by subroutine PHORXN include mineralization,
immobilization, and plant uptake. These are accomplished using temperature
dependent first order kinetics; the same method used for the nitrogen reactions.
The general description of this process is in module section NITR. Figure
4 2(1) 11-1 shows the parameters and equations used to calculate the reaction
fluxes for phosphorus. Reactions are simulated for each of the four soil layers!
using separate parameter sets for each layer. As with nitrogen, the biochemical
phosphate reaction fluxes of mineralization, immobilization, and plant uptake can
be determined at an interval less frequent than the basic simulation interval.
4.2(1).12 Simulate Movement of a Tracer (Section TRACER of Module PERLND)
1 ' • ' '!
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to simulate the movement of any nonreactive tracer
(conservative) in a pervious land segment. Chloride, bromide, and dyes are
commonly used tracers which can be simulated by section TRACER. Also, total
dissolved salts could possibly be modeled by this section. Typically, this code
is applied to chloride to calibrate solute movement through the soil profile. This
involves adjustment of the percolation retardation factors (see section MSTLAY)
until good agreement with observed chloride concentrations has been obtained. Once
these factors have been calibrated, they are used to simulate the transport of
other solutes, such as nitrate.
Method of Simulating Tracer Transport
Tracer simulation uses the agri-chemical solute transport subroutines TOPMOV and
SUBMOV which are described in section PEST. No reactions are modeled.
102
-------
Module Section PHOS
UTP4=P4SU*KPLKP
PLTP
Plant
phosphorus
Plant >
uptake of
phosphorus/
AMSU*KIMAMK=IMMAM
ORGP
Organic
phosphorus
Phos-
phate
mmobill
zation
organic
ihospho
rus
mineral-
ization
P4SU
Phosphate
in
Solution
DESP4=P4AD*KDSPK
or
single value
Freundlich method
(instantaneous)
M1NZOP=ORGP*KMPK
^dsorp
tion
of
phos-
P4AD
Phosphate
adsorbed
ADSP4=P4SU*KADPK
or
single value
Freundlich method
(instantaneous)
Figure 4.2(1).ll-i Mow diagram for phosphorus reactions
103
-------
Module IMPLND
4.2(2) Simulate an Impervious Land Segment (Module IMPLND)
In an impervious land segment, little or no infiltration occurs. However, land
surface processes do occur as illustrated in Figure 4.2(2)-!. Snow may accumu ate
and melt, and water may be stored or may evaporate Various water quality
constituents accumulate and are removed. Water, solids, and various pollutants
flow from the segments by moving laterally to a downslope segment or to a
reach/reservoir.
Module IMPLND simulates these processes. The sections of IMPLND and their
functions are qiven in the structure chart shown in Figure 4.2(2)-2. They are
executed from left; to right. Many of them are similar to the corresponding
sections In ?he PERLND module. In fact, since sections SNOW and ATEMP perform
functions that can be applied to pervious or impervious segments, they are shared
by both modules. IWATER is analogous to PWATER in module PERLND; SOLIDS is
analogous to SEDMNT; IWTGAS is analogous to PWTGAS; and IQUAL is analogous to
POUAL However, the IMPLND sections are simpler since they contain no infiltration
function and consequently no subsurface flows. IPTOT, IBAROT and IPRINT service
the IMPLND module similarly to the corresponding code in PERLND.
4 2(2).3 Simulate the Water Budget for an Impervious Land Segment
(Section IWATER of Module IMPLND)
Purpose
Section IWATER simulates the retention, routing, and evaporation of water from an
impervious land segment.
""••'I1 • 'i 'i „ '•' • ; V" ,',' '•,
Method
Section IWATER is similar to section PWATER of the PERLND module. However, IWATER
is simpler because there is no infiltration and consequently no subsurface
processes. IWATER is composed of the parent subroutine plus three subordinate
Subroutines: RETN, IROUTE, and EVRETN. RETN is analogous to ICEPT, IROUTE[is
analogous to PROUTE, and EVRETN is analogous to EVIChP in module section PWATER.
The time series requirements are the same as for section PWATER.
Fiaure 4.2(2).3-1 schematically represents the fluxes and storages simulated in
module section IWATER. Moisture (SUPY) is supplied by precipitation, or under snow
conditions, it is supplied by the rain not falling on the snowpack plus the water-
yielded by the snowpack. This moisture is available for retention; subroutine RETN
performs the retention functions. Lateral surface inflow (SURLI) may also be
retained if the user so specifies by setting the flag parameter RTLIFG=1.
Otherwise, retention inflow (RETI) equals SUPY.
104
-------
Module IMPLND
Runoff, Solids. Water
Quality Constituents
Figure 4.2(2)-l Impervious land segment processes
105
-------
Module IMPLND
1
IMPLND
Perform
computations
on a segment
ofirnpervious
land
4.2(2
ATEMPl SNOW | IWATER | SOLIDS (
j- — —• -i |— — — ' -i r—— *—] I
(See module
PERLND)
'I
ll
• i
(See module .
PERLND) '
i
'
4.2(1).2
IWTGAS |
Simulate
water budget
for impervious
land segment
Accumulate
and remove
solids
Estimate
water
temperatures
and dissolvec
gas cones.
4.2(2).3
4.2(2).4
4.2(2).5
4.2(2).3^>
4.2(2).4
IQUAL
IPTOT
IBAROT
IPRINT
lulale
lihi
constituents
using simple
relationships
with solids
and/or water
yield
Place point-
valued
output in
INPAD
Place
bar-valued
output in
INPAD
1 4.2(2).6 \4.2(2).7
>l N. 1
4.2(2).7> 4.2
Produce
printed
output
4.2(2).8
S?>
4.2(2). i
4.2(2).9>
k
Figure 4.2(2)-2 Structure chart for IMPLND Module
106
-------
Module IMPLND
SUPY >
precipitation
or
rain+snowpack /
water yield y
SURLI
Lateral
surface
inflow
RETI\
Retention
inflow J
Path depends
on value of
RTLIFG
RETS
Impervious
retention
storage
RETO
Retention
outflow
SURl
Surface
detention
inflow
' Impervious \
, evaporation )
SURS
Surface
detention
storage
SURO
Surface
out-
flow
Figure 4.2(2).3-1 Hydrologic processes
107
-------
Module Section IWATER
Moisture exceeding the retention capacity overflows the storage and is available
for runoff.
The retention capacity, defined by the parameter RETSC, can be used to designate
any retention of moisture which does not reach the overland flow plane. RETSC may
be used to represent roof top catchments, asphalt wetting, urban vegetation,
improper drainage, or any other containment of water that will never flow from the
land segment. The user may supply the retention capacity orr a monthly basis to
account for seasonal variations, or may supply one value designating a fixed
capacity.
Water held in retention storage is removed by evaporation (IMPEV). The amount
evaporated is determined in subroutine EVRETN. Potential evaporation is an input
time series.
it „ . ,. , , „
Retention outflow (RETO) is combined with any lateral inflow when RTLIFG=0
producing the total inflow to the detention storage (SURI). Water remaining in the
detention storage plus any inflow is considered the moisture supply. The moisture
supply is routed from the land surface in subroutine IROUTE.
4 2(2).3.2 Determine How Much of the Moisture Supply Runs Off
(subroutine IROUTE)
Purpose
The purpose of subroutine IROUTE is to determine how much of the moisture supply
runs off the impervious surface in one simulation interval.
Method of Routing
A method similar to that used in module PERLND (Section 4.2(1).3.2.1.3) is employed
to route overland flow.
4. 2(2). 4 Simulate Accumulation and Removal of Solids
(Section SOLIDS of Module IMPLND)
Purpose
Module section SOLIDS simulates the accumulation and removal of solids by runoff
and other means from the impervious land segment. The solids outflow may be used
in section IQUAL to simulate quality constituents associated with particulates.
108
-------
Module Section SOLIDS
Method
4.2(2).4.1 Washoff Solids Using Method 1
(subroutine SOSLD1)
Purpose
Method
STCAP = DELT60*KEIM*((SURS + SURO)/DELT60)**JEIM.
where:
(1)
1n
KEIM = coefficient for transport of solids
ci,™ = surface water storage in inches
SURO = surface outflow of water in in. /interval
JEIM = exponent for transport of solids
When STCAP is greater than the amount of solids in storage, washoff is calculated
SOSLD = SLDS*SURO/(SURS + SURO) (2)
" fulni1 the '"".port "Pacity, then the following
109
-------
Module Section SOLIDS
(Removal
yy cleaning,
wind, etc.
SLSLD
Lateral
input
of
solids
/AbCSDP
Accumulation!
SLDS
Solids
Storage
SOSLD
wash-
off
of
solids
Figure 4.2(2).4-1
Flow diagram of the SOLIDS section of the IMPLND Application
Module
110
-------
SOSLD - STCAP*SURO/(SURS + SURO)
Module Section SOLIDS
(3)
where:
SOSLD = washoff of solids in tons/acre per interval
SLDS = solids storage in tons/acre
SOSLD is then subtracted from SLDS.
Subroutine SOSLD1 differs from SOSLD2 in that it uses the dimensionallv
t 1n the
4.2(2).4.2 Washoff Solids Using Method 2
(subroutine SOSLD2)
Purpose
The purpose of this subroutine is the same as SOSLD1..They only differ in method.
Method of Determining Removal
°tdeterm1njn9 sediment removal has not been tested. Unlike subroutine
'"stead of
STCAP = DELT60*KEIM*(SURO/DELT60)**JEIM
(4)
When STCAP is more than the amount of solids in storage, the flow washes off all
of the solids storage (SLDS). However, when STCAP is less than the amount of
solids in storage, the situation is transport limiting, so SOSLD is equal to STCAP.
4. 2(2). 4. 3 Accumulate and Remove Solids Independently of Runoff
(subroutine ACCUM)
Purpose
runnfov the accumulation and removal of solids independently of
runoff; for example, atmospheric fallout and street cleaning.
Method
111
-------
Module Section SOLIDS
SLDS « ACCSDP + SLDSS*(1.0 - REMSDP) (5)
where: , , ',
ACCSDP - accumulation rate of the solids storage (tons/acre per day)
SLDS - solids in storage at end of day (tons/acre)
SLDSS - solids in storage at start of day (tons/acre)
REMSDP - unit removal rate of solids in storage
(i.e., fraction removed per day)
ACCSDP and REMSDP may be input on a monthly basis to account for seasonal
variations.
Note that, if no runoff occurs, equation 5 will cause the solids storage to
asymptotically approach a limiting value. The limit, found by setting SLDS and
SLDSS to the same value (SLDSL), is:
SLDSL - ACCSDP/REMSDP (6)
4.2(2).5 Estimate Water Temperature and Dissolved Gas Concentrations
(Section IWTGAS of Module IMPLND)
Purpose
IWTGAS estimates the water temperature and concentrations of dissolved oxygen and
carbon dioxide in the outflow from the impervious land segment.
Method
Outflow temperature is estimated by the following regression equation:
SOTMP - AWTF + BWTF*AIRTC "(1)
where:
SOTMP - impervious surface runoff temperature in degrees C
AWTF « Y-intercept
BWTF - slope
AIRTC » air temperature in degrees C
The parameters AWTF and BWTF may be input on a monthly basis. When snowmelt
contributes to the outflow, SOTMP is set equal to 0.5.
The dissolved oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the overland flow are
assumed to be at saturation and are calculated as direct functions of water
temperature. IWTGAS uses the following empirical nonlinear equation to relate
dissolved oxygen at saturation to water temperature (Committee on Sanitary
Engineering Research, I960):
SODOX - (14.652 + SOTMP*(-0.41022 +
SOTMP*(0.007991 - 0.000077774*SOTMP)))*ELEVGC (2)
112
-------
where:
™
SOTMP
ELEVGC
f?owe(Rarnard
Module Section IWTGAS
concentration of dissolved oxygen in surface outflow in rnq/1
surface outflow temperature in degrees C
correction factor for elevation above sea level
(ELEVGC is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent
upon mean elevation of the segment)
n of the overland
(3)
SOC02 = (10**(2385.73/ABSTMP - 14.0184 + 0.0152642*ABSTMP))
*0.000316*ELEVGC*12000.0
where:
SOC02
concentration of dissolved carbon dioxide in
surface outflow in mg C/l
ABSTMP = absolute temperature of surface outflow in degrees K
4. 2(2). 6 Simulate.Washoff of Quality. Constituents Using Simple Relationships
with Solids and Water Yield (Section IQUAL of, Module IMPLND)
Purpose
s*ct™n .simulates water quality constituents or pollutants in the
/nc a" impe«rV1°US land segment using simple relationships with water
• S°J;ds> Any co^tituent can be simulated by this module section. The
8 I™6' !!niH and- Parameter values appropriate to each of the
-------
Module Section IQUAL
> v
(Removal
by cleaning
iecay, wind,
etc.
Accumulation)
SQO
Storage of QUAL
on surface for
direct washoff
by overland flow
SOQO
Direct
washoff
of QUAL
by over-
land
flow
Storage of
QUAL
associated
with
solids
SOQS
washoff
of QUAL
assoc.
with
solids
1
O
SOQUAL
Total
washoff
outflow
of
QUAL
Figure 4.2(2).6-1 Flow diagram for IQUAL section of IMPLND Application Module
114
-------
Module Section IQUAL
IQUAL allows the user to simulate up to 10 quality constituents at a time. If a
constituent is considered to be associated with solids, it is called a QUALSD. The
corresponding term for constituents associated directly with overland flow is
QUALOF. Each of the 10 constituents may be defined as either a QUALSD or a QUALOF
or both. However, no more than seven of any one of the constituent types (QUALSD
or QUALOF) may be simulated in one operation. The program uses a set of flag
pointers to keep track of these associations. For example, QSDFP(3)=0 means that
the third constituent is not associated with solids, whereas QSDFP(6)=4 means that
the sixth constituent is the fourth solids associated constituent (QUALSD).
Similar flag pointer arrays are used to indicate whether or not a quality
constituent is a QUALOF.
4.2(2).6.1 Remove by Association with Solids (subroutine WASHSD)
Purpose
WASHSD simulates the removal of a quality constituent from the impervious land
surface by association with the solids removal determined in section SOLIDS.
Method
This approach assumes that the particular quality constituent removed from the land
surface is in proportion to the solids removal. The relation is specified by
user-input "potency factors." Potency factors indicate the constituent strength
relative to the solids removal from the surface. For each quality constituent
associated with solids, the user supplies separate potency factors. The user is
also able to supply monthly potency factors for constituents that vary somewhat
consistently throughout the year.
Removal of the solids associated constituent by solids washoff is simulated by:
SOQS = SOSLD*POTFW
(1)
where:
SOQS
flux of quality constituent associated with
solids washoff in quantity/acre per interval
SOSLD = washoff of detached solids in tons/acre per interval
POTFW = washoff potency factor in quantity/ton
The unit "quantity" refers to mass units (pounds or tons in the English system) or
some other quantity, such as number of organisms for coliforms. The user specifies
the units of "quantity."
4.2(2).6.2 Accumulate and Remove by a Constant Unit Rate and by Overland Flow
(subroutine WASHOF)
Purpose
WASHOF simulates the accumulation of a quality constituent on the impervious land
surface and its removal by a constant unit rate and by overland flow.
115
-------
'• ; ;{ ; '.i ' , :••• '',! .: r;v >„;!' • • ,~; ;•',;":, I.
Module Section IQUAL
Method
This subroutine differs from subroutine WASHSD in that the storage of the quality
constituent is simulated. The stored constituent can be accumulated and removed
by processes which are independent of storm events, such as cleaning, decay, and
wind deposition, and it is washed off by overland flow. The accumulation and
removal rates can have monthly values to account for seasonal fluctuations.
When there is surface outflow and some quality constituent is in storage then
washoff is simulated using the commonly used relationship:
SOQO - SQO*(1.0 - EXP(-SURO*WSFAC)) (2)
where:
SOQO - washoff of the quality constituent from the land
surface in quantity/acre per interval
SQO - storage of the quality constituent on the surface
in quantity/acre
SURO » surface outflow of water in in./interval
WSFAC - susceptibility of the quality constituent to washoff
in units of I/inch
EXP - Fortran exponential function
The storage is updated once a day to account for accumulation and removal which
occurs independent of runoff by the equation:
SQO - ACQOP + SQOS*(1.0 - REMQOP) (3)
where:
ACQOP - accumulation rate of the constituent, quantity/acre per day
SQOS - SQO at the start of the interval
REMQOP « unit removal rate of the stored constituent, per day
The Run Interpreter computes REMQOP and WSFAC for this subroutine according to:
REMQOP - ACQOP/SQOLIM (4)
where:
SQOLIM - asymptotic limit for SQO as time approaches
infinity, (quantity/acre), if no washoff occurs
and
WSFAC - 2.30/WSQOP (5)
where:
WSQOP - rate of surface runoff which results in a 90 percent
washoff in one hour, in./hr
Since the unit removal rate (REMQOP) is computed from two other parameters, it is
not supplied directly by the user.
116
-------
Module RCHRES
4.2(3) Simulate a Free-flowing Reach or Mixed Reservoir
(Module RCHRES)
Tim module simulates the processes which occur in a single reach of open or
closed channel or a completely mixed lake. For convenience such a processing
unit is referred to as a RCHRES throughout this documentation. In keeping with
the assumption of complete mixing, the RCHRES consists of a single zone situated
between two nodes, which are the extremities of the RCHRES. situated
Flow through a RCHRES is assumed to be unidirectional. The inflow and outflow of
mater als through a RCHRES are illustrated in Figure 4.2(3)-l. Water and other
constituents which arrive from other RCHRES's and local sources enter the RCHRES
through a sing e gate (INFLO). Outflows may leave the RCHRES through one of
several gates (OFLO). A RCHRES can have up to five OFLO gates. Precipitation
S°FSab;?ndnanndt0ther nUXeVlS° influence the Processe* Wh1ch occSrP n t e '
RCHRES but do not pass through the gates.
The ten major subdivisions of the RCHRES module and their functions are shown in
V(3);£' RuPTOT' RB?ROT' and RPRINT Perfo™ the Borage and pHntoSt of
the °thf ™dul? sections of RCHRES (HYDR through RQUAL). Within a
lSim!/lat1?n.of physical Presses (longitudinal advection,
release) is always performed before simulation of biochemical
sPecif1es which module sections are active. If any "aualitv" sections
(CONS through RQUAL) are active, section ADCALC must also be active] it compSSes
certain quantities needed to simulate advection of the quality constituents'
Besides fulfilling this requirement, the user must ensure that all the time
series required by the active sections are available, either as supplied TSput
time series or as data computed by another module section. For example, if
RQUAL is active, the water temperature must be supplied, either as an input time
series or by activating section HTRCH which will compute it.
117
-------
Module RCHRES
Gate OFLO 1
OVOL Water
i Point discharges
Gate INFLO
Storage within the
RCHRES
water-VOL
conservative-VOL*CON
etc.
OCON conservative
etc.
Gate OFLO 2
I Tributary Inflows
Gate ROFLO
collects flows
through all
OFLO gates
Figure 4.2(3)-l Flow of materials through a RCHRES
118
-------
Module RCHRES
RCHRES HYDR ADCALC 1
Perform Simulate Prepare to
computations hydraulic simulate
for a reach or behavior advection of
mixed entrained
reservoir constituents
J 4.2(3) 4.2(3).1 4.2(3).2
SINK 45/S)9\
quantity of
material
settling
out of control
volume
4.2(3).01
GQUAL RQUAL |
Simulate Simulate
behavior of behavior of
a generalized constituents
quality involved in
constituent biochemical
tranformations
4.2(3).6 l4.2(3).7
|4.2(3).6\ 4.2(3) 7\
I / f
CONS HTRCH
Simulate Simulate
behavior of heat
conservative exchange
constituents and water
temperature
4.2(3).3 4.2(3)
Simul
advec
const
totally
traine
water
ate 4.2(3).4\
:lion of
tuent
en-
d in
SEDTRN |
Simulate
behavior of
inorganic
sediment
4 4.2(3).5
4.2(3).5^>
4.2(3).3.1
RPTOT RBAROT
Put current Put current
values of values of
point valued bar-valued
time series in time series in
INPAD INPAD
4.2(3).8 4.2(3)
P^> 4.2(3).9>
RPRINTl
Produce
printed
output
9 4.2(3).10
4.2(3).10>
Figure 4. 2 (3) -2 Structure chart for RCHRES Module
119
-------
Module RCHRES
4.2(3).01 Simulate Sinking of Suspended Material
(subroutine SINK)
Purpose
SINK calculates the quantity of material settling out of a RCHRES and determines
the resultant change in concentration of the material within the RCHRES.
Method
The portion of material settling out of a RCHRES during an interval is calculat-
ed by the equation:
SNKOUT - CONC*(KSET/AVDEPE) (1)
where:
SNKOUT - fraction of material which settles out (reduction of
concentration/interval)
CONC » concentration of material before deposition
KSET - sinking rate in ft/interval (dependent upon RCHRES
characteristics and type of material)
AVDEPE s average depth of water expressed in feet
In any interval in which KSET is greater than AVDEPE, all the material in the
RCHRES sinks out of the water.
The mass of material sinking out of the RCHRES is calculated as:
SNKMAT = SNKOUT*VOL (2)
where:
SNKMAT - mass of material that settles out during the interval
expressed as mass.ft3/l.interval or mass.m3/l.interval
VOL - volume of water in RCHRES in ft3 or m3
120
-------
Module Section HYDR
4.2(3).1. Simulate Hydraulic Behavior (Section HYDR of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to simulate the hydraulic processes occurrina in a
reach or a mixed reservoir fRfHRF^ TKQ fin^ •! H> «<-«;>«:> occurring in a
a HI,ABU reservoir (KLHKtbj. The final goal of the process may be to
nr behavior, or analyze constituents dissolved in the
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storage
state varlable (stored
? SVrfac and ^bsurface sources arrives
RCHRK hazero
system assumes the
Wh1shcllfSSo{!lfr5?HRE?i,dur1!!gia simulatio" time interval,
, is called OVOL(N). The total outflow is ROVOL
The basic equation is that of continuity:
VOL - VOLS = IVOL + PRSUPY - VOLEV - ROVOL (1)
where:
v volume at the end of the interval
VOLS = volume at the start of the interval
This can be written as:
VOL = VOLT - ROVOL
where:
VOLT = IVOL + PRSUPY - VOLEV + VOLS
(2)
to est1mate ROVOL
121
-------
Module Section HYDR
(PRSU
precipitation
on RCHRES
surface _
IVOL
Inflow
> i
OVOL(I)
out-
flow
thru1
exitl
VOLEV
Evaporation
VOL
Volume of water
in RCHRES
ROVOL
Total
out-
flow
N
(NEXITS)
out-
flow
thru'
exit
VNEXITS/
NEXITS
Figure 4.2(3).1-1 Flow diagram for the HYDR Section of the RCHRES Application
Module
122
-------
Module Section HYDR
Calculation of Outflows and VOL
'*
Of
ROVOL = (KS*ROS + COKS*ROD)*DELTS
(3)
weighting factor (0 <= KS <= 0.99)
1.0 - KS (complement of KS)
total rate of outflow from the RCHRES at the start of the interval
total rate of demanded outflow for the end of the interval
simulation interval in seconds
where:
KS
COKS
ROS
ROD
. DELTS
ItatJS'+the mean rate of outflow is assumed to be a weighted mean of the rates
at the start and end of the interval. The weighting factor KS is supplied
either by the user or by default. Care should be exercised in selecting a value
because as KS increases from 0.0 to 1.0, there is an increasing Hsk that the
computation of outflow rates will become unstable. Theoretically a value of
Hpf3M-ite!ai,,! mJn ac[;urate results, provided oscillations do not occur. The
default value of 0.0 has zero risk, but gives less accurate results Users are
advised to be very careful if a nonzero value is used; it seems that onHs
never justified in selecting a value greater than O.s!
Combination of Equations 2 and 3 yields:
(4)
VOL = VOLT - (KS*ROS + COKS*ROD)*DELTS
There are two unknown values in this equation: VOL and ROD Thus a second
relation is required to solve the problem. To provide this function it ?s
assumed that outflow demands for the individual exits are of the form]
00(1) = fl(VOL,t)
OD{2) = f2(VOL,t)
OD(NEXITS) = fNEXITS(VOL,t) (5)
outflow demand for each exit is a function of volume or time or a
. This topic is discussed in greater detail in Section 4.2(3).1.1.2.
It follows that the total outflow demand is of similar form:
ROD = funct(VOL,t)
At a given time in the simulation, t is known and the above functions reduce to:
OD(N) = fN(VOL)
ROD = funct(VOL)
Equation 8 provides the second relation required to solve the problem.
123
(7)
(8)
-------
iflil"-1
Module Section HYDR
Equations 4, 7, and 8 are shown in Figure 4.2(3).1-2. The point of intersection
of Equations 4 and 8 gives the values RO, VOL, and hence 0(1), 0(2), etc.
where:
RO
0(N)
total rate of outflow from the RCHRES at the end of the interval
rate of outflow through exit N at the end of the interval
In HSPF, it is assumed that each outflow demand can be represented by one or
both of the following types of components:
Component =* function(VOL). This is most useful in simulating RCHRES's
where there is no control over the flow or where gate settings are only
a function of water level.
Component - function(time). This is most useful for handling demands
for municipal, industrial, or agricultural use. The function may be
cyclic (for example, annual cycle) or general (for example, annual cycle
superimposed on an increasing trend). The user must supply the component
in the form of an input time series.
If a user indicates that both types of component are present in an outflow
demand, then he must also specify how they are to be combined to get the demand.
HSPF allows the following options:
OD(N) - Min [fN(VOL),gN(t)].
following:
This is useful in cases such as the
Suppose a water user has an optimum demand which may be expressed
as a function of time (g(t)); however, his pump has a limited
capacity to deliver water. This capacity is a. function of the
water level in the RCHRES from which the pump is drawing the water.
Thus, it can be expressed as a function of the volume in the RCHRES
(f(VOL)). Then, his actual demand for water will be the minimum of
the two functions. Note that g(t) is an input time series (OUTDGT).
See the Time Series Catalog (Section 4.7).
2. OD(N) - Max [fN(VOL),gN(t)]
3. OD(N) - fN(VOL) + gN(t)
If one or more outflow demands have an f(VOL) component (Fig.4.2(3).l-2a),
subroutine ROUTE is called to solve the routing equations. In this case, the
evaluation of the outflow demands and the solution of the equations can be quite
complicated.
If there is no f(VOL) component in any demand, the process is much simpler
(Figure 4.2(3).l-2b). Subroutine NOROUT is called in this case.
124
-------
Module Section HYDR
Outflow and Outflow Demand
(A)
Outflow and Outflow Demand
Fl9Ure 4-2(3).l-2 Graphical representation of the equations used to compute outflow
rates and volume
125
-------
Module Section HYDR
Inflow
Lined
Channel
Outflow
Col
•**.
3
t£
1
2
3
4
1
la.
a
a
0
1.5
10
50
2
ra
Cl
0
3
CO
0
1
15
3
(U
|
>
0
8
80
4
^_»
o
u.
0
12
12
100250012
5
.*•*.
1,
CM
U.
0
6
18
36
6
•— •»
I
u.
0
10
10
20
7
*•»
o
<*
u.
0
0
0
20
RCHTAB
B) Function table used to specify geometry
and hydraulic properties of a RCHRES
A) Typical reach and mixed reservoir
s^T^
Precipitation
Irrigation .
release iX Power release
Figure 4.2(3).1-3 Typical RCHRES configurations and the method used to represent
geometric and hydraulic properties
126
-------
Module Section HYDR
Representing the Geometry and Hydraulic Properties of a RCHRES
that ?hperrn^arTti0hS ™9*rd™g the shape of a RCHRES. It does not require
that the cross section be trapezoidal or even that the shape be prismoidal This
is one reason why both free flowing reaches and reservoirs can bS handled by the
same application module. Both of the shapes shown in Figure 4 2(3) l-3a are
acceptable. However, HSPF does assume that: *.^M Ja are
1.
2.
Xri!riiwt/1Xed/elat1on between dePth volunie> and volume
aependent functions (fN(VOL)). Each row contains values appropriate to a
r S^fh618^1011'* The Sy$tem °bta1ns Intermediate values by
> ?^' 5he number of rows 1n RCHTAB depends on the size of the
ser's ConJroia"?nnnthe/deS 1^^°^°^ The table ^ Cither included in the
User s Control Input (in the function tables (FTABLES) block) or it may be
stored in a Watershed Data Management (WDM) file. A subsidiary stand alone
program can be used to generate this table for RCHRES's w th sliple SroSe?t1es
(for prismoidal channels with uniform flow, use Manning's equation). P
Auxiliary Variables
«»put.
nrn1' P!f» 5TAGf' SAREA' AVDEP> TWID> and HRAD are computed
where: DEP is the depth at the deepest point; STAGE is the water
RCHRF^ A^RFP -tedhPOint; SAR5A is the surface area of water in the
RCHRES; AVDEP is -the average depth (volume/surface area); TWID is
the top width (surface area/length); HRAD is the hydraulic radius.
If AUX2FG-1, AVSECT and AVVEL are computed where: AVSECT is the
(V°1Ume/length) ; AVVEL 1s the ^^ velocity
3.
If AUX3FG=1, USTAR and TAU are computed where: USTAR is the bed
shear velocity; TAU is the bed shear stress.
Note that these are point-valued time series; that is, they apply at the
boundaries (start or end) of simulation time intervals. PP Y
127
-------
Module Section HYDR
The user specifies whether AUX1FG, AUX2FG, and AUX3FG are ON or OFF. If he is
simulating certain constituents, one or more of these flags might be required to
be ON. For example, simulation of oxygen (subroutine group OXRX) requires that
both AUX1FG and AUX2FG be ON. AUX3FG must be ON if inorganic sediment is
simulated (subroutine group SEDTRN).
4.2(3).1.1 Calculate Outflows Using Hydraulic Routing (subroutine ROUTE)
Purpose
ROUTE computes the rates and volumes of outflow from a RCHRES and the new volume
in cases where at least one outflow demand has an f(VOL) component.
Method
" , • ' „ ' ':' . i." •' • •' i.'l" ,,' ,' i,
The problem is to solve simultaneously Equations 4 and 8. The cases which arise
are shown graphically on Figure 4.2(3).1-4. Eqns. 7 and 8 are represented by a
series of straight line segments. The breakpoints in the lines correspond to a
row of entries in RCHTAB. A segment of Eqn 8 can be represented by the equation:
(VOL - V1)/(ROD - ROD1) = (V2 - V1)/(ROD2 - ROD1) (9)
where VI,V2 are volumes specified in adjacent rows of RCHTAB, for the lower and
upper extremities of the straight-line segment, respectively. ROD1,ROD2 are the
corresponding total outflow demands.
The first step is to find the intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis:
VOLINT - VOLT - KS*ROS*DELTS (10)
If VOLINT is less than zero, the equations cannot be solved (case 3). Equation
4 will give a negative value for VOL, even if ROD is zero. Physically, this
means that we started the interval with too little water to satisfy the project-
ed outflow demand, even if the outflow rate at the end of the interval is zero.
Accordingly, the code sets:
VOL - 0.0
RO = 0.0
0(*) - 0.0
ROVOL = VOLT
If VOLINT is greater than or equal to zero, the outflow rate at the end of the
interval will be nonzero (case 1 or 2). To determine the case:
1. The intercept of Equation 4 on the Volume axis is found;
OINT - VOLINT/(DELTS*COKS) (11)
2. The maximum outflow demand for which the volume is still zero
(RODZ) is found.
128
-------
Module Section HYDR
(O.VOLINT)
(O.V2)
Q)
(ROD2,V2)
Eq. 8,9
(OINT,0) (RODZ.O)
(Q.VOLINT)
Outflows and Outflow Demands
( "»-) are coordinates of points
(?) is row no. in RCHTAB which contains data for this level
Figure ,.^.1-4 Graphical representation of the work performed by subroutine'
129
-------
Module Section HYDR
If OINT is greater than RODZ, Equations 4 and 8 can be solved (case 1). The
solution involves searching for the segment of Equation 8 which contains the
point of intersection of the graphs, and finding the coordinates of the point
(RO,VOL). This is done by subroutine SOLVE.
If OINT is less than or equal to RODZ, Equations 4 and 8 cannot be solved (case
2). Physically this means that the RCHRES will instantaneously go dry at the
end of the interval with total outflow rate at that time equal to OINT. Accord-
ingly, the code assigns a zero value to the RCHRES vo ume, and total outflow is
equal to the intercept of Equation 4 on the volume axis in Figure 4.2(3).l-4. As
many of the individual demands (0(*)) as possible are satisfied in full by the
available water. The remaining water is used to partially satisfy the demand of
next highest priority, and any others are not satisfied at all.
4 2(3) 1 1.2 Find the Outflow Demands which Correspond to a Specified
Row in RCHTAB
(subroutine DEMAND)
Purpose
DEMAND finds the individual and total outflow demands which apply at the end of
the present interval for a specified level (row) in RCHTAB.
General Method
The approach is to determine the outflow demand for each active exit and
accumulate them to find the total demand.
Evaluating the Demand for Exit N
The outflow demand for an individual exit consists of one or both of two
components. Their presence or absence is indicated by two flags:
Component
fN(VOL)
gN(t)
Flag
ODFVFG(N)
ODGTFG(N)
Finding the fN(VOL) Component
If ODFVFG(N) is zero, there is no fN(VOL) component.
If ODFVFG(N) is greater than zero, there is a fN(VOL) component. The value of
the flag is the column number in RCHTAB containing the value to be used to find
the component:
130
-------
Module Section HYDR
col = ODFVFG(N)
ODFV = fN(VOL) = (column value)*CONVF
ISSS
the
(12)
be
If ODFVFG(N) is less than zero, there is an fN(VOL) component but the function
H?rl% im?hVarZinf'* In ?MS Case the ^termination of the component is "ess
S2 irh r??8-^ ODFVFGW> *** J> flives the element number of a
which contains a user supplied time series The values in thfc
iCat? WhlGh Pa1r of eolura^ in RCHTAB are used to interpo Ste
For example, if COLIND(I) = 4.6 for a given time step then the value
is interpolated between those in columns 4 and 5?
ODFV = fN(VOL) = [0.6*(column5 value) + 0,4*(column4 value)]*CONVF
(13)
ExI^RCES^BlocI
o-
are speci
Demand specification is useful where a set of rule curves
for releases from a reservoir, and it is necessary to
as tim Sp?ogr III?* n the
Finding the gN(t) Component
gN(t) component. If ODGTFG(N) •
The value of this flag is the
the required time series:
FG2
ODGT
ODGTFG(N)
gN(t) = OUTDGT(FG2)
Combining the fN(VOL) and gN(t) Components
(14)
^
1. OD(N) = Min [fN(VOL),gN(t)l
2. OD(N) = Max [fN(VOL),gN(t)l
3. OD(N) = fN(VOL) + gN(t)
(15)
131
-------
Module Section HYDR
4.2(3).1.1.3 Solve Routing Equations used in Case 1.
(subroutine SOLVE)
Purpose
SOLVE finds the point where Equations 4 and 8 intersect (case 1 in Figure
4.2(3).1-4).
General Approach
The general idea is to select a segment of Equation 8 and determine the point of
intersection with Equation 4. If this point lies outside the selected segment,
the code will select the adjacent segment (in the direction in which the point
of intersection lies) and repeat the process. This continues until the point
lies within the segment under consideration. To minimize searching, the segment
in which the point of intersection was last located is used to start the
process.
Solving the Simultaneous Linear Equations
Equations 4 and 9 can be written as:
A1*VOL+ B1*ROD = Cl
A2*VOL+ B2*ROD = C2
These equations can be solved by evaluating the determinants:
Al Bl
A2 B2
DETV =
Cl Bl
C2 B2
DETO =
Al Cl
A2 C2
DET
In the code of this subroutine:
FACTA1 - Al = 1.0/(COKS*DELTS)
FACTA2 - A2 = ROD1 - ROD2
FACTB1 - Bl - 1.0
FACTB2 » B2 = V2 - VI
FACTC1 - Cl = OINT
FACTC2 - C2 - (V2*ROD1) - (V1*ROD2)
By substituting Equations 19 through 24 in Equation 18 the determinants are
evaluated as:
DET - FACTA1*FACTB2 - FACTA2
DETV - OINT*FACTB2 - FACTC2
DETO - FACTA1*FACTC2 - FACTA2*OINT
The coordinates of the point of intersection are:
VOL
RO
DETV/DET
DETO/DET
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)|
132
-------
Module Section HYDR
4.2(3).1.2
Purpose
NOROUT is used to compute the rates and volumes o1
new volume in cases where no outflow demand has an T
where all outflow demands are functions of time only
Method
FG
OD(N)
ROD
ODGTFG(N)
OUTDGT(FG)
OD(1) + ... OD(NEXITS)
(30)
(31)
RO = ROD
0(*) = OD(*)
And from Equations 4 and 10,
VOL = VOLINT - COKS*RO*DELTS
(32)
(33)
133
-------
Module Section HYDR
-^
(O.VOLINT)
0)
1
§
-^i
(O.VOLINT)
— <
(O.VOLINT)
( ""»
c
jDDCi^ 4 OD(2)
^ v*e\r\ ,
^
• OD(3)
1 ^
I
^~~~^~~~~-~~^,^?-4
0(1) 0(2) ^ ^0(3) -~>.
<- >|4
^~^^-%l
.OH),' 0(2)
^1^ "
^2!?>
+F — ?~
V.y'
Eq. 8
^
(RO,VOL)
(T)
(A\
(OINT,O)^" ^
k^Sgse^
Outflows and Outflow Demands
- ) are coordinates of points
2} is row no. in RCHTAB which contains data for this level
Figure 4 2(3). 1-5 Graphical representation of the work performed by subroutine
NOROUT
134
-------
Module Section HYDR
4.2(3).1.3 Compute Values of Auxiliary State Variables (subroutine AUXIL)
Purpose
Method of Computing Depth
integral of surface area with respect to depth.
Most RCHRES's are long and relatively narrow (Figure 4
interpolation, it is assumed that surface area varies 1
between neighboring levels (rows) in RCHTAB:
SAREA = SA1 + (SA2 - SA1)*RDEP
i K\ r £
with deSth
with depth
(34)
to vS?ume:t1n9
6qUati°n With respect to dePth and Bating the result
(A*RDEP**2) + (B*RDEP) + C = 0.0
where:
A =
B .
C =
(35)
SA2 - SA1
2.0*SA1
-(VOL - VOL1)/(VOL2 - VOL1)*(B + A)
is used
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Calculation starts with an estimate of RDEP: RDEP1 =
iWii.tuSti!
A new value RDEP2 - RDEP1 - FRDEP/DFRDEP is calculated
is Sail arS ^ WUh RDEP1 = RDEP2 unt11 the cha"9e
135
-------
Module Section HYDR
Figure 4.2(3).1-6 Illustration of quantities involved in calculation of depth
136
-------
Module Section HYDR
the depth is found using:
DEP - DEP1 + RDEP2*(DEP2 - DEP1)
Computation of Other State Variables
STAGE is the name for any quantity which differs from DEP by a constant:
STAGE = DEP + STCOR
where:
STCOR = the difference, supplied by the user
Surface area is computed using a formula based on Equation 34:
SAREA = SA1 + A*RDEP2
Average depth is computed as:
AVDEP = VOL/SAREA
The mean top width is found using:
TWID = SAREA/LEN
where:
LEN = length of the RCHRES, supplied by the user
°f
(36)
(37)
HRAD = (AVDEP*TWID)/(2.*AVDEP.+ TWID)
(38)
(39)
(40)
"ter" depth (AVDEP)
(41)
137
-------
Module Section HYDR
4.2(3).1.4 Calculate Bed Shear Stress and Shear Velocity
(subroutine SHEAR)
111 '''',,' f
Purpose
SHEAR is used to compute the bed shear velocity and shear stress, based on the
mean particle size of bed sediment and the hydraulic properties of the RCHRES
(i.e., average water depth, average velocity, hydraulic radius, and slope).
The method of calculating shear velocity and shear stress depends on whether the
RCHRES is a lake or a river. If the RCHRES is a lake (LKFG=1), shear velocity
is computed using formula 8.49 from "Hydraulics of Sediment Transport , by W. H.
Graf:
USTAR - AVVEL/(17.66 + (ALOG10 (AVDEP/(96.5*DB50)))*2.3/AKAPPA) (42)
where:
USTAR - shear velocity in ft/s or m/s
AVVEL - average flow velocity in ft/s or m/s
AVDEP ~ average water depth in ft or m
DB50 = median diameter of bed material in ft or m
AKAPPA - Karman constant (AKAPPA = .4)
The shear stress (TAU) on a lake bed is calculated as:
TAU = GAM*(USTAR**2)/GRAV (43
*
TAU - bed shear stress expressed in Ib/ft2 or kg/m2
GAM - unit weight, or density, of water (62.4 Ib/ft3 or 1000 kg/m3)
GRAV - acceleration due to gravity (32.2 ft/sec2 or 9.81 m/sec2)
i1 ' • . • , i
If the RCHRES being simulated is a stream or river, both shear velocity and
shear stress are determined as functions of the slope and hydraulic radius of
the reach:
USTAR - SQRT(GRAV*SLOPE*HRAD) (44)
where:
SLOPE - slope of the RCHRES (no units)
HRAD » hydraulic radius in ft or m
and
TAU - SLOPE*GAM*HRAD (45)
where:
TAU « stream bed shear stress in Ib/ft2 or kg/m2
138
-------
Module Section ADCALC
4. 2(3). 2 Prepare to Simulate Advection of Fully Entrained Constituents
(Section ADCALC of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
ADCALC calculates values for variables which are necessary to simulate longitu-
dinal advection of dissolved or entrained constituents. These van1 ab'es a?e all
V°1Ume and °Utfl°W ValU6S calculated in the Mraulfcs
Approach
The outflow of an entrained constituent is a weighted mean of two quantities-
SfllM" eSH-Ta b%Sel°n c°nditions at the start of the time step, the other
and ™Sl S±i«StaVKi8nd °f J-e ?tep' The wei9hting Actors are called JS
MpnS Li T ??i Si JS) respectively. The values of the weighting coeffi-
cients depend on (1) the relative volume of stored water in the RCHRES compared
vPl^t!;01""16 l6aVing in 3 S?'ngle time steP and (2) the uniformity of the P
velocity across a cross section of the RCHRES. In order to represent these
defined: RAT and CRRAT- RAT ^ thePratio of RCHRES
VOlUBB
(1)
RAT = VOLS/(ROS*DELTS)
where:
VOLS
ROS
DELTS
volume of water at the start of interval in ft3 or m3
outflow rate at start of interval in ft3/s or m3/s
number of seconds in interval
CRRAT is defined as the ratio of maximum velocity to mean velocity
cross section under typical flow conditions. CRRAT must always
Determination of JS and COJS
m!tf?LVa!Ue °f RAT ^.9re?ter than that of CRRAT, it is assumed that all
thlISfpSSf 3 g*Vtnh time 1nt!rvai was contained in the RCHRES at the start of
th! 'n!erV?1} S? the+mean rate of outflow of material is wholly dependent upon
the rate of outflow at the start of the interval (JS = 1.0) If the value of
enlred^fi SSr^ n isHassumed that Pa^ ^ the water in the outl w°
entered the RCHRES as inflow during the same interval; in this case the
concentration of inflowing material will affect the outflow concentration in the
CRRAT1 "anTlh-f-! f ?11J 5^ |-Va1ue less than l'Q' ^ relation p"of RAT?
CRRAT, and JS is illustrated in Figure 4.2(3).2-1. COJS is (1 0 - JS)
139
-------
Module Section ADCALC
Another way to interpret the relationship of these variables is that no
inflowing material is present in the outflow in the same interval if the outflow
volume is less than (VOLS/CRRAT).
I
JS
1.0
0.0
CRRAT
RAT
Figure 4.2(3).2-1 Determination of weighting factors for advection
calculations
Calculation of Components of Outflow Volume
Components of outflow volume based on conditions at the start of the interval
(SROVOL) and the end of the interval (EROVOL) are calculated as:
SROVOL - JS*ROS*DELTS
EROVOL - COJS*RO*DELTS
(2)
where:
SROVOL
EROVOL
ROS
RO
DELTS
outflow volume component based on start of interval,
in ft3/interval or mS/interval
outflow volume component based on end of interval,
in ft3/interval or m3/interval
outflow rate at start of interval, in ft3/s or m3/s
outflow rate at end of interval, in ft3/s or m3/s
number of seconds in interval
Likewise, if there is more than one exit gate for the RCHRES, the corresponding
outflow components for each unit, based on conditions at the start and end of
each interval, are calculated as:
SOVOL(N)
EOVOL(N)
OS*OS(N)*DELTS
COJS*0(N)*DELTS
(3)
140
-------
Module Section ADCALC
where:
SOVOL(N) =
rm/ni IM
EOVOL(N) =
m3/s
m3/s
_C/M.
°(N)
DELTS
outflow volume component based on start of interval for exit
9aJ?1N' in,f "/interval or m3/interval
outflow volume component based on end of interval for exit gate
ir» ft3/interval or m3/interval
°Utfl°W rate 3t Start °f 1nterval f°r exit gate N, in ft3/s or
°Utfl°W rate at end °f 1nterval for exit gate N, in ft3/s or
number of seconds in interval
4. 2(3). 3 Simulate Conservative Constituents
(Section CONS of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
total dissolved solids
chlorides
pesticides and herbicides which decay very slowly
°f
material which a,e
ICON
Inflow
to
RCHRES
V /
F-i /-tllv./-> A O/O\ O 1
VOL CON
Storage
ICON(N)
Outflow
from
RCHRES
through
. exit .
ROCON
XJ^X - ,
r** 1
Sum of
outflow
from
RCHRES
H ^^
- ±-\
4.1! /.«»! wwiioci vau i ve 1-UflSCltuenTS in
the CONS section of the RCHRES Application
Module
141
-------
Module Section CONS
Method
Subroutine CONS performs only three functions. First, a value for inflow of
material (ICON) is obtained and converted to internal units. Next, CONS calls
subroutine ADVECT to perform longitudinal advection of this material and the
material already contained in the RCHRES. Finally, CONS calculates the mass of
material remaining in the RCHRES after advection; this value, RCON, is necessary
for the mass balance checks on conservatives and is calculated as:
RCON - CON*VOL
where:
RCON - mass of material in RCHRES after advection
CON - concentration of conservative after advection
VOL - volume of water in RCHRES at end of interval in ft3 or m3
Additional Requirements
HSPF allows a maximum of ten conservative constituents. The user selects the
units for each constituent; thus, different conservative constituents may have
different units. However, in order to provide this flexibility, additional
input is required. For each constituent the following information must be
provided in the User's Control Input:
1. CONID: the name of the constituent (up to 20 characters long)
2. QTYID: this string (up to 8 characters) contains the units used to
describe the quantity of constituent entering or leaving the
RCHRES, or the total quantity of material stored in it.
Examples of possible units for QTYID are 'kg' for kilograms
or 'Ibs' for pounds
3. CONCID: the concentration units for each conservative (up to 8
characters long); examples are 'mg/1' or 'Ibs/ft3'
4. CONV: conversion factor from QTYID/VOL to desired concentration
units: CONC = CONV*(QTY/VOL) (in English system, VOL is
expressed in ft3) (in metric system, VOL is expressed in m3)
For example, if:
CONCID is mg/1
QTYID is kg
VOL is in m3
then CONV - 1000.0
142
-------
Module Section CONS
4. 2(3). 3.1 Simulate Advection of Constituent Totally Entrained in Water
(subroutine ADVECT)
Purpose
ADVECT computes the concentration of material in a RCHRES and the quantities of
material that leave the RCHRES due to longitudinal advection through active exit
gates. ADVECT is a generalized subroutine, and is called by each module section
which simulates constituents which undergo normal longitudinal advection.
Assumptions
Two assumptions are made in the solution technique for normal advection:
1. Each constituent advected by calling subroutine ADVECT is uniformly
dispersed throughout the waters of the RCHRES.
2. Each constituent is completely entrained by the flow; that is, the
material moves at the same horizontal velocity as the water.
Method
The equation of continuity may be written as:
IMAT - ROMAT = (CONC*VOL) - (CONCS*VOLS)
where:
IMAT
ROMAT
CONCS and CONC
VOLS and VOL
inflow of material over the interval
total outflow of material over the interval
concentrations at the start and end of the interval
volume of water stored in the RCHRES at the start and
end of the interval (m3 or ft3)
(2)
The other basic equation states that the total outflow of material over the time
interval is a weighted mean of two estimates; one based on conditions at the
start of the interval, the other on ending conditions:
ROMAT = ((JS*ROS*CONCS) + (COJS*RO*CONC))*DELTS
(3)
where:
JS
ROS and RO
DELTS
weighting factor and COJS = 1.0 - JS
rates of outflow at the start and end of the interval
(m3/s or ft3/s)
= interval, in seconds
(2) in Section 4.2(3).2 (Subroutine ADCALC), Equation (3) can be
143
-------
Module Section CONS
ROMAT - (SROVOL*CONCS) + (EROVOL*CONC) (4)
where SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined earlier.
By combining Equations (2) and (4) we can solve for CONC:
CONC - (IMAT + CONCS*(VOLS - SROVOL))/(VOL + EROVOL) (5)
The total amount of material leaving the RCHRES during the interval is calculat-
ed from equation (4).
If there is more than one active exit from the RCHRES, the amount of material
leaving through each exit gate is calculated as:
OMAT - SOVOL*CONCS + EOVOL*CONC (6)
where:
OMAT = amount of material leaving RCHRES through individual exit gate
SOVOL » outflow volume component for individual exit gate based on start
of interval
EOVOL ** outflow volume component for individual exit gate based on end
of interval
(SOVOL and EOVOL are defined in Section 4.2(3).2)
If the RCHRES goes dry during the interval, the concentration at the end of5 the
interval is undefined. The total amount of material leaving the RCHRES is:
ROMAT - IMAT + (CONCS*VOLS) (7)
If there is more than one active exit from the RCHRES, the amount of material
leaving through each exit gate from a RCHRES which has gone dry during the
interval is calculated as:
OMAT - (SOVOL/SROVOL)*ROMAT (8)
The units in the foregoing equations are:
VOLS,VOL m3 or ft3 (call these volunits)
SROVOL,etc volunits/interval
CONCS,CONC user defined (call these concunits)
IMAT,ROMAT,etc concuni ts*voluni ts/i nterval
144
-------
Module Section HTRCH
4. 2(3). 4 Simulate Heat Exchange and Water Temperature
(Section HTRCH of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
°f thiS Cude is.to Slmulate the Presses which determine the water
fi -V rea°h 2r+m1Sed reservoir- Water temperature is one of the most
fundamental indices used to determine the nature of an aquatic environment
Most processes of functional importance to an environment are affected by '
temperature. For example, the saturation level of dissolved oxygen varies
inversely with temperature. The decay of reduced organic matter, and hence
?orfof teS^taUSedHby "U6 deCay' increases With ^creasing tern e?a?u?e Some
form of temperature dependence is present in nearly all processes. The preva-
dejendent1 phytopl ankton and zooplankton species is often temperature
Required Time Series
blll£"lthTi"
1*.""»rt™d *°
temperature
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
solar radiation in langleys/interval
cloud cover expressed as tenths
air temperature in degrees C
dewpoint temperature in degrees C
wind speed in meters/interval
Note that solar radiation data are usually available as daily totals. The user
XSHSPFnV8If thf^dna5a,H°H,payA-hOUr1y °rtW° h°Ur1y values before using thlm
iliH h 'A- -A A ?tandard PF disaggregation rule were used, a daily value
would be divided into equal increments for each interval of the day; this would
not account for the rising and setting of the sun. A similar kind of prepro-
cessing needs to be done if daily max/min air temperatures are used
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
Figure 4.2(3).4-1 illustrates the fluxes involved in this module section There
ChLSp,S!nn;ntant jnt!rnal -Joyces °r sinks of temperature within a RCHRES.
Changes in heat content are due only to transport processes across the RCHRES
boundaries. Module section HTRCH considers two major processes: heat transfer
of HdS-n"' aHd^-eat ^ansfer across the air-water interface. The processes
of diffusion and dispersion are not considered in HSPF.
145
-------
Module Section HTRCH
i Jk.
CQ
ran
£2
e-g
3 "N
(B ®
^ j: *
•o ° S
sis
O IM
'•5 X JO
f f«
I§l
II
4.2(3).4-1 Flow diagram for HTRCH section of the RCHRES Application Module
146
-------
Module Section HTRCH
Heat is transported across the air-water interface by a number of mechanisms,
and each must be evaluated individually. The net transport across the air-water
interface is the sum of the individual effects. Mechanisms which can increase
the heat content of the water are absorption of solar radiation, absorption of
longwave radiation, and conduction-convection. Mechanisms which decrease the
heat content are emission of longwave radiation, conduction-convection, and
evaporation.
Shortwave Solar Radiation
The shortwave radiation absorbed by a RCHRES is approximated by the foil owing
equation: 3
QSR = 0.97*CFSAEX*SOLRAD*10.0
(1)
where:
QSR
0.97
CFSAEX =
SOLRAD
10.0
shortwave radiation in kcal/m2.interval
fraction of incident radiation which is assumed absorbed
(3 percent is assumed reflected)
ratio of radiation incident to water surface to radiation
incident to gage where data were collected. This factor also
accounts for shading of the water body, e.g., by trees
solar radiation in langleys/interval
conversion factor from langleys to kcal/m2
Longwave Radiation
All terrestrial surfaces, as well as the atmosphere, emit longwave radiation.
The rate at which each source emits longwave radiation is dependent upon its
Jr2£rca*UreVTh? ]on9wave radiation exchange between the atmosphere and the
RCHRES is estimated using the formula:
QB
SIGMA*((TWKELV**4) - KATRAD*(10**-6)*CLDFAC*(TAKELV**6))*DELT60
(2)
where:
QB
SIGMA
TWKELV
KATRAD
CLDFAC
TAKELV
C
DELT60
net transport of longwave radiation in kcal/m2.interval
Stephan-Boltzman constant multiplied by 0.97 to account
for emissivity of water
water temperature in degrees Kelvin
atmospheric longwave radiation coefficient with a typical
value of 9.0
1.0 + (.0017*C**2)
air temperature in degrees Kelvin corrected for elevation
difference
cloud cover, expressed as tenths (range 0 through 10)
DELT(mins) divided by 60 . .
147
-------
Module Section HTRCH
Both atmospheric radiation to the water body and back radiation from the water
body to the atmosphere are considered in this equation., QB is positive for
transport of energy from the water body to the atmosphere.
Conduction-Convection
Conductive-convective transport of heat is caused by temperature differences
between the air and water. Heat is transported from the warmer medium to the
cooler medium; heat can therefore enter or leave a water body, depending upon
its temperature relative to air temperature. HSPF assumes that the heat
transport is proportional to the temperature difference between the two media.
The equation used is:
QH = CFPRES*(KCOND*10**-4)*WIND*(TW - AIRTMP)
(3)
where:
QH
CFPRES
KCOND
WIND
TW
AIRTMP
conductive-convective heat transport in kcal/m2.interval
pressure correction factor dependent on elevation
conductive-convective heat transport coefficient
(typically in the range of 1 to 20)
windspeed in m/interval
water temperature in degrees C
air temperature in degrees C
QH is positive for heat transfer from the water to the air.
Evaporative Heat Loss
Evaporative heat transport occurs when water evaporates from the water surface.
The amount of heat lost depends on the latent heat of vaporization for water and
on the quantity of water evaporated. For purposes of water temperature simula-
tion, HSPF uses the following equation to calculate the amount of water evapo-
rated :
EVAP - (KEVAP*10**-9)*WIND*(VPRESW - VPRESA)
(4)
where:
EVAP
KEVAP
WIND
VPRESW
VPRESA
quantity of water evaporated in m/interval
evaporation coefficient with a typical value of 1 to 5
wind movement 2 m above the water surface in m/interval
saturation vapor pressure at the water surface in mbar
vapor pressure of air above water surface in mbar
The heat removed by evaporation is then calculated:
QE - HFACT*EVAP
(5)
148
-------
Module Section HTRCH
where:
QE
HFACT
heat loss due to evaporation in kcal/m2.interval
heat loss conversion factor (latent heat of vaporization
multiplied by density of water)
Heat Content of Precipitation
In module section HYDR an option exists to include the input of water from
precipitation falling directly on the water surface. If this option is activat-
aSSi?u ! temperature to the water added to the RCHRES in
as the
Net heat exchange
The net heat exchange at the water surface is represented as:
QT = QSR - QB - QH - QE + QP
(6)
where:
QT
QSR
QB
QH
QE
QP
net heat exchange at water surface in kcal/m2.interval
net heat transport from incident shortwave radiation
net heat transport from longwave radiation
heat transport from conduction-convection
heat transport from evaporation
heat content of precipitation
Calculation of Water Temperature
Of the five heat transport mechanisms across the air-water interface, three are
significant and dependent upon water temperature. In order to obtain a stable
solution for water temperature, these three terms (QB, QH, QE) are evaluated for
the temperature at both the start and end of the interval and the average of
the two values is taken (trapezoidal approximation). For this purpose, the
unknown ending temperature is approximated by performing a Taylor series
expansion about the starting temperature, and ignoring nonlinear terms This
ov™thV inters? t0 ^ following e^uation ^r the change in water temperature
DELTTW = CVQT*QT/(1.0 + SPD*CVQT)
(7)
where:
DELTTW
CVQT
QT
SPD
change in water temperature in degrees C
conversion factor to convert total heat exchange expressed in
kcal/m2.interval to degrees C/interval (volume dependent)
net heat exchange in kcal/m2.interval (with terms evaluated at
starting temperature)
sum of partial derivatives of QB, QH, and QE with respect to
water temperature
149
-------
Module Section HTRCH
The heat exchange calculations do not give realistic results when the water body
becomes excessively shallow. Consequently, heat transport across the air-water
interface is not considered if the average depth of water in the RCHRES falls
below 2 Inches.
4.2(3).4.1 Correct Air Temperature for Elevation Difference
(subroutine RATEMP)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to correct air temperature for any elevation
difference between the RCHRES and the temperature gage.
Approach
The lapse rate for air temperature is dependent upon whether or not precipita-
tion occurs during the time interval. If precipitation does occur, a wet lapse
rate of 1.94E-3 degrees C/ft is assumed. Otherwise, a dry lapse rate which is a
function of time of day is used. A table of 24 hourly dry lapse rates is built
into the HSPF system. The corrected air temperature is:
AIRTMP - GATMP - LAPS*ELDAT
(8)
where:
AIRTMP
GATMP
LAPS
ELDAT
corrected air temperature in degrees C
air temperature at gage
lapse rate in degrees C/ft
elevation difference between mean RCHRES elevation and
gage elevation in feet (ELDAT is positive if mean RCHRES
elevation is greater than gage elevation)
4.2(3).5 Simulate Behavior of Inorganic Sediment
(Section SEDTRN of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to simulate the transport, deposition, and scour of
inorganic sediment in free-flowing reaches and mixed reservoirs. The modeling
of sediment in channels may be needed for analysis of such problems as:
1. Structural instability of bridge piers or water intakes caused by
scouring.
2. Reduction of reservoir capacity and clogging of irrigation canals and
navigable waterways due to deposition.
150
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
3* sediment" °f "^ ava11able to aa.uatic organisms caused by suspended
4' pesti??des°f adS°rbed P°llutants such as fertilizers, herbicides, and
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
'tate
With wh1ch
Both the migration characteristics and the adsorptive capacities of sediment
vary significantly with particle size. Consequently, HSP? divides the organic
sediment load into three components (sand, silt, and clay), each with its own
rS Parametric 1nfo™ation required for cohesive edSnt s it an3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
particle diameter - D
particle settling velocity in still water - W
particle density - RHO
critical shear stress for deposition - TAUCD
critical shear stress for scour - TAUCS
erodibility coefficient - M
n Xalues rec>uired J?r noncohesive, or sand, particles depend on the
nn A d *° """P"*6 sandload (alternate methods are described in the func-
tional description of subroutines SANDLD, TOFFAL, and COLBY). If the Toffaletl
an5 oartl?pe^ttia-UeS T*¥ ^V™* for median bed sedim*nt diameter (DB50)
3«H £a - e fettl1"9 velocity (W). The Colby method requires a value for DB50
SP ± "inP"t power function" method requires both a coefficient (KSAND) for
the power function and an exponent (EXPSND). v^««u;
thyOQ"-pv.a^^:''"! indicates, the same materials fluxes are modeled for all
three fractions of sediment. Only the methodology used to determine fluxes
between suspended storage and bed storage differ ueterraine riuxes
HSPF assumes that scour or deposition of inorganic sediment does not affect the
hydraulic properties of the channel. Furthermore, it is assumed that sand
silt, and clay deposit in different areas of the RCHRES bed; consequently the
ftESlKS ?r-fSuL2!,!a? m.aterial -1s "ot linked to the other fra^ons' (i.J..
"armoring"
modeled.
is not modeled). Longitudinal movement of bed sediments is not
The details of the transport, deposition, and scour techniques are outlined in
SCrti0nS ?f 1the.lower level subroutines of the SEDTRN module
^^
VOLSED(J) = RSED(J+3)/RHO(J)*1.0E06
(D
151
-------
I
Module Section SEDTRN
OC
CO
o
W
IJuMJ
Q
tH «*
* 3"
=/ I a
S §5|
<2\ 5 g
w?" ^
(o'JoTS
cy
CO
Q.
So °
O w o
Q. 0)
DC:
4.2(3).5-1 Flow diagram of inorganic sediment fractions in the SEDTRN section of
the RCHRES Application Module
152
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
where:
RSEDfSSi = hpJUent into the three components
this material can be routed "
4. 2(3). 5.1 Simulate Cohesive Sediments (subroutine COHESV)
Purpose
scour> and transport
Method
153
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
4.2(3).5.1.1 Simulate Exchange with Bed
(subroutine BDEXCH)
Purpose
BDEXCH simulates the deposition and scour of cohesive sediment fractions (silt
and clay).
Approach
Exchange of cohesive sediments with the bed is dependent upon the shear stress
exerted upon the bed surface. The shear stress within the RCHRES is calculated
in subroutine SHEAR (4.2(3).1.4) of the HYDR section. Whenever shear stress
(TAU) in the RCHRES is less than the user-supplied critical shear stress for
deposition (TAUCD), deposition occurs; whenever shear stress is greater than the
user-supplied critical shear stress for scour (TAUCS), scouring of cohesive bed
sediments occurs. Rate of deposition for a particular fraction of cohesive
sediment is based on a simplification of Krone's (1962) equation to the follow-
ing form:
D - W*CONC*(1.0 - TAU/TAUCD)
(4)
where:
D
- rate at which sediment fraction settles out of suspension
(units of mass/1en2.ivl)
W - settling velocity for cohesive sediment fraction (len/ivl)
CONC » concentration of suspended sediment fraction (mass/1en3)
TAU = shear stress (Ib/ft2 or kg/m2) ,nu,,,.,„ , , „,
TAUCD « critical shear stress for deposition (Ib/tt2 or kg/m2)
The rate of change of suspended sediment fraction concentration in the RCHRES
due to deposition can be expressed as:
d(CONC)/dt = -(D/AVDEPM)
(5)
average depth of water in RCHRES in meters
where:
AVDEPM
By substituting the expression for deposition rate (D) from Equation 4 the
following equation is obtained:
d(CONC)/dt - -(W*CONC/AVDEPM)*(1 - TAU/TAUCD)
(6)
By integrating and rearranging this equation a solution may be obtained for the
concentration of suspended sediment lost to deposition during a simulation
interval (DEPCONC):
DEPCONC - CONC*(1.0 - EXP((-W/AVDEPM)*(1.0 - TAU/tAUCD))
(7)
154
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
where:
CONC
concentration of suspended sediment at start of interval (mg/1)
settlinVe]?ci*y for sediment fraction (m/ivl) ( 9/ U
in meters (caiculated in HYDR)
TAUCD
i
critical shear stress for deposition (Ib/ft2 or kg/m2)
uCpadatUeda:10n °f DEPC°NC' the St°ra96 <* ******* - suspension and
SUSP = SUSP - (DEPCONC*VOL)
BED = BED + (DEPCONC*VOL)
where:
SUSP = suspended storage of sediment fraction (mg.ft3/l or mq m3/l )
BED = storage of sediment fraction in bed (mg ft3/l or mg m3/n
VOL = volume of water in RCHRES (ft3 or m3) mg.m-Vi;
The rate of resuspension, or scour, of cohesive sediments from the bed is
derived from a modified form of Partheniades'(1962) equation?
S = M*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0)
where:
M = rate at which sediment is scoured from the bed (mass/len2 ivl)
TAUCS = r.?t- ' }ltyh coefricient f°r the sediment fraction (kg/m2.vl)
TAUCS = critical shear stress for scour (Ibs/ft2 or kg/m2) y/ VI;
fraCt1°n — entration in the RCHRES
(8)
(9)
(10)
d(CONC)/dt = S/AVDEPM
(S) from
10
d(CONC)/dt = (M/AVDEPM)*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0)
(11)
following
(.1.2)
simulation interval (SCRCONC):
SCRCONC = M/AVDEPM*1000*(TAU/TAUCS - 1.0)
scour
where:
AwnroM
AVDEPM
1000
(13)
erodibility coefficient in kg/m2.ivl
average depth of water in meters
conversion from kg/m3 to mg/1
155
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
The user is required to supply values for the erodibility coefficient (M) and
critical shear stress for scour (TAUCS) for each fraction of cohesive sediment
(silt or clay) which is modeled.
I*' • '
Following the calculation of SCRCONC, the storage of sediment in suspension and
in the bed is updated:
BED - BED - (SCRCONC*VOL)
SUSP - SUSP + (SCRCONC*VOL)
(14)
(15)
If the amount of scour calculated is greater than available storage in the bed,
the bed scour is set equal to the bed storage and the bed storage is set equal
to zero. Since the value specified for TAUCS should be greater than that for
TAUCD, only one process (deposition or scour) occurs during each simulation
interval.
4.2(3).5.2 Simulate Behavior of Sand/Gravel (subroutine SANDLD)
Purpose
SANDLD simulates the deposition, scour, and transport processes of the sand
fraction of inorganic sediment.
Method
Erosion and deposition of sand, or noncohesive sediment, is affected by the
amount of sediment the flow is capable of carrying. If the amount of sand being
transported is less than the flow can carry for the hydrodynamic conditions of
the RCHRES, sand will be scoured from the bed. This occurs until the actual
sand transport rate becomes equal to the carrying capacity of the flow or until
the available bed sand is all scoured. Conversely, deposition occurs if the
sand transport rate exceeds the flow's capacity to carry sand.
Subroutine SANDLD allows the user to calculate sand transport capacity for a
RCHRES by any one of three methods. Depending on the value of SANDFG specified
in the User's Control Input, either the Toffaleti equation (SANDFG=1), the Colby
method (SANDFG=2), or an input power function of velocity (SANDFG=3) is used.
If sand transport capacity is calculated using the Toffaleti or Colby methods,
the potential sand load concentration is determined by the following conversion:
PSAND - (GSI*TWIDE*10.5)/ROM
(16)
where:
PSAND
GSI
TWIDE
10.5
ROM
potential sandload expressed in mg/1
sand transport capacity in tons/day.ft width
(calculated in COLBY or TOFFAL)
width of RCHRES in ft
conversion factor
total rate of outflow of water from the RCHRES in m3/sec
156
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
If carrying capacity is a power function of velocity, PSAND is calculated as:
PSAND = KSAND*AVVELE**EXPSND
where:
C0eff1cient ™ the sandload suspension equation (input oarameter)
equat'°"(1nput '
(18)
The potential outflow of sand during the interval is:
PROSND = (SANDS*SROVOL) + (PSAND*EROVOL)
where:
PROSND = potential sand outflow
555S5 = concentration of sand at start of interval (ma/n
SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined in Section 4.2(J).2
deP°sitio» to> the-bed storage is found using the
PSCOUR = (VOL*PSAND) - (VOLS*SANDS) + PROSND - ISAND
where:
PSCOUR
VOL
VOLS
ISAND
(19)
potential scour (+) or deposition (-)
volume of water in RCHRES at the end of the interval (ft3 or m
volume of water in RCHRES at the start of interval ftor m3)
total inflow of sand into RCHRES during interval
SAND = (ISAND + SCOUR + SANDS*(VOLS - SROVOL))/(VOL + EROVOL)
where:
SAND
SCOUR
SANDS
(20)
concentration of sand at end of interval
sand scoured from, or deposited to, the bottom
concentration of sand at start of interval
The total amount of sand leaving the RCHRES during the interval is:
ROSAND = SROVOL*SANDS + EROVOL*SAND (21)
goes dry during an interval, or if there is no outflow from the
157
-------
4.2(3).5.2.1
Module Section SEDTRN
Calculate Sand Transport Capacity by Using Toffaleti's Method
(subroutine TOFFAL)
Purpose
TOFFAL uses Toffaleti's method to calculate the capacity of the RCHRES flow to
transport sand.
Method
In Toffaleti's methodology the actual stream for which the sand discharge is to
be calculated is assumed to be equivalent to a two-dimensional stream of width
equal to that of the real stream and of depth equal to the hydraulic radius of
the real stream (FHRAD).
For the purposes of calculation, the depth, FHRAD, of the hypothetical stream is
divided into four zones shown in Figure 4.2(3).5-2. These are: (1) the bed zone
of relative thickness Y/FHRAD = 2*FDIAM/FHRAD; (2) the lower zone extending from
Y/FHRAD - 2*FDIAM/FHRAD to Y/FHRAD = 1/11.24; (3) the middle zone extending from
Y/FHRAD - 1/11.24 to Y/FHRAD - 1/2.5; and (4) the upper zone extending from
Y/FHRAD - 1/2.5 to the surface. (FDIAM is the median bed sediment diameter).
The velocity profile is represented by the power relation:
U = (1 + CNV)*V*(Y/FHRAD)**CNV
(22)
where:
U
V
CNV
TMPR
flow velocity at distance Y above the bed in ft/sec
mean stream velocity in ft/sec
exponent derived empirically as a function of water
temperature (0.1198 + 0.00048*TMPR)
water temperature in degrees F
The concentration distribution of sand is given by a power relation for each of
the three upper zones; i.e., by Eqs. 23-25 in Figure 4.2(3).5-2. The exponent,
ZI, in Eqs. 23-25 is given by:
ZI - (VSET*V)/(CZ*FHRAD*SLOPE)
(26)
where:
VSET
SLOPE
CZ
settling velocity for sand in ft/s
slope of RCHRES in ft/ft
empirical factor derived as a function of water
temperature (260.67 - 0.667*TMPR)
Expressions for the sand transport capacity of the lower (GSL), middle (GSM),
and upper (GSU) zones are obtained by substituting U from Eq. 22 and the
appropriate value for sand particle concentration (CI) for each zone into the
following equation and integrating between the vertical limits of the zone:
GSI - INT [LLI to ULI] (CI*Udy) (27)
158
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
o>
Ii
||
it
<5» **""
I
35
•2
*
O
II
^-^^
&• ^
c
la
"^.
*••*
C'
*^M
m
CO
CD
e
—
N
3
Q.
\
S t
-**• •
*" S Q l-
£ i
^
.O
|o
o
c
0
o
s
5
^
D
^
M,
•£.
E
L.
Figure 4. 2(3). 5-2 Toffaleti's Vplnritv rnn^^+^^» :.^ ^ .. r— ^ — : '
, and Sediment'
159
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
where:
GSI
INT
ULI
LLI
CI
sand transport capacity for zone I
integral of function in ( ) over limits in [ ]
depth Y at upper limit of zone I
depth Y at lower limit of zone I
concentration of sand in zone I
The resulting equations for sand transport capacity in the three zones are:
GSL - CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.758*ZI) -
(2*FDIAM)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.756*ZI))/(1.0 + CNV - 0.756*ZI))
GSM = CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(0.244*ZI)*((HRAD/2.5)**(1.0 + CNV - ZI) -
(HRAD/11.24)**(1.0 + CNV - ZI)))/(1.0 + CNV - ZI))
GSU - CMI*(((HRAD/11.24)**(0.244*ZI)*(HRAD/2.5)**(0.5*ZI)*
(HRAD**(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI) - (HRAD/2.5)**(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI)))/
(1.0 + CNV - 1.5*ZI))
(28)
(29)
(30)
in which
CMI
43.2*CLI*(1.0 + CNV)*V*HRAD**(0.758*ZI - CNV)
(31)
A value for CLI, the concentration of sand in the lower zone, can be obtained by
setting the expression for GSL in Eq. 28 equal to the following empirical
expression and solving for CLI:
GSL = 0.6/((TT*AC*K4/V**2)**(!.67)* DIAM/0.00058)**(1.67))
(32)
where:
GSL
TT
AC
K4
V
FDIAM
sand transport capacity
empirical factor derived as a function of water
temperature (1.10*(0.051 + 0.00009*TMPR))
empirical factor derived as a function of the kinematic
viscosity of water (VIS) and shear velocity based on
shear stress due to sand grain roughness (USTAR)
empirical factor derived as a function of AC, slope
of the RCHRES (SLOPE), and particle diameter for which
65% by weight of sediment is finer (D65).
mean stream velocity in ft/sec
median bed sediment diameter in ft
Values for factors AC and K4 are given in Figure 4.2(3).5-3. The dimensions of
AC are such that GSL is expressed in tons per day per foot of width. Conse-
quently, when CLI is evaluated and substituted back into Eqs. 28-30 the result-
ing units of sand transport capacity for all three zones are tons per day per
foot width.
160
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
1.5
IJO
0.8
5
fc 0.6
| o,
Ǥ 0.3
O.2
/
/ s
\
"S
t»
y
\
*^ •
\
0-* 0.3 0.4 ibl 0.6 O.8 T
AC»(IQ»»5) * SLOPE «D65
Figure 4. 2(3). 5-3 Factors in Toffaleti Relati
161
V
\
N
0 2.C
ons
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
Prior to calculation of sand transport capacity for the zones, Eq. 25 is solved
to be sure that the value for concentration at Y=2*FDIAM does not exceed 100
Ibs/ft3. If it does, the concentration at this depth is set equal to 100
bs/ft3 and an adjusted value of CLI is calculated and used in Eqs. 28-30 The
transport capacity of the final zone, the bed zone (Figure 4.2(3).5-2), is also
determined using the adjusted value of CLI and the following equation:
GSB - CMI*(2*FDIAM)**(1.0 + CNV - 0.758*ZI) (33)
The total sand transport capacity (6SI) for the RCHRES is the sum of the
transport capacities for the four zones:
GSI - GSB + GSL + GSM + GSU
4 2(3) 5.2.2 Calculate Sand Transport Capacity by Using Colby's Method
(subroutine COLBY)
Purpose
COLBY calculates the capacity of the RCHRES to transport sand based on the
median bed sediment diameter (DB50), average stream velocity (V), hydraulic
radius (HRAD), fine sediment load concentration (FSL), and water temperature
(TEMPR).
Method
The solution technique used in this subroutine is based on empirical relation-
ships developed from Figures 4.2(3).5-4 and 4.2(3).5-5. In general terms, the
solution consists of three operations:
. ' i. i
i , , , " i
1 Obtain one value for sediment transport capacity from a matrix of values
* by interpolation. The dimensions of the matrix (G) are 4x8x6 and corre-
spond to ranges of hydraulic radius, velocity, and mean diameter of bed
sediment, respectively. Since Colby's curves were developed on a og-log
scale it is necessary to perform a series of three linear interpolations
of logarithmic values to derive the value for sediment transport appro:
priate for the hydraulic parameters in the RCHRES. This value (GTUC) is
not corrected for the effects of fine sediment concentration or water
temperature.
2 Correct sand transport capacity value to account for water temperature in
RCHRES A multiplier is obtained from a matrix of values by interpola-
tion. The dimensions of the matrix (T) are 7x4 and correspond to ranges
of water temperature and hydraulic radius, respectively. A linear
interpolation of logarithmic values is performed to derive the appropri-
ate temperature correction factor. Generally speaking sand transport
capacity, measured in tons per day per foot of stream width, decreases
with increasing stream width (see Figure 4.2(3).5-5).
- ' I,, ' !
162
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
MEAN VELOCITY. IN FEET PER SECOND
Figure 4.2(3).5-4 Col by's Relationship for Discharge of Sands in Terms of Mean
Velocity for Six Median Sizes of Bed Sands, Four Depths of Flow
and Water Temperature of 60 F ^uu, or MOW,
163
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
0.1 1
MEDIAN DIAMETER OF BED MATERIAL.
IN MILLIMETERS
Figure 4.2(3).5-5 Colby's Correction Factors for Effect of Water Temperature,
Concentration of Fine Sediment, and Sediment Size to be Applied
to Uncorrected Discharge of Sand Given by Figure 4.2(3).5-4
164
-------
Module Section SEDTRN
iJrS?SjF?and.tra?J?°^ caPacity val"e to account for fine sediment load
are 1mportant " "^standing and using the
1. Fine sediment load Is defined as the sum of suspended silt and clay
Acceptable ranges of parameter values for COLBY are-
(a) median bed sediment diameter 0.1-0.8 mm
(b) hydraulic radius 0 1-100 ft
(c) average velocity l.'o-lO.O ft/s
165
-------
Module Section GQUAL
4.2(3).6 Simulate the Behavior of a Generalized Quality Constituent
(Module Section GQUAL)
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to enable the model user to simulate the behavior of
a generalized constituent. The constituent which is modeled may be present in
the RCHRES only in a dissolved state, or it may also be sediment-associated. If
the generalized quality constituent, which will be called a "qua! throughout
this discussion, is not associated with sediment, module section GQUAL only
considers the following processes:
1. Advection of dissolved material
2. Decay processes. One or more of the following can be modeled:
a. hydrolysis
b. oxidation by free radical oxygen
c. photolysis
d. volatilization
e. biodegradation
f. generalized first-order decay
3. Production of one generalized quality constituent as a result of decay
of another generalized quality constituent by any of the listed decay
processes except volatilization. This capability is included to allow
for situations in which the decay products of a chemical are of primary
interest to the user.
The following additional processes are considered if the generalized quality
constituent being modeled is sediment-associated:
4. Advection of adsorbed suspended material
5. Deposition and scour of adsorbed material
6. Decay of suspended and bed material
7. Adsorption/desorption between dissolved and sediment-associated phase.
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storage
Figure 4 2(3).6-1 illustrates the fluxes and storages modeled in section GQUAL.
Note that the arrows indicating fluxes from each of the sediment fraction
storages are not all labeled. For instance, although deposition and scour
transfer materials between the suspended storage and bed storage of all three
sediment fractions (sand, silt, clay), only the flux arrow for deposition/scour
of clay is labeled. Deposition/scour flux arrows for sand and silt are left
unlabeled so that the flow diagram does not become overly cluttered and incom-
prehensible. The same convention is used for the other fluxes contained in the
flow diagram (i.e., an unlabeled flux arrow indicates that a flux of the same
nature as a parallel labeled flux occurs).
166
-------
Module Section GQUAL
constituent on susp. sediment SQAL
Inflow \
uiay
Adsorption
OSQAL
(N)
ROSQAL
Input from decay
of parent
. Hydrolysis
Desorption
ADQAL
(other)
DDQAL
Constituent on bed sediment BQAL
Figure 4.2(3).6-1
sertion qU3lity constituent in the GQUAL
section of the RCHRES Application Module
167
-------
Module Section GQUAL
Approach
The first portion of GQUAL evaluates the nature of the data which will be used
for the GQUAL simulation. Since it is anticipated that some users of section
GQUAL will be using this section independently of many of the other sections of
the RCHRES application module, a variety of data types are allowed. In particu-
lar, most data required for simulation of individual decay processes can be
supplied in the form of a single constant, 12 monthly constants, a time series
value from the INPAD, or in cases where the data value is calculated in another
active section of RCHRES, the last computed value may be used. Data types which
may be obtained from any one of these sources include:
1. water temperature
2. pH (for hydrolysis)
3. free radical oxygen (for oxidation)
4. total suspended sediment (for photolysis)
5. phytoplankton (for photolysis)
6. cloud cover (for photolysis)
7. wind (for volatilization on lakes)
GQUAL utilizes six subroutines to perform the simulation of a generalized
quality constituent. These six subroutines and their functions are:
1. OXREA:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ADVECT:
DDECAY:
ADVQAL:
ADECAY:
ADSDES:
compute oxygen reaeration rate (used in simulation of qual
volatilization)
simulate advection of dissolved material
simulate decay of dissolved material
advect sediment-associated material (deposition and scour are
also considered)
simulate decay of qual adsorbed to suspended and bed sediment
simulate exchange of materials due to adsorption and desorption
Details on the methods used by these subroutines are provided in functional
descriptions 4.2(3)3.1, 4.2(3).7.1.2, and 4.2(3).6.1 through 4.2(3).6.4,
respectively. GQUAL is also responsible for the calculation of increases in
qual material resulting from decay of a "parent" chemical. The HSPF code is
designed so that a user may specify that a "daughter" chemical is produced by
any or all of the six decay processes (except volatilization) which degrade a
"parent" qual. However, certain restrictions are placed on the daughter/parent
relationship. Simulation of up to three generalized quality constituents is
allowed. Qual #2 may be produced by decay of qual #1. Qual #3 may be produced
by decay of qual #1 and/or qual #2. Other relationships are not allowed. The
user should sequence quality constituents accordingly. The amount of daughter
qual produced by decay of a parent by a particular decay process is computed as:
PDQAL(I) = DDQAL(K,J)*C(I,J,K)
(1)
where:
PDQAL(I) = amount of daughter qual I produced by decay of
parent qual J through process K expressed in
(concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(ni3/ivl)
168
-------
Module Section GQUAL
DDQAL(K,J)
C(I,J,K)
amount of parent material decayed by process K
expressed in same units as PDQAL(I)
amount of qual I produced per unit of qua! J
degraded by process K in units of concu I/concu J
DQAL(I) = DQAL(I) + (PDQAL(I) - DDQAL(7,I))/VOL
where:
DQAL(I)
PDQAL(I)
DDQAL(7,I)
VOL
(2)
concentration of dissolved qual I
amount of qual I produced by decay of parent qual(s)
total amount of qual I degraded by the decay processes
volume of water in the RCHRES processes
Additional Requirements
1
2.
the name of the constituent (up to 20 characters long)
(UP t°? ch«-«*ers) contains the units used to
W^ty of constituent entering or leaving the
he
4.
GQID:
QTYID:
Fv^mni' f *5? total
-------
Module Section GQUAL
4.2(3).6.1 Simulate Decay of Dissolved Material (subroutine DDECAY)
Purpose
DDECAY simulates the degradation of generalized quality constituents by chemical
and/or biological means. Six processes are considered:
1. hydrolysis
2. oxidation by free radical oxygen
3. photolysis
4. volatilization
5. biodegradation
6. generalized first-order decay
Discussion
HSPF includes detailed degradation methods only for the dissolved state of the
quality constituent (qual); decay of qual material in the adsorbed state is
handled by a lumped first-order decay function in subroutine ADECAY
(4 2(3).6.3). Formulations of the degradation processes are based on studies
conducted by Smith et al. (1977, 1979), Zepp and Cline (1977), Falco et al.
(1976), and Mill et al. (1980). Most formulations are similar to those included
in the SERATRA model (Onishi and Wise, 1979). All degradation processes modeled
in DDECAY contain a temperature correction factor.
Methods
Hydrolysis
Hydrolysis is defined as any reaction that takes place in water, without the aid
of light or microorganisms, in which a compound is transformed to a different
compound as a result of a reaction with water. The rate of change of dissolved
qual concentration due to hydrolysis is sensitive to changes in pH and water
temperature. In HSPF, the equation presented by Smith et al. (1977) is modified
to include a temperature correction factor and rewritten as:
KHYD - (KA*10.0**(-PHVAL) + KB*10.0**(PHVAL - 14.0) + KM)* (3)
THHYD**TW20
1 , '" , • •„ i,
( •
KHYD - hydrolysis rate constant for qual adjusted for pH
and water temperature conditions of RCHIRES
KA - hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in acidic solution (pH5)
KB » hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in basic solution (pH9)
KN - hydrolysis rate coefficient for qual in neutral solution (pH7)
PHVAL - pH of water in RCHRES
THHYD = temperature correction parameter for hydrolysis
TW20 - TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0
170
-------
Module Section GQUAL
The hydrolysis rate coefficients (KA, KB, KN) for a particular aual are deter
S^JS'S^pl?011?^ "^ (AS™' 19*0)' Defending on the avalbllty
of data and the needs of the model user, pH information for the hydrolysis
equation can be supplied as (1) one constant value, (2) twelve month?! values
rL?LanfimS S-n?S;- Th^time Series can either ^e an input time series or the
results of pH simulation if section RQUAL is active and pH is simulated
Oxidation by Free Radical Oxygen
nr- react1onf.can »» distinguished for evaluating
processes in an aquatic environment (Mill et al . , 1980):
Reaction of an excited state of a molecule with oxygen, in which the
excited state is produced by direct photolysis or by interact ion with a
photosensitizer; this process is termed photo-oxidation
?Lth6TTd Sta^e ofJthe chemical with oxidants in solution,
in which the oxidants are formed by reactions of dissolved or suspended
Xldat on' ™ }£S,|1!-SOlUt1on! tihese reacti°ns are termed therm P
' 10n-°r Simpl oxidation- The ultimate driving
'
reac-
In HSPF, photo-oxidation is considered as one of the photo-initiated pnra
processes collectively labelled as photolysis. Consequently" only thermal
°-Sidered 1nthe folowing formulation. The rate of oxidat on of
'
(4)
KROX = KOX*ROC*(THOX**TW20)
where:
KROX
KOX
ROC
THOX
TW20
oxidation rate constant for qua! adjusted for free
radical oxygen concentration and water temperature
base oxidation rate coefficient for qua!
free radical oxygen concentration expressed as moles/1 (M)
temperature correction parameter for oxidation
TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20 0
"1 d"a
f°r
1s
Photolysis
Photochemical transformation of chemicals can occur when energy in the form of
light is absorbed by a molecule, placing it in an excited state from which
a iSelf'Ssorb^lah?110*?^8 °f ChemiCals °CCUrs when the chSilSal
itself absorbs light and undergoes reaction from its excited state
171
-------
Module Section GQUAL
Indirect photolysis occurs when another chemical species, called a sensitizer,
absorbs light and the sensitizer transfers energy from its excited state to
another chemical, which then undergoes reaction. There are many types of
photochemical reactions, including oxidation, reduction, hydrolysis, substitu-
tion, and rearrangement. In practice it is possible to measure the rate
constant for photochemical reaction or a reaction quantum yield without knowing
the types of reactions which are occurring (Mill et al., 1980). The formulation
of photolysis developed for HSPF is intended to measure the net degradation of a
generalized quality constituent which results from photochemical reactions.
The basic equation for rate of loss of a qual in dilute solution in an environ-
mental water body due to absorbance of light of wavelength lambda is given by:
KPHOL - ((PHI*INLITL)/DEP)*FSLAM*FQLAM
(5)
where:
KPHOL
PHI
INLITL
DEP
FSLAM
FQLAM
rate of loss of qual due to photolysis from absorption
of light of wavelength lambda
reaction quantum yield for photolysis of qual expressed
in moles/einstein
incident light intensity of wavelength lambda in
einsteins/cmZ.day
depth of water
fraction of light absorbed by the system
fraction of absorbed light that is absorbed by qual
The solution technique outlined by Mill and implemented in HSPF uses seasonal
day-averaged, 24-hour light intensity values (LLAM) for 18 wavelength intervals
from 300 nm to 800 nm. In order to use these values, the relationship between
the light intensity variable (INLITL) in Eq. 5 and the tabulated values for LLAM
must be defined. The relationship derived by Mill for relatively clear water or
shallow depths can be written as:
INLITL - LLAM/2.3*BETA (6)
where:
BETA - LLIT/DEP
LLIT = path length of light through water
DEP - depth of water
Further, the effects of cloud cover on light intensity are introduced by adding
factor CLDLAM:
INLITL - (LLAM/2.3*BETA)*CLDLAM
where:
CLDLAM = fraction of total light intensity of wavelength
lambda which is not absorbed or scattered by clouds
(7)
172
-------
Module Section GQUAL
CLDLAM is calculated as:
CLDLAM = (10.0 - CC*KCLDL)/10.0
where:
CC
KCLDL
cloud cover in tenths
efficiency of cloud cover in intercepting light
of wavelength lambda, a user supplied parameter (default value 0 0)
KPHOL = ((PHI*LLAM*CLDLAM)/2.3*BETA*DEP)*FSLAM*FQLAM
by the
FSLAM - 1.0 - 10**(-KLAM*LLIT)
' KLAM' 1B this
two components for
KLAM = ALPHL + EPSLAM*C
where:
ALPHL
,
base absorbance term for light of wavelength lambda
CDCI AM fur *ue system exP^essed as /cm
EPSLAM = absorbance term for light of wavelength lambda
absorbed by qua! expressed as I/mole. cm
t = concentration of qual expressed as moles/1
KLAM = ALPHL + EPSLAM*C + GAMLAM*SED + DELLAM*PHYTO
where:
(12)
PHYTO
phytoplankton concentration in mg/1
expression for FSLAM is obtained: ( ' )} the final fom of the
FSLAM = 1.0 - 10**(-1.2*KLAM*DEP)
(13)
173
-------
Module Section GQUAL
The remaining term of the general equation for photolysis (Eq. 9) which must be
evaluated is FQLAM, the fraction of total absorbed light that is absorbed by the
qua!. This term is evaluated as:
FQLAM - (EPSLAM*C)/KLAM (14)
Eq. 9 can be rewritten as:
PHOFXL - ((PHI*LLAM*CLDLAM)/2.3*BETA*DEP)* (15)
(1.0 - 10**(-1.2*KLAM*DEP))*(EPSLAM*C/KLAM)
To obtain the rate of loss of qua! due to photolysis from absorption of light of
all wavelength intervals, Eq. 15 must be summed over L.LAM:
KPHO - (PHI/(2.76*DEP))*(SUM [1 to 18] ((LLAM* (16)
CLDLAM*EPSLAM/KLAM)*(1.0 - EXP(-2.76*KLAM*DEP))
The equation for the degradation rate due to photolysis used in HSPF is further
complicated by correction factors for surface shading and water temperature. The
final rearranged and expanded formulation is:
KPHO - (CF*DELT60/24.)*PHI*(SUM [1 to 18] ((LLAM* (17)
CLDLAM/2.76*KLAM*DEP)*(1.0 - EXP(-2.76*KLAM*
DEP))*EPSLAM))*THPHO**TW20
where: ,...,. . r i
SUM ~ summation of function in ( ) over limits in [ J
CF = factor accounting for surface shading
DELT60/24 - conversion from day to ivl
THPHO - temperature correction parameter for photolysis
TW20 « TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0
For simulation intervals of less than 24 hours, photolysis is assumed to occur
only between 6:00 AM and 6:00 PM during approximate daylight hours. In order to
obtain a solution which is reasonably consistent with the input seasonal, day-
averaged, 24-hour light intensity values, the daily light intensity is assumed
to be uniformly distributed over the 12 hours from 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM. Conse-
quently, calculated photolysis rates are doubled during daylight hours and set
equal to zero for non-daylight hours. It should be noted that five look-up
tables for solar intensity values (LLAM) are incorporated into HSPF. Tables
4 2(3).6-1 through 4.2(3).6-5 show the values for seasonal day-averaged, 24 hour
light intensity at 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 degrees latitude. The Run Interpreter
checks the input latitude for the study area and selects the appropriate table
from which to extract values. Additional input required to simulate photolysis
in subroutine DDECAY include:
1. Molar absorption coefficients for each of the 18 wavelengths
2. Reaction quantum yield for qua! (PHI)
3. Temperature correction parameter for photolysis (THPHO)
4. 18 values for base absorbance term for water system (ALPHL)
174
-------
Module Section 6QUAL
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
18 values for absorbance term for light absorbed bv
suspended sediment (GAMLAM)
18 values for absorbance term for light absorbed by
phytoplankton (DELLAM) y
Cloud cover values. Either a time series or 12 monthly
values may be supplied.
Total suspended sediment values. Either a time series
or 12 monthly values may be supplied.
Phytoplankton values. Either a time series or 12
monthly values may be supplied.
Table 4.2(3).6-1 Solar Intensity Values for Latitude 10
Wavelength, Solar Intensity, milli-einsteins/cm2.day
Nanometers Spring Summer Fall Winter
300
303.75
308.75
313.75
318.75
323.1
346
370
400
430
460
490
536.25
587.5
637.5
687.5
756
800
1.02E-2
1.78E-2
2.85E-2
3.27E-2
4.18E-2
3.70E-2
3.39E-1
4.33E-1
8.40E-1
1
1
1
2
2
2,
2,
2,
,16
,47
50
74
90
90
80
70
3.00
4.66E-4
3.16E-3
9.37E-3
1.90E-2
2.91E-2
2.65E-2
3.29E-1
4.38E-1
8.37E-1
,17
,47
50
69
79
80
80
70
4.19E-4
2.87E-3
8.51E-3
1.73E-3
2.66E-2
2.91E-2
2.99E-1
3.85E-1
7.64E-1
1.07
1.36
1.37
2.50
2,
2,
2.
2.
2.
46
52
60
60
50
3.20E-4
2.39E-3
7.26E-3
1.51E-2
2.38E-2
2.36E-2
2.92E-1
3.44E-1
6.96E-1
9.80E-1
23
27
26
35
43
30
40
2.30
2.10
175
-------
Module Section GQUAL
Volatilization
Volatilization of a chemical that is dissolved in water is defined as the
transport of the chemical from the water to the atmosphere. The concentration
of the chemical in water decreases even though a transformation does not occur.
Thus, volatilization is not a degradation process in the strict sense, since the
chemical which leaves a water body by volatilization is not biologically or
chemically degraded. Current evidence suggests that volatilization is likely to
be the major aquatic fate of low molecular weight, nonpolar compounds that are
not rapidly biodegraded or chemically transformed. Volatilization rates of
higher molecular weight compounds can also be significant under certain condi-
tions (Smith, 1979).
In HSPF, the volatilization rate of a qua! is tied to the oxygen reaeration
coefficient:
KVOL - KOREA*CFGAS
(18)
where:
KVOL
KOREA
CFGAS
rate of loss of qual from water due to volatilization
oxygen reaeration coefficient calculated by subroutine
OXREA (4.2(3).7.1.2)
ratio of volatilization rate of qual to oxygen reaeration
rate, an input parameter.
The value for input parameter CFGAS can be determined as the ratio of the
molecular diameter of oxygen to the molecular diameter of the qual.
Biodegradation
Biodegradation is one of the most important processes for transformation of
chemical compounds when they enter into natural environments. Many organic
chemicals are used by living cells for carbon and energy sources. Microorgan-
isms metabolize a wide variety of organic compounds, including many man-made
chemicals (Chou, 1980). The rate of biodegradation of a dissolved qual is
expressed as a function of the concentration of biomass which degrades the qual
(BIO) and water temperature:
KBIO - KBMASS*BIO*(THBIO**TW20)
(19)
where:
KBIO
BIOCON
BIO
THBIO
TW20
biodegradation rate constant for qual adjusted for
biomass concentration and water temperature
base biodegradation rate coefficient for qual
concentration of biomass that is involved in qua] degradation
temperature correction parameter for biodegradation
TW (water temperature in degrees C) - 20.0
178
-------
Module Section GQUAL
Biomass data may be supplied by a constant, 12 monthly values, or a time series.
HSPF allows for the fact that a different population of microorganisms can be
involved in the biodegradation of each different generalized quality constituent
by requiring the user to specify a unique set of biomass data for each constitu-
ent which is simulated.
Generalized First-order Decay
Generalized first-order decay of the dissolved state of a qual may be simulated
in addition to, or instead of, the individual decay processes outlined above.
The equation used to calculate rate of decay is:
(20)
KGEN = KGEND*THGEN**TW20
where:
KGEN = generalized first-order decay rate for a qual
corrected for temperature
KGEND = base first-order decay rate for a qual
THGEN = temperature correction parameter for first-order decay
After decay rates for all of the processes which are active for a qua! have been
calculated, they are summed to determine a total decay rate. At this point the
total loss of qual material resulting from decay is evaluated-
DDQALT = DQAL*(1.0 - EXP(-KIOTO))*VOL
(21)
where:
DDQALT
DQAL
KTOTD
VOL
loss of qual due to all forms of degradation,
expressed in (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/1)*(m3/ivl)
concentration of dissolved qual in concu/1
total decay rate of qual per interval
volume of water in the RCHRES
Finally, to determine the amount of material degraded by each individual
process, a linear proration is performed based on the total decay of material:
DDQAL(I) = (K(I)/KTOTD)*DDQALT
(22)
where:
DDQAL(I)
loss of qual due to decay by process I, expressed
in (concu/1)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/1)*(m3/ivl)
decay rate due to process I expressed in units of /ivl
179
-------
Module Section GQUAL
(subroutine ADVQAL)
Purpose
ADVQAL simulates the advective processes for the quality constituent (qua!)
attached to one sediment size fraction. Processes handled in this subroutine
include:
1. Inflow to the RCHRES of qua! attached to suspended sediment.
2. Migration of qua! from suspension in the water to the bed as a result of
deposition of the sediment to which the qua! is adsorbed.
3. Migration of qua! from the bed into suspension in the water as a result
of scour of the bed sediments to which the qua! is adsorbed.
4. Outflow from the RCHRES of qua! attached to suspended sediment,
Method
The movement of adsorbed qual is completely dictated by the movement of the
sediment to which it is attached. All fluxes of adsorbed qual are expressed as
the product of the flux of a sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay) and the
concentration of qual associated with that fraction (expressed in concu per mg
of sediment). Likewise, storages of adsorbed qual are expressed as the product
of the sediment fraction storage and the associated concentration of qual. A
simplified flow diagram of sediment and associated qual fluxes and storages is
provided in Figure 4.2(3).6-2 to facilitate the following discussion. Note that
ADVQAL is designed to operate on one sediment fraction and one qual each time it
is called by subroutine GQUAL.
If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that scour of bed
storage of a sediment fraction occurs, the following actions are taken in
ADVQAL:
1. Bed storage of adsorbed qual is updated.
2. Flux of qual from bed to suspension (DSQAL) is set equal to the bed
storage of the qual (RBQAL) if the entire bed storage of the sediment
fraction is scoured.
3. If only part of the bed storage of the sediment fraction is scoured, the
flux of qual from bed to suspension is calculated as:
DSQAL - BQAL*DEPSCR (23)
180
-------
Module Section 6QUAL
Sediment 1 OUAL
ISED
RSED
(storage)
>
k
^
1
ROSED 1 ISQAL
~ - 1 — P"
I
i
RSQAL
(absorbed
storage)
SQAL
(absorbed
concentration)
SUSPENSION k
i *
1
I
— -- — "- — p- — — — — '
DEPSCR ,
BED
BSED
(storage)
i
i
1
1
1
k.
>
ROSQAL
*
DSQAL
f
RBQAL
(absorbed
storage)
BQAL
(absorbed
concentration)
I
1
Figure 4. 2(3). 6-2 Simplified flow diagram for important fluxes and storages of
sediment and associated qua! used in subroutine ADVQAL
181
-------
Module Section GQUAL
where:
DSQAL = amount of qua! scoured from bed and added to
suspension expressed in (concu/l)*(ft3/
ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
BQAL = concentration of qua! on bed sediment fraction
under consideration in concu/mg sediment
DEPSCR « amount of sediment fraction which is scoured from
the bed expressed in mg.ftS/l.ivl or mg.mS/l.ivl
4. Concentration of adsorbed qua! in suspension is
updated to account for scour:
SQAL = (ISQAL + RSQALS - DSQAL)/(RSED + ROSED) (24)
where:
SQAL = concentration of adsorbed qual in suspension
expressed as concu/mg suspended sediment fraction
ISQAL - inflow of qual to the RCHRES as a result
of inflowing sediment fraction, expressed
as (concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/ivl)
RSQALS * storage of qual on suspended sediment fraction
expressed in (concu/l)*ft3 or (concu/l)*m3
RSED » amount of sediment fraction in suspension
at end of interval expressed in mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l
ROSED » amount of sediment fraction contained in
outflow from the RCHRES during the interval
expressed in mg.ftS/l.ivl or mg.mS/l.ivl
5. Amount of qual leaving the RCHRES as outflow is determined as:
ROSQAL = ROSED*SQAL (25)
If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that deposition of
suspended sediment occurs, ADVQAL performs the following operations:
1. Concentration of qual on total suspended sediment fraction (inflow +
suspended storage) for the RCHRES is calculated:
SQAL - (ISQAL + RSQALS)/(RSED + DEPSCR + ROSED) (26)
2. Amount of qual leaving the RCHRES due to outflow of sediment fraction is
determined:
ROSQAL - ROSED*SQAL (27)
3. Amount of qual leaving suspension due to deposition of the sediment to
which it is adsorbed is found by:
DSQAL - DEPSCR*SQAL (28)
182
-------
Module Section GQUAL
4. The concentration of qual on sediment in suspension is set equal to zero
if the suspended storage of sediment is zero.
5. The concentration of qual on bed sediment is set equal to zero if the
storage of bed sediment at the end of the interval is zero.
6. If there is bed sediment at the end of the interval, the bed storage of
qual associated with the sediment fraction is calculated as:
RBQAL = DSQAL + RBQALS
7. The concentration of qual on bed sediment is determined:
BQAL = RBQAL/BSED
(29)
(30)
where :
BSED = storage of sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay)
in the bed, expressed as mg.ft3/l or mg.mS/l
operation which ADVQAL performs is the computation of outflow of
The al or?thm ]^°Ug individ"al gates (when more than one exit is specified).
OSQAL (I) = ROSQAL*OSED(I)/ROSED
where:
OSQAL(I) = outflow of adsorbed qual through gate I
S?rS?t> = tota1 outflow of adsorbed qual from RCHRES
USED(I) = outflow of sediment fraction through gate I
(31)
4.2(3).6.3
Purpose
Simulate Decay of Adsorbed Material
(subroutine ADECAY)
on. AVS 3 9enera 1Z^d su?routine which calculates the amount of decay experi-
enced by a generalized quality constituent (qual) adsorbed to inorganic sedi-
n±'fn^S subrm"y 1* called twice (once for decay on suspended sedimeni and
?s Sed?LSCX^iSdHSedJSnt) f°r eacl?generalized quality constituent which
bv ^?J?nn nJi?!??}? ?d* (It-e USer ?Pecif1es th^ a qual is sediment-associated
tha+ Ih 3 QALFG(7)=1/°^ ^e qual in the User's Control Input.) HSPF assumes
of LJ?Lnt°a^ rate ?f*a Pa*:ticular adso^bed Qua! is the same for all fractions
fS
183
-------
Module Section GQUAL
Method
Necessary information which must be supplied to the subroutine includes:
1. ADDCPM(l) - decay rate for qua! on sediment being
considered (suspended or bed)
i • , '"n'
2. ADDCPM(2) - temperature correction coefficient for decay
3. RSED(l-S) - the storage of each sediment fraction
expressed in mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l (for
either suspended or bed sediment)
4. SQAL(l-S) - the concentration of qua! associated with
the 3 fractions of sediment (concu/mg)
First, the temperature-adjusted decay rate is calculated:
DK =• ADDCPM(1)*ADDCPM(2)**TW20 (32)
where:
TW20 - TW (water temperature) - 20.0 in degrees C.
Next, the fraction of adsorbed qual which decays during the simulation interval
(FACT) is calculated using the general form for first-order decay:
FACT - 1.0 - EXP(-DK) (33)
The concentration of qual decayed from each sediment fraction (DCONC) is
determined, and the concentration of qual associated with each fraction is
updated:
DCONC - SQAL(I)*FACT (34)
SQAL(I) - SQAL(I) - DCONC (35)
Finally, the mass of qual decayed from each sediment fraction is calculated:
SQDEC(I) - DCONC*RSED(I) (36)
where:
SQDEC(I) - amount of qual decayed from sediment fraction I expressed in
(concu/l)*(ft3/ivl) or (concu/l)*(m3/iyl)
DCONC « concentration of qual decayed from sediment fraction
expressed in concu/mg
RSED(I) - storage of sediment fraction I expressed in mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l
184
-------
Module Section GQUAL
4.2(3).6.4
Purpose
dissoled
Method
of a Generalized Quality Constituent
the exchange of a generalized quality constituent (qua!)
anadsoed state. Kinetic equil ibrium between
Sand' SiU'
hatM;«;"*k"1^'"wV (°n1?hi and Wise, 1979) for the transfer of a chemical
between the dissolved state and an adsorbed state on sediment type J is:
-d(RSEDJ*SQALJ)/dt + RSEDJ*KJT*(KDJ*DQAL - SQALJ) = 0
(37)
where:
RSEDJ
SQALJ
DQAL
KDJ
KJT
total quantity of sediment type J in the RCHRES
(mg.ft3/l or mg.m3/l)
concentration of qua! on sediment type J expressed in concu/ma
concentration of dissolved qual in concu/1 concu/mg
l mJ«Hc/°V?eIf1c!e3t betWeen dissolved state and sediment type
J (liters/mg) (adsorbed concentration/dissolved concentration)
temperature corrected transfer rate between dissolved
state and sediment type J
Thus, adsorption of a qual by sediment or desorption from sediment is assumpH tn
occur toward an equilibrium condition with transfer rate KJT f the particulate
qua! concentration differs from its equilibrium value. Equat on 37 is actually
snA?!? ?h (°ne f°r 6aCh Sed1ment tyPe J^ Wlt« 7 unknowns (D^AL and 6 values of
?2o f}ii T-6 neces!ary seventh equation is that of conservation of material
The following relation gives the total quantity of qual in the RCHRES both
before and after exchange due to adsorption/desorption' '
SUM [1 to 6](RSEDJ*SQALJ) + VOL*DQAL = TOT
where:
(38)
VOL = volume of water in the RCHRES
To solve numerically, Eq. 37 is expressed in finite difference form:
(39)
where:
SQALJ
SQALJO
DELT
concentration of qual on sediment type J at end of
simulation interval (subsequent to adsorption/desorption)
concentration of qual on sediment type J at start of
simulation interval
simulation time step
185
-------
Module Section GQUAL
The product of the transfer rate for sediment type J and the simulation time
step 1s calculated (AKJ - KJT*DELT), and the resulting value is substituted into
Equations 38 and 39. Two forms of Eq. 38 are written. Eq. 40 expresses conser-
vation of material at the beginning of the simulation interval and Eq. 41
expresses conservation of material at the end of the interval:
- SUM [1 to 6] ((RSEDJ*SQALJO) - VOL*DQALO) = -TOT (40)
- SUM [1 to 6] ((RSEDJ*SQALJ) - VOL*DQAL ) = -TOT (41)
Eq. 39 is rewritten as:
RSEDJ((1.0 + AKJ)/(AKJ*KDJ))*SQALJ - RSEDJ*DQAL = (42)
(RSEDJ*SQALJO)/(AKJ*KDJ)
Equations 41 and 42 can be written in matrix form and solved for unknowns SQALJ
and DQAL using standard procedures such as Gaussian elimination or the Crout
reduction. The solutions are:
DQAL - (TOT - SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ*CJ)/AJJ)/
(VOL + SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ/AJJ))
SQALJ - (CJ/AJJ) -f (DQAL/AJJ)
(43)
(44)
where:
DQAL
SQALJ
concentration of dissolved qua! after adsorption/desorption
concentration of qual on sediment type J after
adsorpti on/desorpti on
AJJ = (1 + AKJ)/(AKJ*KDJ)
CJ - (SQALJO/AKJ*KDJ)
By combining Eqs. 40 and 43, TOT can be eliminated, and a final solution for
DQAL can be obtained:
DQAL - (VOL*DQALO + SUM [1 to 6] (SQALJO - CJ/AJJ)*RSEDJJ) (45)
/(VOL + SUM [1 to 6] (RSEDJ/AJJ))
In subroutine ADSDES, the following variables are used to facilitate the
evaluation of Eqs. 44 and 45:
AINVJ - 1.0/AJJ = (AKJ*KDJ)/(1.0 + AKJ) (46)
CAINVJ - CJ/AJJ - (SQALJO/(1.0_ + AKJ)) (47)
186
-------
Module Section RQUAL
4.2(3).7 Simulate Constituents Involved in Biochemical Transformations
(Section RQUAL of Module RCHRES)
RQUAL is the parent subroutine to the four subroutine groups which simulate
RnmSithr™iinV?lved 1nb]ochem1cal transformations. Within module section
RQUAL the following constituents may be simulated:
dissolved oxygen
biochemical oxygen demand
ammonia
nitrite
nitrate
orthophosphorus
phytoplankton
benthic algae
zooplankton
dead refractory organic nitrogen
dead refractory organic phosphorus
dead refractory organic carbon
total inorganic carbon
PH
carbon dioxide
Four additional quantities are estimated from simulation of these constituents
These quantities are total organic nitrogen, total organic phosphors total
Jhoo^nnf !!£•?•' ™ P/*60^ a ^^hemi cal oxygen demand. The definition of
these quantities is determined by their method of calculation:
TORN
TORP
TORC
POTBOD
where:
TORN
TORP
TORC
POTBOD
ORN
ORP
ORC
BOD
CVBN
CVBP
CVBC
CVNRBO
CVBO
ZOO
PHYTO
= ORN -f CVBN*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO)
= ORP + CVBP*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO)
= ORC + CVBC*(ZOO + PHYTO + BOD/CVBO)
= BOD + CVNRBO*(ZOO + PHYTO)
= total organic nitrogen in mg N/l
= total organic phosphorus in mg P/l
= total organic carbon in mg C/l
- potential BOD in mg 0/1
= dead refractory organic nitrogen in mg N/l
= dead refractory organic phosphorus in mg P/l
= dead refractory organic carbon in mg C/l
= biochemical oxygen demand from dead nonrefractory orqanic
materials in mg 0/1
= conversion from mg biomass to mg nitrogen
= conversion from mg biomass to mg phosphorus
= conversion from mg biomass to mg carbon
= conversion from mg biomass to mg biochemical
(with allowance for non-refractory fraction)
= conversion from mg biomass to mg oxygen
= zooplankton in mg biomass/1
= phytoplankton in mg biomass/1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
oxygen demand
187
-------
Module Section RQUAL
Subroutine RQUAL performs two tasks. First, RQUAL is responsible for calling
the four subroutine groups which simulate the constituents listed above. These
four groups and their functions are:
1. OXRX: simulate primary dissolved oxygen and biochemical oxygen
demand balances ^
2. NUTRX: determine inorganic nitrogen and phosphorus balances
3. PLANK: simulate plankton populations and associated reactions
4. PHCARB: simulate pH and inorganic carbon species
The four groups are listed in their order of execution, and the execution of a
group is dependent upon the execution of the groups listed above it. For
example, subroutine group PHCARB cannot be activated unless OXRX, NUTRX, and
PLANK are active. On the other hand, the reactions in OXRX can be performed
without the reactions contained in the other three subroutine groups.
The other function of RQUAL is to determine the values for variables which are
used jointly by the four subroutine groups. The following variables are
evaluated:
1. AVVELE: the average velocity of water in the RCHRES in ft/s
2. AVDEPE: the average depth of water in the RCHRES in ft
3. DEPCOR: conversion factor from square meters to liters
(used for changing area! quantities from the benthal
surface to equivalent volumetric values based on the
depth of water in the RCHRES)
4. SCRFAC: scouring factor to be used for calculation of benthal
release rates of inorganic nitrogen, orthophosphorus,
carbon dioxide, and biochemical oxygen demand
SCRFAC has one of two values depending on the average velocity of the water in
the RCHRES. AVVELE is compared to the value of parameter SCRVEL, the user
specified velocity at and above which scouring occurs. If AVVELE is less than
the value of parameter SCRVEL, then SCRFAC is set equal to 1.0, arid there is no
increase of benthal release rates due to scouring. If AVVELE is greater than
SCRVEL, SCRFAC is set equal to the value of parameter SCRMUL, which is a
constant multiplication factor applied directly to the release rates to account
for scouring by rapidly moving water.
188
-------
1
Simulate Primary DO and BOD Balances
(Subroutine Group OXRX of Module RCHRES)
Subroutine Group OXRX
4. 2(3). 7.1
Purpose
The purpose of this code is to simulate the primary processes which determine
the dissolved oxygen concentration in a reach or mixed reservoir Dissolved
wpn e" ?once"tr?tlon is generally viewed as an indicator of the overall
well-being of streams or lakes and their associated ecological systems In
•
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
sJst'em ThTBOD^ 1? aVa1JaHe t0 Satisfy *« oxygen requ1?Slnts of the
2- stfte variable represents the total quantity of oxygen required
^
Subroutine OXRX considers the following processes in determining oxygen balance:
1,
2.
3.
4.
5.
longitudinal advection of DOX and BOD
sinking of BOD material
benthal oxygen demand
benthal release of BOD material
reaeration
6. oxygen depletion due to decay of BOD materials
thRCHRpn * Si2k? °f D°X and BOD are Simu1ated in other sections of
the RCHRES module. If module section NUTRX (Section 4.2(3).7 2) is active the
ctn b^ot?±lJ1CaTJ°n ™ d1ssolved oxygen and denitrificat on on BOD balaSc!
can be considered. If module section PLANK (Section 4.2(3) 7 3) is activp the
dissolved oxygen balance can be adjusted to account for photosyntnetfc and' "
SraJry aCJ^ity by Phytoplankton and/or benthic algae aKespirat?on bv
zooplankton Adjustments to the BOD state variable in section PLANK ?n
'^6 t0 ^^ °f lankt°n and "°" gl "ex" ?eti
189
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
RODOX
KOREA * (SATDO-DOX)
Figure 4.2(3).7.1-1 Flow diagram for dissolved oxygen in the OXRX
subroutine group of the RCHRES Application Module
IBOD
OBOD(N)
Outflow
from
RCHRES
through
exit N
ROBOD
,»•••—••••,
Sum of
out-
flows
from
RCHRES
VOL * BOD
Storage
SNKBOD
Fluxes shown in
parentheses ()
are considered
only if the
related quantity
is simulated
Figure 4.2(3).7.1-2 Flow diagram for biochemical oxygen demand in the
OXRX subroutine group of the RCHRES Application
Module
190
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
Subroutine OXRX uses five subroutines to simulate dissolved oxyqen and biochemi
ca oxygen demanAdvection of DOX and BOD is performed by'S^ ^ subro 2l5
4 2 3 'on ' n»X I!i i^° K elua 1S carried out by SINK (subroutine
matlrkl^'Tho nvl^ CUlatef-benthaL°Xygen demand and bentha1 release of BOD
S Enn A' °Xyg?n reaeratlon coefficient is determined by utilizinq OXREA
and BOD decay calculations are performed in BODDEC. uu.nzing UAKLA,
Since subroutine OXREA may also be called by module section GOUAL to obtain -
fS^nET**!011 C??rf1c1ent (KOREA> for Calculation of ^latiTizationraEes
for generalized qualnty constituents, the change in dissolved
1s calculated ?n OXRX
(l)
DOX = DOXS + KOREA*(SATDO - DOXS)
where:
™Jc = disso1lved oxygen concentration after reaeration (mg/L)
™^. = dissolved oxygen concentration at start of interval fma/f }
KOREA = reaeration coefficient calculated in OXREA interval (mg/L)
SATDO = saturated concentration of dissolved oxygen (mg/L)
The saturation concentration of dissolved oxygen is computed at orevalent
atmospheric conditions by the equation: ^mputea at prevalent
SATDO = (14.652 + TW*(-.41022 + TW*(.007991 - .7777E-4*TW)))*
where:
SATDO = saturated cone of dissolved oxygen (mg/L)
TW = water temperature (degrees C)
CFPRES = ratio of site pressure to sea level pressure
(CFPRES is calculated by the Run Interpreter dependent upon
mean elevation of RCHRES) p
(2)
191
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
4.2(3).7.1.1
Simulate Benthal Oxygen Demand and Benthal Release of BOD
(subroutine OXBEN)
Purpose
OXBEN accounts for two possible demands exerted on available oxygen by the
benthos. These two demands are categorized as benthall oxygen demand and benthal
release of BOD materials. Benthal oxygen demand results from materials in the
bottom muds which require oxygen for stabilization. This process results in a
direct loss of oxygen from the RCHRES. The second demand on oxygen caused by
the release and suspension of BOD materials is a less direct form of oxygen
demand. This process increases the pool of BOD present in the RCHRES and exerts
a demand on the dissolved oxygen concentration at a rate determined by the BOD
decomposition kinetics.
Benthal Oxygen Demand
The user approximates the oxygen demand of the bottom muds at 20 degrees Celsius
by assigning a value to BENOD for each RCHRES. The effects of temperature and
dissolved oxygen concentration on realized benthal demand are determined by the
following equation:
BENOX = BENOD*(TCBEN**TW20)*(1.0 - Exp(-EXPOD*DOX))
(3)
where:
BENOX
BENOD
TCBEN
TW20
EXPOD
DOX
amount of oxygen demand exerted by benthal muds (mg/m2/interval)
reach dependent benthal oxygen demand at 20 degrees C
(mg/m2/interval)
temperature correction factor for benthal oxygen demand
water temperature - 20.0 (deg C)
exponential factor to benthal oxygen demand function
(default value = 1.22)
dissolved oxygen concentration (mg/L)
The first portion of the above equation adjusts the demand at 20 degrees Celsius
to a demand at any temperature. The second portion of the equation indicates
that low concentrations of dissolved oxygen suppress realized oxygen demand.
For example, 91 percent of BENOD may be realized at a dissolved oxygen concen-
tration of 2 mg/L, 70 percent at 1 mg/L, and none if the waters are anoxic.
After the value of BENOX has been calculated, the dissolved oxygen state
variable is updated:
DOX - DOX - BENOX*DEPCOR
(4)
where:
DEPCOR
factor which converts from mg/m2 to mg/L, based on the average
depth of water in the RCHRES during the simulation interval
(DEPCOR is calculated in subroutine RQUAL 4.2(3).7)
192
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
Benthal Release of BOD
RELBOD - (BRBOD(l) + BRBOD(2)*Exp(-EXPREL*DOX))*SCRFAC
where:
RRR!X?ii = ?°° released *>y bott°m muds (mg/m2 per interval)
bKBOD(l) = base release rate of BOD materials i**™Mr conditions)
(5)
BRBOD(2) - increment to bottom release rate due to decreasing
cvnnn dissolved oxygen concentration
EXPREL = exponential factor to BOD benthal release function
(default value = 2.82)
srcFAr I d1ssolved oxygen concentration (mg/L)
5LKhAL - scouring factor dependent on average velocity of-.water
^LKI-AL is calculated in subroutine RQUAL 4 2(3) 7)
increased velocity of overlying water disrupts this layer and reiease rTtes of
4. 2(3). 7.1. 2 Calculate Oxygen Reaeration Coefficient (subroutine OXREA)
Purpose
s f
Approach
The general equation for reaeration is:
DOX = DOXS + KOREA*(SATDO - DOXS)
where:
DOX
KOREA
SATDO
DOXS
(6)
dissolved oxygen concentration after reaeration (mg/L)
reaeration coefficient (greater than zero and less than one)
oxygen saturation level for given water temperature (mg/ }
dissolved oxygen concentration at start of interval (mg/L)
193
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
Lake Reaeration
In a lake or reservoir, calculation of reaeration is dependent upon surface
area, volume, and windspeed. The windspeed factor is determined using the
following empirical relationship:
WINDF = WINDSP*(-.46 + .136*WINDSP) (7)
where: , _ i.
WINDF » windspeed factor in lake reaeration calculation
WINDSP » windspeed expressed (m/sec)
For low windspeeds, less than 6.0 m/s, WINDF is set to 2.6. The reaeration
coefficient for lakes is calculated as:
KOREA - (.032808*WINDF*CFOREA/AVDEPE)*DELT60 (8)
*
CFOREA » correction factor to reaeration coefficient for lakes; for lakes
with poor circulation characteristics, CFOREA may be less than
1.0, and lakes with exceptional circulation characteristics may
justify a value greater than 1.0 for CFOREA
AVDEPE - average depth of water in RCHRES during interval (ft)
DELT60 « conversion from hourly time interval to simulation interval
Stream Reaeration
One of three approaches to calculating stream reaeration may be used:
1. Energy dissipation method (Tsivoglou-Wallace, 1972). Oxygen
reaeration is calculated based upon energy dissipation principles:
KOREA - REAKT*(DELTHE/FLOTIM)*(TCGINV**(TW - 20.))*DELTS (9)
where:
REAKT » escape coefficient with a typical value between
.054/ft and .110/ft.
DELTHE = drop in energy line along length of RCHRES (ft)
FLOTIM = time of flow through RCHRES (seconds)
TCGINV s temperature correction coefficient for gas invasion rate
with a default value of 1.047
DELTS = conversion factor from units of per second to units of
per interval
DELTHE, the drop in elevation over the length of the RCHRES, is supplied by the
user. REAKT, the escape coefficient, referred to in Tsivoglou's work, is also
supplied by the user. The value for FLOTIM is calculated by dividing the length
of the RCHRES by the average velocity for the simulation interval. Tsivoglou's
method of calculation is activated by setting the reaeration method flag
(REAMFG) equal to 1.
194
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
2*
^ir,,* °f determ1n1"9 reaeration (Covar, 1976). Reaeration
is calculated as a power function of hydraulic depth and velocity
The generalized equation used is: velocity.
KOREA
REAK*(AVVELE**EXPREV)*(AVDEPE**EXPRED)
*(TCGINV**(TW - 20.))*DELT60
(10)
where:
KOREA =
REAK =
AVVELE =
EXPREV =
AVDEPE =
EXPRED =
TC6INV =
DELT60 =
reaeration coefficient (per interval)
empirical constant for reaeration equation
expressed in units of per hour
average velocity of water in ft/s
exponent to velocity function
average water depth in ft
exponent to depth function
temperature correction coefficient for reaeration
defaulted to 1.047
conversion factor from units of per hour to units of
per interval
EXPREV* nfJEXPREDnKdM?Lh a"p v»1oc'ty' °"e °f three sets of values for REAK,
lr"V ^
formulas and their associated hydraulic conditions and coefficients are:
1. Owen's formula (1964). This formula is used for depths of
and'EXPRED = Las'?" ^ f°rmUla' REM = '9°6' ™EV = 0.67,
*' SioiT-*11 VTula (1962)- This formula is used for high
velocity situations in depths of greater than 2 ft. For this
formula, REAK = .484, EXPREV - .969, and EXPRED 1-1.673.
3* °'5°"no^D°N?in^f0™ula (1958). This formula is used for
lower velocity situations in depths of greater than 2 ft The
coefficient values are: REAK - .538, EXPREV = 0.5, and EXPRED
"~ ~ 1 • 0 •
This method of calculation of reaeration is activated by settinq the
reaeration method flag (REAMFG) equal to 2. setting tne
3. The user may select his own power function of hydraulic depth and
th f rH/0h USS U?der al] co"diti°ns of depth and ve Sclty In
JnJJnS • ' ? S^1QS ValU6S for REAK' EXPREV' and- EXPRED This
option is selected by setting the reaeration method flag (REAMFG) to 3
Reaeration may be modeled as a constant process for any
195
-------
Subroutine Group OXRX
4.2(3).7.1.3 Calculate BOD Decay (subroutine BODDEC)
Purpose
Subroutine BODDEC adjusts the dissolved oxygen concentration of the water to
account for the oxygen consumed by microorganisms as they break down complex
materials to simpler and more stable products. Only carbonaceous BOD is
considered in this subroutine. The BOD decay process is assumed to follow first
order kinetics and is represented by:
BODOX - (KBOD20*(TCBOD**(TW - 20.)))*BOD
(ID
where:
BODOX
KBOD20
TCBOD
TW
BOD
quantity of oxygen required to satisfy BOD decay
in mg/L per interval
BOD decay rate at 20 degrees C per interval
temperature correction coefficient, defaulted to 1.075
water temperature in degrees C
BOD concentration expressed in mg/L
If there is not sufficient dissolved oxygen available to satisfy the entire
demand exerted by BOD decay, only the fraction which can be satisfied is
subtracted from the BOD state variable, and the DOX variable is set to zero.
196
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
4. 2(3). 7. 2 Simulate Primary Inorganic Nitrogen and Phosphorus Balances
(Subroutine Group NUTRX of Moduli RCHRES) fiances
Purpose
EHTy Pr?cesses whi<* determine the balance of
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
i!!n?htiUdinial adve^t1on of dissolved N03, N02, TAM, and P04
oentnal release of inorganic nitrogen (TAM) and P04 (if BENRFG
ammonia ionization (NH3/NH4+ equilibrium)
ammonia vaporization (if AMVFG = 1)
nitrification of N03 and N02
denitrification (if DENFG = 1)
ammonification due to degradation of BOD materials
adsorption/desorpt1on-of TAM and P04 to inorganic sediment in
the water column (if ADNHFG = 1 or ADPOFG = 1) bKUimeni: ln
°f
- n
" '
197
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
Inflow
to
RCHRES
^f Scour/ \
K deposition I
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
Algae uptake
Inflow
to
RCHRES
NH3/NH4
Adsorbed
>
>
"^^ w
y^AdsorptionX
\JDesorption //^
' / Vaporization
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
NH3
NH4
Dissolved
Zoopl. resp.
and death
Inflow
to
RCHRES
(Nitrification
\ s
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
(Benthal \
release /
NO2
Inflow
to
RCHRES
Denitrifi cation
BOD Decay
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
Algae uptake
NO3
Zoopl. resp
and death
(Denitrification
\ /\
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
BOD Decay
198
r
Figure 4.2(3).7.2-1 Flow diagram for inorganic nitrogen in the NUTRX subroutine
group of the RCHRES Application Module
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
Phyto. uptake
Inflow
to
RCHRES
Scour/
deposition
P04
Adsorbed
Inflow
to
RCHRES
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
V s
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
/Adsorption
\Desorption
Zoopl. resp.
and death
Out-
flow
thru
exit
N
Total
out-
flow
from
RCHRES
Benthic algae
uptake
ngure ,.Z13,.7.Z-Z
in the NUTRX group of the
199
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
Subroutine NUTRX utilizes nine principal subroutines to simulate inorganic
nitrogen and phosphorus. Advection of dissolved N03, N02, JAM, and P04 is
performed by ADVECT. BENTH determines the amount of inorganic nitrogen and
phosphorus which is released to the overlying waters from the benthos. The
nitrification and denitrification processes are simulated by NITRIF and DENIT,
respectively. Adsorption/desorption of NH4 and P04 is computed by ADDSNU, and
the advection and deposition/scour of the adsorbed forms are simulated in
ADVNUT. The ammonia ionization and volatilization calculations are performed in
AMMION and NH3VOL, respectively. Finally, the production of inorganic nitrogen
and phosphorus resulting from decay of BOD materials is simulated by DECBAL.
4.2(3).7.2.1 Simulate Benthal Release of Constituents (subroutine BENTH)
Purpose
This subroutine checks to see whether present water conditions are aerobic or
anaerobic, calculates benthal release for a constituent based on this check, and
updates the concentration of the constituent.
Approach
The equation used to calculate release is:
RELEAS - BRCON(I)*SCRFAC*DEPCOR
*
RELEAS = amount of constituent released (mg/L per interval)
BRCON(I) - benthal release rate (BRTAM or BRP04) for constituent
(mg/m2 per interval) '
SCRFAC - scouring factor, dependent on average velocity of the water
(SCRFAC is calculated in subroutine RQUAL)
DEPCOR - conversion factor from mg/m2 to mg/L (computed in subr. RQUAL)
The dissolved oxygen concentration below which anaerobic conditions are consid-
ered to exist is determined by the input parameter ANAER. Two release rates are
required for each of the constituents: one for aerobic conditions and one for
anaerobic conditions. Typically, the aerobic release rate is less than the
anaerobic rate, because a layer of oxidized materials forms on the benthal
surface during aerobic periods, and this layer retards the release rate of
additional benthal materials. BRCON(l) is the aerobic release rate and BRCON(2)
is the anaerobic rate. The choice of which release rate is used is determined
by comparing the current value of DOX to ANAER.
If ammonia is simulated, the inorganic nitrogen release from the benthos is
assumed to be in the form of ammonia, and the TAM state variable is updated. If
ammonia is not simulated, benthal release of inorganic nitrogen is assumed to
not occur. If orthophosphate is simulated, an additional call is made to BENIH
to account for release of P04.
Simulation of benthal release processes is activated by assigning a value of one
to BENRFG in the User's Control Input.
200
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
4. 2(3). 7. 2. 2 Simulate Nitrification (subroutine NITRIF)
Purpose
S}™?ie!l 1S dePendent upon a suitable supply of
NITRIF does not simulate nitrification if the DO
Method
The rate of nitrification is represented by a fi
nitrification is directly proportional to the
o^5izedaTonN02°is?UrUe- The 6qUat10n USSd
TAMNIT = KTAM20*(TCNIT**(TW - 20.))*TAM
where:
J?22I = am°Un- °f T5M ^idation expressed in mg N/L per interval
KTAM20 = ammonia oxidation rate r^ff^i™*. ,f on ;£„»/ ""i-ervai
at du degrees C expressed
(2)
TCNIT =
TW _ ^
TAM = total ammonia concentration in mg N/L
°f
N02NIT = KN0220 * (TCNIT**(TW - 20.)) * N02
to nitrate is
where:
KN0220 = Nn?Unv-2f^°2 oxjdation expressed (mg N/L/interval
ff20: HSrSi"^^^^/*20 de9rees c (/1nte"al)
(3)
, ::,s»«i JIE
DODEMD
3.22 * TAMNIT + 1.11 * N02NIT
where:
(4)
201
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
If the value of DODEMD is greater than available dissolved oxygen, the amounts
of oxidation from NH3 to N02 and from N02 to N03 are proportionally reduced, so
that the state variable BOX maintains a non-negative value. If nitrite is not
simulated, the calculated amount of oxidized ammonia is assumed to be tuny
oxidized to nitrate.
4.2(3).7.2.3 Simulate Denitrification (subroutine DENIT)
Purpose
DENIT simulates the reduction of nitrate by facultative anaerobic bacteria such
as Pseudomonas, Micrococcus, and Bacillus. These bacteria can use N03 for
respiration in the same manner that oxygen is used under aerobic conditions.
Facultative organisms use oxygen until the environment becomes nearly or totally
anaerobic, and then switch over to N03 as their oxygen source. In HSPF, the end
product of denitrification is assumed to be nitrogen gas.
Approach
Denitrification does not occur in the RCHRES module unless the dissolved oxygen
concentration is below a user-specified threshold value (DENOXT). If that
situation occurs, denitrification is assumed to be a first-order process based
on the N03 concentration. The amount of denitrification for the interval is
calculated by the following equation:
DENN03 - KN0320 * (TCDEN**(TW-20)) * N03
(5)
where:
DENN03
KN0320
TCDEN
N03
amount of N03 denitrified (mg N/L per interval)
N03 denitrification rate coefficient at 20 degrees C (/interval)
temperature correction coefficient for denitrification
nitrate concentration (mg N/L)
4 2(3) 724 Simulate Adsorption/Desorption of Ammonia and Orthophosphorus
(subroutine ADDSNU)
Purpose
This subroutine simulates the exchange of nutrient (ammonium and
orthophosphorus) between the dissolved state and adsorption on suspended
sediment. The sorbents considered are suspended sand, silt, and clay, which are
simulated in section SEDTRN. The adsorption/desorption process is not simulated
in bed sediments.
Approach
The adsorption/desorption for each sediment fractionis represented with an
equilibrium, linear isotherm, i.e., a standard Kd approach, which is described
as follows:
202
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
SNUT(J) = DNUT * ADPM(J)
where:
SNUT(J) = equilibrium concentration of adsorbed nutrient on sediment
fraction J (mg/kg)
SfXI/11 = t5e e^111brium concentration of dissolved nutrient (mq/L)
ADPM(J) = adsorption parameter (or Kd) for sediment fraction J (L/kg)
This expression for SNUT(J) is substituted into the following mass balanrP
express10n for total nutrient in the reach: ™"owing mass Daiance
NUM = DNUT*VOL + Z |SNUT(J)*RSED(J)] = total nutrient in reach
J=l,3
(6)
(7)
where:
VOL
RSED(J) = mass of sediment fraction J in suspension (kg)
the
' rearranging> and solvi"9 fo^ DNUT, the following expression
DNUT
NUM
VOL + Z [RSED(J)*ADPM(J)]
J=l,3
(8)
In the above equation, the value of NUM is obtained from a "hon-eauilihHnm"
version of Equation (7) in which temporary DNUT and SNUT values inc Ide Jhe
Jfr th fhother Presses such as advection, scour/deposit on! nitrification
etc that have occurred during the interval. Therefore, the overall prSced2?e
involves performing all processes that affect the nutrient concentrations and
then partitioning (equilibrating) the total mass of nutrient Sg the four
phases, i.e., dissolved phase and three sediment fractions.
Note, the units listed for some variables in the preceding discussion
simplified from the internal (code) HSPF units. ^euing a^cussion
4. 2(3). 7. 2. 5 Simulate Advection and Deposition/Scour of Adsorbed
Ammonia and Orthophosphorus (subroutine ADVNUT)
Purpose
ADVNUT simulates the advective processes for a nutrient (NH3 or P041 at^r
one sediment size fraction. Processes handled i! ! this sib?ou?1n! include:
1. Inflow to the RCHRES of nutrient attached to suspended sediment.
2' reiu^o? dLnft-ent jTIf susP?nsion in the water to the bed as a
result of deposition of the sediment to which the nutrient is adsorbed.
203
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
3 Migration of nutrient from the bed into suspension in the water as a
result of scour of the bed sediments to which the nutrient is adsorbed.
4. Outflow from the RCHRES of nutrient attached to suspended sediment.
Method
The movement of adsorbed nutrient is completely dictated by the movement of the
sediment to which it is attached. All fluxes of adsorbed nutrient are expressed
as the product of the flux of a sediment fraction (sand, silt, or clay) and the
concentration of nutrient associated with that fraction (expressed in mg per kg
of sediment). Likewise, storages of adsorbed nutrient are expressed as the
product of the sediment fraction storage and the associated concentration of
nutrient. Note that the nutrient storage in the bed is essentially infinite.
Nutrients that deposit to the bed are assumed to be lost from the RCHRES, and
scoured sediment is assumed to have a constant (user-specified) adsorbed
nutrient concentration; thus the scoured nutrient flux is limited only by the
storage of sediment in the bed. A simplified flow diagram of sediment and
associated nutrient fluxes and storages is provided in Figure 4.2(3).7.2-3 to
facilitate the following discussion. ADVNUT is designed to operate on one
sediment fraction and one nutrient each time it is called by subroutine NUTRX.
If the sediment simulation in module section SEDTRN indicates that scour of bed
storage of a sediment fraction occurs, the following actions are taken in
ADVNUT:
1. The flux of nutrient from bed to suspension is calculated as:
DSNUT - BNUT*DEPSCR
(9)
where:
DSNUT
BNUT
DEPSCR
amount of nutrient scoured from bed and added to suspension
(mg/L)*(ft3/ivl) or (mg/L)*(ra3/ivl)
constant concentration of nutrient on bed sediment fraction
under consideration (mg/mg sediment)
amount of sediment fraction which is scoured from
the bed (mg.ftS/L.ivl or mg.m3/L.ivl)
2. The concentration of adsorbed nutrient in suspension is updated to
account for scour:
SNUT = (ISNUT + RSNUTS - DSNUT)/(RSED + ROSED)
(10)
204
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
where:
SNUT
TOM,,
ISNUT
RSN..-K
RSNUTS
RSED
oncrn
ROSED
concentration of adsorbed nutrient in suspension
(m9/mg suspended sediment)
inflow of nutrient to the RCHRES as a result of inflowinq
s?diment Action ((mg/L)*(ft3/ivl) or (ng/L)*(m3/1v?7
storage of nutrient on suspended sediment friction
((mg/L)*ft3 or (mg/L)*m3)
amount of sediment fraction in suspension
at 6n? °t 1n5erval (mg.ft3/L or mg.m3/L)
amount of sediment fraction contained in outflow from the RCHRES
during the interval (mg.ftS/L.ivl or mg.mS/L.ivl)
3. The concentration of nutrient on bed sediment is set equal to zero if
the storage of bed sediment at the end of the interval is zero
5. Amount of nutrient leaving the RCHRES as outflow is determined as:
ROSNUT = ROSED*SNUT
SNUT = (ISNUT + RSNUTS)/(RSED + DEPSCR + ROSED)
(12)
°f
ROSNUT = ROSED*SNUT
DSNUT = DEPSCR*SNUT
4.
where :
(13)
of the sediment
(14)
zero if the suspended^foraSe o? sldS Is zer^'0" 1s ^ e
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
4.2(3).7.2.6 Simulate lonization of Ammonia to Ammonium
(subroutine AMMION)
Approach
The total dissolved ammonia state variable (TAM) consists of two forms, NH^ and
NH3. The ionized form is dominant at typical pH's and temperatures found in
nature; however, the un-ionized form is toxic to aquatic species at fairly low
concentrations, and may be significant at some extreme environmental pH's.
Therefore, while the process formulations in HSPF are based on the total
ammonia, the un-ionized form is computed and output.
The fraction (FRAC) of total ammonia that is present as un-ionized ammonia is
calculated as:
IOPH
FRAC =
where:
RATIO
10"" + RATIO
ratio of ionization products for water kw and ammonia (kb)
(16)
RATIO is computed using an empirical relationship based on pH and temperature as
described by Loehr (1973):
RATIO - -3.39753 loge(0.02409 TW) 10s
(17)
The pH used in Equation 16 may be obtained from Section PHCARB (if it is active)
or specified by the user in the form of a constant value, 12 monthly values, or
an input time series.
4.2(3).7.2.7
Simulate Ammonia Volatilization
(subroutine NH3VOL)
Approach
The amount of total ammonia lost from the RCHRES due to ammonia volatilization
is calculated by a standard two-layer model of mass transfer across the air-
water interface; this is based on Henry's Law and the flux of mass through the
water and air films. The inverse of the overall mass transfer coefficient is
given by the following expression:
1 1
— - KRINV =
KR NH3KL
8.21X10'5 * TWKELV
HCNH3 * NH3KG
(18)
206
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
where:
KR
KRINV
NH3KL
NH3KG
HCNH3
8.21E-5
TWKELV
overall mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
inverse of coefficient (hr/cm)
liquid film mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
gas film mass transfer coefficient (cm/hr)
Henry's Law Constant for ammonia (atm-m3/mole)
the ideal gas constant (atm-m3/K/mole)
water temperature (degrees K)
Computation of the liquid-film coefficient is based on correlation with the
reaeration rate (i.e., the rate of transfer of oxygen gas across the interface).
The proportionality constant is a function of the ratio of the molecular
weights. Therefore, the liquid-film coefficient is given by
NH3KL = [KOREA * AVDEPM * 100/DELT60] * [1.878**(EXPNVL/2.)]
(19)
where:
KOREA
AVDEPM
100
DELT60
1.878
EXPNVL
the oxygen reaeration rate (per interval)
average depth of the reach (m)
conversion from meters to centimeters
conversion from units of per interval to units of per hour
ratio of molecular weight of oxygen (32) to ammonia (17)
user-specified exponential factor
Note that in the first part of the above equation, KOREA is being converted to
the same units as NH3KL, i.e., cm/hr.
rn«m?1!1Iarinf!!ner +° the 11c>u1d-film coefficient, the gas-film coefficient is
computed from the water evaporation rate which is primarily driven by the wind
The gas film coefficient is computed as:
(20)
NH3KG =700. * WINDSP * 1.057**(EXPNVG/2.)
where:
700 = an empirical constant relating the wind speed in m/s and the
evaporation rate in cm/hr
WINDSP = wind speed (m/s)
J:2SL = ratio of water molecular weight to that of ammonia
EXPNVG = user-specified exponential factor
The Henry's constant for ammonia (HCNH3) is interpolated from a table of values
based on temperature and pH.
The reach-specific, first-order rate constant for volatilization is computed by:
KNVOL = KR * DELT60/(AVDEPM * 100) (2i)
where:
KNVOL = first-order rate constant for volatilization (/interval)
100 = conversion from units of I/cm to 1/m
207
-------
Subroutine Group NUTRX
Finally, the volatilization loss is computed as:
NH3VLT = KNVOL * TAM
(22)
where:
NH3VLT
TAM
volatilization loss during the interval (mg/L)
concentration of total ammonia (mg/L)
Simulation of ammonia volatilization is activated by setting AMVFG equal to one
in the User's Control Input. Of course total ammonia simulation must also be
activated by setting TAMFG equal to 1.
4.2(3).7.2.8 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Organic to
Inorganic Material (subroutine DECBAL)
Purpose
DECBAL adjusts the inorganic nitrogen and orthophosphorus state variables to
account for decomposition of organic materials.
Method
In subroutine NUTRX the total BOD decay for the time interval is used to compute
the corresponding amounts of inorganic nitrogen and orthophosphorus produced by
the decay are determined as:
DECNIT - BODOX*CVON
DECP04 - BODOX*CVOP
(23)
(24)
where:
BODOX
CVON
CVOP
total BOD decay expressed as mg 0/L per interval
stoichiometric conversion factor from mg oxygen to mg nitrogen
stoichiometric conversion factor from mg oxygen to mg phosphorus
The values for DECNIT and DECP04 are passed to subroutine DECBAL. If ammonia is
simulated, the value of DECNIT is added to the TAM state variable; if not,
DECNIT is added to the N03 state variable., If orthophosphorus is simulated, the
value of DECP04 is added to the P04 state variable.
208
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
4. 2(3). 7. 3 Simulate Plankton Populations and Associated Reactions
(Subroutine Group PLANK of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
PLANK simulates phytoplankton, zooplankton, and/or benthic algae.
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
Figures 4.2(3). 7.3-1 through 4. 2(3). 7. 3-4 illustrate the fluxes and storages of
six constituents which are introduced into the RCHRES modeling system in
subroutine PLANK. In addition to these constituents, the state variables for
dissolved oxygen, biochemical oxygen demand, nitrate, total ammonia, and
orthophosphorus are also updated. If subroutine group PLANK is active (PLKFG =
1), dead refractory organics will automatically be simulated. The state
variables for these organics are ORN (dead refractory organic nitrogen), ORP
(dead refractory organic phosphorus), and ORC (dead refractory organic carbon)
The user must specify whether or not phytoplankton, zooplankton, and/or benthic
algae are simulated by assigning appropriate values to PHYFG,ZOOFG, and BALFG in
the User s Control Input. The state variable PHYTO represents the free floating
£™,;Psy h?tlc a]9ae» zo° represents the zooplankton which feed on PHYTO, and
BENAL is the state variable for algae attached to the benthal surface.
unrunr grouP PLANK is the ] ar9est and most compl ex of the code segments in
the RCHRES module. PLANK uses twelve subroutines to perform simulation of the
w ?n,,n^Bes of P1ankton- Longitudinal advection of PHYTO and ZOO is performed
by ADVPLK, a special advection routine for plankton. ORN, ORP, and ORC are
cT^Cte!by ADVECT- The sinking of PHYTO, ORN, ORP, and ORC is performed by
SINK. The user controls the sinking rate of these constituents by assigning
values to parameters PHYSET and REFSET in the User's Control Input. PHYSET is
the rate of phytoplankton settling, and REFSET is the settling rate for all
three of the dead refractory organic constituents. Advection and sinking are
performed every interval of the simulation period. The remainder of the
PI°Cnr5nromodeled 1n PLANK are only Performed when the average depth of water in
the RCHRES is at least 2 inches. Experience has shown that the algorithms used
to represent these processes are not accurate for excessively shallow waters
If 2 inches or more of water is present in the RCHRES, PLANK performs a series
of operations which are necessary to determine the availability of light to
support algal growth. First the light intensity at the RCHRES surface is
calculated by the following equation:
INLIT = 0.97*CFSAEX*SOLRAD/DELT
(1)
where:
INLIT
0.97
CFSAEX
SOLRAD
DELT
light intensity immediately below water surface (langleys/min)
correction factor for surface reflection (assumed 3 percent)
input parameter which specifies the ratio of radiation
at water surface to gage radiation values. This factor also
accounts for shading of the water body, eg. by trees
solar radiation in langleys/interval
conversion from units of per interval to per minute
209
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
IPrf
J---
INFL
t(
RCH
GROPHY*CVPS
(Net grow
(growth
respiratic
OW
RES
SNKPm
rth\
"I),/
>
t
r
VOL*PH
k.
DTHPHY*CVPS
X" \OPHYT{N)
( Death jrrTri ROPHYT
V. / Outflow r^*"^^^i
\- / from Sum of
RCHRES out-
through flows
exit N from
YlO ™ \ /
Storage w
r
( Sinking j
}
f >
'
2EAT
f, Zooplankton ]
V predation 1
r
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-1 Flow diagram for phytoplankton in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module
IR
{*"—
INFL
t
RCH
V
PHYREF
(Phyto- X
plankton .
death J
.ow
3
RES
*r ^^
SNKOU1
>
t >
BALREF
/^Benthic \OR§F(N)
( algae JfTTl ROREF
V delth } o-mj^ fz^\
f
Dead
refractory
organics
storage
r
( Sinking ^
>
t
1
i.
RCHRES out-
through flows
exit N from
V y/ RCHRES
Jhb.
^
ZREF
^ooplanktonX
> death and I
X^excretion /
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-2 Flow diagram for dead refractory organics in the PLANK
section of the RCHRES Application Module
210
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
IZOO
INFLOW
to
RCHRES
ZOGR
Growth
ZRES
Respiration
VOL*ZOO
Storage
Outflow
from
RCHRES
through
exitN
ZDTH
Death
ROZOO
- *
Sum of
out-
flows
from
RCHRES
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-3 Flow diagram for zooplankton in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module
(GROBAL*CVPS)/DEPCqR
Net growth
(growth-
respiration)
(DTHBAL*CVPS)/DEPCOR
Death
(VOL/AVDEPE)
* BENAL
Storage
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-4 Flow diagram for benthic algae in the PLANK section of
the RCHRES Application Module
211
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
After light intensity at the water surface has been calculated, PLANK determines
the factors which diminish the intensity of light as it passes downward from the
surface. In addition to the natural extinction due to passage through water,
extinction may result from interference caused by total! suspended sediment or
phytoplankton. If SDLTFG is assigned a value of one, the contribution of total
suspended sediment to light extinction is calculated as:
EXTSED - LITSED*SSEDT
(2)
where:
EXTSED
LITSED
SSEDT
increment to base extinction coefficient due to total
suspended sediment in units of /ft
multiplication factor to total suspended sediment cone.
(supplied in User's Control Input)
total suspended sediment (sand + silt + clay) in mg/L
The contribution of suspended phytoplankton to light extinction is determined by
the empirical relationship:
EXTCLA - .00452*PHYCLA
(3)
where:
EXTCLA
increment to base extinction coefficient due to phytoplankton,
in units of per foot
.00452 = multiplication factor to phytoplankton chlorophyll a
concentration
PHYCLA - phytoplankton concentration as micromoles chlorophyll a/L
After values for INLIT, EXTSED, and EXTCLA have been calculated, PLANK calls
subroutine LITRCH to determine the light correction factor to algal growth and
the amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae. Once these
calculations have been completed, PLANK checks a series of flags to determine
which types of plankton are to be simulated. If PHYFG is assigned a value of
one, simulation of phytoplankton is performed by a group of six subroutines.
Zooplankton are simulated by a group of three subroutines if ZOOFG is given a
value of one. Zooplankton simulation can be performed only if the phytoplankton
section is active. Finally, a value of one for BALFG activates benthic algae
simulation by a group of five subroutines.
212
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
4.2(3).7.3.1 Advect Plankton (subroutine ADVPLK)
Purpose
ADVPLK performs the advection of phytoplankton and zooplankton. The normal
advection method (subroutine ADVECT) used in the RCHRES module assumes that each
constituent concentration is uniform throughout the RCHRES. This assumption is
not valid for plankton. Both phytoplankton and zooplankton locate their
breeding grounds near the channel boundaries. Since the water near the bound-
aries moves downstream much more slowly than the mean water velocity, the
plankton populations have a much longer residence time in the RCHRES than would
be indicated by the mean flowtime. The geographical extent of the plankton
breeding grounds is inversely related to the flow rate. At low flows, large
areas of slow moving waters which are suitable for breeding exist along the
channel boundaries. As flowrates increase, more and more of these areas are
subject to flushing. The special advection routine is critical to plankton
simulation, because the only source of plankton is within the reach network.
Thus an upstream RCHRES with no plankton inflows can maintain a significant
plankton population only if the growth rate of plankton exceeds the rate at
which plankton are advected out of the RCHRES. Since biological growth rates
nrunly?ically much slower than "normal" advection rates, few free-flowing
RCHRES s could maintain a plankton population without the use of the special
advection routine. H
Method
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-5 illustrates the relationships used to perform plankton
advection.
MXSTAY
SEED
OREF
OFLO (ff/sec)
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-5 Relationship of parameters for special
advection of plankton
213
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
ADVPLK assumes that a certain concentration of plankton (STAY) is not subject
to advection, but any excess of organisms will be advected in the normal way. A
small population (SEED) of plankton are never subject to advection, even during
the periods of greatest flow. The maximum concentration of plankton which is
not subject to advection (MXSTAY) occurs during low flow conditions. Each
simulation interval ADVPLK calculates STAY based on thevalues of these two
parameters and OREF. OREF is the outflow rate at which STAY has a value midway
between SEED and MXSTAY. First, the average flow rate through the RCHRES for
the interval is calculated:
OFLO - (SROVOL + EROVOL)/DELTS (4)
where:
OFLO « average flow rate (ft3/s or m3/s)
DELTS « number of seconds per interval
SROVOL and EROVOL are as defined in Section 4.2(3).2
The concentration of plankton which is not subject to advection is then deter-
mined:
STAY - (MXSTAY - SEED)*(2.0**(-OFLO/OREF)) + SEED (5)
where:
STAY » plankton concentration not advected in mg/L
MXSTAY - maximum concentration not subject to advection
SEED * concentration of plankton never subject to advection
OREF = outflow rate at which STAY has a value midway between
SEED and MXSTAY (ft3/s or m3/s)
The amount of plankton not subject to advection is converted to units of mass
(MSTAY) by multiplying STAY by the volume in the RCHRES at the start of the
interval (VOLS). The concentration of plankton which is advected is:
PLNKAD - PLANK - STAY (6)
ADVPLK calls subroutine ADVECT (4.2(3).3.1) to perform longitudinal advection of
the quantity PLNKAD. The updated value of PLNKAD is then added to the amount of
plankton which did not undergo advection to determine the concentration of
plankton in the RCHRES at the end of the interval:
PLANK - PLNKAD + MSTAY/VOL (7)
where:
PLANK - concentration of plankton at end of interval
PLNKAD « concentration of advected plankton which remain in RCHRES
MSTAY « mass of plankton not advected
VOL - volume in RCHRES at end of interval
If the concentration of plankton in the RCHRES at the start of the interval is
less than the value assigned to SEED, advection of plankton is not performed in
the RCHRES, and the value of PLANK at the end of the interval is calculated as:
214
-------
PLANK - (MSTAY + IPLANKJ/VOL
Subroutine Group PLANK
(8)
where:
IPLANK = mass of plankton which enters RCHRES during interval
4.2(3).7.3.2 Calculate Light-related Information Needed for Algal Simulation
(subroutine LURCH)
Purpose
Subroutine LURCH determines the light correction factor to algal growth and the
amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae.
Method
ID?c?neral1 11ght extinction factor for the interval is obtained by adding
EXTSED and EXTCLA to the base extinction coefficient (EXTB). The value of EXTB
is assumed constant for a particular RCHRES and must be assigned in the User's
Control Input. The resulting sum (EXTCO) is used to calculate the euphotic
depth, which is the distance below the surface of the water body at which 1
percent of the light incident on the surface is still available-
EUDEP = 4.60517/EXTCO
(9)
where:
EUDEP
EXTCO
euphotic depth in ft
total light extinction coefficient in units of per foot
HSPF assumes that growth of algae occurs only in the euphotic zone (that is, the
water above euphotic depth). When EUDEP has been calculated, it is possible to
assign a value to CFLIT, the light correction factor to algal growth. A value
+1'0 Is4assi9ned to CFLIT if the calculated euphotic zone includes all the
water of the RCHRES. CFLIT = EUDEP/AVDEPE, if the euphotic depth is less than
the average depth of water (AVDEPE). CFLIT is used in subroutine ALGRO, to
adjust the computed rate of algal growth.
Finally, the amount of light available to phytoplankton and benthic algae is
calculated. The equation used to calculate the amount of light available to
phytoplankton assumes that all phytoplankton are at mid-depth in the RCHRES-
PHYLIT = INLIT*Exp(-EXTCO*(.5*AVDEPE))
(10)
where:
PHYLIT
INLIT
EXTCO
AVDEPE
light available to phytoplankton in langleys/min
light available at water surface in langleys/min
light extinction coefficient in /ft
average depth of water in the RCHRES in ft
215
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
The equation used to calculate the amount of light available to benthic algae
assumes that all benthic algae are at AVDEPE below the surface of the RCHRES:
BALLIT - INLIT*Exp(-EXTCO*AVDEPE) (11)
4.2(3).7.3.3 Simulate Phytoplankton (subroutine PHYRX)
Purpose
PHYRX simulates the algae which float in the waters of a RCHRES. Because these
organisms use energy from light to produce organic matter, they are called
primary producers and are considered the first trophic level in the aquatic
ecosystem. The biological activity of the ecosystem is dependent upon the rate
of primary production by these photosynthetic organisms. The activities of the
phytoplankton are in turn affected by the physical environment. Through the
process of photosynthesis, phytoplankton consume carbon dioxide and release
oxygen back into the water. At the same time, algal respiration consumes oxygen
and releases carbon dioxide. Phytoplankton reduce the concentration of nutri-
ents in the water by consuming phosphates, nitrate, and ammonia. Through
assimilation these nutrients are transformed into organic materials which serve
as a food source for members of higher trophic levels. A portion of the organic
matter which is not used for food decomposes, which again affects the oxygen and
nutrient concentrations in the water. Where the phytoplankton population has
grown excessively, much of the available oxygen supply of the water may be
depleted by decomposition of dead algae and respiration. In this situation,
phytoplankton place a serious stress upon the system.
Approach
To describe quantitatively the dynamic behavior of phytoplankton populations, a
number of assumptions must be made. PHYRX treats the entire phytoplankton
population as if it were one species, and the mean behavior of the population is
described through a series of generalized mathematical formulations. While such
an approach obscures the behavior of individual species, the overall effect of
the phytoplankton population on the quality of the water can be modeled with
reasonable accuracy.
The HSPF system assumes that biomass of all types (phytoplankton, zooplankton,
benthic algae, dead organic materials) has a consistent chemical composition.
The user specifies the biomass composition by indicating the carbon:nitrogen:
phosphorus ratio and the percent-by-Weight carbon. This is done by assigning
values to the following parameters:
1. CVBPC: number of moles of carbon per mole of phosphorus in biomass
(default = 106)
2. CVBPN: number of moles of nitrogen per mole of phosphorus in
biomass (default = 16)
216
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
3. BPCNTC: percentage of biomass weight which is carbon
(default = 49)
The algorithms used in PHYRX and its subroutines require that the phytoplankton
population be expressed in units of micromoles of phosphorus per liter PHYRX
converts the value for state variable PHYTO in milligrams biomass per liter into
micromoles phosphorus per liter and assigns this value to the internal state
variable STC (standing crop).
PHYRX uses five subroutines to simulate phytoplankton. ALGRO computes unit
growth and respiration rates and determines the growth limiting factor for the
phytoplankton. If the amount of growth exceeds the amount of respiration for
the interval, GROCHK adjusts growth to account for nutrient limitations. PHYDTH
SiCn?D Snor aT2nn°f deat!) oaring during the interval. State variables
ORN, ORP, ORC, and BOD are updated by ORGBAL to account for materials resulting
™2m,E"{toP1ankt?n death. Finally, NUTRUP adjusts the values for P04, N03, and
IAM (total ammonia) to account for uptake of nutrients by phytoplankton. In
Juviv ?" these updates, the dissolved oxygen state variable is adjusted in
PHYRX to account for the net effect of phytoplankton photosynthesis and respira-
i* I on *
DOX = DOX + (CVPB*CVBO*GROPHY)
(12)
where:
CVPB
CVBO
GROPHY
conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
conversion factor from mg biomass to mg oxygen
net growth of phytoplankton (micromoles phosphorus/L per interval)
After all the operations in PHYRX and its subroutines have been performed, the
value of STC is converted back into units of milligrams biomass per liter and
becomes the updated value of PHYTO.
4.2(3).7.3.3.1 Calculate Unit Growth and Respiration Rates for Alaae
(subroutine ALGRO) s
Purpose
ALGRO calculates the unit growth rate of algae based on light, temperature, and
nutrients. Each time step ALGRO determines the rate limiting factor for growth
and passes a label which identifies the limiting factor to the subroutines
responsible for printed output. The labels and their meanings are as follows-
'LIT'
'NON'
'TEM'
'NIT'
'P04'
'NONE'
'WAT'
Growth is light limited.
Insufficient nutrients are available to support growth
Water temperature does not allow algal growth.
Growth is limited by availability of inorganic nitrogen.
Growth is limited by availability of orthophosphorus.
IherLls.no Iim1tin9 factor to cause less than maximal growth.
Insufficient water is available to support growth
217
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
ALGRO is also responsible for calculating the unit respiration rate for algae.
This subroutine is used in the simulation of both phytoplankton and benthic
algae.
Approach
ALGRO performs a series of initial checks to determine whether or not conditions
are suitable for growth during the interval. If the light intensity for the
interval is less than .001 langleys/min, insufficient light is available for
growth, and growth is not calculated. Likewise, if the concentration of either
inorganic nitrogen or orthophosphorus is less than .001 mg/L, no growth occurs.
If these checks indicate that conditions are suitable for growth, ALGRO next
determines the effects of water temperature on the growth potential.
Temperature Control
The user specifies the temperature preferences of the algae by assigning values
to three parameters: TALGRL, TALGRM, and TALGRH. If the water temperature is
less than the value assigned to TALGRL or greater than the value assigned to
TALGRH, no growth occurs. For water temperatures between TALGRL and TALGRH, a
correction factor to maximum growth rate (MALGR) is calculated. This correction
factor increases in value linearly from 0.0 at TALGRL to 1.0 at TALGRM. Thus,
TALGRM specifies the minimum temperature at which growth can occur at a maximum
rate. ALGRO assumes that there is no temperature retardation of maximum growth
rate for temperatures between TALGRM and TALGRH. The temperature corrected
maximum growth rate is:
MALGRT - MALGR*TCMALG
(13)
where:
MALGRT
MALGR
TCMALG
temperature corrected maximum algal growth rate in
units of per interval
maximum unit growth rate for algae
temperature correction to growth
(TCMALG has a value between 0.0 and 1.0)
Once the temperature correction to potential growth rate has been made, ALGRO
uses Monod growth kinetics with respect to orthophosphorus, inorganic nitrogen,
and light intensity to determine the actual growth rate. The procedure taken in
ALGRO is to consider each possible limiting factor separately to determine which
one causes the smallest algal growth rate during each simulation interval.This
method does not preclude that interactions between factors affect the actual
growth rate; in cases where it has been established that there is such an
interaction, as in the uptake of phosphate, the phenomena are included in the
model. If none of the factors considered is limiting, growth will be maximal
and temperature dependent.
218
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
Phosphorus Limited Growth
d|;Pendent UP°" uPtake of orthophosphorus to provide the continual
Phosphorus necessary for ordinary cellular metabolism and reproductive
15*2 i^sa^
(DiTor°-et ai-I97o>-
(14)
CROP = MALGRT*P04*N03/((P04 + CMMP)*(N03 + CMMNP))
where:
GROP =
MALGRT =
P04
N03
CMMP =
CMMNP =
unit growth rate based on phosphorus limitation (per interval)
temperature corrected maximum algal growth rate
orthophosphorus concentration in mg P/L
nitrate concentration in mg N/L
orthophosphorus Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus
limited growth in mg P/L (CMMP is defaulted to .015 mg P/L)
nitrate Michaelis-Menten constant for phosphorus limited
growth in mg N/L (CMMNP is defaulted to .0284 mg N/L)
Nitrogen Limited Growth
t^tSent-al t0 algae for as^ilation of proteins and enzymes. In the
motn ?he> ni1Wn serves as the essential hydrogen acceptor in the
metabolic pathways which enable organisms to grow. ALGRO allows for two
vllup^f nno"rceS °^ "ST^f ni*r°9en- " ammonia is being simulated and a
MtStS a?2 ulil K'S f the nitrogen source flag (NSFG), both ammonia and
nitrate are used by algae to satisfy their nitrogen requirements. Otherwise
only nitrate is considered in the kinetics formulations. High ratios of ammonia
to nitrate have been found to retard algal growth. If a value of one is
assigned to the ammonia retardation flag (AMRFG), this phenomenon is simulated
MALGN = MALGRT - 0.757*TAM + 0.051*N03
where:
MALGN = maximum unit growth rate corrected for ammonia retardation
(/interval)
MALGRT = temperature corrected maximum unit growth rate
Nitrogen limitation on growth is calculated by the equation:
GRON = MALGN*MMN/(MMN + CMMN)
where:
£S?™'" Uni* growth rate based on nitro9en limitation (per interval)
MALGN = maximum unit growth rate (MALGN has the same value
as MALGRT if AMRFG is set to zero)
2L = i5°tal P?ol°fJnorganic nitr°9en considered available for growth
CMMN = Michaelis-Nenten constant for nitrogen limited growth in
mg N/L (CMMN is defaulted to .045 mg N/L)
(15)
(16)
219
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
Light Limited Growth
The equation used to determine the limitation on growth rate imposed by light
intensity was derived by Dugdale and Macisaac (1971) based on uptake rates of
inorganic nitrogen under varying light intensities:
GROL - MALGRT*LIGHT/(CMMLT + LIGHT)
(17)
where:
GROL
HALGRT
LIGHT
CHMLT
unit growth rate based on light limitation (/interval)
temperature corrected maximum unit growth rate (/interval)
light intensity available to algae in RCHRES (langleys/min)
Michaelis-Menten constant for light limited growth in
langleys/min (CMMLT is defaulted to .033 langleys/min)
Algal Respiration
Algal respiration is dependent upon water temperature and is calculated by the
equation:
RES = ALR20*(TW/20.) (18)
where:
RES
ALR20
TW
unit algal respiration rate in units of per interval
unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C
water temperature in degrees C
4.2(3).7.3.3.2 Check Nutrients Required for Computed Growth (subroutine GROCHK)
GROCHK assures that a minimum concentration of .001 mg/L of each nutrient
remains in the RCHRES waters after growth occurs. If this condition is not
satisfied, the computed growth rate is adjusted accordingly. Orthophosphorus
and inorganic nitrogen are always considered as nutrients. If pH is simulated
(PHFG » 1), the user may specify that carbon dioxide concentration also be
considered as a limiting nutrient by setting the value of DECFG equal to zero.
4.2(3).7.3.3.3 Calculate Phytoplankton Death (subroutine PHYDTH)
Purpose
PHYDTH calculates algal death each interval by using one of two unit death rates
specified in the User's Control Input. ALDL, the low unit death rate, is used
when environmental conditions encourage sustained life. In situations where
nutrients are scarce or the phytoplankton population becomes excessive, ALDH,
the high algal death rate, is used.
220
-------
Method
Subroutine Group PLANK
The high algal death rate, which has a default value of .01/hr, is used
if any one of three conditions exists:
I'
3*
1s less than the val ue of Parameter PALDH
c nitrogen 1s less than the
°f PhytoP1a"kton is greater than the value of
?nrrS±rtthH$etieStS 1nd^ate that ALD" °r *LDL should be used, an
°f
DTHPHY = ALD*STC
where:
DTHPHY
ALD
STC
amount of phytoplankton death as micromoles P/L.interval
unit algal death rate determined by environmental conditions
in units of per interval
concentration of phytoplankton as micromoles P/L
(19)
4. 2(3). 7. 3. 3. 4 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Living
to Dead Organic Material (subroutine ORGBAL)
Purpose
of dead Or9ani« to account for plankton
u 6lther be algal death' zooplankton death, or
whchR!! b{hzo?P1ankton b"t not assimilated. In each case in
which ORGBAL is called, the increments to ORP, ORN, ORC, and BOD are calculated
in the subroutine which makes the call and passed on to ORGBAL ORGBAL is
merely a service program which performs the'additions to these state variables.
4.2(3).7.3.3.5 Perform Materials Balance for Transformation from Inorganic
to Organic Materials (subroutine NUTRUP)
Purpose
state "'
221
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
Method
The adjustments to P04 and C02 are straightforward. The P04 state variable is
always updated; the C02 state variable is only updated if pH is simulated (PHFG
- 1) and carbon dioxide is considered as a limiting nutrient (DECFG = 0).
Adjustment of the inorganic nitrogen state variables is more complex. If
ammonia is not specified as a source of inorganic nitrogen for growth (NSFG =
0), only the N03 state variable is updated to account for net growth. If
ammonia is considered a nutrient (NSFG =1), negative net growth is accounted
for by adding the total flux of nitrogen to the TAM state variable. If net
growth is positive, a portion of the nitrogen flux is subtracted from both the
N03 and TAM state variables. The relative proportions of N03 and TAM are
governed by the value of parameter ALNPR, which is the fraction of nitrogen
requirements for growth which are preferably satisfied by nitrate.
4.2(3).7.3.4 Simulate Zooplankton (subroutine ZORX)
Purpose
ZORX simulates the growth and death of zooplankton, and the resultant changes in
the biochemical balance of the RCHRES. Zooplankton play an important role in
determining the water quality of rivers and lakes. By feeding on the algal,
bacterial, and detrital mass, they are a natural regulator in the aquatic
environment. At the same time zooplankton are a source of food material for
higher trophic levels such as fish. Through excretion, zooplankton provide
nutrients for phytoplankton growth. HSPF is only concerned with those zooplank-
ton which feed on phytoplankton, although in reality zooplankton may be herbi-
vores, omnivores, or carnivores.
Schematic View of Fluxes and Storages
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-3 illustrates the fluxes and storage of zooplankton modeled in
ZORX. In addition to zooplankton, the state variables for dissolved oxygen,
biochemical oxygen demand, total ammonia, nitrate, orthophosphate, and refracto-
ry organics are also updated. Subroutine ZORX considers the following process-
es:
1. filtering and ingestion of phytoplankton by zooplankton
2. assimilation of ingested materials to form new zooplankton biomass
3. zooplankton respiration
4. inorganic and organic zooplankton excretion
5. zooplankton death
222
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
Filtering and Ingestion
thl
1ngested per m11119™n zooplankton is calculated by
ZOEAT = ZFIL20*(TCZFIL**(TW - 20.})*PHYTO
(20)
where:
ZOEAT
ZFIL20
TCZFIL
TW
PHYTO
unit ingestion rate in mg phyto/mg zoo per interval
zooplankton filtering rate at 20 degrees C as
liters filtered/mg zoo per interval
temperature correction coefficient for filtering
water temperature in degrees C
phytoplankton concentration in mg phyto/L
The filtering rate is dependent upon water temperature and phytoplankton
concentration. Rates for most biological activities double for every 10 degrees
dJfail? v^nfnf J",^6™^?' ™e filtering rate meets this criterion if the
default value of 1.17 is used for the temperature correction coefficient TCZFIL.
When the phytoplankton biomass is below a critical concentration, the unit
Inr^Hn? IK ^ be.maximal and constant. As the phytoplankton biomass
ncreases above the critical concentration, the limiting rate is dependent on
IZr!1Ve,,aHd d?Hestlve capabilities, and not on the concentration of the food
3 tAa* +ter these conditions, the filtering rate decreases proportionally
such that the algal biomass ingested remains constant at the value of the
EeTn^r MSpEAVhi-h js defa!!]ted to °'055 "9 Phytoplankton/mg zoopiankton
per hour. The code simulates this by reducing ZOEAT to MZOEAT, if equation 20
gives a value greater than MZOEAT. HSPF assumes that the filtering activities
?h/?±anh-°!; -re 10? ^T1?* erficient; that is, the zooplankton ingest a 11 of
nhwt ? S?lch.ls contained in the water which they filter. The total amount of
phytoplankton ingested by the zooplankton is calculated as:
(21)
ZEAT - ZOEAT*ZOO
where:
™SL = in9ested phytoplankton in mg biomass/L per interval
ZOEAT = unit ingestion rate
ZOO = zooplankton concentration in mg biomass/L
ZORX checks that the calculated amount of ingestion does not reduce the
phytoplankton population to less than 0.0025 micromoles of phosphorus per liter-
tration°at'this le?Il " ^ 1$ adjusted to mai"tain a phytoplankton concen-
Assimilation
oonktcc by W51ch 1n9ested phytoplankton are converted to new
zooplankton mass. The process of assimilation is never 100 percent efficient in
biological systems. Unassimilated food is excreted as organic and Inorganic
waste products. Zooplankton assimilation efficiency is dependen? uJSn qSS ity
223
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
and concentration of food. High quality food is assimilated at high efficiency,
whereas low quality food is mostly excreted as waste resulting in low assimila-
tion efficiency. The relationship between food concentration and assimilation
efficiency is more complex. If the concentration of available food and the
filtering rate of an organism are such that the organism ingests more food than
can be readily used for growth and metabolism, the organism's assimilation
efficiency decreases. The model represents the effect of food quality and
concentration on assimilation as shown in Figure 4.2(3).7.3-6.
The quality of the zooplankton food is assigned in the User's Control Input by
the parameter ZFOOD. Three qualities of food are allowed. From these, one type
must be chosen to represent the overall food source available to the zooplank-
ton:
1 = high quality food
ZFOOD - 2 - medium quality
3 = low quality
,"' • I*, ' h, i , • , i ,'iip
Depending on the value assigned to ZFOOD, the assimilation efficiency ZEFF is
calculated by one of the following equations:
IF ZFOOD - 1 THEN ZEFF = -.06*PHYTO +1.03 (22)
IF ZEFF > 0.99 THEN ZEFF =0.99
IF ZFOOD - 2 THEN ZEFF = -.03*PHYTO + 0.47
IF ZEFF < .20 THEN ZEFF « 0.20
IF ZFOOD - 3 THEN ZEFF = -.013*PHYTO +0.17
IF ZEFF < .03 THEN ZEFF =0.03
These equations are extrapolations from research on Daphnia (Schindler, 1968).
The corrections to ZEFF set reasonable upper or lower limits on efficiency for
assimilating each type of food. The mass of ingested phytoplankton assimilated
by zooplankton is calculated as:
ZOGR - ZEFF*ZEAT (23)
where:
ZOGR « zooplankton growth as mg biomass/L per interval
ZEFF « assimilation efficiency (dimensionless)
ZEAT * ingested phytoplankton in mg biomass/L per interval
224
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
1.0
X 0.8
55N
0.4
0.2
0.0
Subroutine Group PLANK
ZFOOD=1
ZFOOD=2
ZFOOD=3
10
Food Concentration, mg/l
Respiration
Figure 4.2(3).7.3-6 Zooplankton assimilation
efficiency
rnt- t-S bioc!?em1cal Process by which organic molecules are broken
down, resulting in a release of energy which is essential for cellular and
'wi h-n^h5' The ?x1d1ze2 m°lecules ma* e1ther be carbohydrates and
! th the or^nism °r food Pass™9 through the organism's digestive
°aS' the nd esult of Aspiration is a decrease in zoo-
of inorgan1c nutr1ents- The
(24)
ZRES = ZRES20*(TCZRES**(TW - 20.))*ZOO
where:
ZRES
ZRES20
TCZRES
ZOO
zooplankton biomass respired mg zoo/L per interval
respiration rate at 20 degrees C (default= .0015/hr)
temperature correction factor for respiration (default
zooplankton in mg biomass/L
= 1.07)
Excretion Products
Th«« V hS tested food which is not assimilated by the zooplankton
These waste products contain both refractory and nonrefractorv materials
amount of refractory organic excretion is calculated as: materials.
ZREFEX = REFR*ZEXMAS
(25)
225
-------
I
Subroutine Group PLANK
where:
ZREFEX
ZEXMAS
REFR
refractory organic material excreted by zooplankton
mg refractory biomass/L per interval
total mass of zooplankton excretion
(ZEXMAS is the difference between ZEAT and ZOGR)
fraction of biomass which is refractory
(REFR is the complement of parameter NONREF)
The nonrefractory portion of the excretion is released to the water in the form
of inorganic nutrients and undegraded BOD materials. The relative abundance of
the materials is dependent upon the unit ingestion rate of the zooplankton
(ZOEAT). At higher ingestion rates, a larger fraction of the nonrefractory
excretion is not decomposed and is released as BOD materials. In the model the
parameter ZEXDEl is the fraction of nonrefractory excretion which is immediately
decomposed and released to the water as inorganic nutrients when the unit
ingestion rate of the zooplankton is maximal. If the unit ingestion rate is
less than maximal, the model assumes that all the nonrefractory excretion is
released to the water as inorganic nutrients. Thus, the amount of excretion
released as inorganic materials is:
ZINGEX - ZEXDEC*(ZEXMAS - ZREFEX)
(26)
where:
ZINGEX
ZEXDEC
amount of biomass decomposed to inorganic excretion
as mg biomass/L per interval
fraction of nonrefractory inorganic excretion
(ZEXDEC = 1 for ZOEAT <= MZOEAT and ZEXDEC = ZEXDEL for
ZOEAT > MZOEAT. Value of ZOEAT is that given by equation
20; that is, prior to adjustment.)
The remaining portion of the excretion is considered to be BOD materials, and is
calculated as:
ZNRFEX - ZEXMAS - ZREFEX - ZINGEX
(27)
where:
ZNRFEX
amount of biomass released as nonrefractory organic excretion
as mg biomass/L per interval
Death
Zooplankton death is the termination of all ingestion, assimilation, respira-
tion, and excretion activities. After death, zooplankton contribute both
refractory and nonrefractory materials to the system. Under aerobic conditions,
the mass rate of zooplankton death is determined by multiplying the natural
zooplankton death rate, ZD, by the zooplankton concentration. If anaerobic
conditions exist, an increase in zooplankton death rate is modeled by adding the
value of the anaerobic death rate parameter, OXZD, to ZD. The default value of
ZD is 0.0001/hr and that of OXZD is .03/hr.
226
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
Materials Balance for Related Constituents
Research has shown that 1.10 mg of oxygen are consumed for every gram of
zooplankton mass which is respired (Richman, 1958). The DOX state variable is
reduced accordingly in ZORX. If there is not sufficient ojQrgen available to
SM1Sfy !ienSvr?tlon ^^merits, the deficit is added to the BOD state vari-
able, and DOX is set equal to zero.
r nnl fubrout1ne DECBAL (4. 2(3). 7. 2. 4) to update the state variables
JAM, N03, and P04 to account for additions from zooplankton respiration and
inorganic excretion. The amount of inorganic constituents produced by these two
processes is calculated by the following equations:
ZNIT = (ZINGEX +
ZP04 = (ZINGEX +
ZC02 = (ZINGEX +
ZRES)*CVBN
ZRES)*CVBP
ZRES)*CVBC
(28)
where:
ZNIT
ZP04
ZC02
ZINGEX
ZRES
CVBN
CVBP
CVBC
increment to TAM or N03 state variable in mg N/L per interval
increment to P04 state variable in mg P/L per interval
increment to C02 state variable in mg C/L per interval
amount of biomass decomposed to inorganic excretion expressed
as mg biomass/L per interval
amount of biomass respired by zooplankton as
mg biomass/L per interval
conversion factor from biomass to equivalent nitrogen
conversion factor from biomass to equivalent phosphorus
conversion factor from biomass to equivalent carbon
If ammonia is simulated, the inorganic nitrogen released is added to the TAM
variable; otherwise, it is added to the N03 variable. The value of ZC02 is
computed for use in subroutine group PHCARB if pH simulation is performed.
Finally, ZORX calls subroutine ORGBAL (4.2(3).7.3.3.4) to update the state
variables for ORN, ORP ORC, and BOD to account for additions from zooplankton
' by
ZORN
ZORP
ZORC
ZBOD
where:
ZORN
ZORP
ZORC
ZBOD
REFR
((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBN
((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBP
((REFR*ZDTH) + ZREFEX)*CVBC
(ZDTH*CVNRBO) + (ZNRFEX*CVBO)
= increment to ORN state variable in mg N/L per interval
= increment to ORP state variable in mg P/L per interval
= increment to ORC state variable in mg C/L per interval
= increment to BOD state variable in mg 0/L per interval
= refractory fraction of biomass
(29)
227
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
ZDTH
ZREFEX
ZNRFEX
CVBO
CVNRBO
zooplankton death as mg biomass/L per interval
refractory organic excretion as mg biomass/L per interval
nonrefractory organic excretion as mg biomass/L per interval
conversion from biomass to equivalent oxygen
conversion from nonrefractory biomass to equivalent oxygen,
times NONREF
4.2(3).7.3.5 Simulate Benthic Algae (subroutine BALRX)
Purpose
BALRX simulates those algae in the RCHRES which are attached to rocks or other
stable structures. In free flowing streams, large diurnal fluctuations of
oxygen can be attributed to benthic algae. During the sunlight hours, if
sufficient nutrients exist to support photosynthesis, oxygen is produced in such
large quantities that supersaturation often occurs. However, at night, when
photosynthesis cannot occur, the benthic algae can exert a significant demand on
the oxygen supply of the RCHRES due to respiratory requirements. Benthic algae
influence the nutrient balance of the RCHRES by their extraction of nutrients
for growth.
Approach
The growth and death of benthic algae are modeled in much the same manner as
their free floating relatives, the phytoplankton. In fact, four of the five
subroutines which are used for phytoplankton simulation are also used in the
benthic algae simulation. These subroutines are ALGRO, GROCHK, ORGBAL, and
NUTRUP. There are two major differences in modeling the two types of algae.
First, since the benthic algae are attached to materials in the RCHRES, they are
not subject to longitudinal advection. Second, the manner in which death of
benthic algae is modeled is sufficiently different from the method used for
phytoplankton that a special subroutine, BALDTH, is used. Within BALRX benthic
algae are in units of micromoles phosphorus per liter so that the benthic algae
simulation can take advantage of the same subroutines used by PHYRX. In order
to obtain these units, the following conversion is performed:
BAL - BENAL*DEPCOR/CVPB
(30)
where:
BAL
BENAL
CVPB
DEPCOR
benthic algae as micromoles phosphorus/L
benthic algae as mg biomass/m2
conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
conversion from square meters to liters based on average depth of
water in RCHRES during the interval (DEPCOR is computed in RQUAL)
228
-------
Net Growth
Subroutine Group PLANK
GROBAL = (GRO*CFBALG - RES*CFBALR)*BAL
where:
GROBAL
GRO
CFBALG
RES
CFBALR
BAL
(31)
net growth rate of benthic algae as micromoles
phosphorus/L per interval
unit growth rate as calculated in subroutine ALGRO
ratio of benthic algae to phytoplankton growth rates
under identical growth conditions, (default = 10)
unit respiration rate as calculated in subroutine ALGRO
(default =1 oT * to phytoplankton respiration rates
benthic algae concentration as micromoles phosphorus/L
™lhbdoLCna^;±^ ±™H"' 6R?« !!«"«'.*• assure that
Death of Benthic Algae
inf™matio T0™ calculates t!?e amount of benthic algae death and
fall below .0001 micromoles of phosphorus per square°meter.1S "
Materials Balance for Related Constituents
-_ to account for the net effect of benthic algae
according to the following equation:
DOX = DOX + (CVPB*CVBO*GROBAL)
where:
(32)
= concentration of dissolved oxygen (mg/L)
CVPB = conversion factor from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
SA, = co"version fact°^ ^om mg biomass to mg oxygen
GROBAL = net growth of benthic algae as micromoles phosphorus/L
Gr 1 "*
229
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
The additions to ORN, ORP, ORC, and BOD resulting from benthic algae death are
calculated as:
BALORN
BALORP
BALORC
BALBOD
where:
BALORN
BALORP
BALORC
BALBOD
REFR
DTHBAL
CVNRBO
CVPB
CVBPN
CVBPC
REFR*DTHBAL*CVBPN*.014
REFR*DTHBAL*.032
REFR*DTHBAL*CVBPC*.012
CVNRBO*CVPB*DTHBAL
increment to ORN state variable in mg N/L per interval
increment to ORP state variable in mg P/L per interval
increment to ORC state variable in mg C/L per interval
increment to BOD state variable in mg 0/L per interval
refractory fraction of biomass
benthic algae death as micromoles P/L per interval
conversion from mg biomass to equivalent mg
oxygen demand (allowing for refractory fraction)
conversion from micromoles phosphorus to mg biomass
conversion from micromoles phosphorus to micromoles nitrogen
conversion from micromoles phosphorus to micromoles carbon
(33)
When BALORN, BALORP, BALORC, and BALBOD have been evaluated, subroutine ORGBAL
is called to perform the actual increments to the appropriate state variables.
Finally, subroutine NUTRUP is called to update the inorganic state variables to
account for net growth.
External Units
The output values for benthic algae are in units of milligrams biomass per
square meter and micrograms chlorophyll a per square meter.
4.2(3).7.3.5.1 Calculate Benthic Algae Death (subroutine BALDTH)
Purpose
BALDTH calculates algal death each interval by using one of two unit death rates
specified in the User's Control Input. ALDL, the low unit death rate, is used
when environmental conditions encourage sustained life; in situations where
nutrients are scarce or the benthic algae population becomes excessive, ALDH,
the high algal death rate, is used.
Method
The high algal death rate, which has a default value of .01/hr, is used if any
one of three conditions exists:
1. the concentration of P04 is less than the value of parameter PALDH
2. the concentration of inorganic nitrogen is less than the value of
parameter NALDH
3. the areal density of benthic algae is greater than the value of parame-
ter MBAL
230
-------
Subroutine Group PLANK
DTHBAL = (ALD*BAL) + SLOP
where:
DTHBAL
ALD
BAL
SLOP
(34)
= unitntl°flbdnthiC al9ae deatl? as m1cromoles P/L Per interval
... «•«• i «*»* Vl pci iiiu'ciVal
concentration of benthic algae as micromoles P/L
amount of benthic algae sloughed as
micromoles P/L per interval
231
-------
Subroutine Group PHCARB
4.2(3).7.4 Simulate pH, Carbon Dioxide, Total Inorganic Carbon,
and Alkalinity (Subroutine Group PHCARB of Module RCHRES)
Purpose
PHCARB calculates the pH of the water within a RCHRES. The primary value of pH
is as an indicator of the chemical environment of the system. Under normal
circumstances, pH is near neutral, that is, near seven. Most life sustaining
processes are impaired at extremes of pH.
Method
Figure 4.2(3).7.4-1 illustrates the fluxes and storages of constituents intro-
duced in this section. Determination of pH requires simulation of alkalinity,
carbon dioxide, and total inorganic carbon. Within PHCARB, state variables for
alkalinity (ALK), carbon dioxide (C02), and total inorganic carbon (TIC) are
expressed as molar concentrations to correspond to the equilibrium expressions
necessary to determine pH. The conversion from mg/1 to moles/1 takes place
after longitudinal advection has been considered. Externally, ALK, CUZ, and IIL
are expressed in mg/1.
Alkalinity
Alkalinity is defined as the amount of acid required to attain a pH value equal
to that of a total inorganic carbon molar solution of H2C03. This pH value is
near 4.5, which is approximately the lowest pH value tolerated by most forms of
aquatic life. Alkalinity is interpreted as the acid neutralizing capacity of
natural waters.
Alkalinity is simulated as a conservative constituent, in module section CONS.
Parameter ALKCON, in the User's Control Input for PHCARB, specifies which
conservative substance is alkalinity. For example, if ALKCON = 3 then subrou-
tine PHCARB will assume that alkalinity is the 3rd conservative constituent.
Carbon Dioxide and Total Inorganic Carbon
HSPF assumes that changes in the TIC concentration occur only as changes in C02
concentration. Thus, the sources of TIC are:
1. carbon dioxide invasion (input) from the atmosphere
2. zooplankton respiration
3. carbon dioxide released by BOD decay
4. net growth of algae (if negative)
5. benthal release of carbon dioxide (if BENRFG = 1)
232
-------
Subroutine Group PHCARB
DECCO2
-• ^
BOD
Decay
ZC02
Zooplanktoi
respiration
KCINV*(SATCO2-CO2
Carbon ^
dioxide
invasion /
ICO2
I Inflow i
I to
RCHRESJ
ITIC
Inflow
to
RCHRES
Net
growth
of algae
BENCO2
Benthal
release
CO2
•f-
H2CO3
HC031
COS1
TIC
OCO2JN)
Outflow I
I from ,
.RCHRES8
I thru |
ROCO2
r Sum I
I of
out- I
I flows i
, from '
Outflow
from
RCHRES
thru
exit
ROTIC
Sum
of
out-
flows
from
RCHRES
Fl9ure 4-2(3)-7-4-1
233
-------
Subroutine Group PHCARB
The sinks of TIC are:
1. carbon dioxide release to the atmosphere
2. net growth of algae (if positive)
All of these quantities except carbon dioxide invasion are calculated in other
subroutines and passed into PHCARB.
Carbon Dioxide Invasion
In order to calculate carbon dioxide invasion, the saturation concentration of
C02 must be determined. First, Henry's constant for C02, defined as the molar
concentration of atmospheric C02 divided by the partial pressure of C02, is
calculated by the equation:
S - 10.**(2385.73/TWKELV - 14.0184 + .0152642*TWKELV) (1)
where:
S s Henrys's constant for C02
TWKELV - absolute temperature of water in degrees Kelvin
Using Henry's constant, saturation concentration of C02 is calculated as:
SATC02 - 3.16E-04*CFPRES*S
, »
SATC02 s saturation concentration of C02 in moles C02-C/1
CFPRES - correction to atmospheric pressure resulting from elevation
difference (CFPRES is calculated in the Run Interpreter)
S - Henry's constant for C02
The carbon dioxide invasion is then calculated by the following equation:
ATC02 - KCINV*(SATC02 - C02)
where: ._
ATC02 « carbon dioxide invasion expressed as molesC02-C/I
per interval
KCINV - carbon dioxide invasion coefficient (per interval)
SATC02 - saturation concentration of C02 in moles C02-C/1
C02 - concentration of C02 after longitudinal advection in moles
C02-C/1
A positive value for ATC02 indicates addition of C02 to the water; a negative
value indicates a release of C02 from water to the atmosphere. The value of
KCINV is dependent upon the value calculated for KOREA, the oxygen reaeration
coefficient, in subroutine group OXRX:
234
-------
KCINV = CFCINV*KOREA
Subroutine Group PHCARB
(4)
where:
KCINV =
CFCINV =
KOREA =
carbon dioxide invasion coefficient (units are I/interval)
parameter specifying ratio of C02 invasion rate to 02
reaeration rate
oxygen reaeration coefficient (units are I/interval)
Net Carbon Dioxide Flux
The net carbon dioxide flux is determined by the following equation:
DELTCD = ATC02 + (ZC02 - ALGC02 + DECC02 + BENC02)/12000.
(5)
where:
DELTCD
ATC02
ZC02
ALGC02
DECC02
BENC02
12000.
net C02 flux in moles C02-C/1 per interval
C02 invasion in moles C02-C/1 per interval
C02 released by zooplankton excretion and respiration
in mg C02-C/1 per interval
C02 flux due to net growth of algae in mg C02-C/1 per interval
C02 released by BOD decay in mg C02-C/1 per interval
benthal release of C02 in mg C02-C/1 per interval
conversion from mg C02-C/1 to moles C02-C/1
the flag which decouples C02 from algal simulation, has a value of
haSja value of zero in this equation. Benthal release rates for
anaerobic conditions must be included in the User's Control
release of C02 is simulated. Since HSPF assumes that changes
— w_..ic carbon concentration only occur as chanaes in carbor
the update to the TIC state variable for each simulation interval is:
n
one
TIC = TIC + DELTCD
(6)
where:
TIC = total inorganic carbon in moles C/l
The Carbon System
The value of pH is controlled by the carbon system. There are three species of
IhTsum^l fS2cS3ei^nHte^n^2C?3*L iH?°3]' and [C03]' [H2C03*J is defied a?
relatlla tn r?$?] ?h [ *J5 f°r Tdeling PurP°ses [H2C03] is negligible
ttons: ° Sy m Ca" be descr1bed by the following equa-
[H]*[HC03]/[H2C03*] = K1EQU
[H]*[C03]/[HC03] = K2EQU
[H]*[OH] = KWEQU
[H2C03*] + [HC03] + [COS] = TIC
[HC03] + 2*[C03] + [OH] - [H] = ALK
(7)
235
-------
Subroutine Group PHCARB
where:
[H]
[OH]
[COS]
[HC03]
[H2C03*]
K1EQU
K2EQU
KWEQU
hydrogen ion concentration in moles/1
hydroxide ion concentration in moles/1
carbonate ion concentration in moles/1
bicarbonate ion concentration in moles/1
carbonic acid/carbon dioxide concentration in moles/1
first dissociation constant for carbonic acid
second dissociation constant for carbonic acid
ionization product of water
The five unknown values ([H2C03*], [HC03], [COS], [H], [OH]) can be determined
when K1EQU, K2EQU, KWEQU, TIC, and ALK are known. K1EQU, K2EQU, and KWEQU are
all functions of water temperature and are evaluated by the following equations:
K1EQU »
K2EQU =
KWEQU -
where:
TWKELV
10.**(-3404.71/TWKELV + 14.8435 - .032786*TWKELV)
10.**(-2902.39/TWKELV + 6.4980 - .02379*TWKELV)
10.**(-4470.99/TWKELV + 6.0875 - .01706*TWKELV)
absolute temperature of water in degrees Kelvin
(8)
Calculation of pH and C02
Once values have been determined for K1EQU, K2EQU, KWEQU, TIC, and ALK, an
equilibrium equation can be developed for hydrogen ion concentration ([H]). The
five equations representing the carbon system (Equation 7) can be reduced to a
fourth order polynomial expression:
[H]**4 + COEFF1*([H]**3) + COEFF2*([H]**2) + COEFF3*[H] + COEFF4 = 0
(9)
where:
COEFF1
COEFF2
COEFF3
COEFF4
[H]
ALK + K1EQU
-KWEQU + ALK*K1EQU + K1EQU*K2EQU - TIC*K1EQU
-2.*K1EQU*K2EQU*TIC - K1EQU*KWEQU + ALK*K1EQU*K2EQU
-K1EQU*K2EQU*KWEQU
hydrogen ion concentration in moles/1
The solution of this equation is performed by subroutine PHCALC. Based on the
hydrogen ion concentration calculated in PHCALC, the concentration of C02 is
recalculated as:
C02 - TIC/C1. + K1EQU/HPLUS + K1EQU*K2EQU/(HPLUS**2))
C02 - carbon dioxide concentration in moles C/l
TIC = total inorganic carbon concentration in moles C/l
(10)
236
-------
K1EQU
K2EQU
HPLUS
Subroutine Group PHCARB
first dissociation constant of carbonic acid
second dissociation constant of carbonic acid
hydrogen ion concentration in moles H/l
°f
ALK are converted back to mg/1 for use
4. 2(3). 7. 4.1 Calculate pH (subroutine PHCALC)
PHCALC uses the Newton-Raphson method to solve the fourth order oolvnomial
express on for the hydrogen ion concentration (Equation 9) The Sser ^ecifies
P^'tSaS^Ll^^ 1™*°™* * "^Ing a^alieto'par Set r
rnnln* + • continues the iteration process until the solutions for oH
a M ±t ?f°tfh!W< ?°y?ecut1ve iterations differ by no more thSn Jne tenth of
a pH unit. If the solution technique does not converge within the maximum
allowable number of iterations, PHCALC passes this information back to PHCARB bv
mt*LC^l cJllT °f -Z6r? t0 C°NVFG,: An error messa9e ^ pHnted an3 then Y
PHCALC is called again, to repeat the unsuccessful iteration process This
time, the "debug flag" (PHDBFG) is set ON so that, for each iteration PHCALC
' ''
237
-------
Module COPY
4.2(11) Copy Time Series (Utility Module COPY)
This utility module is used to copy one or more time series from a source
specified in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Block of the User's Control Input (UCI),
to a target specified in the NETWORK or EXT TARGETS Block (Part F, Section 4.6).
To operate the COPY module, the user must specify the time interval used in the
internal scratch pad (INDELT) and the number of point-valued and mean-valued
time series to be copied (NPT and NMN in Part F, Section 4.4(11).!). Up to 20
point-valued and/or 20 mean-valued time series may be copied in a single
operation.
Module TSGET transfers the time series from the source(s), which may be either
external (eg. WDM or TSS Data set or sequential file) or the output(s) from one
or more preceding operations, to the INPAD. TSS Data sets with time steps other
than the internal scratch pad time interval (INDELT) will be automatically
aggregated or disaggregated. Data from sequential files must be at the INDELT
interval. It also automatically alters the "kind" of time series, if appropri-
ate, and can multiply each value by a user-specified factor.
Module TSPUT then transfers the time series from the INPAD to the target which,
again, can be either external or internal. The work performed is a mirror image
of that done by TSGET; time series can be aggregated/disaggregated and/or
transformed in the same way.
Module COPY is typically used to transfer time series, such as precipitation and
potential evapotranspiration data, from a sequential file (eg. card images) to a
data set in the WDM file or Time Series Store (TSS). Thereafter, when these
data are used as inputs to simulation operations, they are read directly from
the WDM or TSS.
COPY can also be used to change the "kind" and/or interval of one or more time
series. For example, a WDM data set containing hourly precipitation data could
be input to COPY and the output stored in another WDM data set with a daily time
step. The data would automatically be aggregated.
4.2(12) Prepare Time Series for Display on a Plotter (Utility Module PLTGEN)
This utility module prepares one or more time series for simultaneous display on
a plotter. As with the COPY module (Section 4.2(11)), the user must specify the
input(s) (sources), using entries in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Blocks in his
control input (UCI). The internal time-step and the number of point- and/or
mean-valued time series to be displayed must also be specified.
TSGET transfers the time series from the source(s) to the INPAD (as in COPY).
PLTGEN then outputs these data to a plot file (PLOTFL). This is a sequential
file; the first 25 records contain general information, such as the plot
heading, number of curves to be plotted, scaling information, etc. Each
subsequent record contains:
238
-------
Module PLT6EN
Cols Contents
1 - 4 Identifier (first 4 characters of title)
6 - 10 Year
11-13 Month
14 - 16 Day
17 - 19 Hour
20 - 22 Minute
25 - 36 Value for curve 1, for this date/time
39 - 50 Value for curve 2, for this date/time
etc (repeats until data for all curves are supplied)
Format: A4,1X,I5,4I3,10(2X,612.5)
The time resolution of the PLOTFL is the INDELT of the run, an integer multiple
of the INDELT which is also evenly divisible into one day, one month, or one
year.
A PLOTFL may contain only records greater than a certain threshold value,
THRESH, or during a certain span of time specified in the Special Actions Block.
The contents of a sample PLOTFL are listed below. To keep the listing short,
only the first four values have been included:
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
Plot
HSPF FILE FOR DRIVING SEPARATE PLOT PROGRAM
Time interval: 30 mins Last month in printout year: 9
No. of curves plotted: Point-valued: 2 Mean-valued: 0 Total- 2
Label flag: 0 PIVL: 1 IDELT: 30
Plot title: Plot of reservoir flowrates
Y-axis label: Flow (ft3/sec)
Scale info: Ymin: .OOOOOE+00
Ymax: 1000.0
Time: 48.000 intervals/inch
Data for each curve (Point-valued first, then mean-valued):
Label LINTYP INTEQ COLCOD TRAN TRANCOD
Inflow 0 01 SUM 1
Outflow 0 0 1 SUM 1
Time series (pt-valued, then mean-valued)
Date/time Values
1974 5 31 24 0
1974 6 1 0 30
1974 6110
1974 6 1 1 30
.OOOOOE+00
.82838
1.5071
2.0631
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
1.0000
239
-------
Module PLTGEN
A plot file is intended to be read by a stand-alone plot program, which trans-
lates its contents into information used to drive a plotting device. Alterna-
tive uses of a PLOTFL are:
1. To display one or more time series in printed form. For example: To examine
the contents of a data set in the WDM file, run it through PLTGEN and list
the contents of PLOTFL on a line printer or terminal.
2. To feed time series to some other stand-alone program. For example, one
could specify the contents of PLOTFL as input to a program which performs
statistical analysis or computes cross correlations between time series.
4.2(13) Display Time Series in a Convenient Tabular Format (Utility Module
DISPLY)
The purpose of this module is to permit any time series to be displayed (at a
variety of time intervals) in a convenient format. Sample outputs are shown in
Figures 4.2(13)-! thru -3. Salient features of this module are:
1. Any time series (input or computed) can be displayed. The user specifies
the time series in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK Block, as with any other
module.
2. As with any other module, the data are first placed in the 1NPAD, by module
TSGET. At this point they are at the time interval specified for this
operation in the OPN SEQUENCE Block (INDELT). This might have involved
aggregation or disaggregation, if the data were brought in from the WDM
file. In general, INDELT can be any of the 19 HSPF supported time steps,
ranging from 1 minute to 1 day.
3. The user can elect to display the data in a "long-span table" or a
"short-span table". The term "span" refers to the period covered by each
table. A short-span table (Figures 4.2(13)-! and -2) covers a day or a
month at a time and a long-span table (Figure 4.2(13)-3) covers a year.
4. The user selects the time-step for the individual items in a short-span
display (the display interval) by specifying it as a multiple (PIVL) of
INDELT. For example, the data in Figure 4.2(13)-! are displayed at an
interval of 5 minutes. This could have been achieved with:
INDELT PIVL
5 min 1
1 min 5
If the display interval is less than an hour, an hours worth of data are
displayed on one printed "row" (Figure 4.2(13)-!). The number of items in a
row depends on their interval (e.g., 60 for one minute, 12 for 5 minutes, 2
for 30 mins.). A "row" may actually occupy up to 5 physical lines of
printout because a maximum of 12 items is placed on a line.
240
-------
5.
6.
Module DISPLY
If the display interval is >= hour, a day's worth of data are displayed on
one "row" (Figure 4.2(13)-2). Again, the number of items in a row depends
on the display interval. In this case the entire table spans a month; in
the former case it only spans a day.
A long-span table always covers a year; the display interval for the indi-
vidual items in the table is a day (Figure 4.2(13)-3). The user can select
the month which terminates the display (December, in the example) so that
the data can be presented on a calendar year, water year or some other
basis.
For the purpose of aggregating the data from the interval time step (INDELT)
to the display interval, day-value, month-value, or year-value, one of five
"transformation codes" can be specified:
Code
SUM
AVER
MAX
MIN
LAST
Meaning
Sum of the data
Average of the data
Take the max of the values at
the smaller time step
Take the minimum
Take the last of the values
belonging to the shorter
time step
for
SUM is appropriate for displaying data like precipitation; AVER is useful
displaying data such as temperatures.
7. The module incorporates a feature designed to permit reduction of the
quantity of printout produced when doing short-span displays. If the
^V^of ("nour-sum" ™ Fig^e 4.2(13)-!; "day-average" in Figure
4.3(13)-2) is less than or equal to a "threshold value", printout of the
entire row is suppressed. The default threshold is 0.0. Thus, in Figure
4.2(13)-!; data for dry hours are not printed.
8. The user can also specify:
a. The number of fractional digits to use in a display.
b. A title for the display.
C*
, transformation, to be performed on the data when they are at
the INDELT time interval (i.e. before module DISPLY performs any aggre-
gation). By default, no transformation is performed.
241
-------
'. ""TV lm !",!rfl|» • I1 i ill. ..I!!!;
o_
CO
0}
r—
i
fig
i^"1
£o*m
4*i
fcti
£o~
O» V.**"
to C«
sfs
t_
ac
«O
I
T
si
1
(M
«—
O
O
"~
o
o
0
«••
o
0
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
CM
IO
o
o
0
o
0
»"•
o
o
0
o
o
*~
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
*r-
o
o
o
o
0
tO
•J-
o
(M
0
CM
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
in
in
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•"
o
*~
0
CM
0
*—
o
*~
o
-o
•o
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~"
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
fO
£
o
o
o
0
o
•"
o
o
o
0
0
o
0
«—
o
o
o
o
0
*~
o
o
o
o
o
IO
CO
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
*—
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
0
*"
o
o
o
o
0
to
ot
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
•^
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
0
ro
o
0
o
o
*—
o
o
o
o
o
T-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
*"
o
o
o
o
0
ro
^
0
o
o
o
o
^~
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
0
*~
o
o
o
o
o
r-
o
*~
o
-*
CM
o
o
0
o
o
^
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
to
JO
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
CM
Jt
o
o
o
0
o
o
0
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
*~
o
o
o
o
o
-*
tn
r—
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
-
•o
«—
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
CD
o
o
o
*~
o
to
£
*—
o
*~
o
o
o
o
*"
o
*~
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
o
-o
CO
o
0
o
o
o
~
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
^~
o
*""
o
*~
o
in
o
o
*""
0
o
o
•
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
ro
o
(M
0
o
o
o
o
o
0
*""
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
*~
CM
0
o
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
0
o
o
o
*—
o
o
o
o
0
o
o
o
o
o
o
«~
R!
•^H
cu
i.
>>
J
uo
;_
£
Q.
l/>
5
nS
Q_
_>
o
/)
0)
a.
3
n
-1
— X
1
M
*
*
El)
3
o>
1_
242
-------
a.
oo
o
CU
u_
Sf>°
fofj
2s 2
IF
L.
a
•X
R
o
£
oc
sj
c
00
1C
h-
•o
co
in
in
in
in
8
to
N!
tc
„
3
cc
cc
IB
8
rvi
in
„
in
(M
ro
n
oo
\i
^
o.
o
N
?
CO
c
00
S
s
CO
*
8
o
CO
CO
•o
o
o
tn
N
CVl
cv
N
OC
o
o
R
1C
°
sj-
-0
•o
o
>o
'•2
to
s
NO
(s.
in
*
^
fc
cc
c
CO
58
0
in
i*
s.
co
n
CM
58
ON
O
U
-
•o
IS
oc
CO
1C
N.
X>
CM
n
in
in
CVl
to
in
o
CO
on
1C
g
CM
U
cc
oc
cc
oo
u
co
*
S
o
in
in
in
in
in
in
sf
O>
~-
1C
K
ss
o
CO-
tf
CVl
CO
N.
CM
*-
8
^«
-0
o
s
in
•0
o
0
fj
K
t<
co
o
a
in
CO
co
fi
O
8
0
-o
CO
s
o
in
^.
a
R
R
^_
S
o
cc
cc
8
fS
^
s.
58
o
8
co
o
in
in
IM
-t
C
R
fc
O
R
R
si
CM
8
CVl
X
CVl
in
O
o
M
CC
N
a
0
R
fc
^
CO
o
•o
CO
*
CM
5
^.
i/
c
N
U
R
ON
fj
-
0-
s
o
r
CVl
in
CM
K
ro
in
tn
•a"
in
f\
L
ON
NO
R
o
S
°
o
co
in
CO
Nf
to
i?
•o
n
to
>o
cc
R
t2
CVl
CO
cc
u
co
cc
&
CM
CO
NC
IN.
in
0-
n
tn
n
in
^
•fi
o
0-
3
S
K
R
vt
•o
-
^
2
o
o
p"
CO
in
0
*4
1C
CO
o.
u
co
3*
§
*
>o
£
3
,_
C3
o
co
CM
o
^
fc
s
cc
cc
cc
tf
CO
s
$
s
3
s'
in
in
CM
S
c
CO
o
0
§
CO
S
ON
S
R
S
CVl
2
to
in
co
-------
>-
Q_
O
0)
r—
I
0
Ul
o
*
H-
s
O-
UJ
tn
^
_J
O
—3
3E
5
>-
£
J
O£
?
CO
U3
LU
z
•<
-»
5F
o
co
•
«-.
«••
is.
in
«*
t
Os
-o
Is.
CM
T™
(>
h-
-»
CO
•g
o.
so-
CM
£
tO
£
10
$
to
in
sa-
in
CO
M
ft
|s-
£-
-»
CO
CM
«*
M
«—
fO
in
to
o
"7
rs-
£
N.
$
tn
e
_
tn
so
r»-
os
-*
fO
O
CO
ps
o
•r—
CM
O
r>-
tO
in
•o
*r~
o
ro
to
in
oo
CO
so-
CO
K
0
f2
r^
s
N-
Os
in
0
CO
»O
OO
so
CM
CO
IO
>»
O
CO
*-.
|s-
X
in
o
^
$
0
P.
K
K
o
PI
to
S.
in
o
CM
O
in
O
in
to
o
CM
tn
CM
•
«*
o
CM
to
-*
W
OO
£
CM
8
CO
K
•*
PI
o
o
«*
co
0
N.
in
oo
a
o
co
>o
in
CM
^_
CM
^>
M
CO
^
CM
in
«o
«—
t2
^_
R
•o
o
in
co
^
^
T-
in
CM
to
in
o
N-
h-
J^
^_
•*
to
in
tn
st
in
-O
o
^
>»
fc
o
s
CM
tn
in
_
>o
N-
CM
N.
•0
to
in
in
en
K3
in
tn
to
in
<-
CM
12
-*
p:
0
s
-O
£
CM
3
-o
to
_
tn
o
g;
o>
CK
o>
to
o!
CM
in
CM
0
VO
to
CM
•O
in
iS
o
S5
CM
1C
0>
s
_
~*
CO
OO
in
«O
to
-O
•^)
o
to
to
y
o
CM
to
$
O
1C
o<
^~
co
CM
fc
CO
co
in
-O
t?
-*
vO
CM
^
-4-
O
to
_
t>-
t^
w
O
°J
•O
S8
in
1C
!•-
fc
co
g
o
ts-
in
ts-
CO
CM
CM
o
SO
>»
|s-
JS
CM
•*
O
CM
O
Rl
in
ul
O
SO"
ts.
e
Os
§
CM
K
in
co
in
co
-*
o
»*
^
!^
in
ts.
CM
10
is.
a
in
fc
CM
Is.
O
s
SO
S8
to
co
CM
K
o
!3
ts.
•g
CM
R
CM
T—
•J-
^_
O
to
V*
•«»
co
CM
CO
M
tn
PJ
1p_
Os
in
•*
!2
co
K
SO
S
^
s
-o
ts.
in
N.
o
s*
•*
in
co
CM
tn
CM
tn
to
S-
10
-*
Os
•-
in
sO
?;
in
w
co
1^
s!
CM
in
in
to
^
o
in
S
co
K
Os
g
CO
12
to
S8
•j-
«
co
in
SO
&
f-
o
CM
Os
Is.
ol
|s-
«
St
M
Os
CO
in
sO
K
o
iS
Is.
sS
in
£
o
co
^
CO
CM
S
co
co
o
r-
|sl
«—
SO
CM
CO
ft
Os
sO
Os
K
co
!C
^_
fe
to
in
•O
Os
•*
|s-
tn
N.
Is.
CM
in
in
CM
^
«—
r^
i^
^-
w
in
ft
CM
co
in
CM
fS
Os
s
SO
Os
•O
CO
CO
in
CO
o
CO
M
o
a
|s-
in
CM
CM
to
CM
CM
CO
CM
CO
CO
sr
-»
in
Os
£
CO
K
in
s5
CM
Os
in
sO
o
CM
in
to
$
sO
co
CM
R
CO
to
CM
O
sf
^_
~
o
T-
in
0
tc
to
£
T_
N!
^
CO
in
o
Is.
co
in
co
o
»»
CM
|s-
CM
?5
in
CM
N.
^f
o>
m
to
-*
in
SO
1C
Os
PI
in
CM
|s-
^
o
SO
-*
to
to
Os
in
IS.
>»
sO
CM
CM
in
in
o
to
Is.
CM
^_
|s.
,_
SO
in
in
s
s*
1C
Os
12
o
CM
SO
co
to
in
in
co
3
^_
o
SO
to
RJ
to
»-
to
ts.
Is.
to
in
-*
[2
co
K
^_
i£
Os
in
SO
to
SO
to
|s.
CM
-*
^_
co
N.
CO
f)
to
SO
CM
o
SO
t^
in
CO
in
sO
Os
t2
CM
K
in
CM
•o
in
co
to
in
CM
&
CM
CM
CM
CO
to
O
en
xf
CM
CM
|s-
•O
in
3
Os
fj
|s-
3
^_
sS
CM
to
•r-
CO
to
s*
to
to
3
Os
Os
1
r»
Os
CM
in
tw
3
-*
Pi
co
1C
to
so1
-*
in
SO
t^
•d-
Os
^
SO
sO
CM
O
SO
in
i
O
CM
,_
fi!
in
S
Os
3
CM
"
o
to
OJ
^
•
N.
in
a
Is.
SO
^_
S
CM
PI
0
1C
S*
e
to
R
CM
CM
•*
Os
Os
R
o
o
CM
C*
111
<
CL
00
o
CO
3
C
ea
a.
co
i
O)
0)
oo
OO
I
oo
r—I
Csl
•
«d-
o
on
244
-------
Module DURANL
4.2(14) Perform Duration Analysis on a Time Series (Utility Module DURANL)
This module examines the behavior of a time series, computing a variety of
statistics relating to its excursions above and below certain specified "levels"
(Figure 4.2(14)-!). Sample printout is shown in Figure 4.2(14)-2. The quantity
?L!^ntol!t Produced can be regulated by the user with a "print-level-flag"
(PRFG), which has a valid range of values from 1 through 6.
The basic principles are:
1. The module works on the time series after it has been placed in the INPAD
The data are, thus, at the internal time step of the operation (INDELT)
This module operates on a mean-valued input time series. Therefore, if a
point-valued time series is routed to it, TS6ET will, by default, generate
mean values for each time step, and these will be analyzed.
2. When the value of the time series rises above the user specified "level" a
positive excursion commences. When it next falls below the level this '
excursion ends. A negative excursion is defined in the reverse way
(Figure 4.2(14)-!).
3.
4.
5.
If the time series has a value less than -10.0**10 this is considered to be
an undefined event" (e.g., concentration of a constituent when there is no
water). In this case the value is in a special category - it is in neither
a positive nor a negative excursion.
The above is true if the specified "duration" is one time step. In this
case, the results produced include a conventional frequency analysis (e.g.,
flow duration) of the data. However, the user may specify up to 10 dura-
tions; each is given as a multiple (N) of the basic time step (INDELT),
Then, for an excursion or undefined event to be considered, it has to endure
tor at least N (consecutive) intervals; else it is ignored.
The user may specify an "analysis season". This is a period (the same in
each year) for which the data will be analyzed (e.g., Oct 1 thru May 10)
Data falling outside the analysis season will not be considered.
245
-------
Module DURANL
Value
(of
time
series or
"level")
'f +10
0
-10
-20
• "*"""«
1
/
.j"
3+
Time
<====Time Series
-- ,
• "" ""
__
2+
1+
—
.2-
3-
)"""
2+
__ /
2-
^
*
• *
"""i '__.
'--- 3+ 3rd
level
2+
2nd level
1+
1-.--' 1st level
i
/ /
Legend: 2+ excursion above second level (duration >=1)
2- excursion below second level (duration >=1)
etc.
Figure 4.2(14)-! Definition of terms used in duration analysis module
246
-------
Module DURANL
The analyses performed, and printout produced (Figure 4.2(14)-2), are:
1. Introductory information - Title, start and end date/time, analysis season.
2. The next 7 sets of tables are all similar in format; each contains data on
positive and negative excursions, for each level and duration, and informa-
tion on undefined event" conditions which persisted for each of the
specified durations. The value of PRFG required to generate each of these,
and the table heading and the data displayed in it are:
a) PRFG>0. "Fraction of time spent in excursions at each level with
duration >= the specified durations. Fraction is relative to total time
span. These are the fractions of total considered time that each of
the above-defined conditions existed.
b) PRFG>1. "Fraction of time spent in excursions at each level with
duration >= the specified durations. Fraction is relative to the time
spent in excursions at each level." In the "Positive Excursions" table
this gives, for each specified level, the total time that an excursion
of duration N existed, divided by the total time that an excursion of
duration 1 existed. A similar definition holds for the numbers in the
"Negative Excursions" table.
c) PRFG>2. "Time spent in excursions at each level with duration >= the
specified durations." The tables give the total number of time steps
for which the various conditions occurred.
d) PRFG>3. "Number of excursions at each level with duration >= the
specified durations". These give the total number of events that were
found (no. of positive and negative excursions for each level and
duration, and no. of "undefined occurrences" of each duration).
e) PRFG>4. "Average duration of excursions at each level given that the
duration >= the specified durations". These values answer the question:
given that a specified excursion or 'undefined condition' occurred,
what was the mean number of time steps for which it persisted?"
f) PRFG>5. "Standard deviation of duration of excursions at each level
given that the duration >= the specified durations." These tables are
similar to those discussed in (e) above, except that the standard
deviation, instead of the mean, is considered.
g) PRFG>6. "Fraction of excursions with duration N with respect to the
total number of excursions (duration 1) for each level". These tables
give the number of excursions at each duration divided by the number of
excursions at duration 1 for each level.
3. Summary information:
Total no. of time intervals analyzed, total no. of time intervals for which
value?; wore "iinHpfinoH" tntai mumknv. ~e ,!.,..„ 1 i -i
247
-------
W! .,* !' .'Sir', i*
ModuleDURANL
STANDARD DEVIATION OF TIME SPENT IN EXCURSIONS
POSITIVE EXCURSIONS
LEVELS
.OOOOE+00
10.00
20.00
50.00
500.0
DURATIONS
1
.OOOOE+00
922.9
321.6
71.65
.7423
12
.OOOOE+00
2032.
581.1
132.1
.OOOOE+00
24
.OOOOE+00
2181.
602.0
128.7
.OOOOE+00
NEGATIVE EXCURSIONS
LEVELS
.OOOOE+00
10.00
20.00
50.00
500.0
DURATIONS
1
.OOOOE+00
107.2
127.0
167.6
1202.
12
.OOOOE+00
113.8
140.0
188.1
1202.
24
.OOOOE+00
113.3
141.4
191.6
1202.
UNDEFINED EVENTS (NO WATER)
DURATIONS
1 12
.OOOOE+00 .OOOOE+00
24
.OOOOE+00
SUMMARY
TOTAL LENGTH OF DEFINED EVENTS:
TOTAL LENGTH OF UNDEFINED EVENTS:
TOTAL LENGTH OF ANALYSIS: 550. DAYS
SAMPLE SIZE: 13200
SAMPLE MAXIMUM: .1307E+05
SAMPLE MINIMUM: 2.290
SAMPLE MEAN: 37.80
SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION: 164.0
13200. INTERVALS
0. INTERVALS
250
-------
Module DURANL
4. Lethality analysis:
The function of this section of the DURANL module is to assess the risk associ-
ated with any contaminant concentration time series generated by the HSPF
application modules. The methodology links frequency data on instream contami-
nant levels to toxicity information resulting from both acute and chronic
laboratory bioassays The methodology is based on the Frequency Analysis of
foHpf IfiJIt^!^? Pr29ram dTloped b* Battelle, Pacific Northwest Labora-
tories as part of their Chemical Migration and Risk Assessment (CRMA) Methodolo-
Laboratory toxicity experiments provide the main basis for developing a risk
?he rpJnurJ1^ °r Other.at^ati9 organisms. A common method of summarizing
thJ J?S I?« nSS8 eiiper,1?en*Vs to use a letha1 concentration where 50% of
Sfi hm,2 JLC50): "s"ally 1nfo^ation for LC50 concentrations at 24, 48, and
96 hours can be derived from laboratory experiments in the form of pairs of
lethal concentration and duration values. By connecting these pairs with
end3'? f,mr??nne?llie!ltJ-anH ^"Jl"? the funct1on in a reasonable manner at each
end, a funct on is defined such that an event defined by a particular concentra-
tion level with a particular duration can be classified as exceeding or not
exceeding the function, i.e., exceeding an LC50 value. (Figure 4.2{14)-3) An
Stinfn?d?hthe "/unction when the concentration defining the eJent and the
r«2? S ?rKnhe evenVTults ln the pair falli"9 above ^d to the right of the
combined LC50, or global exceedance, curve.
If LCNUM is greater than zero a global exceedance summary table is printed which
gives the fraction of time that a global exceedance curve is exceeded Up to 5
LC curves can be analyzed at one time. It should be noted that the global
exceedance summary eliminates double counting by reporting only those
SrSnWHth tnV™est concentrations that occur indifferent c^nSna
(FRANCO documentation should be consulted for more detailed discussion)
If LCOUT=1 and LCNUM=0, a lethal event summary is printed to supplement the
global exceedance information. The table gives a summary of all lethal events
including ending time, lethal curve number, number of intervals in event and
SS!S?±ai10? 1-Ve1'* ,Pr1ntout Is to unit PUNIT, which should be SnlS! to the
duration analysis; otherwise, the output from the lethal event summary will mix
with the printout from application modules.
251
-------
Module DURANL
0.010
0.008
s§. 0.006
O
§ 0.004
0.002
0.001
24 48 96 192
DURAT (hours)
288
Figure 4.2(14)-3 Sample Lethal Concentration (LC) Function for Global Exceedance
Calculation
252
-------
Module GENER
Series
OPCODE
1
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
C=
C=
C=
C=
C
C
C
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
C=
Action
Abs value (A)
Square root (A)
Truncation (A)
eg. If A=4.2, C=4.0
A=-3.5, C=-3.0
Ceiling (A). The "ceiling" is
the integer >= given value.
eg. If A=3.5, C=4.0
A=-2.0, C=-2.0
Floor (A). The "floor" is the
integer <= given value.
eg. If A=3.0, C=3.0
A=-2.7, C=-3.0
loge (A)
loglO (A)
K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2 (up to 7 terms)
The user supplies the no. of
terms and the values of the
coefficients (K).
K**A
A**K
A+K
Sin (A)
Cos (A)
Tan (A)
Sum (A)
A+B
A-B
A*B
A/B
MAX (A,B)
MIN (A,B)
A**B
253
-------
"'iSil'! ife;'" i
Module MUTSIN
4.2(16) Multiple Sequential Input of Time Series from a HSPF
Stand Alone Plotter File (Utility Module MUTSIN)
This utility module reads a sequential external file previously written on tape
or disk. This file has the same format as the PLOTFL produced with utility
module PLTGEN (Section 4.2(12)). The user specifies the number of point and/or
mean-valued time series to be read and the number of lines to skip at the
beginning of the sequential external file.
The missing data flag, MISSFG, is used to specify how MUTSIN reacts to missing
data. A MISSFG value of 0 indicates that MUTSIN is to report an error and quit
if any data is missing. Therefore, the internal time-step (DELT) must equal the
time-step of the sequential external file, the starting time of the run must
correspond with the first entry read from the sequential external file, and no
entries may be missing. A MISSFG value of 1 indicates that MUTSIN is to fill
missing sequential file entries with 0.0. A MISSFG value of 2 indicates that
MUTSIN is to fill missing entries with -1.0E30. A MISSFG value of 3 indicates
that MUTSIN is to fill missing values with the value of the next available
entry.
Note that the date and time appearing in each record of the file must be in the
same format as that used by the PLTGEN module to write a PLOTFL. (Section
4 2(12)). That is, the full year/month/day/hour/minute string must be present
and a time, e.g., midnight is coded as 74 01 02 24 00, not 75 01 03 00 00.
The EXT TARGETS and/or NETWORK blocks are used to specify where TSPUT places the
time series data read in from the sequential external file.
MUTSIN has four potential uses:
.„,''' , "'I. ' • i',
(1) It may be used to form a simple interface with other continuous models.
The other model can output its results in the form of HSPF PLOTFL (or a
format conversion program can be used), and MUTSIN can be used to input
this data to HSPF. Conversely, data can be output from HSPF, using the
PLTGEN module, for input to the other model.
(2) MUTSIN may be used to transfer data in a WDM or TSS file to another WDM or
TSS file. This transfer requires the use of PLTGEN to output the data from
the source file and MUTSIN to input to the target file.
(3) By writing the data on a tape one can transfer data between different types
of computer hardware (e.g., Unix to DEC and vice versa.)
(4) MUTSIN may also be used to input point valued data or data with a time
interval not included in the standard HSPF sequential input formats (Part
F, Section 4.9).
254
-------
Module TSPUT
4.3 Module TSPUT
^^i'SHHiS^
obtains a time series from the INPAD and places its output in the WDM file TSS
sLDaC»k!nd« n/STLf1* haV1milar Capabilities to TSGET, to alter the time '
it deals perform a linear transformation on the time series with which
Compared to TSGET, module TSPUT contains one major complicating factor. When a
time series is to be written to a WDM or TSS data set, the action taken depends
on now any pre-existing data are to be treated. The three oossihlp arrp««
modes, ADD, INST and REPL, are discussed in Part F, SecJMon T.I
255
-------
REFERENCES
REFERENCES
American Society for Testing and Materials. 1980. Annual Book of
ASTM Standards: Part 31, Water. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.
Anderson, E.A. 1968. Development and Testing of Snow Pack Energy Balance
Equations. Water Resour. Res. 4(1):19-37.
Anderson, E.A., and N.H. Crawford. 1964. The Synthesis of Continuous
Snowmelt Runoff Hydrographs on a Digital Computer. Department of Civil
Engineering, Stanford University. Stanford, California. Technical
Report No. 36. 103 p.
Chou, T.-W. 1980. Aquatic Biodegradation, Chapter 6 in Mill et al., 1980.
Churchill, M.A., H.L. Elmore, and R.A. Buckingham. 1962. The Prediction
of Stream Reaeration Rates. Amer. Soc. Civil Engineers Journ.
88(SA4), p. 1-46.
Committee on Sanitary Engineering Research. 1960. Solubility of
Atmospheric Oxygen in Water. Twenty-ninth Progress Report. Amer.
Soc. Civil Engr., 0. San. Engr. Div. 86(SA4):41.
Covar, A.P. 1976. Selecting the Proper Reaeration Coefficient for Use in
Water Quality Models. Proc. Conf. on Environmental Modeling, and
Simulation, Cincinnati. EPA 600/9-76-016. 861p.
Crawford, N.H.,'and A.S. Donigian, Jr. 1973. Pesticide Transport and
Runoff Model for Agricultural Lands. Office of Research and
Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington D.C. EPA
660/2-74-013. 211p.
Di Toro, D.M., D.T. O'Connor, and R.V. Thomann. 1970. A Dynamic Model of
Phytoplankton Populations in Natural Waters. Environmental
Engineering and Science Program. Manhattan College, New York.
Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976a. Modeling Pesticides and
Nutrients on Agricultural Lands. Environmental Research Laboratory,
Athens, Georgia. EPA 600/2-7-76-043. 317 p.
Donigian, A.S., Jr., and N.H. Crawford. 1976b. Modeling Nonpoint Pollution
From the Land Surface. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens,
Georgia. EPA 600/3-76-083. 280p.
Donigian, A.S, Jr., D.C. Beyerlein, H.H. Davis, Jr., and N.H. Crawford.
1977. Agricultural Runoff Management (ARM) Model Version II:
Refinement and Testing. Environmental Research Laboratory, Athens,
Georgia. EPA 600/3-77-098. 294p.
Dugdale, R.C., and J.J. Macisaac. 1971. A Computational Model for the
Uptake of Nitrate in the Peru Upwelling. Prepublication Copy.
256
-------
REFERENCES
Falco, J.W., K.T. Sampson, and R.F. Carsel. 1976. Physical Modeling of
Pesticide Degradation. Proceedings of Symposium on Model Ecosystem
Approach to Biodegradation Studies. Society for Industrial
Microbiology, pp. 193-202.
Harnard H.S. and R. Davis. 1943. The lonization Constant of Carbonic
Acid in Water and the Solubility of C02 in Water and Aqueous Salt
Solution from 0 to 50 C. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 65:2030.
Hydrocomp, Inc. 1977. Hydrocomp Water Quality Operations Manual.
Palo Alto, California.
Hydrocomp, Inc. 1976. Hydrocomp Simulation Programming: Operations
Manual. Palo Alto, California, 2nd ed.
Johanson, R,C., J.C. Imhoff and H.H. Davis, Jr. 1979. Programmer's
Supplement for the Hydrological Simulation Program - Fortran (HSPF).
Krone, R.B. 1962. Flume Studies of the Transport of Sediment in
Estuanal Shoaling Processes. Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory
and Sanitary Engineering Research Laboratory, University of
California, Berkeley, California.
Loehr, R.C., T.B.S. Prakasam, E.G. Srinath, and Y.D. Joo. 1973. Development
and Demonstration of Nutrient Removal from Animal Wastes. U S
Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C. EPA R2-73-095.
Mabey, W.R., T. Mill, and D.G. Hendry. 1980. Photolysis in Water,
Chapter 3 in Mill et al., 1980.
Meyer, L.D., and W.H. Wischmeier. 1969. Mathematical Simulation of the
Prnrocc nf
-------
REFERENCES
O'Connor, D.J., and W.E. Dobbins. 1958. Mechanism of Reaeration in Natural
Streams. Amer. Soc. Civil Engineers Trans., Vol. 123, p. 641-684.
Onishi, Y. and S.E. Wise. 1979. Mathematical Model, SERATRA, for
Sediment-Contaminant Transport in Rivers and its Application
to Pesticide Transport in Four Mile and Wolf Creeks in Iowa.
Battelle, Pacific Northwest Laboratories, Richland, Washington.
Onstad, C.A., and 6.R. Foster. 1975. Erosion Modeling on a Watershed.
Trans. Am. Soc. Agric. Eng. 18(2):288-292.
Owens, M., R.W. Edwards, and J.W. Gibbs. 1964. Some Reaearation Studies
in Streams. Int. Journ. Air and Water Pollution. Vol. 8, p. 469-486.
Partheniades, E. 1962. " A Study of Erosion and Deposition of Cohesive
Soils in Salt Water. Ph.D. Thesis, University of California,
Berkeley, California.
Philip, J.R. 1956. The Theory of Infiltration: The Infiltration Equation
and Its Solution. Soil Science 83: 345-375.
Richman, S. 1958. The Transformation of Energy by Daphnia pulex.
Ecolog. Monogr. Vol. 28, p. 273-291.
Schindler, D.W. 1968. Feeding, Assimilation and Respiration Rates of
Daphnia magna Under Various Environmental Conditions and their
Relation to Production Estimates. Journal of Animal Ecology.
Vol. 37, p. 369-385.
Smith,J.H., and D.C. Bomberger. 1980. Volatilization from Water,
Chapter 7 in Mill et al., 1980.
Smith, J.H., W.R. Mabey, N. Bohonos, B.R. Holt, S.S. Lee, T.-W. Chou,
D.C. Bomberger, and T. Mill. 1977. Environmental Pathways of
Selected Chemicals in Freshwater Systems, Part I: Background
and Experimental Procedures. Environmental Research Laboratory,
Athens, Georgia. EPA 600/7-/7-113.
Thomann, R.V. 1972. Systems Analysis and Water Quality Management.
McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York. 286p.
Tsivoglou, E.C., and J.R. Wallace. 1972. Characterization of Stream
Reaeration Capacity. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
EPA R3-72-012.
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 1956. Snow Hydrology, Summary Report of the
Snow Investigations. North Pacific Division. Portland Oregon. 437 p.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1975. Process Design Manual for
Nitrogen Control. Office of Technology Transfer, Washington D.C.
258
-------
Vanomi, V.A., Editor. 1975. Sedimentation Engineering. Prepared by
the ASCE Task Committee for the Preparation of the Manual on
Sedimentation of the Sedimentation Committee of the Hydraulics
Division, New York.
Wezerak, C.6., and J.J. Gannon. 1968. Evaluation of Nitrification in
Streams. Amer. Soc. CivilEngr., J. San. Engr. Div. 94(SA5):6159.
REFERENCES
f ":?:iHafd °-D; *™th- J965/ Predicting Rainfall Erosion Losses
from Cropland East of the Rocky Mountains. Department of
Agriculture. Agricultural Handbook No. 282. 47 p.
Zepp, R.G. and D.M. Cline. 1977. Rates of Direct Photolysis in Aquatic
Environments. Envir. Sci. Technol. 11:359-366. «qudnc
259
-------
User's Control Input
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION AND CONVENTIONS
1.1 The User's Control Input
The User's Control Input (UCI) consists of a number of text lines, 80 characters
wide in card images. A general feature of the UCI is that the card images are
collected into groups. Groups may contain subordinate groups; that is, they may
be nested. In every case, a group commences with a heading (such as, RUN) and ends
with a delimiter (such as, END RUN).
The HSPF system will ignore any line in the UCI which contains three or more
consecutive asterisks (***), just as a Fortran compiler bypasses comments in a
source program. Blank lines are also ignored. This feature can be used to insert
headings and comments which make the text more intelligible to the reader, but are
not required by the HSPF system itself.
The body of the User's Control Input consists of one or more major groups of text,
called input sets:
An input set is either a TSSMGR input set or a RUN input set. A TSSMGR input set
consists of one or more commands which direct the time series store manager module
to create, modify, or destroy labels of individual data sets in the TSS. A RUN
input set contains all the input needed to perform a single RUN. A RUN is a set of
operations with a common START date-time and END date-time.
1.2 General Comments on Method of Documentation
The documentation of each portion of the UCI is divided into three sections:
"layout", "details", and "explanation".
The "layout11 section shows how the input is arranged. Text always appearing in the
same form (e.g., TSSM) is shown in upper case. Text which varies from job to job
is shown by lower case symbols enclosed in angle brackets (). Lines containing
illustrative text, not actually required by the system, have three consecutive
asterisks, just as they might have in the UCI. Optional material, or that which
is not always required, is enclosed in brackets []. The column numbers printed at
the head of each layout show the exact starting location of each keyword and
symbol.
The "details" section describes the input values required for each symbol appearing
in the layout. The Fortran identifiers used to store the value(s) are given,
followed by the format. The field(s) specified in this format start in the column
containing the < which immediately precedes the symbol in the layout.
262
-------
TSSM Input Set
For example, < ds> in a TSSM input set starts in column 26 and ends in column 26
linno =,,co.lu.mn 30- Where relevant, the Details section also indicates default
values and minimum and maximum values for each item in the UCI.
any necessary
coma
2.0 FORMAT OF A TSSMGR DATA SET
-! ," °f H$PF' the TSSMGR m°dule and a" Other TSS
will be removed from the program.
2.1 Summary
A TSSMGR Input Set starts with a TSSM heading and ends with an END TSSM delimiter.
me input set contains one or more commands and associated parameters, which mav
appear in any sequence. A single exception applies: DATASET N0=, if required must
appear as the first parameter following a command. All parameter values (numbers
striSngn right-justified and end in column 30, except the LOCATION
PJ°gra."l' NEWTuSS' must be run to create and initialize a Time
18 used by the HSPF system- (This
263
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.2 TSSM Block
The TSSM block is used to indicate the start and end of a TSSM input set.
*************************************************************************
1 " 2 ' 3 4 '5 " "" ' "6 " ' 7 ' '" " "' 8""
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
*:*
TSSM
TSSFL=< ts>
*** see following sections for definitions of TSSM commands and associated
parameters.
[]
*** continue until all parameters are defined
[]
*** commands may be continued as needed to perform all functions desired.
END TSSM
*******
Example
*******
TSSM
SHOWDSL
DATASET NO*
SHOWSPACE
END TSSM
TSSFL*
15
100
Details
Symbol
< ts>
Keyword
TSSFL=
Fortran
name(s)
TSSFL
Format
15
Default
15
Min
15
Max
23
Explanation
The TSSFL is the FORTRAN unit number for the TSS.
then 'TSSFL^' may also be omitted.
If the default value is used,
264
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.3 ADD Block
The ADD block is used to create a label for a new data set on the TSS.
***«**"^
ssss
Layout
******
ADD
DATASET N0=
SPACE=
TIMESTEP=
MEMBER NAME=
[STATION=
[SECURITY-
[UNITS=
[COMPRESSION=
[OBS TIME=
[FILLER CODE=
[GAP CODE=
[YEAROR=
[BASEYR=
[LOCATION
[KIND=
[FORMAT-
*******
Example
*******
ADD
DATASET N0=
SPACE=
MEMBER NAME=
TIMESTEP=
UNITS=
COMPRESSION-
STATION=
FILLER CODE=
YEAROR=
LOCATION=
KIND=
]
]
]
< compr>]
]
]
gc]
]
]
]
-location-
39
100
PRECIP
360
METRIC
COMPR
US3112
ZERO
YES
PALO ALTO, CALIFORNIA
MEAN
265
-------
TSSM Input Sel
Details
Symbol
< statn>
< units>
< compr>
qc
3**
< y>
< location
< kind >
Keyword
DATASET N0=
SPACE=
MEMBER NAME=
TIMESTEP=
STATION^
SECURITY=
UNITS=
COMPRESS ION-
OBS TIME=
FILLER CODE=
GAP CODE=
YEAROR=
BASEYR=
> LOCATION
KIND=
FORMAT=
Fortran
name(s)
DSDSNO
SPACE
MEMNAM
DSDELT
STA
SECURE
UNITS
COMPR
OBSTIM
CFILL
6APCOD
YEAROR
BASEYR
LOCATN
MKIND
FMT
Format
14
15
A6
16
A8
A8
A8
A8
15
A8
A2
A4
15
A40
A8
15
Default
none
none
none
none
[blank]
WRITE
METRIC
UNCOMP
24
UNDEF
UU
YES
1900
[blank]
MEAN
0
Valid Values
Min: 1, Max: 9999
Min: 1, Max: 99999
Any 6 char, string
Min: 1, Max: 1440
Any 8 char, string
WRITE, READ
METRIC, ENGLISH
UNCOMP, COMPR
Min: 1, Max: 48
UNDEF, ZERO
UU,UC,CU,CC
YES, NO
Min: 1, Max: 10000
Any 40 char, string
MEAN, POINT
Min: 0, Max: 10
Explanation
Each input item must be right justified within its field. For example, OBSTIM is
input with 15 format; a value of 12 is input as " 12".
DATASET NO is a unique identifying number for a data set.
SPACE is the space reserved for a data set in TSS records.
MEMBER NAME is the name of the member, e.g., PRECIP,EVAPOR.
TIMESTEP is the time step in minutes for a data set.
STATION is the station identifier for a data set.
SECURITY is the read/write security for a data set.
UNITS is the system of units used for the data stored in the TSS.
COMPRESSION is the compression indicator.
OBS TIME is the observation hour for daily data.
FILLER CODE is the padding value used to fill in missing data.
GAP CODE is the compression indicator for filled values preceding and following
period of valid input within the year. See explanation below.
YEAROR: YES means a file is in yearly chronological order; otherwise, NO.
BASEYR is the first year for which data can be stored.
LOCATION is the location description.
KIND is the kind of data in this member, either point or mean.
FORMAT is the number of decimal digits desired in the output format.
266
-------
TSSM Input Set
The parameter GAP was included to permit some compression of space, even where data
are stored in uncompressed form. If the first letter of GAP Ss c, and data which
nHor fifth Wayt H™??! J " ^ year are fed into the Tss data set, the per 3
fhi rJ™ t ?***** "I11 u* ^P^ssed. Note that this implies that data for
the compressed period cannot subsequently be read in.
Similarly, if the second letter of GAP is C, and data which end part-way through
a calendar year are fed into the TSS data set, the period after the end of the data
will be compressed. (Note that this period could subsequently be filled with data
using the ADD or REPL access mode, provided space is available in the data set).'
To illustrate the above, consider the following example: Suppose we need to store
uncompressed data with a timestep of 1 minute" for one month (say July 1974) A
full calendar year of data would require 1041 records. But, If GAP-CC were used
"
s
267
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.4 UPDATE Block
The UPDATE block is used to update selected fields in the label of a data set
already present in the TSS.
****************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout '" ! ' " "
******
UPDATE
*** the following group is repeated for each data set
DATASET N0=
[STATION-
[SECURITY-
[UNITS-
[DBS TIME-
[YEAROR-
[BASEYR-
[LOCATION-
]
]
]
]
]
-location-
*******
Example
*******
UPDATE
DATASET NO- 39
UNITS- ENGLISH
OBS TIME- 12
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
< statn>
< units>
< y>
< location
Keyword
DATASET NO-
STATION-
SECURITY-
UN ITS-
DBS TIME-
YEAROR-
BASEYR-
> LOCATION-
Fortran
name(s)
DSDSNO
STA
SECURE
UNITS
OBSTIM
YEAROR
BASEYR
LOCATN
Format
14
A8
A8
A8
15
A4
15
A40
Default
none
[blank]
WRITE
METRIC
24
YES
1900
[blank]
Valid Values
Min: 1, Max: 9999
Any 8 char, string
WRITE, READ
METRIC, ENGLISH
Min: 1, Max: 48
YES, NO
Min: 1, Max: 10000
Any 40 char, string
Explanation - See Explanation for ADD Block (Section 2.3)
268
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.5 SCRATCH Block
let SIntcb1°Ck 1S US6d to delete a data set label (and> effectively, the data
wCw^UIIUCflUo* •» *
**************************************^^
££2S£^
Layout
******
SCRATCH
nATAcrihMnf°llow1ng 11ne 1s ^peated for each data set
UAIASET N0=
*******
Example
*******
SCRATCH
DATASET N0=
39
**************************************
Details
****************************************A^
Symbol
Keyword
DATASET N0= DSDSNO
Fortran Format Default
name(s)
Min
1
Max
9999
14
none
Explanation
DATASET NO is a unique identifying number for a data set.
269
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.6 EXTEND Block
The EXTEND block is used to allocate more space to a data set or remove space from
a data set.
**************************************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************************************
Layout
******
EXTEND
*** the following group is repeated for each data set:
DATASET N0=
SPACE
*******
Example
*******
EXTEND
DATASET N0=
SPACE-
39
120
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Keyword
DATASET N0=
SPACE=
Fortran
name(s)
DSDSNO
SPACE
Format
14
15
Default
none
none
Min
1
1
Max
9999
99999
Explanation
DATASET NO is a unique identifying number for a data set.
SPACE is the space reserved for a data set in records.
270
-------
TSSM Input Set
2.7 SHOWSPACE, SHOWDSL, AND SHOWTSS Blocks
The SHOWSPACE block is used to show the free space in the TSS, the SHOWDSL block
is used to display the contents of the label of one or all of the data sets in the
TSS, and the SHOWTSS block is used to display the current state of the TSS.
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
SHOWSPACE
SHOWDSL
[DATASET N0=
SHOWTSS
*******
Examp1e
*******
]
SHOWSPACE
SHOWDSL
DATASET N0
SHOWTSS
39
Details
Symbol
Keyword
DATASET N0=
Fortran
name(s)
DSDSNO
Format
14
Default
none
Min
1
Max
9999
Explanation
DATASET NO is a unique identifying number for a data set,
present, all data sets are shown.
If this keyword is not
271
-------
TSSM Input Set
3.0 SAMPLE TSSMGR INPUT SET
A sample input stream which creates the label for a data set.
TSSM
ADD
DATASET NO- 39
MEMBER NAME- PRECIP
SPACE- 100
UNITS- ENGLISH
COMPRESSION- COMPR
STATION- US3112
FILLER CODE- ZERO
TIMESTEP- 360
LOCATION- PALO ALTO, CALIFORNIA
END TSSM
272
-------
RUN Input Set
4.0 FORMAT OF A RUN INPUT SET
Summary
A RUN input set starts with a RUN heading and ends with an END RUN delimiter. The
body of the text consists of several groups, called "blocks," which may appear in
any sequence:
RUN
GLOBAL Block
Contains information of a global nature. It applies to every
operation in the RUN.
FILES Block
Specifies disk files to be used by the run and their FORTRAN unit
numbers.
OPN SEQUENCE Block
Specifies the operations to be performed in the RUN, in the sequence
they will be executed. It indicates any grouping (INGROUPs).
<0peration-type> Block
Deals with data "domestic" to all the operations of the same
<0peration-type>, for example, parameters and inital conditions for all
Pervious Land-segments in a RUN. It is not concerned with relationships
between operations, or with external sources or targets for time series.
There is one <0peration-type> Block for each involved
in the RUN.
[FTABLES Block]
A collection of function tables (FTABLES). A function table is used to
document, in discrete numerical form, a functional relationship between
two or more variables.
[EXT SOURCES Block]
Specifies time series which are input to the operations from external
sources (TSS, WDM file, or sequential files).
[NETWORK Block]
Specifies any time series which are passed between operations.
273
-------
RUN Input Set
[EXT TARGETS Block]
Specifies those time series which are output from operations to external
destinations (TSS or WDM file).
[SCHEMATIC Block]
Specifies structure of watershed, i.e., connections of land segments and
stream reaches to each other. Operates in tandem with MASS-LINK block
to simplify definition of complex watersheds.
'.I ' ''• •„ ;• .,.''•• . ', . . ' ' „": ; ' >-.: M I: >,
[MASS-LINK Block]
Specifies groups of time series to combine with network connections
defined in the SCHEMATIC block in order to specify mass flows in the
watershed.
[FORMATS Block]
Contains any user-supplied formats which may be required to read time
series on external sequential files.
[SPEC-ACTIONS Block]
Specifies operation, variable location, type or name, date/time and
action code in order to change a variable's value during a run.
END RUN ^ ^ °_ , [ ( "('." / _"' f , " . . ' ^ ' .' ,
Usually, a RUN input set will not include all of the above blocks. Their presence
will be dictated by the operations performed in the RUM and the options which are
selected.
274
-------
GLOBAL Block
4.1 GLOBAL Block
This block must always be present in a RUN input set.
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 56 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GLOBAL
START <---s-date-time ---- >
RUN INTERP OUTPUT LEVEL
RESUME RUN
END GLOBAL
•-- run-info --- -
END<---e-date-time—-:
********************************************************************************
Examp1e
*******
GLOBAL
Seven Mile River - Water quality run
START 1970/01/01 00:00 END 1977/12/31 12:00
RUN INTERP OUTPUT LEVEL 7
RESUME 0 RUN 1
END GLOBAL
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max
RUNINF(20)
SYR,
SMO,
SDA,
SHR,
SMI
EYR,
EMO,
EDA,
EHR,
EMI
OUTLEV
RESMFG
RUNFG
A78
none
none
18,
IX, 12,
IX, 12,
IX, 12,
IX, 12
18,
IX, 12,
IX, 12,
IX, 12,
IX, 12
15
15
15
none
1
1
0
0
none
12
varies
#24
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
none
32767
12
varies
23
59
32767
12
varies
24 #only if EMI is 0
59
10
1
1
275
-------
GLOBAL Block
, 'i ' ,, ,,„ ••;'',,., '' • • „' '„'• I „, ' , '' **!
Explanation
RUNINF stores the users comments regarding the RUN.
Users conventionally label the same point in time differently, depending whether
they are looking forward or backward towards it. For example, if we say that a RUN
starts on 1978/05 we mean that it commences at the start of May 1978. On the other
hand, if we say it ends on 1978/05 we mean it terminatesat the end of May 1978.
Thus, HSPF has two separate conventions for the external labeling of time. When
supplying values for a date/time field a user may omit any element in the field
except the year, which must be supplied as a 4 digit figure. HSPF will substitute
the defaults given above for any blank or zero values. The completed starting and
ending date/time fields are translated into another format, which is the only one
used to label intervals and time points internally. It has a resolution of 1
minute. Thus, time is recorded as a year/month/day/hour/minute set, to completely
specify either a time interval or point. The date/time used by the internal clock
uses the "contained within" principle. For example, the first minute in an hour is
numbered 1 (not 0) and the last is numbered 60 (not 59). The same applies to the
numbering of hours. Thus, the time conventionally labeled 11:15 is in the 12th
hour of the day so is labeled 12:15 internally; the last minute of 1978 is labeled
1978/12/31 24:60. This convention is extended to the labeling of points by
labeling it with the minute that immediately precedes it. Thus, midnight New Year's
eve 1978/1979 is 1978/12/31 24:60, not 1979/01/01 00:00. This gives a system for
uniquely labeling each point internally.
OUTLEV is a flag which governs the quantity of informative output produced by the
Run Interpreter. A value 0 results in minimal output; 10 in the maximum. It does
not affect error or warning messages.
If RESMFG is 1, the system will operate in "resume" mode; that is, it will use the
same input as were supplied in a previous RUN input set except where overriding
information is supplied in this input set. (This feature is not supported in the
current release of HSPF).
If RUNFG is 1, the system will both interpret and execute the RUN. If it is
0, only interpretation will be done.
276
-------
FILES Block
4.2 FILES Block
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
FILES
< -file name
(repeats until all files are specified)
END FILES
*******
Examp1e
*******
FILES
INFO
ERROR
WARN
MESSU
UNIT*
24
25
26
21
61
33
END FILES
FILE NAME ***
/hspf/hspinf.da
/hspf/hsperr.da
/hspf/hspwrn.da
test.mes
test.dsp
test.pis
Details
Symbol
Fortran Format
Name(s)
Comment
FTYPE
FUNIT
FNAME
A6 Type of file; valid values are: INFO,
ERROR, WARN, MESSU, WDM, TSS, ANNMES.
15 File unit number; valid values are:
1, 5, 15-99 (20-99 recommended).
A64 File name; complete path name or local
name if in default/current directory.
277
-------
; is'4''
FILES Block
Explanation
The FILES Block contains the names of input and output files used by the program
during the run; this block associates the unit numbers specified in various parts
of the UCI file with actual disk file names. It is designed to eliminate the need
for a separate command file, such as a DOS "BAT" file or VAX "COM" file, where the
correspondence between file name and unit number isoften performedfor batch
programs such as HSPF. Since the FILES Block requires that the program be able to
locate the UCI file, the command line for invoking HSPF includes the name of the
UCI file. The syntax is as follows:
hspf uci-file-name
For compiles/computers that do not have a command line parameter capability, the
program is designed to default to a UCI file name of "hspfuci.inp".
FTYPE is a keyword that identifies the type of file. There are seven FTYPE's that
HSPF recognizes, and that must be specified for these types of files. For all
other files, this field should be left blank. The FTYPE keyword should be left-
justified in columns one through six. The valid FTYPE values are shown below:
DESCRIPTION FTYPE
Information INFO
Error ERROR
Warning WARN
Run interpreter output MESSU
Watershed Data Management WDM
Time Series Store TSS
Message file ANNMES
FUNIT is the file unit number of the file. This corresponds to the unit number of
those files specified in other parts of the UCI file. For the Information, Error,
Warning, WDM, and TSS files, FUNIT may be any of the valid numbers. FUNiT is an
integer value that should be right-justified in columns 9 through 13, and the valid
values for FUNIT are 1, 5, and 15-99. Each value of FUNIT in the FILES Block
should be unique, and the numbers 6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14 should not be used.
FNAME is the file name of the file. If the file is not in the current (default)
directory, the complete path name should be specified. FNAME should be left-
justified in columns 17 through 80.
The FILES Block is usually required. In particular, if a WDM or TSS file is needed
by the run, it must be specified in the FILES Block, since the program does not
have a default name for these files. The Information, Error, and Warning files
must also be specified for every run, or they must reside in the default/current
directory and have the following default names: "hspinf.da", "hsperr.da", and
"hspwrn.da". Similarly, in the operating modules (PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, DISPLY,
PLTGEN, DURANL, and MUTSIN), the user must specify file unit numbers as the
destination for printout. It is recommended that these files be explicitly
assigned names in the FILES Block. However, if the user does not include an entry
in the FILES block for one of these operations, a file is automatically opened by
HSPF with the default name "hspfxx.dat", where xx is the unit number.
278
-------
OPN SEQUENCE Block
4.3 OPN SEQUENCE Block
***
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************A^^**^^A^^^A^^AVfcjtitst^^.fcit^^jfcjtit<.^^^SfcAik
Layout
******
OPN SEQUENCE
[INGRP
<-opn-id >
INDELT ]
<-opn-id
[END INGRP ]
<-opn-id
<-opn-id-
[INGRP
<-opn-id-
INDELT
INDELT
INDELT ]
[END INGRP ]
END OPN SEQUENCE
*******
Example
*******
OPN SEQUENCE
INGRP
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
END INGRP
RCHRES
END OPN SEQUENCE
*****************************************vnt*********************^^
20
21
22
INDELT 02:00
1 INDELT 12:00
Details
Symbol
Fortran
Name(s)
Format
Comment
<-opn-id->
HRMIN(2)
OPTYP,OPTNO
12,IX,12 Time interval (hour:min) used in the
INPAD e.g., 00:05
A6,5X,I3 Type and no. of this operation.
e.g., RCHRES 100
279
-------
OPN SEQUENCE Block
Explanation
This block specifies the various operations to be performed in the RUN and,
optionally, their grouping into INGROUPs. The operations will be performed in the
sequence specified in the block, apart from repetition implied by grouping. A
maximum of 75 operations can be specified in one run.
Every <-opn-id-> consists of OPTYP and OPTNO. The OPTYP field must contain an
identifier of up to 6 characters which corresponds to an "operating module id" in
the HSPF system. The OPTNO field contains an integer which distinguishes
operations of the same type from one another. Every must be unique.
The time intervals of the scratch pads used in the RUN are specified in this block.
These appear on the INGROUP lines, except where the user has not placed an
operation in an INGROUP. In that case is specified alongside <-opn-id->.
4.3.1 Optimization of Operation Sequencing
The sequence of operations within the Operations Sequence block should be optimized
to make most efficient use of the internal scratch pad (INPAD). Optimal use of the
INPAD is accomplished by reducing the maximum number of time series(rows) on the
INPAD. This increases the length of each row and the INSPAN, which reduces
swapping between operations.
A time series occupies a row on the INPAD from the moment it is either read from
an external source or is created by an operation until the moment it is used by the
last operation requiring it. HSPF automatically optimizes the reading of data from
external sources and writing of data to external targets.
Optimal sequencing of operations requires that an operation be executed as soon as
all input timeseries produced by other operations have been created. For example,
a DISPLY operation which displays outflow from a PERLND operation should
immediately follow the PERLND operation. A RCHRES operation representing a section
of stream should immediately follow any RCHRES operations representing reaches
upstream and any PERLND operations which contribute local inflow.
For example, a watershed is represented by 4 PERLND operations, 5 RCHRES
operations, 2 PLTGEN operations, 4 DISPLY operations, and 1 DURANL operation.
These are defined as follows:
280
-------
OPN SEQUENCE Block
PERLND 1 - rain gage 1, land use of pasture
PERLND 2 - rain gage 1, land use of corn
PERLND 3 - rain gage 2, land use of pasture
PERLND 4 - rain gage 2, land use of corn
RCHRES 1 - local inflow from PERLND 1 and 2
RCHRES 2 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 1,
local inflow from PERLND 1 and 2
RCHRES 3 - local inflow from PERLND 3 and 4
RCHRES 4 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 2 and 3,
local inflow from PERLND 3 and 4
RCHRES 5 - upstream inflow from RCHRES 4,
local inflow from PERLND 3 and 4
DISPLY 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5
DISPLY 2 - outflow from RCHRES 3
DISPLY 3 - unit flow from PERLND 2
DISPLY 4 - unit flow from PERLND 4
PLTGEN 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5,
measured flow at bottom of RCHRES 5
PLTGEN 2 - outflow from RCHRES 1,
area weighted sum of unit flow from PERLND 1 and 2
DURANL 1 - outflow from RCHRES 5
The optimum order for these operations is:
PERLND 1
PERLND
DISPLY
PLTGEN
RCHRES
PERLND
PERLND
DISPLY
RCHRES
RCHRES
RCHRES
RCHRES 1
DISPLY 2
DISPLY 1
DURANL 1
PLTGEN 1
281
-------
Operation-type Block
4.4 <0peration-type> Block
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
. i '.•'.'... -., • 'i • .'. , ' .. «• '"', " 31 .' I . ' ' ,: ' „''!
Layout
******
General input
Section 1 input --
Section 2 input Only supplied if the operating module is sectioned
and the section is active
*
Section N input --
END
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran Format Comment
Name(s)
OPTYP
A6
Type of operation covered in this
block, e.g., RCHRES, PERLND
Explanation
This type of block deals with data which are "domestic" to all operations of the
same <0peration-type>, e.g., the parameters and initial conditions for all the
Pervious Land- segments in a RUN. It is not concerned with relationships between
operations or with external sources or targets for time series.
This type of block provides for "general" input and for input which is specific to
individual "sections" of the OM. The latter only apply to modules which are
sectioned. The general input contains all of the information which simple
(non-sectioned) modules require; for sectioned modules it contains input which is
not specific to any one section.
The general organization of the <0peration-type> blocks is as follows:
282
1 i,
-------
Operation-type Block
The user supplies his input in a set of tables (e.g., ACTIVITY, Sect 4.4(1).1.1
below). Each table has a name (eg. ACTIVITY), called the "Table-type". A table
starts with the heading and ends with the delimiter END
The body of the table consists of:
<-
-values-
where is the range of operation-type numbers to which the apply.
If the second field in is blank, the range is assumed to consist of a
single operation. Thus, in the example in Sect 4.4(1).1.1, Pervious Land-segments
(PLSs) 1 through 7 have the same set of active sections, while segment 9 has a
different set.
Thus, a table lists the values given to a specified set of variables (occupying
only 1 line) for all the operations of a given type. The input was designed this
way to minimize the quantity of data supplied when many operations have the same
values for certain sets of input.
HSPF will only look for a given Table-type if the options already specified by the
user require data contained within it. Thus, Table-type MON-INTERCEP (Sect
4.4(1).4.5) is relevant only if VCSFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 (4.4(1).4.1) is set
to 1 for one or more PLSs. The system has been designed to ignore redundant
information. Thus, if VCSFG is 0 and Table-type MON-INTERCEP is supplied, the table
will be ignored.
On the other hand, if an expected value is not supplied, the system will attempt
to use a default value. This situation can arise in one of three ways:
1. The entire table may be missing from the UCI.
2. The table may be present but not contain an entry (line) for the operation
in question. The example in Sect 4.4(1).1.1 has no entry for PLS No. 8.
Thus, all values in its active sections vector will have the default of 0.
3. A field may be left blank or given the value zero. In the example in Section
4.4(1).4.2, KVARY will acquire the default value 0.0 for PLS's 1 through 7.
When appropriate, the HSPF system will also check that a value supplied by the user
falls within an allowable range. If it does not, an error message is generated.
Note that a table contains either integers or real values, but not both. For
example, Table-type ACTIVITY (Sect 4.4(1).1.1) contains only integer flags, but
Table-type PWAT-PARM2 (4.4(1).4.2) contains only real numbers. For tables
containing real-valued data, the documentation gives separate defaults, minima and
maxima for the English and Metric unit systems. The user specifies the system in
which he is working, in Table-type GEN-INFO (e.g., Sect 4.4(1).1.3)
283
-------
PERLND Block
4.4(1) PERLND Block
*******************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** ;
PERLND
General input
[section ATEHP input]
[section SNOW input]
[section PWATER input]
[section SEDMNT input]
[section PSTEMP input]
[section PWTGAS input]
[section PQUAL input]
[section MSTLAY input]
[section PEST input]
[section NITR input]
[section PHOS input]
[section TRACER input]
END PERLND
Explanation
This block contains the data which are "domestic" to all
segments in the RUN. The "General input" is always relevant:
required if the module section concerned is active.
the Pervious Land-
other input is only
284
-------
1
PERLND -- General Input
4.4{l).l PERLND BLOCK — General input
*************************************************^^
1 23 45 6 7 8
iH!5S!8901234567890I2345678901234567890123456789°123456789012345678901234567890
***************************************************^^
Layout
******
Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO
*********************************************^^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.
285
-------
PERLND -- General Input
4.4(1).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector
**************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
ACTIVITY
<-range>< - a-s-vector - - >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ACTIVITY
*******
Example
******* . ' ' ;"_
ACTIVITY
Active Sections ***
* - # ATMP SNOW PWAT SED PST PWG PQAL MSTL PEST NITR PHOS TRAC***
17111
9 0001
END ACTIVITY
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ASVEC(12)
Format
1215
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Explanation
The PERLND module is divided into 12 sections. The values supplied in this table
specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation involving
the PERLND module. A value of 0 means "inactive" and 1 means "active". Any
meaningful subset of sections may be active.
286
-------
PERLND -- General Input
4.4(1).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information
****************************************************^^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
IH!5578901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************^^
Layout
******
PRINT-INFO
<-range><-
print-flags
(repeats until all operations of this type are'coveredj
END PRINT-INFO
->
*******
Example
*******
PRINT-INFO
********************* Print-flags *************************
# - # ATMP SNOW PWAT SED PST PW6 PQAL MSTL PEST NITR PHOS TRAC *********
17246 439-1019
END PRINT-INFO .
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PFLA6(12)
PIVL
PYREND
Format
1215
15
15
Def
4
1
9
Min
2
1
1
Max
6
1440
12
287
-------
'HP! •: ''" "I11:"" ii-i'i,""'::1;1" .'""I1"'I"'.'ir' i->f,!^ ME "MM 1"" PW'i.i
,; " , , „ , ,„ ' , • '• • iiil ' '»• •,',
,:• i< '• -1 ' ' .'I :, Jij i)V' :>.
:'. •. ' . ' ' • • i . ;;!l i ,:, '".:•:
PERLND -- General Input
Explanation
HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value for
PFLAGQ is:
2 means every PIVL intervals
3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never
In the example above, output from Pervious Land-segments 1 thru 7 will occur as
follows:
Section Max frequency
ATEMP
SNOW
PWATER
SEDMNT
thru
PEST
NITR
PHOS
TRACER
10 intervals
month
never
| month (defaulted)
month
day
10 intervals
A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that is,
every PDELT=PIVL*DELT mins). PIVL must be chosen such that there are an integer no.
of PDELT periods in a day.
HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified minimum interval. In the above example, output for section PHOS
will be printed at the end of each day, month and year.
PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.
288
-------
PERLND -- General Input
4.4(1).1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information
****************************************************^^
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
IH!MI8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************^^
Layout
GEN-INFO
<-rangex---PLS-id --><--unit-syst--x-printu->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GEN-INFO' ' ' '..' *
*******
Example
*******
GEN-INFO
# - #
Name
I Yosemite Valley
2 Kings river
END GEN-INFO
NBLKS Unit-systems Printer***
User t-series Engl Metr***
in out ***
1 1 1 23
***************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LSID(5)
NBLKS
UUNITS,IUNITS,
Format
5A4
15
315
Def
none
1
1
Min
none
1
1
Max
none
1
2
OUNITS
PUNIT(2)
215
99
289
-------
PERLND -- General Input
. . i i . • , "".', , f t;, 'i.; indicate the system of units for data in the
UCI, input time series and output time series respectively: 1 means English units,
2 means Metric units.
",, , ; ' ,;'
The values supplied for indicate the destinations of printout in English
and Metric units respectively. A value 0 means no printout is required in that
system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that system and and the
value is the Fortran unit no. of the file to which the printout is to be written.
Note that printout for each Pervious Land Segment can be obtained in either the
English or Metric systems, or both (irrespective of the system used to supply the
inputs).
4.4(1).2 PERLND BLOCK -- Section ATEMP input
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type ATEMP-DAT]
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of the table mentioned above is detailed in the documentation
which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.
290
-------
PERLND -- Section ATEMP Input
4.4(1).2.1 Table-type ATEMP-DAT -- Elevation difference between gage & PLS
*********************************************^^
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************************^^
Layout
ATEMP-DAT
<-rangexel-diff-x-airtmp->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ATEMP-DAT '
*******
Example
*******
ATEMP-DAT
El-diff
# - # (ft)
1 7 150.
END ATEMP-DAT
***
***
************************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ELDAT
AIRTMP
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
60
15
Min
none
none
-60
-50
Max
none
none
140
60
Units
ft
m
Deg F
Deg C
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
tnDoJt-S *ne.<;ifterence in elevation between the temp gage and the PLS; it is used
if ?S1!fce-thJ.t?p ?uer *te PLS by aPPlic*tion of a lapse rate. It is positive
it the PLS is higher than the gage, and vice versa.
AIRTMP is the air temperature over the PLS at the start of the RUN.
291
-------
T" Mil!, 'I'm,,]: !|!i; '
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
4.4(1).3 PERLND BLOCK -- Section SNOW input
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type ICE-FLAG]
Table-type SNOW-PARM1
[Table-type SNOW-PARM2]
[Table-type SNOW-INIT1]
[Table-type SNOW-INIT2]
********************************************************************************
• i ,; -' • • '! ;• - •' .:•;' t
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example,
all the values can be defaulted.
292
-------
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
4.4(1).3.1 Table-type ICE-FLAG -- governs simulation of ice formation
***************************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
iH!5SI8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^
Layout
******
ICE-FLAG
<-rangexice>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ICE-FLAG'
*******
Example
*******
ICE-FLAG
Ice- ***
# - # flag ***
171
END ICE-FLAG
***********************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
ICEFG 15 0 0 1
Explanation
A value 0 means ice formation in the snow pack will not be simulated; 1 means it
wi 11.
293
-------
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
4.4(1).3.2 Table-type SNOW-PARM1 -- First group of SNOW parameters
*****************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SNOW-PARM1
<-range>< snowparml -- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
• •••••#••••'•'•*•**'*•""•*'"''''' '
END SNOW-PARM1
*******
Example
*******
SNOW-PARM1
Latitude Mean- SHADE SNOWCF
$ - # elev
1 7 39.5 3900. 0.3 1.2
END SNOW-PARM1
COVIND***
***
10
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LAT
MELEV
SHADE
SNOWCF
COVIND
Format Def
5F10.0 40.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
none
none
hone
Min
-90.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
0.01
0.25
Max
90.0
30000.0
10000.0
1.0
100.0
none
none
Units
degrees
ft
m
none
none
in
mm
Unit
system
Both
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
294
-------
n
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
Explanation
f°r
MELEV is the mean elevation of the PLS.
Sple'f t^es!"^10" °f ^ PL$ WMch is Shaded from solar radiation by> for
SNOWCF is the factor by which recorded precip data will be
n is snowfallj to account for
writh Pack..(wat.er ^6(Iu1vallent) at which the entire PLS will be
covered with snow (see functional description of SNOW section).
4. 4(1). 3. 3 Table-type SNOW-PARM2 -- Second group of SNOW parms
********^"H"^
£S°iES<>^
Layout
******
SNOW-PARM2
<-range><
snowparmZ ...... -
(repeats until all operations of'this type 'are 'covered)
END SNOW-PARM2 ................. ....
*******
Example
*******
SNOW-PARM2
# - # RDCSN
1 7 0.2
END SNOW-PARM2
***
TSNOW SNOEVP CCFACT MWATER MGMELT***
OO •
295
-------
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
RDCSN
TSNOW
SNOEVP
CCFACT
MWATER
MGMELT
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.15
32.0
0.0
0.1
1.0
0.03
0.01
0.25
Min
0.01
30.0
-i.o
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
PERLND -
Max
1.0
40.0
5.0
1.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
25.
•- Sectior
Units
none
degF
degC
none
none
none
, ' .1. ' I-;
in/day
mm/day
• •
-
i SNOW Input
Unit
system
Both
1 • "
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
i '", • ,• ••
Engl
Metric
Explanation
RDCSN is the density of cold, new snow relative to water. This value applies t
snow falling at air temps <= OdegF. At higher temperatures the density of snow is
adjusted.
TSNOW is the air temp below which precip will be snow, under saturated conditions.
Under non-saturated conditions the temperature is adjusted slightly.
•, !-. '•,..• .: - •' • ; , "v ;' ,'' ;ri;v:v '', • '':>' '; .,;'. " : :, :,.,"'! •. : "vi, '
SNOEVP is a parameter which adapts the snow evaporation (sublimation) equation to
field conditions.
CCFACT is a parameter which adapts the snow condensation/convection melt equation
to field conditions.
MWATER is the max water content of the snow pack, in depth water per depth water
equiv.
MGMELT is the max rate of snowmelt by ground heat, in depth of waterequiv per day.
This is the value which applies when the pack temperature is at freezing point.
- .'.'.'iflr
296
;!„"„!;:;:,: .it;
-------
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
4.4(1).3.4 Table-type SNOW-INIT1 -- First group of initial values
*******************************************************^^
1 2 3 ' 4 5 67 8
IH!S578901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^
Layout
******
SNOW-INIT1
<-range><-
-snowinitl -
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SNOW-INIT1
Example
*******
SNOW-INIT1
# - # Pack-snow Pack-ice Pack-watr
1 7 2.1 .02
END SNOW-INIT1
RDENPF
.40
DULL
***
PAKTMP***
**************************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
Pack-snow
Pack-ice
Pack-watr
RDENPF
DULL
PAKTMP
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.2
400.
32.
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.01
0.0
none
none
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
1.0
800.
32.
0.0
Units
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
none
none
degF
degC
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
297
-------
PERI.ND -- Section SNOW Input
Explanation
Pack-snow is the quantity of snow in the pack (waterequiv).
Pack-ice is the quantity of ice in the pack (water equiv).
Pack-watr is the quantity of liquid water in the pack.
RDENPF is the density of the frozen contents (snow+ice) of the pack, relative to
water.
DULL is an index to the dullness of the pack surface, from which albedo is
estimated.
PAKTMP is the mean temperature of the frozen contents of the pack.
4.4(1).3.5 Table-type SNOW-INIT2 -- Second group of initial values
*************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890^
********************************************************************************J
Layout
******
SNOW-INIT2
<-range>< —snowinit2 -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SNOW-INIT2
*******
Example
*******
SNOW-INIT2
***
# - I COVINX XLNMLT SKYCLR***
1 7 0.50
END SNOW-INIT2
********************************************************************************
1 • , • • ; v • ' ., L-|:
298
-------
PERLND -- Section SNOW Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
COVINX
XLNMLT
SKYCLR
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.01
0.25
0.0
0.0
1.0
Min
0.01
0.25
0.0
0.0
.15
Max
none
none
none
none
1.0
Units
in
mm
in
mm
none
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Explanation
C2VI.NuX ^.V6 current Pack (water equiv) required to obtain complete areal coverage
(PACKF/COVINX) the PaCR 1S l6SS than thiS amount' areal cover is Pirated
XLNMLT is the current remaining possible increment to ice storage in the pack (see
functional description). This value is only relevant if ice formation is being
simulated (ICEFG= 1). a
SKYCLR is the fraction of sky which is assumed to be clear at the present time.
In the above example COVINX and XLNMLT will be assigned default values because the
user has left the fields blank.
299
-------
," » ":l!'*,'1i'!h"" n I'1 '' JillNlliii! ,„ i,
" j Hi iniliJ , ,j!'|i',,.i,i !KliJllli;i;l|I1!llii:!ill|||l . <
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4 PERLND BLOCK — Section PWATER input
12345678
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789pl23456789dl234567890123456789u
**************************************************************************
11 i, :: ' ' ' ,*' , ' ' „ ' .11, T , ,i M i i, J" i
Layout
******
[Table-type PWAT-PARM1 ]
Table-type PWAT-PARM2
[Table-type PWAT-PARM3 ]
Table-type PWAT-PARM4
[Table-type HON-INTERCEP]
[Table-type MON-UZSN ]
[Table-type MOM-MANNING ]
[Table-type MON-INTERFLW]
[Table-type HON-IRC ]
[Table-type MON-LZETPARM]
[Table-type PWAT-STATE1 ]
only required if the relevant quantity
varies through the year
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.
300
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4. 4(1). 4.1 Table-type PWAT-PARM1 -- First group of PWATER parms (flags)
*************************************************^^
1 23 4 5 67 8
!S!!S78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***************************************************^^
Layout
******
PWAT-PARM1
<-range><
pwatparml
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWAT-PARM1 .................. . ' '
*******
Exampl e
*******
PWAT-PARM1
„ Flags
# - # CSNO RTOP UZFG VCS VUZ
1711
END PWAT-PARM1
VNN VIFW VIRC VLE
***
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CSNOFG
RTOPFG
UZFG
VCSFG
VUZFG
VNNFG
VIFWFG
VIRCFG
VLEFG
Format
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
301
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
Explanation
If CSNOFG is 1, section PWATER assumes that snow accumulation and melt is being
considered. It will, therefore, expect that the time series produced by section
SNOW are available, either internally (produced in this RUN) or from external
sources (produced in a previous RUN). If CSNOFG is 0, no such time series are
expected. See the functional description for further information.
If RTOPFG is 1, routing of overland flow is done in exactly the same way as in
HSPX, ARM and NPS. A value of 0 results in a different algorithm being used.
If UZFG is 1, inflow to the upper zone is computed in the same way as in HSPX, ARM
and NPS. A value of zero results in the use of a different algorithm, which is
less sensitive to changes in DELT.
The flags beginning with "V" indicate whether or not certain parameters will be
assumed to vary through the year: 1 means they do wary, 0 means they do not. The
quantities concerned are:
VCSFG interception storage capacity
VUZFG upper zone nominal storage
VNNFG Manning's n for the overland flow plane
VIFWFG interflow inflow parameter
VIRCFG interflow recession const
VLEFG lower zone E-T parameter
If any of these flags are on, monthly values for the parameter concerned must be
supplied (see Table-types MON- , documented later).
302
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.2 Table-type PWAT-PARM2 -- Second group of PWATER parms
********************************************************^^
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^
Layout
******
PWAT-PARM2
<-range><--
-pwatparm2-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWAT-PARM2
*******
Example
*******
PWAT-PARM2
***
# - # ***FOREST
1 7 0.2
LZSN
8.0
INFILT
0.7
LSUR
400.
SLSUR
.001
KVARY
AGWRC
.98
END PWAT-PARM2
*******************************************************^^
303
-------
• ,•;, • j xi'1'1"'-}!
Hi"';' ' "'Jit ""«"!! »l ',"!' -W,'. •'tT?t*
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
FOREST
LZSN
INFILT
LSUR
SLSUR
KVARY
AGWRC
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
0.0
0.0
none
Min
0.0
.01
.25
0.0001
0.0025
1.0
0.3
.000001
0.0
0.0
0.001
Max
1.0
ibo ;
2500.
ibo.
2500.
none
none
10.
none
none
1.0
Units
none
in
mm
in/hr
mm/hr
ft
m
none
I/in
I/mm
I/day
Unit
system
Both
Engl
Metric
EngT
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Engl
Metric
Both
Explanation
FOREST is the fraction of the PLS which is covered by forest which will continue
to transpire in winter. Input only if CSNOFG = 1.
LZSN is the lower zone nominal storage.
INFILT is an index to the infiltration capacity of the soil.
LSUR is the length of the assumed overland flow plane, and SLSUR is the slope.
KVARY is a parameter which affects the behavior of groundwater recession flow,
enabling it to be non exponential in its decay with time.
AGWRC is the basic groundwater recession rate if KVARY is zero and there is no
inflow to groundwater (rate of flow today/rate yesterday).
In the above example, KVARY will be assigned the default value of 0.0.
304
i,; "a!, y, " iff" kiifS-ii! I'liij im' i',-1,,.'. ,:,:i ', i: •&•>>:,» .i1- J,> i:' .£ iv ','•
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.3 Table-type PWAT-PARM3 -- Third group of PWATER parms
**************************************************
1234 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PWAT-PARMS
<-range><-
_--pWatparm3-----
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWAT-PARM3
*******
Example
*******
PWAT-PARMS
***
# - #*** PETMAX PETMIN INFEXP INFILD DEEPFR BASETP AGWETP
9 39 33 3.0 1.5
END PWAT-PARMS
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PETMAX
PETMIN
INFEXP
INFILD
DEEPFR
BASETP
AGWETP
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
40.
4.5
35.
1.7
2.0
2:0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
none
none
none
none
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
10.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Units
degF
degC
degF
degC
none
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
305
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
Explanation
PETMAX is the air temp below which E-T will arbitrarily be reduced below the value
obtained from the input time series, and PETMIN is the temp below which E-T will
be zero regardless of the value in the input time series. These values are only
used if snow is being considered (CSNOFG= 1).
INFEXP is the exponent in the infiltration equation., and INFILD is the ratio
between the max and mean infiltration capacities over the PLS.
DEEPFR is the fraction of groundwater inflow which will enter deep (inactive)
groundwater and, thus, be lost from the system as it is defined in HSPF.
BASETP is the fraction of remaining potential E-T which can be satisfied from
baseflow (groundwater outflow), if enough is available.
AGWETP is the fraction of remaining potential E-T which can be satisfied from
active groundwater storage if enough is available.
In the above example, all parameters will be suppplied default values for
Land-segments 1 through 7, while DEEPFR thru AGWETP will be supplied defaults for
Land-segment 9.
4.4(1).4.4 Table-type PWAT-PARM4 -- Fourth group of PWATER parms
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567^9012345678^
********************************************************
i' . ' jllr/UI,, , "' »",,,; ,, , , »:„ n '. :','i ,,'i.,,'' !Vli| ',,,,1 i
Layout
******
PWAT-PARM4
<-range>< pwatparm4-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWAT-PARM4 '
Example
*******
PWAT-PARM4
***
* - # CEPSC UZSN NSUR INTFW IRC LZETP***
1 7 0.1 1.3 0.1 3. 0.5 0.7
END PWAT-PARM4
306
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CEPSC
UZSN
NSUR
INTFW
IRC
LZETP
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
none
none
0.1
none
none
0.0
Min Max
0.0 10.0
0.0 250.
0.01 10.0
0.25 250.
0.001 1.0
l.OE-30 none
l.OE-30 1.0
0.0 1.0 ,
Units
in
mm
in
mm
none
I/day
none
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
Values need only be supplied for those parameters which do not vary through the
year. If they do vary (as specified in Table-type PWAT-PARM1), monthly values are
supplied in the tables documented immediately below this one.
CEPSC is the interception storage capacity.
UZSN is the upper zone nominal storage.
NSUR is Manning's n for the assumed overland flow plane.
INTFW is the interflow inflow parameter.
IRC is the interflow recession parm. Under zero inflow, this is the ratio of
interflow outflow rate today/rate yesterday.
LZETP is the lower zone E-T parm. It is an index to the density of
deep-rooted vegetation.
307
-------
• i,1 >,,iii I,;/
,,„ . ..£,,
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.5 Table-type MON-INTERCEP -- Monthly interception storage capacity
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
MON-INTERCEP
<-range><
-mon-icep-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-INTERCEP
*******
Example
*******
MON-INTERCEP
Interception storage capacity at start of each month
I - I JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .02 .03 .03 .04 .05 .08 .12 .15 .12 .05 .03 .01
END MON-INTERCEP
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CEPSCM(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
,„;• •
Max
10.
250.
Units
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
Monthly values of interception storage.
PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
Only required if VCSFG in Table-type
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
308
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.6 Table-type MON-UZSN -- Monthly upper zone storage
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
MON-UZSN
<-range><
mon-uzsn— --
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-UZSN' '
*******
Example
*******
MON-UZSN
Upper zone storage at start of each month
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV
1 7 .30 .35 .30 .45 .56 .57 .45 .67 .64 .54 .56
END MON-UZSN
***
DEC ***
.40
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
UZSNM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 none
none
Min
.01
.25
Max
10.
250.
Units
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
Monthly values of upper zone nominal storage. This table is only required if VUZF6
in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
309
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.7 Table-type MON-MANNING -- Monthly Manning's n values
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
1 • ' , • '• i " ' • /. " ' • • ,'".". ,i!li,"
MON-MANNING
<-range>< mon-Manning ."---"-----._.___">
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
" / ' ;;•" »::
END MON-MANNING '
*******
Example
*******
•, i v ,';'. f
MON-MANNING
Manning's n at start of each month ***
* - $ JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 .23 .34 .34 .35 ,28 .35 .37 .35 .28 .29 .30 .30
END MON-MANNING
********************************************************************************
Details
•*-•«••—*•*»•»-»•»•-«•—— — ——•.«•«•—— — — .....»___.....»_____„____ .... . _ .. _ ..'____... «,.„.«. _ _ _ _ « H .«• — •«.....„.„___
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
""" "•""•••••«"•»»*•««»«•«•«•• — ••"--•*•»" — — — — — .-«-~ — -. — — — •.___«___.____________, «.....•._ _ ..™ _ _. -______« _ _
NSURM(12) 12F5.0 .10 .001 1.0 complex Both
Explanation
Monthly values of Manning's constant for overland flow. This table is only
required if VNNFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first dayofthe month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
310
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.8 Table-type MON-INTERFLW -- monthly interflow inflow parameters
**************************************************
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-INTERFLW
<-range><—
mon-interflw - --•
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-INTERFLW
*******
Example
*******
MON-INTERFLW
Interflow inflow parameter for start of each month
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 2.0 3.3 3.6 3.8 4.2 5.6 5.6 7.6 7.5 5.6 4.6 3.4
END MON-INTERFLW
********************************************************************************
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def
Min
Max Units
Unit
system
INTFWM(12)
12F5.0 none
0.0
none
none
Both
Explanation
Monthly values of the interflow inflow parameter. This table is only required if
VIFWFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
311
-------
PERLND--Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.9 Table-type MON-IRC -- Monthly interflow recession constants
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
MON-IRC
<-range>< mon-irc .""""•; >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-IRC
*******
Example
*******
MON-IRC
Interflow recession constant at start of each month ***
I - * JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG. SEP OCT NO.V DEC***
1 7 .35 .40 .40 .40 .40 .43 .45 .45 .50 .45 .45 .40
END MON-IRC
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
IRCM(12) 12F5.0 none l.OE-30 1.0 /day Both
Explanati on
Monthly values of the interflow recession parameter. This table is only required
if VIRCFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
11 »'" '•..."'...".. ,'„,!,, , , '
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
312
vi-,:,. ' '. Hi.;.;.! ..'i;..''.: ". laaii
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4. 4(1). 4. 10 Table-type MON-LZETPARM -- Monthly lower zone E-T parameter
**********************************************************^
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
MON-LZETPARM
<-range><
-mon-lzetparm-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-LZETPARM
*******
Example
*******
MON-LZETPARM
Lower zone evapotransp pa.rm at start of each month
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .30 .30 .35 .35 .40 .40 .45 .45 .45 .45 .42 .38
END MON-LZETPARM .
************************************************************^
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LZETPM(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max Units
1.0 none
Unit
system
Both
Explanation
Monthly values of the lower zone ET parameter.
VLEFG in Table-type PWAT-PARM1 is 1.
This table is only required if
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
313
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
4.4(1).4.11 Table-type PWAT-STATE1 -- PWATER state variables
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************^
Layout
****** , . .. , .
PWAT-STATEI
<-range><---
-pwat-statel-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWAT-STATEi
*******
Example
*******
PWAT-STATEI
PWATER state variables***
# . i*** CEPS SURS UZS
1 7 0.05 0.10 0.25
END PWAT-STATEI
IFWS
0.01
LZS
8.2
AGWS
2.0
GWVS
.025
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CEPS
"ii" '
SURS
UZS
IFWS
LZS
AGWS
GWVS
Format Def
7F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.001
.025
0.0
0.0
.001
.025
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.001
.025
0.0
0.0
.001
.025
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
100
2500
100
2500
100
2500
100
2500
100
2500
100
2500
100
2500
Units
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
inches
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
314
-------
PERLND -- Section PWATER Input
Explanation
This table is used to specify the initial water storages.
CEPS is the interception storage.
SURS is the surface (overland flow) storage.
UZS is the upper zone storage.
IFWS is the interflow storage.
LZS is the lower zone storage.
AGWS is the active groundwater storage.
GWVS is the index to groundwater slope; it is a measure of antecedent active
groundwater inflow.
4.4(1).5 PERLND BLOCK -- Section SEDMNT input
*******************************^^
1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************^^
Layout
******
[Table-type SED-PARM1]
Table-type SED-PARM2
Table-type SED-PARM3
[Table-type MOM-COVER]
[Table-type MON-NVSI]
[Table-type SED-STOR]
Tables in brackets [] are
not always required.
*******************************************************^^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
315
-------
PERLND •-- Section SEDMNT Input
1 • '• • ' it* •!!,':• '' . ' •• X •• „'• "
4.4(1).5.1 Table-type SED-PARM1 -- First group of SEDMNT parms
******************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SED-PARM1
<-rangex--sed-parml-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SED-PARMi
Example
*******
SED-PARMI
***
I - # CRV VSIV SDOP***
17010
END SED-PARMI
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CRVFG
VSIVFG
SDOPFG
Format Def
315 0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
Max
1
2
1
Explanation
If CRVFG is 1, erosion-related cover may vary throughout the year. Values are
supplied in Table-type MON-COVER.
If VSIVFG is 1, the rate of net vertical sediment input may vary throughout the
year. If VSIVFG is 2, the vertical sediment input is added to the detached
sediment storage only on days when no rainfall occurred during the previous day.
Values are supplied in Table-type MON-NVSI.
If SDOPFG is 1, removal of sediment from the land surface will be simulated with
the algorithm used in the ARM and NPS models. If it is 0, the new algorithm will
be used.
316
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
4.4(1).5.2 Table-type SED-PARM2 -- Second group of SEDMNT parms
**********************,^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^^
Layout
******
SED-PARM2
<-range><
-- sed-parm2
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SED-PARM2 ' '
*******
Example
*******
SED-PARM2
***
# - # SMPF
1 7 0.9
END SED-PARM2
KRER JRER AFFIX COVER NVSI***
0.08 1.90 0.01 0.5 -0.100
****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SMPF
KRER
JRER
AFFIX
COVER
NVSI
Format Def
6F10.0 1.0
0.0
none
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.001
0.0
none
0.0
0.0
none
none
Max
1.0
none
none
1.0
1.0
none
none
Units Unit
system
none Both
complex Both
complex Both
/day Both
none Both
Ib Engl
/ac.day
kg Metric
/ha. day
317
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
Explanation
SHPF is a "supporting management practice factor." It is used to simulate the
reduction in erosion achieved by use of erosion control practices.
KRER is the coefficient in the soil detachment equation.
JRER is the exponent in the soil detachment equation.
AFFIX is the fraction by which detached sediment storage decreases each day, as a
result of soil compaction.
COVER is the fraction of land surface which is shielded from erosion by rainfall
(not considering snow cover, which can be handled by simulation).
NVSI is the rate at which sediment enters detached storage from the atmosphere.
A negative value can be supplied (e.g., to simulate removal by human activity or
wind).
If monthly values for COVER and NVSI are being supplied, values supplied for these
variables in this table are not relevant.
318
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
4.4(1).5.3 Table-type SED-PARM3 -- Third group of SEDMNT parms
*******************************************************^^
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************^^
Layout
******
SED-PARMS
<-range><-- sed-parmS >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SED-PARM3
*******
Examp1e
*******
SED-PARMS
***
# - # KSER
1 7 0.08
END SED-PARMS
JSER
1.7
KGER
0.06
JGER***
1.4
*****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
*
Fortran
name(s)
KSER
JSER
KGER
JGER
Format Def
4F10.0 0.0
none
0.0
none
Min
0.0
none
0.0
none
Max
none
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
complex Both
complex Both
complex Both
complex Both
Explanation ;
KSER and JSER are the coefficient and exponent in the detached sediment washoff
equation.
KGER and JGER are the coefficient and exponent in the matrix soil scour equation
(simulates gully erosion, etc.).
319
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
4.4(1).5.4 Table-type MON-COVER -- Monthly erosion related cover values
***************************************************************************
i " ' 2 : 3' 4 " '5 ''"'i™1 6 : i '"':: :"8';
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-COVER
<-range>< mon-cover - ->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END HON-COVER
*******
Example
*******
MON-COVER
Monthly values for erosion related cover ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.0 .12 .12 .24 .24 .56 .67 .56 ,,34 .34 .23 .12
END MON-COVER
********************************************************************************
Details
' ____ ^--^±-^^J^LLd±l-j.i±^--I--I'---L^l^'
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
. _ _.
COVERM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 none Both
Explanation
Monthly values of the COVER parameter. This table is only required if CRVFG in
Table-type SED-PARM1 is 1.
• J!,, I
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
320
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
4.4(1).5.5 Table-type MON-NVSI -- Monthly net vertical sediment input
*****************************************^
12 3 4 5 6 7 a
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
************************************************^
Layout
******
MON-NVSI
<-range><-
-mon-nvsi
(repeats until all operations of this type are'coveredj
END MON-NVSI '
*******
Example
*******
MON-NSVI
Monthly net vertical sediment input***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
"m "°3 "°4 "°5 -°3 -°2 -01 °'° -01 -03 '01
***************************************************
*****************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
NVSIM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 0.0
0.0
Min Max Units
none none lb/
ac.day
none none kg/
ha. day
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
nate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
321
-------
PERLND -- Section SEDMNT Input
4.4(1).5.6 Table-type SED-STOR -- Detached sediment storage
*****************************************************************************
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SED-STOR
orangex >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SED-STOR:
*******
Example
*******
SED-STOR
Detached sediment storage (tons/acre) ***
a & ***
W " W
I 7 0.2
END SED-STOR
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
DETS F10.0 0.0 0.0 none tons/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none tonnes Metric
/ha
Explanation
DETS is the initial storage of detached sediment.
322
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PSTEMP input
****************************************************^^^
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
IH!MI890123456789012345678901234567890123456789°123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^
Layout
******
[Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1]
Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2
[Table-type MON-ASLT]
[Table-type MON-BSLT]
[Table-type MON-ULTP1]
[Table-type MON-ULTP2]
[Table-type MON-LGTP1]
[Table-type MON-LGTP2]
[Table-type PSTEMP-TEMPS]
Tables in brackets [] are
not always requried
***^****^*****************^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
323
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.1 Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 -- Flags for section PSTEMP
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
- • • • I
PSTEMP-PARM1 ;
<-range><—pstemp-parml--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PSTEMP-PARM1
******* ' . . . ... • • . •
Example
*******
PSTEMP-PARM1
Flags for section PSTEMP***
I - # SLTV ULTV LGTV TSOP***
170001
END PSTEMP-PARM1
.I*:,'! AT.
;,<•).;>.••.': '.: li
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
SLTVFG
ULTVF6
LGTVFG
TSOPFG
Format Def
415 0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
1
324
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
Explanation
ll ly Parai«eters for estimating surface layer temperature can vary
throughout the year. Thus, Table-types MON-ASLT and MON-BSLT will be expected
H S?SopUr?1osJ f°r- upper .layer temperature calculations. Tables
and MON-ULTP2 will be expected of ULTVFG is 1. LGTVFG serves the same
purpose for the lower layer and active groundwater layer temperature calculations
Table- types MON-LGTP1 and MON-LGTP2 will be expected if LGTVFG is ^Cdltuiailons'
TSOPFG governs the methods used to estimate subsurface soil temperatures If it
is 0, they are computed using a mean departure from air temperature, together with
smoothing factors If TSOPFG is 1, upper layer soil temperature (s estimated by
regression on air temperature (like surface temperature) . The lower 1 ayer/ground-
spec'f edeforeeach month)' $UPPlied ^^ by the US6r U different value may be
4.4(1).6.2 Table-type PSTEMP-PARM2 -- Second group of PSTEMP parms
**********************************************^
i2£KE!12£22S^^
Layout
******
PSTEMP-PARM2
<-range><
pstemp-parm2
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END PSTEMP-PARM2 '
*******
Exampl e
*******
PSTEMP -PARM2
***
f - #
1 7
24.
END PSTEMP- PARM2
BSLT
.5
ULTPl
24
ULTP2
5
LGTP1
an
4°'
LGTP2***
325
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
ASLT
BSLT
Format Def
6F10.0 32.
0.
1.0
1.0
Min
0.0
-18.
0.001
0.001
Max
100.
38.
2.0
2.0
Units Unit
system
deg F Engl
deg C Metric
deg F/F Engl
deg C/C Metric
Definition of remaining quantities depends on soil temp option flag
(TSOPFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1)
TSOPFG=0:
f . ¥1
ULTP1
ULTP2
LGTP1
LGTP2
TSOPFG-1:
ULTP1
ULTP2
LGTP1
LGTP2
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
not
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
used
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none Both
F deg Engl
C deg Metric
none Both
F deg Engl
C deg Metric
Deg F Engl
Deg C Metric
Deg F/F Engl
Deg C/C Metric
Deg F Engl
Deg C Metric
Explanation
ASLT is the surface layer temperature, when the air temperature is 32 degrees F (0
degrees C). It is the intercept of the surface layer temperature regression
equation.
BSLT is the slope of the surface layer temperature regression equation.
If TSOPFG - 0 then:
ULTP1 is the smoothing factor in upper layer temperature calculation.
ULTP2 is the mean difference between upper layer soil temperature and air
temperature.
LGTP1 and LGTP2 are the smoothing factor and mean departure from air
temperature, for calculating lower layer/groundwater soil temperature.
326
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
If TSOPFG = 1 then:
ULTP1 and ULTP2 are the intercept and slope in the upper layer soil temperature
regression equation (like ASLT and BSLT for the surface layer). LGTP1 is the
lower 1 ayer/groundwater layer soil temperature. LGTP2 is not used.
u! are being suPP11ed for any of these quantities (in Table-type
MON-XXX), the value appearing in this table is not relevant.
4. 4(1). 6. 3 Table-type MON-ASLT -- Monthly values for ASLT
**************************************************^
123456 7 8
H?!!S!8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************^
Layout
******
MON-ASLT
<-range><-
-mon-aslt-
(repeats until all operations of this type are 'covered)
• ••••••- ...............
END MON-ASLT
*******
Exampl e
*******
MON-ASLT
Value of ASLT at start of each month (deg F)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
- 38' 39' 40' 41
********************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
ASLTM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 32.
0.
Min Max
0. 100.
-18. 38.
Units
deg F
deg C
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is only required if SLTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1.
The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month; values for inter-
mediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values
327
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.4 Table-type MON-BSLT -- Monthly values for BSLT
*****************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-BSLT
<-range>< mon-bslt -- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-BSLT
*******
Example
*******
MON-BSLT
Value of BSLT at start of each month (deg F/F)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3
END MON-BSLT
********************************************************************************
i , , • : .,:J;"'i ;••.; ;• /, ,/ , :•• ,-!'„•
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BSLTM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 1.0
1.0
Min
0.001
0.001
Max
2.0
2.0
Units Unit
system
deg F/F Engl
deg C/C Metric
Explanation
This table is only required if SLTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
328
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.5 Table-type MON-ULTP1 Monthly values for ULTP1
***************************************************
*****************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IEJSS!!201234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************************************^*:*^
Layout
******
MON-ULTP1
<-range><-
-mon-ultpl-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-ULTpi
*******
Example
*******
MON-ULTP1
Value of ULTP1 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1)
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 37. 38. 39. 40. 42. 44. 47. 44. 42 39 39
END MON-ULTP1 '
***
39.
***********************************************************************^A^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ULTP1M(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
see
Min
notes for
Max
Table -type
PSTEMP- PARM2
Explanation
This table is only required if ULTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
329
-------
PIERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.6 Table-type MON-ULTP2 -- Monthly valuesfor ULTP2
'": •, ...:,'• : ••',', . . : • •' ,""' 'l';]"'
*****************************************************
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-ULTP2
<-range><-
-mon-ultp2-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-ULTP2
*******
Exampl e
*******
••. .',.'' '
MON-ULTP2
Value of ULTP2 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1)
I - i JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .4 .5 .5 .5 .6 .6 .5 .4 .4 .3
END MON-ULTP2
********************************************************************************
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ULTP2M(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
see
Min
notes for
Max
Table-type
PSTEMP- PARM2
Explanation
This table is only required if ULTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
330
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4. 4(1). 6. 7 Table-type MON-LGTP1 -- Monthly values for LGTP1
****************************************^^
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
«
Layout
******
MON-LGTP1
<-range><-
-mon-lgtpl-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-LGTPi '
*******
Exampl e
*******
MON-LGTPI
Value of LGTP1 at start of each month (TSOPFG=1)
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
38' "• "• 51' «
***
***************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LGTP1M(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
see
Min
notes for
Max
Table-type
PSTEMP -PARM2
Explanation
This table is only required if LGTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
331
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.8 Table-type MON-LGTP2 -- Monthly values for LGTP2
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-LGTP2
<-range><
mon-lgtp2 - •
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-LGTP2
*******
Example
*******
MON-LGTP2
Value for LGTP2 at start of each month (F deg) (TSOPFG=0) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0' 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
END MON-LGTP2
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LGTP2M(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 none
none
Min
none
none
Max
none
none
Units
F deg
C deg
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is only required if LGTVFG in Table-type PSTEMP-PARM1 is 1 and TSOPFG
is 0.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
332
-------
PERLND -- Section PSTEMP Input
4.4(1).6.9 Table-type PSTEMP-TEMPS -- Initial temperatures
*************************^^
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
H!!!!I55SI234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************************************^
Layout
******
PSTEMP-TEMPS
<-range><-- pstemp-temps >
(repeats until all operations of this type are'covered)
END PSTEMP-TEMPS '
Example
*******
PSTEMP-TEMPS
Initial temperatures***
# - # AIRTC SLTMP ULTMP
1 7 48. 48. 48.
END PSTEMP-TEMPS
LGTMP***
48.
***********************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def
Min
Max
Units
Unit
system
AIRTC
SLTMP
ULTMP
LGTMP
4F10.0 60.
16.
60.
16.
60.
16.
60.
16.
-20.
-29.
-20.
-29.
-20.
-29.
-20.
-29.
120.
49.
120.
49.
120.
49.
120.
49.
deg F
deg C
deg F
deg C.
deg F
deg C
deg F
deg C
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
These are the initial temperatures:
AIRTC - air temperature
SLTMP - surface layer soil temperature
upper layer soil temperature
lower layer/groundwater layer soil temperature
ULTMP
LGTMP
333
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PWTGAS input
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
PWT-PARM1]
PWT-PARM2]
MON-IFWDOX]
MON-IFWC02]
MON-GRNDDOX]
HON-GRNDC02]
PWT-TEMPS]
PWT-GASES]
Tables in brackets [] are not
always required
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
334
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.1 Table-type PWT-PARM1 -- Flags for section PWTGAS
1 2 3 45 678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
PWT-PARMI
<-range>< pwt-parml >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWT-PARMi
Example
*******
PWT-PARMI
Flags for section PWTGAS***
# - # IDV ICV GDV GVC***
170010
END PWT-PARMI
************************************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
IDVFG
ICVFG
GDVFG
GCVFG
Format Def
415 0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
1
Explanation
These flags each indicate whether or not a parameter is allowed to vary throughout
the year and, thus, whether or not the corresponding table of monthly values will
be expected:
FLAG PARAMETER
TABLE-TYPE FOR MONTHLY VALUES
IDVFG Interflow DO concentration MON-IFWDOX
ICVFG Interflow C02 concentration MON-IFWC02
GDVFG Groundwater DO concentration MON-GRNDDOX
GCVFG Groundwater C02 concentration MON-GRNDC02
335
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.2 Table-type PWT-PARM2 -- Second group of PWTGAS parms
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
PWT-PARM2
<-range><-
-pwt-parm2-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWT-PARM2
Example
*******
PWT-PARM2
Second group of PWTGAS parms***
* - # ELEV IDOXP IC02P
1 7 1281. 8.2 0.2
END PWT-PARM2
ADOXP
8.2
AC02P***
0.3
Details
Symbol
-
Fortran
name(s)
ELEV
IDOXP
IC02P
ADOXP
AC02P
Format Def
5F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
-1000.
-300.
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
• :, "iir <
Max
30000.
9100.
20.
1.0
" ',li"'i ,• i1 ' ,
20.
1.0
Units
ft
m
mg/1
mg C/l
mg/l
mg C/l
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
ELEV is the elevation of the PLS above sea level (used to adjust saturation
concentrations of dissolved gasses in surface outflow).
IDOXP is the concentration of dissolved oxygen in interflow outflow.
IC02P is the concentration of dissolved C02 in interflow outflow.
ADOXP is the concentration of dissolved oxygen in active groundwater outflow.
AC02P is the concentration ,of dissolved C02 in active groundwater outflow.
336
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.3 Table-type MON-IFWDOX -- Monthly interflow DO concentration
******************************************************************
12 3 456 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-IFWDOX
<-range>< mon-ifwdox >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-IFWDOX '
*******
Example
*******
MON-IFWDOX
Value at start of each month for interflow DO concentration***
# - # JAN FEE MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 4.5 4.7 5.7 6.5 7.6 7.6 7.4 6.3 4.3 5.3 4.3 3.5
END MON-IFWDOX
********************************************************************************
Details
--_ _ _ ___:___
Symbol Fortran Format De.f Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
IDOXPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/1 Both
Explanation
This table is only required if IDVFG in Table-type PWT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
337
-------
'!'; A?!, <•;'. -, '• ,'Hii 4 V. ' ' *i '"!* "f.'• i!.11!! If It ilif •', "'"58 I
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.4 Table-type MON-IFWC02 -- Monthly interflow C02 concentration
12345678
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234!^
Layout
******
MON-IFWC02
<-range>< --------------- mon-ifwco2
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-IFWC02
*******
Example
*******
MON-IFWC02
Value at start of each month for interflow C02 concentration***
#- # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .123 .171 .142 .145 .157 .178 .122 .123 .143 .145 .176 .145
END MON-IFWC02
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
IC02PM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
Explanation
This table is only required if ICVFG in Table-type PWT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
338
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.5 Table-type MON-GRNDDOX -- Monthly groundwater DO concentration
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-GRNDDOX
<-range>< mon-grnddox >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-GRNDDOX * '
*******
Example
*******
MON-GRNDDOX
Value at start of each month for groundwater DO concentration***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 4.5 4.7 4.9 4.9 4.9 4.9 5.0 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.4 5.1
END MON-GRNDDOX
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
.name(s) system
ADOXPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 20.0 mg/1 Both
Explanation
This table is only required if GDVFG in Table-type PWT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
339
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.6 Table-type MON-GRNDC02 -- Monthly groundwater C02 concentration
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
MON-GRNDC02
<-range>< ....... ------- mon-grndco2
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-GRNDC02
r , • ; '. •> . ' , .. -i . -,,' . ;,;'i';,:,i ,;„/:(!
*******
Example
*******
. , , ... i
MQN-GRNDC02
Value at start of each month for groundwater C02 concentration***
I - I JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .23 .22 .22 .23 .24 .25 .24 .23 .22 .22 .22 .22
END MON-GRNDC02
Details
iiJM,"
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
AC02PM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 mg C/l Both
Explanation
This table is only required if GCVFG in Table-type PWT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
340
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
4.4(1).7.7 Table-type PWT-TEMPS -- Initial water temperatures
123 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
PWT-TEMPS
<-range><-- -------- pwt-temps ........ ->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWT-TEMPS
*******
Exampl e
*******
PWT-TEMPS
Initial water temperatures***
# - # SOTMP IOTMP AOTMP***
1 7 47. 47. 53.
END PWT-TEMPS
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SOTMP
IOTMP
AOTMP
Format Def
3F10.0 60.
16.
60.
16.
60.
16.
Min
32.
0.
32.
0.
32.
0.
Max
100.
38.
100.
38.
100.
38.
Units
deg F
deg C
deg F
deg C
deg F
deg C
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
These are the initial water temperatures:
SOTMP is surface outflow temperature.
IOTMP is interflow outflow temperature.
AOTMP is active groundwater outflow temperature.
341
-------
PERLND -- Section PWTGAS Input
. t,
4.4(1).7.8 Table-type PWT-GASES -- Initial DOand C02concentrations
****************************************************************
1 ?. ' "3 4 5~"."' 6 '' 7 ' 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** " ' " ; , . " ;.
PWT-GASES
<-range><-
-pwt-gases-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PWT-GASES ' ' '
*******
Example
*******
PWT-GASES
# - # SODOX
1 7 8.9
END PWT-GASES
Initial DO and C02 concentrations***
SOC02 IODOX IOCQ2 AODOX AOC02***
.122 7.8 .132 3.5 .132
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SODOX
SOC02
IODOX
IOC02
AODOX
AOC02
Format Def
6F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
20.
1.0
20.
1.0
20.
1.0
Units
mg/1
mg C/l
mg/1
mg C/l
mg/1
mg C/l
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
These are the initial concentrations of dissolved gas:
SODOX is DO concentration in surface outflow.
SOC02 is C02 concentration in surface outflow.
IODOX is DO concentration in interflow outflow.
IOC02 is C02 concentration in interflow outflow.
AODOX is DO concentration in active groundwater outflow.
AOC02 is C02 concentration in active groundwater outflow.
342
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4.4(1).8 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PQUAL input
********************************************************************************
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type NQUALS]
Table-type QUAL-PROPS
[Table-type QUAL-INPUT]
[Table-type MON-POTFW]
[Table-type MON-POTFS]
[Table-type MON-ACCUM]
[Table-type MON-SQOLIM]
[Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC]
[Table-type MON-GRND-CONC]
repeat for each
quality constituent
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The, exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] are not always required;for example, because all the
values can be defaulted.
343
-------
'."IM "4III-, .•'• • ' ' ";! I" •/
PERLND — Section PQUAL Input
4.4(1).8.1 Table-type NQUALS -- Total number of quality constituents simulated
Layout
******
NQUALS
<-rangexnql>
', ..... • ,,,,'i||| I.".'.
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NQUALS'
*******
Exampl e
*******
NQUALS
***
I - INQUAL***
178
END NQUALS
*******
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
NQUAL 15 1 1 10
Explanation
The total number of quality constitutents simulated in Section PQUAL is indicated
in this table. The set of tables below is repeated for each quality constitutent
(but any tables not applicable to a given constituent may be omitted).
344
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4.4(1).8.2 Table-type QUAL-PROPS --
Identifiers and Flags
for a quality constituent
************************************************^
123 4 56 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******iM:**************************^
Layout
******
QUAL-PROPS
<-rangex-qualid—
- flags-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END QUAL-PROPS
*******
Example
*******
QUAL-PROPS
Identifiers and Flags***
# - #*** qua!id QTID QSD VPFW VPFS QSO VQO QIFW VIQC QAGW VAQC
17 BOD kg 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
END QUAL-PROPS
***********
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
QUALID
QTYID
QSDFG
VPFWFG
VPFSFG
QSOFG
VQOFG
QIFWFG
VIQCFG
QAGWFG
VAQCFG
Format Def
3A4 none
A4 none
915 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
none
none
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
none
none
1
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
345
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
Explanation
QUALID is a string of up to 10 characters which identifies the quality constituent.
QTYID is a string of up to 4 characters which identifies the units associated with
this constituent (e.g., kg, # (for coliforms)). These are the units refered to as
"qty" in subsequent tables (e.g., Table-type QUAL-INPUT).
If QSDFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALSD (sediment associated).
2. If VPFWFG is 1, the washoff potency factor may vary throughout the year.
Table-type MON-POTFW is expected. If VPFWFG is 2, the daily factors are not
computed by interpolation between the monthly values.
3. If VPFSFG is 1, the scour potency factor may vary throughout the year.
Table-type MON-POTFS is expected.
If QSOFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALOF (directly associated with overland flow).
2. If VQOFG is 1 then rate of accumulation and the limiting storage of QUALOF
may vary throughout the year. Table-types MON-ACCUM and MON-SQOLIM are
expected.
If QIFWFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALIF (interflow associated).
2. If VIQCFG greater than 1 then concentration of this constituent in interflow
outflow may vary throughout the year. Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC is expected.
If VIQCFG is 2 or 4, the daily values are obtained directly from the monthly
values; no interpolation between monthly values is performed. If VIQCFG is
3 or 4, the units of the input concentrations are mg/L.
If QAGWFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALGW (groundwater associated).
2. If VAQCFG is 1 the concentration of this constituent in groundwater outflow
may vary throughout the year. Table-type MON-GRND-CONC is expected. If
VAQCFG is 2 or 4, the daily values are obtained directly from the monthly
values; no interpolation between monthly values is performed. If VAQCFG is
3 or 4, the units of the input concentrations are mg/L.
346
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4.4(1).8.3 Table-type QUAL-INPUT -- Storage on surface and nonseasonal parms
***************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************************************^^
Layout
******
QUAL-INPUT
<-range><--
-qual-input-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END QUAL-INPUT
*******
Example
*******
QUAL-INPUT
Storage on surface and nonseasonal parameters***
# - # SQO POTFW POTFS ACQOP SQOLIM WSQOP IOQC
1 7 1.21 17.2 1.1 0.02 2.0 1.70 15?2
END QUAL-INPUT
AOQC***
17.1
*********************************************^^
347
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
SQO
POTFW
POTFS
ACQOP
SQOLIM
WSQOP
IOQC
AOQC
Format Def
8F8.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
,
0.0
.000001
.000002
1.64
41.7
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.6
0.0
: '. "1,
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.000001
.000002
0.01
0.25
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
,v •'!'.'" ,|?i '.„ •"'
none
none
none
; :P!|, • " ' ,
none
'"
none
none
none
none
none
none' '
none
none
Units Unit
system
qty/ac Engl
qty/ha Metric
qty/ton Engl
qty Metric
/tonne
qty/ton Engl
qty Metric
/tonne
qty Engl
/ac.day
qty Metric
/ha. day
qty/ac Engl
qty/ha Metric
in/hr Engl
mm/hr Metric
qty/ft3 Engl
qty/1 Metric
qty/ft3 Engl
qty/1 Metric
Explanation
The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALSD:
1. POTFW, the washoff potency factor.
2. POTFS, the scour potency factor.
A potency factor is the ratio of constituent yield to sediment (washoff or scour)
outflow.
The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALOF:
1. SQO, the initial storage of QUALOF on the surface of the PLS.
2. ACQOP, the rate of accumulation of QUALOF.
3. SQOLIM, the maximum storage of QUALOF.
4. WSQOP, the rate of surface runoff which will remove 90 percent of stored
QUALOF per hour.
I. . ' l.i '• '• '•!' Si!.:!11?: .'.If!'. ",( "i . !",:!,!!";-,'!,". . • : . . 5'T ' '.«!•'• 1i. '!.."",i"
IOQC is the concentration of the constituent in interflow outflow (meaningful only
if this is a QUALIF). AOQC is the concentration of the constituent in active
groundwater outflow (meaningful only if this is a QUALGW).
If monthly values are being supplied for any of these quantities, the value in this
table is not relevant; instead,the system expects and uses values supplied in
Table-type MON-XXX.
348
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4.4(1).8.4 Table-type MON-POTFW -- Monthly washoff potency factor
****************************************************^
iSSZSSlSSJ^^
Layout
******
MON-POTFW
<-range>< mon-potfw- . >
*********•••*••»•••»
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END MON-POTFW ' '
*******
Example
*******
MON-POTFW
*PLS I ™IUecro'^n* «Leach month for washoff potency factor (lb/ton)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
END" MON-PO™ 2'4 3'6 5-8 10'2 20'2 "-2 30.8 40.2 10.1 2.5 1.7
************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
POTFWM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units Unit
system
qty/ton Engl
qty Metric
/tonne
Explanation
This table is only required if VPFWFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is greater than 0.
If VPFWFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month
and values for intermediate days are obtained by interpolatingi-between sucessive
nyVUeS' If VPFWF" 1$ 2 °r 4> the input m°nthly Val"" apply ?o a" day!
349
-------
.. •.. • '. • --. • I"
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
"!» ' I' '' ' • "Ih «" , h 'ill, I1:,,'1' 'ill!!"
4.4(1).8.5 Table-type MON-POTFS -- Monthly scour potency factor
********************************************************************************
1 ' 2 ! ' 3' " ' 4 " "' 5 " ' i:'"""i "6" ^ ' 7 ' :' J!"' 8"
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-POTFS
<-range><— mon-potfs - >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-POTFS
*******
Example
*******
MON-POTFS
Value at start of each month for scour potency factor (lb/ton)***
# - I JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 1.3 113 1.0 0.9 0.9
END MON-POTFS
********************************************************************************
Details
— — ..,, — _«_ — — — — — — ——-* — -• — — — — — — — — - — — — — — ---- — -----"----- — --- — — --- — — --- — -------- — — ----
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
Jj'1
POTFSM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ton Engl
0.0 0.0 none qty Metric
/tonne
_«...**•••* — — •••••*•• •.«.«. — — — « — — — — — -• — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —— — — — — — — — —— — — — — — — — — -*""~~~~~*~~~~-""~~~
Explanation
This table is only required if VPFSFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
IN ' I, l!n, •
350
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4. 4(1). 8. 6 Table-type MON-ACCUM -- Monthly accumulation rates of QUALOF
********************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
IHf5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************^^
Layout
MON-ACCUM
<-range>< ------ ..... ---- mon-accum ----- ..... ------------------------ >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-ACCUM
*******
Example
*******
MON-ACCUM
Value at start of month for accum rate of QUALOF (lb/ac.day)***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
• 1 7 0.0 0.0 0.01 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.05 0.04 0.02 0.01 0.0 0 0
END MON-ACCUM
*******************************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit""""
name(s) system
ACQOPM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none""qty~~~~~Engi
/ac.day
0.0 0.0 none qty Metric
/ha.day
Explanation
This table is only required if VQOFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
351
-------
"?;,; \ ""'•'"-i i'''.;; IP Wlf'*"":: ' ":1 *••* ';i""!M'-1 'WMffi I"I,III Ml
'i'l'f jjjllljl' ', ' , '. i ' , '„„ ' ' • , , 'I ..i,f ,'ijjl I'J
PERLND --SectionPQUAL Input
4.4(1).8.7 Table-type MON-SQOLIM -- Monthly limiting storage of QUALOF
•':! el ",S, titi II:
********************************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-SQOLIM
<-range>< --mon-sqolim-- - . >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-SQOLIM
*******
Example
*******
it i ' ,': iji'11; |; ' ' • '', ,; ,„
MON-SQOLIM
Value at start of month for limiting storage of QUALOF (lb/acre)***
# - f JAN FEE MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 10 12 14 18 20 25 30 26 20 13 10 7
END MON-SQOLIM
***********************************************************************^
Details
MV.._..MVM......««.___»_«««»*».-_ — ___-._»• — — «. — — «. — — — — — _ — — _____»_ _______ «,•,«.„••_•••«.«,•• — — — «.• — •
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
hame(s) system
SQOLIM(12) 12F5.0 none 0.01 none qty/ac Engl
none 0.02 none qty/ha Metric
Explanation
,„, , „, , , ,„ „ i
This table is only required if VQOFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
352
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4. 4(1). 8. 8 Table-type MON-IFLW-CONC - Monthly cone of QUAL in interflow
************************************************^
I2ffi2212«^
Layout
******
MON-IFLW-CONC . •
<-range>< --------- ..... --mon-iflw-conc ----- --- ........ ______ _ ____ __>
••• ................. ....
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered) '".!***•
END MON-IFLW-CONC ................... ' .....
*******
Example
*******
MON-IFLW-CONC
*PLS J i«?,c rLQUAL 1n interflow outflow for each month (Ib/ft3)***
f " f nmo /EB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
END" '0005 °'° °-°-0002 -005 -°02 -001.0016.0014.0012
***********
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max Units Unit
system
IOQCM(12)
If VIQCFG = 3 or 4 in
Table-type QUAL-PROPS:
12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none qty/ft3 Engl
0-0 0.0 none qty/1 Metric
0.0
0.0 none mg/L Both
Explanation
This table is only required if VIQCFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is greater than 0.
If VIQCFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month
m;nthiayUVeaSlue°sr "if^ocF^T "1 ^^ by ^Po^ting between »ucS!l!i
of the month? °r ' he input monthly Va1ues aPP^ to all days
353
-------
PERLND -- Section PQUAL Input
4. 4(1). 8. 9 Table-type MON-GRND-CONC -- Monthly cone of QUAL in groundwater
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-GRND-CONC
<-range><
-mon-grnd-conc-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-GRND-CONC
*******
Example
*******
MON-GRND-CONC „,_"/*',»**
Value at start of month for cone of QUAL in groundwater (Ib/ft3)**
# - * JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7.0013.0014.0012'.0012.0012.001 .001 .001 .0011.0012.0012.0013
END MON-GRND-CONC
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
AOQCM(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
0.0"
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units
qty/ft3
qty/1
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
If VAQCFG - 3 or 4 in
Table-type QUAL-PROPS:
0.0 0.0 none mg/L Both
Explanation
This table is only required if VAQCFG in Table-type QUAL-PROPS is greater than 0.
If VAQCFG is 1 or 3, the input monthly values apply to the first day of the month,
and values for intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive
monthly values. If VAQCFG is 2 or 4, the input monthly values apply to all days
of the month.
354
-------
1
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9 PERLND BLOCK -- Section MSTLAY input
***************************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**^***************:^^
Layout
******
only if Section
PWATER is
inactive
Table-type VUZFG
Table-type UZSN-LZSN
Table-type MON-UZSN if VUZFG= 1
Table- type MST-PARM
Table-type MST-TOPSTOR
Table- type MST-TOPFLX
Table-type MST-SUBSTOR
Table- type MST-SUBFLX
*******************************************^
Explanation
f°+?at^°f eaPh of the tables mentioned above, except MON-UZSN, is
be
^
not be suppiied- see
355
-------
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.1 Table-type VUZFG -- Variable upper zone flag
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
VUZFG
<-rangexvuz>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END VUZFG '
*******
Example
*******
VUZFG
VUZFG***
# - f *** .
1 7 1
END VUZFG
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
VUZFG
Format
15
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Explanation
VUZFG is a flag which indicates whether or not the upper zone nominal storage
varies throughout the year or not. A value of zero means it does not vary, value
1 means it does. If it does vary, the system will expect a table of type MON-UZSN
in the User's Control Input.
Note that Table VUZFG is only required if Section PWATER is inactive. If that
section is active VUZFG would have already been provided in the input for PWATER
(Table-type PWAT-PARM1).
356
-------
1
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.2 Table-type UZSN-LZSN --
Values of UZSN, LZSN and initial
surface storage
**^
i2S2S212£2^^
Layout
******
UZSN-LZSN
<-rangex-uzsn-x-lzsn-x-surs->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END UZSN-LZSN
*******
Example
*******
UZSN-LZSN
# - #
1 7
UZSN
in
1.0
LZSN SURS
in in
6.0 .02
***
***
********************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
UZSN
LZSN
SURS
Format
F8.0
F8.0
F8.0
Def
none
none
none
none
.001
.025
Min
0.01
0.25
0.01
0.25
.001
.025
Max
10.0
250.
100.
2500.
100.
2500.
Units
in
mm
in
mm
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
357
-------
PERLND-- Section MSTLAY Input
Explanation
This table is only required if Section PWATER is inactive, else the data would have
already been supplied in the input for Section PWATER.
ill!1!1-
UZSN is the nominal upper zone storage. The value supplied here is irrelevant if
VUZFG has been set to 1; in that case monthly values for UZSN are supplied in
Table-type MON-UZSN.
LZSN is the nominal lower zone storage.
SURS is the initial surface detention storage.
t
358
-------
1
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4. 4(1). 9. 3 Table-type MST-PARM -- Factors used to adjust solute leaching
rates
********************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a
iH45S78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************************^
Layout
******
MST-PARM
<-range>< leach-parms >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MST-PARM
*******
Example
*******
MST-PARM
SLMPF ULPF |_LPF***
# - # ***
1 7 0.5 2.0 2.0
END MST-PARM
^M***********************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min
SLMPF 3F10.0 1.0 001
ULPF i.o i.o
LLPF 1.0 i.o
&***************************3
Max Units Unit
system
1.0 none Both
10.0 none Both
10.0 none Both
Explanation
These are the factors used to adjust solute percolation rates. SLMPF affects
nT thyUrf/Ce l^er Borage.to the upper layer principal storage
M D£ S1aJlon r°"? +h-e Upper layer PrinciPal storage to the lower layer
inactive groundwlter perc°latl°n from the lower la^er stora9e to the active and
359
-------
•[ ,r. v ..'HBP .fi n •:••'•.
Jl" ., i •.'*' - i" .*) . Sli'i't
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.4 Table-type MST-TOPSTOR -- Initial moisture storage in each
topsoil layer
************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MST-TOPSTOR
<-range><--- topstor >
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END MST-TOPSTOR '
Example
*******
MST-TOPSTOR.
Topsoil storages (lb/ac)***
# - # SMSTM UMSTM IMSTM***
1 7 100000 400000 300000
END MST-TOPSTOR
•i, , •• ." • ,,>• , ;t • i .' . .1 in,
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SMSTM
UMSTM
IMSTM
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
• 0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
Units
lb/ac
kg/ha
lb/ac
kg/ha
lb/ac
kg/ ha
,
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is used to specify the initial moisture content in the surface, upper
principal and upper transitory (interflow) storages respectively.
Note that the values given in this table only affect the water storages for the
start of the first interval in the run; there is no carry-over of the values beyond
the starting instant. Therefore, in most runs, this table need not be supplied;
the default zero values will not cause any problems.
360
-------
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.5 Table-type MST-TOPFLX - Initial fractional fluxes in topsoil
layers
********************************^^^A^^^^^^^^^it^^itA^^jt^it^^ifcit^it^^^^^^^^jt^^^^^^^^
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234R67aQn
********************************^^^^^^^^^^^^A^^^^^^A^^A^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^oHoo/oyu
Layout
******
MST-TOPFLX
<-range><----- top-flux >
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END MST-TOPFLX
*******
Example
*******
MST-TOPFLX
Fractional fluxes in topsoil layers (/ivl) ***
# - # FSO FSP FII FUP FIO*'**
1 7 .07 .03
END MST-TOPFLX
"f*************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min MaxUnits"~~Unit~"
_.."!m!.(?? system
^O,FSP,FH, "5Fi"o:o"o:o"""o:o"""";:o /ivr"^;""
Explanation
°f
chem1cals
suPP11ed 1n th1s table apply at the instant that the ran
e
this table; the default zero values will not cause any problems.
361
-------
ERLtfD -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.6 Table-type MST-SUBSTOR -- Initial moisture storage in subsurface
layers
***********************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
- • .. i , i: - if
MST-SUBSTOR
<-range>< substor >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MST-SUBSTOR
*******
Example
*******
HST-SUBSTOR
Subsoil moisture (kg/ha)***
I - # LMSTM AMSTM ***
1 7 800000 1000000
END MST-SUBSTOR
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LMSTM, AMSTM
Format Def
2F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units
Ib/ac
kg/ ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
These are the initial moisture storages in the lower layer and active groundwater
layers respectively.
Usually, this table should be omitted and the default values taken. The comments
made on this subject in the explanation for Table-type MST-TOPSTOR are also
applicable here.
362
-------
PERLND -- Section MSTLAY Input
4.4(1).9.7 Table-type MST-SUBFLX -
Initial fractional fluxes
in subsurface layers
***************************************************^
1 2 3 4 5-6 78
IH!!!I?SS1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^
Layout
******
MST-SUBFLX
<-range>< ---------- subflux ----- ...... >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MST-SUBFLX ............
*******
Exampl e
*******
MST-SUBFLX
Subsurface fractional fluxes f/ivl) *'**
# - # FLP FLOP FAO .***
17 0.1 0.05
END MST-SUBFLX
***************************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max ..... Units~~~Unit
_______________ n^e(s) .......... system
FLP, FLOP, FAO 3F10.0 0.0 ~~~0~0 1~0 /ivi~~~~Both
Explanation
These are the initial fractional fluxes of soluble chemicals through the subsoil
I djr C iS •
inht-hi and the defau1t values taken- The comments
this subject in the explanation for Table- type MST-TOPFLX are applicable here.
363
-------
.
PERLND"-- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PEST input
*******************************************************************
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
Table-type PEST-FLAGS
Table-type SOIL-DATA
Table-type PEST-ID
Table-type
Table-type
Table-type
Table-type
Table-type
PEST-THETA
PEST-FIRSTPM
PEST-FIRSTPM
PEST-FIRSTPM
PEST-FIRSTPM
for surface layer
for upper layer
for lower layer
for groundwater layer
if
ADOPFG
Table-type PEST-CMAX
Table-type PEST-SVALPM
Table-type PEST-SVALPM
Table-type PEST-SVALPM
Table-type PEST-SVALPM
Table-type PEST-CMAX
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM
Table-type PEST-NONSVPM
Table-type PEST NONSVPM
Table-type PEST-DEGRAD
for surface layer
for upper layer
for lower layer
for groundwater layer
for surface layer
for upper layer
for lower layer
for groundwater layer
if
ADOPFG
=2
if
ADOPFG
_3
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for surface layer storage
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for upper layer princ. storage
Table-type PEST-STOR2 for upper layer trans, storage
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for lower layer storage
Table-type PEST-STOR1 for groundwater layer storage
********************************************************************************
repeat for
each
pesticide
364
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
Explanation
fl "ejected ! "" tabl*
ab°Ve 1ndi"te
^^
4. 4(1). 10.1 Table-type PEST-FLAGS - Flags for pesticide simulation
12££di22£2S^^
Layout
******
PEST- FLAGS
<-rangexnps>< ---- itmax ---- >< ---- adopt ---- >
(repeats until all operations of'this typ'e'are covered)
END PEST-FLAGS ...............
*******
Example
*******
PEST-FLAGS
NPST
# - #
1 7 2
END PEST-FLAGS
Max iterations
Pstl Pst2 Pst3
20 20
Adsorp option ***
Pstl Pst2 Pst3***
1 3
**
365
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
NPST
ITMXPS(*)
ADOPFG(*)
Format
15
315
315
Def
1
30
2
Min
1
1
, ' '
Max
"5
IQQ
3
Explanation
NPST is the number of pesticides being simulated in the operation.
ITMXPS is the maximum number of iterations that will be made in trying to solve for
adsorbed and dissolved equilibrium using the Freundlich isotherm. A separate value
may be supplied for each pesticide being handled (up to 3). If the Freundlich
method is not being used, these values have no effect.
ADOPF6(*) are flags which indicate which method will
adsorption/desorption, for each pesticide (maximum of 3):
1 means use first-order kinetics
2 means use single-value Freundlich method
3 means use non-single value Freundlich method
be used to simulate
366
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.2 Table-type SOIL-DATA - Soil layer depths and bulk densities
**************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
lH!5f8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************************^
Layout
SOIL-DATA
<-range><-
-depths-
•bulkdens-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SOIL-DATA
*******
Example
*******
SOIL-DATA
# - # Surface
1 7 .12
END SOIL-DATA
Depths (ins)
Upper
6.0
Lower Groundw
40.0
80.
Bulk density (Ib/ft3)
Surface Upper Lower Groundw
80.
120.
***
***
****************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
none
none
Format
4F8.0
4F8.0
Def
none
none
103
1.65
Min
.001
.0025
50
0.80
Max
1000
2500
150
2.40
Units
in
cm
Ib/ft3
gm/cc
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
The first four values are the depths (thicknesses) of the surface, upper, lower and
groundwater layers respectively; the second group of four values are the
corresponding bulk densities of the soil in those layers.
The depth and bulk density are mutiplied together by the program to obtain the mass
chemicals™ *"' iS US6d t0 compute the concentrations of adsorbed
367
-------
PIERtND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.3 Table-type PEST-ID -- Name of pesticide
Layout
PEST-ID
<-range>< pestid-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-ID ***"''*'
*******
Example
*******
PEST-ID
I - I
1 7
END PEST-ID
Details
Symbol
Pesticide***
***
Atrazine
Fortran
name{s)
Format Def Min Max
PESTID(*)
5A4 none none none
, «»;:f r 'K-tiai : i HI;
j!S :: • ; jWifc
'"nil'. '', !, , •' '"I1*, 'i'j|,, i.
Explanation
This table specifies the name of the pesticide to which the data in the following
tables apply.
368
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.4 Table-type PEST-THETA --
Pesticide first-order reaction
temperature correction parameters
*********************************************************^^
1 2 34 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
PEST-THETA
<-range>< theta >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-THETA'
*******
Example
*******
PEST-THETA
Temperature parms***
# - # THDSPS THADPS***
1 7 1.07
END PEST-THETA
:***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
THDSPS, THADPS
Format
2F10.0
Def
1.05
Min
1.00
Max
2.00
Units Unit
system
none Both
Explanation
These parameters are used to adjust the desorption and adsorption rate parameters
(respectively), using a modified Arrhenius equation:
Rate at T = (Rate at 35 deg C) * (theta)**(T-35)
This table is only required if first order kinetics are used to simulate
adsorption/desorption (ADOPFG=1 in Table-type PEST-FLAGS).
369
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.5 Table-type PEST-FIRSTPM -- Pesticide first-order parameters
12345678
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678i3di2345678901234567890
Layout
******
PEST-FIRSTPM
<-range>< firstparm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-FIRSTPM
******* ' "" " ! '
'. , , . ' , ' f;,*" '!• .. •• • • f ., ' • ,:;. • , .'••» •' ," '"if, • *'
Example
*******
PEST-FIRSTPM
First-order parms (/day)***
I - # KDSPS KADPS ***
1 7 .07 .04
END PEST-FIRSTPM
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
KDSPS,KADPS 2F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
•••''.' . v ' " ' ' ;,'i>' i •' I .'$'••
Explanation
KDSPS and KADPS are the desorption and adsorption rates at 35 deg C.
This table is only required if ADOPFG=1 (first-order kinetics) for this pesticide.
370
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.6 Table-type PEST-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of pesticide
********************************************************************************
1234567 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
PEST-CMAX
<-rangex--cmax-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-CMAX '
Example
*******
PEST-CMAX
CMAX***
# - # (ppm)***
1 7 25.0
END PEST-CMAX
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CMAX
Format
F10.0
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max Units
none ppm
Unit
system
Both
Explanation
CMAX is the maximum solubility of the pesticide in water.
This table is only required if ADOPFG= 2 or 3 for this pesticide (Freundlich method
of simulating adsorption/desorption).
371
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.7 Table-type PEST-SVALPM -- Pesticide parameters for single value
Freundlich method
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
PEST-SVALPH
<-range>< ---svalpm-- -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-SVALPM
*******
Example
*******
PEST-SVALPM
XFIX
# - # (ppm)
1 7 20.
END PEST-SVALPM
Kl
4.0
***
1.5
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
XFIX
Kl
Nl
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
none
Min
0.0
0.0
1.0
Max
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
ppm Both
Both
Both
Explanation
XFIX is the maximum concentration (on the soil) of pesticide which is permanently
fixed to the soil. Kl and Nl are the coeff. and exponent parameters for the
Freundlich adsorption/desorption equation:
X- K1*C**(1/N1) + XFIX
This table is only used if ADOPFG= 2 for this pesticide (single value Freundlich
method). Then, the system expects it to appear four times for this pesticide;
first, for the surface layer, second for the upper layer, etc.
372
-------
I
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4. 4(1). 10. 8 Table-type PEST-NONSVPM -- Pesticide parameters for Non-single
Value Freundlich method
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
PEST-NONSVPM
<-range>< ----------- ..... nonsvpm --------------- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-NONSVPM ................
*******
Example
*******
PEST-NONSVPM
XFIX Kl
# - # (ppm)
1 7 15. 5.0
END PEST-NONSVPM
Nl
1.5
[\I2***
***
1.7
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
XFIX
Kl
Nl
N2
Format Def
4F10.0 0.0
0.0
none
none
Min
0.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
Max
none
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
ppm Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
XFIX is the maximum concentration (on the soil) of pesticide which is permanently
fixed in the soil. Kl and Nl are the coefficient and exponent parameters for the
Freundlich curve used for adsorption. N2 is the exponent parameter for the
auxiliary ("desorption") curve.
This table is only used
Freundlich Method).
if ADOPFG= 3 for this pesticide (Non-single Value
373
-------
, PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.9 Table-type PEST-DEGRAD -- Pesticide degradation rates
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
1E34567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789Q1234567890123456789Q1234567890
Layout
******
PEST-DEGRAD
<-range>< degrad >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-DEGRAD
*******
Example
*******
PEST-DEGRAD
Pesticide degradation rates (/day) ***
$ - i Surface Upper Lower Groundw***
1 7 .05 .02 .01
END PEST-DEGRAD
t*****4
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
SDGCON,UDGCON, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
LDGCON,ADGCON
Explanation
These are the degradation rates of the pesticide in the surface, upper, lower and
groundwater layers respectively. These rates are not adjusted for temperature.
374
-------
PERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4{1).10.10 Table-type PEST-STOR1 -- Initial pesticide storage in surface,
upper, lower or groundwater layer
*********************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^
Layout
PEST-STOR1
<-rangex-cryst--x---ads--x--soln-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-STOR1 ............
*******
Example
*******
PEST-STOR1
Initial pesticide in surface layer (lb/ac)***
# - # Cryst Ads Soln ***
1 7 10.0 25.0 50.0
END PEST-STOR1
****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
,,
Fortran
name(s)
PSCY,PSAD,
PSSU
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units
lb/ac
kg/ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
is the pesticide in crystalline form, is the pesticide in adsorbed
form and is the pesticide in solution.
The values given in this table apply to one of the following four soil storages-
surface, upper principal, lower or groundwater.
375
-------
PIERLND -- Section PEST Input
4.4(1).10.11 Table-type PEST-STOR2 — Initial pesticide stored in upper layer
transitory (interflow) storage
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
PEST-STOR2
<-rangex--ips—>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PEST-STOR2
*******
Example
*******
:'.: M .'• •
..'iiii 'I ' ii ' in '''MS
***
PEST-STOR2
Interflow
I - # storage(kg/ha)***
1 7 20.0
END PEST-STOR2
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
IPS
Format Def
F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
hone
none
.. • • , . ''•
Units
Ib/ac
kg/ha
_, , . ;,,
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
IPS is the initial storage of pesticide in the upper layer transitory (interflow)
storage. Since only dissolved pesticide is modeled in that storage, only one value
is needed (no crystalline or adsorbed material).
376
-------
PERLND — Section NITR Input
4.4(1). 11 PERLND BLOCK -- Section NITR input
********************************************^^
12 3 4 5 678
IH!5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************************^
Layout
******
Table-type SOIL-DATA if section PEST is inactive
Table-type NIT-FLAGS
Table-type NIT-UPTAKE -------------- ....... „ if VNUTFG= 0
Table-type MON-NITUPT for surface layer
Table-type MON-NITUPT for upper layer
Table- type MON-NITUPT for lower layer
Table- type MON-NITUPT for groundwater layer
Table-type NIT-FSTGEN
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for surface layer
Table-type NIT-FSTPM for upper layer
Table-type NIT-FSTPM ' "
Table-type NIT-FSTPM
if VNUTFG= 1
for lower layer
for groundwater layer
Table-type NIT-CMAX
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for surface layer
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for upper layer
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for lower layer
Table-type NIT-SVALPM for groundwater layer
if
FORAFG=
1
(single value
Freundlich
method)
Table-type NIT-STOR1
Table-type NIT-STOR1
Table-type NIT-STOR2
Table-type NIT-STOR1
Table- type NIT-STOR1
for surface layer storage
for upper layer princ. storage
for upper layer trans, storage
for lower layer storage
for groundwater layer storaqe
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above, except SOIL-DATA is
1S d°CUmented ""der the
The comments given alongside the table names above indicate under what
circumstances a table is expected. Note that if all the fields in a table haJe
defaulfsVwillSbe adopted6 "" ** ^"^ ^ ^ US6r'S C°ntro1 InpUt* Then' *
VNUTFG and FORAFG
are the nitrogen plant uptake flag and the ammonium
They are descn'bed "
377
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4. 4(1). 11.1 Table-type NIT-FLAGS --Flags for nitrogen simulation
********************************************************************^
' '
1
i
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
NIT-FLAGS
<-range><- nitflags-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-FLAGS
*******
Example
*******
NIT-FLAGS
Nitrogen flags ***
# - f VNUT FORA ITMX BNUM CNUM***
171 10 10
END NIT-FLAGS
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
VNUTFG
FORAFG
ITMAXA
BNUMN
CNUMN
Format Def
515 0
0
30
none
none
Min
0
0
1
1
1
Max
1
1
100
1000
1000
Explanation
If VNUTFG^ 1 the first-order plant uptake parameters for nitrogen are allowed to
vary throughout the year and four tables of type MON-NITUPT are expected in the
User's Control Input. The first appearance is for the surface layer, 2nd for upper
layer, 3rd for the lower layer and 4th for the groundwater layer. If VNUTFG=0 the
uptake rates do not vary through the year and a value for each layer is specified
in a single table (Table-type NIT-UPTAKE).
378
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
USed t0 simulate adsorption and desorption
0
1
first-order kinetics
single-value Freundlich method
be
olving the
BNUMN is the number of time steps that will elapse between recalculation of
biochemical reaction fluxes. For example, if BNUMN= 10 and the simulation time
step is 5 mm then these fluxes will be recalculated every 50 minutes All
reactions except adsorption/desorption fall into this category. CNUMN Is the
corresponding number for the chemical (adsorption/desorption) reactions
379
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4.4(1).11.2 Table-type NIT-UPTAKE -- Nitrogen plant uptake rate parameters
***************************************************************************
1 "" 2 •' ' 3 4' " '5 •'" *' Ji"6 ' ' " 7 " : 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout ' ' ' "' """'''"" ' ' '"" '
******
NIT-UPTAKE
<-range>< uptake >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-UPTAKE
*******
Example
*******
NIT-UPTAKE
Nitrogen plant uptake rates (/day) ***
# - # Surface Upper Lower Groundw***
1 2 0.01 0.02 0.01
END NIT-UPTAKE
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
SKPLN,UKPLN, 4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
LKPLN.AKPLN
Explanation
SKPLN, UKPLN, LKPLN and AKPLN are the plant nitrogen uptake reaction rate
parameters for the surface, upper, lower and active groundwater layers,
respectively.
380
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4.4(1)..11.3 Table-type MON-NITUPT -- Monthly plant uptake parameters for
nitrogen, for the surface, upper, lower or groundwater layer
123 4 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************,v***********^
Layout
******
MON-NITUPT
<-range><--
-mon-uptake"
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-NITUPT
***
*******
Example
*******
MON-NITUPT
Plant uptake parms for nitrogen in upper layer (/day)
# - * JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 4 .01 .03 .05 .05 .03 .01
END MON-NITUPT
********************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Explanation
Fortran
name(s)
KPLNM(*)
Format Def Min Max Units
12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day
Unit
system
Both
mm-rJo ? -S r.efiyired lf tne Plant uptake parameters vary throughout the year
(VNUTFG= 1 in Table-type NIT-FLAGS). The entire table is supplied four times;
first for the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer
and fourth for the active groundwater layer. If omitted, default values will be
supplied. For example, if the third and fourth occurrences of the table are
omitted, the parameters for the lower and groundwater layers will default to zero.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
381
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4.4(1).H.4 Table-type NIT-FSTGEN -- Nitrogen first-order general parameters
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
NIT-FSTGEN
<-rangexupt-fact><-
-temp-parms-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-FSTGEN
*******
Example
*******
NIT-FSTGEN
Upt-facts< Temp-parms (theta) >***
§ - I N03 NH4 PLN KDSA KADA KIMN KAM KDNI KMI KIMA***
1 7 .5 .5 1.07 1.08
END NIT-FSTGEN
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
N03UTF
NH4UTF
THPLN
THKDSA
THKADA
THKIMN
THKAM
THKDNI
THKNI
THKIMA
Format Def
2F5.0 1.0
0.0
8F5.0 1.07
1.05
1.05
1.07
1.07
1.07
1.05
1.07
Min
0.001
0.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Max
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Units
none
none
none
none
none
none
hone
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
382
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
Explanation
These general parameters apply to nitrogen reactions in all the layers; thus, this
table only appears once (or not at all, if defaults are used).
N03UTF and NH4UTF are parameters intended to designate which fraction of nitrogen
uptake comes from nitrate and ammonium, respectively. Their sum should be 1.0
The remaining fields specify the temperature coefficients (theta)
for the various reactions:
THPLN Plant uptake
THKDSA Ammonium desorption (only relevant if FORAFG= 0)
THKADA Ammonium adsorption (only relevant if FORAFG= 0)
THKIMN Nitrate immobilization
THKAM Organic N ammonification
THKDNI N03 denitrification
THKNI Nitrification
THKIMA Ammonium immobilization
4.4(1).11.5 Table-type NIT-FSTPM -- Nitrogen first-order reaction parameters
for the surface, upper, lower or active groundwater layer
*************************************************^^
12 3 4 56 7 a
H*H678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^^
Layout
******
NIT-FSTPM
<-range>< ---fstparms ___>
*•************•••*•*•*••••,.«
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered) ' '
END NIT-FSTPM
*******
Example
*******
NIT-FSTPM
*PLS *!!! N,itr°9en first-order parameters for lower layer (/day)
I - f*** KDSAM KADAM KIMNI KAM KDNI KNI KIMAM
1 7 .05 .03 .02 OR
END NIT-FSTPM 'Ob
383
-------
:'»i" „: •' •' f; - ;;; ;&i. (Hit rise, ^,<,.•; i FI; %• • ; as • ?. - «i,i »: <• ••' ft •» "K
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
Details
«,•.»»•«.•,••«.-.•.«.•. — — — — — — — •--. — — — — — «-•- — — — — — — — — — —'— — «••• — — — — — —'— — — — .j" ^«,-. — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —— — — — —
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
KDSAM.KADAM, 7F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
KIMNI,KAM,KDNI,
KNI,KIMAM
Explanation
These are the first-order reaction rate parameters for a layer of soil:
KDSAM Ammonium desorption (irrelevant if FORAFG= 1)
KADAM Ammonium adsorption (irrelevant if FORAFG= 1)
KIMNI Nitrate immobilization
KAM Organic N ammonification
KDNI Denitrification
KNI Nitrification
KIMAM Ammonium immobilization
HSPF expects this table to appear four times in the User's Control Input; first for
the surface layer, second for the upper layer, third for the lower layer, fourth^
for the active groundwater layer. If one or more occurrences of the table are'
missing, all reaction parameters for the affected layer(s) will be defaulted to
zero.
384
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4.4(1).11.6 Table-type NIT-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of ammonium
****************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a
I??!56789012345678901234567890123456789°1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
************************************************^^
Layout
******
NIT-CMAX
<-rangex--cmax-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-CMAX*
*******
Example
*******
NIT-CMAX
CMAX***
: # - # (ppm)***
1 5 15.0
END NIT-CMAX
****************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min "'Max'""^^^""^^^
"^!__ system
CMAX F10.0 0.0 0~0none"""ppm Both
Explanation
CMAX is the maximum solubility of ammonium in water. This table only appears once
^
385
-------
" 'ill ' •»,, '!!", ' I1 •
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
; • • ' ••'' , ! i"1 ,i " •„! .;• • , ' ! ' „;; • „:' • , •.: "I,' 1'1 ' ,' ' ' ;•„,;»', • "in "'
4.4(1).11.7 Table-type NIT-SVALPM -- Nitrogen single value Freundlich
adsorption/desorption parameters
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
i*******************************************************************************
Layout
******
NIT-SVALPM
<-range>< svalpm- -->
(repeats'until'all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-SVALPM'
*******
Example
*******
NIT-SVALPM
XFIX Kl Nl***
# - # (ppm) ***
1 3 10.0 5.0 1.2
END NIT-SVALPM
**
******************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
XFIX
Kl
Nl
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
none
Min
0.0
0.0
1.0
Max
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
ppm Both
Both
Both
I; Is'Mil"!' '.', |L,: I!1
Explanation
This table is only required if FORAFG=1; that is, adsorption and desorption of
ammonium is simulated using the single value Freundlich method.
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type PEST-SVALPM.
386
-------
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4. 4(1). 11. 8 Table-type NIT-STOR1 - Initial storage of nitrogen in the surface,
upper, lower or groundwater layer
**********************************^^
12£22!!S!$2dj2^^
Layout
NIT-STORI
<-range>< ---nit-storl >
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered) '
END NIT-STORi ' ' ' '
*******
Example
*******
NIT-STORI
Initial storage of N in upper layer (Ib/ac) ***
#- # ORGN AMAD AMSU N03 PLTN ***
E» NIT-STOR! 10°- 5°°- 50-
t*****,
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min "Max Units~"unit~"
..._..."!m!.(^ system
ORGN»AMAD,AMSU, 5Flo"o"o^O o"o"""none""lb/ac""Engi""
^:^™____ °-° °-0 none kg/ha Metric
Explanation
This table is similar in organization to Table-type PEST-STOR1 It specifies
ir ?iaf W.of ti^iFAV™" Stora9es and th 8"liR *
'
ORGN
AMAD
AMSU
N03
PLTN
Organic N
Adsorbed ammonium
Solution ammonium
Nitrate
N stored in plants, derived from this layer
387
-------
'"ill'11. |i":,l'" |" ill If W '"''. /i*
PERLND -- Section NITR Input
4 4(1).11.9 Table-type NIT-STOR2 -- Initial storage of nitrogen in upper
layer transitory (interflow) storage
*********************************
1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************************************
Layout
******
NIT-STOR2
<-range>< nit-stor2 >
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END NIT-STOR2
*******
Example
*******
N1T-STOR2
Initial N in interflow storage (lb/ac)***
* - I IAMSU IN03 ***
1 2
END NIT-STOR2
******
**************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
IAMSU, IN03
Format Def
2F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
•
Max Units
none lb/ac
none kg/ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is similar to Table-type PEST-STOR2. It specifies the initial storage
of ammonium and nitrate in the upper layer transitory (interflow) storage.
388
-------
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1).12 PERLND BLOCK -- Section PHOS input
**************************************************^^
12222212^
Layout
******
if VPUTFG= 1
PEST and NITR are inactive
Table-type PHOS-UPTAKE if VPUTFG= 0
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for surface layer
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for upper layer
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for lower layer
Table-type MON-PHOSUPT for groundwater layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTGEN
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for surface layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for upper layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for lower layer
Table-type PHOS-FSTPM for groundwater layer
Table-type PHOS-CMAX
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for surface layer
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for upper layer
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for lower layer
Table-type PHOS-SVALPM for groundwater layer
if
FORPFG=
1
(single value
Freundlich
method)
Table-type PHOS-STOR1
Table-type PHOS-STOR1
Table-type PHOS-STOR2
Table-type PHOS-STOR1
Table-type
for surface layer storage
for upper layer princ. storage
for upper layer trans, storage
for lower layer storage
for groundwater layer storage
Explanation:
°f each °f the tables mentioned above, except SOIL-DATA is
n* f0llOWS' S°IL-DATA is doi" ted «nder' tX
VPUTFG and I FORPFG are the phosphorus plant uptake flag and the ohosohate
They
389
-------
'•:' ; ;' •">. i1'?''1"1!! it J! !iii ,:r:'"<:«'!
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1).12.1 Table-type PHOS-FLAGS -- Flags governing simulation of phosphorus
************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PHOS-FLAGS
<-range>< phosflags >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHOS-FLAGS'
*******
Example
*******
PHOS-FLAGS
VPUT FORP ITMX BNUM CNUM ***
# - #
i< 4 i 10 10
END PHOS-FLAGS
********************************************************************************
"1
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
VPUTFG 515 0 0 1
FORPFG 0 0 1
ITMAXP 30 1 100
BNUMP none 1 1000
CNUMP none 1 1000
Explanation
I, • , ' ,
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-FLAGS.
390
-------
1
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1). 12.2 Table-type PHOS-UPTAKE -- Phosphorus plant uptake parameters
*************************************^^
1222221212^^
Layout
******
PHOS-UPTAKE
<-range>< ...... -------- phos-uptake ------ ..... -->
(repeats until all operations of'this type 'are 'covered)
END PHOS-UPTAKE ................
*******
Exampl e
*******
PHOS-UPTAKE
Phosphorus plant uptake partns (/day) ***
# - # SKPLP UKPLP LKPLP AKPLP***
1 .005 .03 .05 01
END PHOS-UPTAKE
****************************************^^
9
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min ~Max Units"~Un1t~~"~~
............. __!^?> _____ system
SKPU, ......
Explanation
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-UPTAKE.
391
-------
PERLND -- secti on pubs input
4.4(1).12.3 Table-type MON-PHOSUPT -- Monthly plant uptake parameters for
phosphorus, for the surface, upper, lower or groundwater layer
********************************************************************************
1 2 345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
HON-PHOSUPT
<-range><--
- mon-phosupt •
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-PHOSUPT '
1 • '.i'lMIR,:1 I !.i'","l , 'li'lilii
*******
Example
*******
MON-PHOSUPT n If. %
Monthly phosphorus uptake parameters for surface layer (/day)
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC
1 2 .01 .03 .07 .07 .04 .01
END MON-PHOSUPT
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max Units Unit
system
KPLPM(*)
12F5.0 0.0 0.0 none /day Both
Explanation
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type MON-Nlt'UPT.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
392
-------
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4. 4(1). 12. 4 Table-type PHOS-FSTGEN -- Temperature correction parameters
for phosphorus reactions
122222122^^
Layout
******
PHOS-FSTGEN
<-range><---
-theta-
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'coveredj
END PHOS-FSTGEN ' . . . .
Example
*******
PHOS-FSTGEN
Temperature corection parameters (theta)
f - # THPLP THKDSP THKADP THKIMP
1 1.07
END PHOS-FSTGEN
***
THKMP***
1.05
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
THPLP
THKDSP
THKADP
THKIMP
THKMP
Format Def
5F10.0 1.07
1 .05
1.05.
1.07
1.07
Min
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Max
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Units
none
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
1b an°9US t0
THPLP
THKDSP
THKADP
THKIMP
THKMP
NIT-FST6EN, except for the first two values
supplied m this table (and
Plant uptake
d"orPti°n (°nly relevant if FORPFG=0 in Table PHOS-FLAGS)
Organic P mineralization
393
-------
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
v , ;:;..-.,•' • '..-;,".: ' ' .'; ";: I
4.4(1).12.5 Table-type PHOS-FSTPM -- Phosphorus first-order reaction parameters
*****************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PHOS-FSTPM
<-range>< --phos-fstpm --->
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHOS-FSTPM
*******
Example
******* : ' ...',,',' ,,,', .. '„
PHOS-FSTPM tlj % _
Phosphorus first-order parameters for surface layer (/day) ***
I - # KDSP KADP KIMP KMP ***
15 -04
END PHOS-FSTPM ^
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
KDSP, KADP,
KIMP, KMP
Format Def Min Max Units
4F10.0 0.0 0.0 none /day
Unit
system
Both
Explanation
This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-FSTPM. The reaction rate parameters
supplied in this table are:
KDSP Phosphate desorption (only used if FORPFG=0 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS)
KADP Phosphate adsorption (only used if FORPF6=0 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS)
KIMP Phosphate immobilization
KMP Organic P mineralization
394
-------
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1).12.6 Table-type PHOS-CMAX -- Maximum solubility of phosphate
*********************************************
***********************************
12!S££!2«2
Layout
******
PHOS-CMAX
<-rangex--cmax-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHOS-CMAX
*******
Example
*******
PHOS-CMAX
CMAX***
# - # (ppm)***
1 2 5.0
END PHOS-CMAX
*******************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max ..... Units"~UrnTt ......
_______________ ™m_[s}_ _________ ..... ___ system
CMAX F10.0 0.0 ~~0~0 non7"~Ppm""~Both
Explanation
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-CMAX.
395
-------
PERLND -- section PHOS input
4.4(1).12.7 Table-type PHOS-SVALPM --
,, ., • .. :,. , , ;;,, ; .;.,. , ,
Phosphorus single value Freundlich
adsorption/desorption parameters
*H fl.
**************************************************'****************
1 2 3 4 5 6,7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PHOS-SVALPM
<-range>< svalpm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHOS-SVALPM
*******
Example
*******
PHOS-SVALPM
Parameters for Freundlich method (lower layer) ***
# - # XFIX Kl Nl ***
1 30. 5.0 1.5
END PHOS-SVALPM
"'I ;'", ' • ', .,' ' '""' '• , ' ":, i :' |
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
XFIX
Kl
Nl
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
none
Min
0.0
0.0
1.0
Max Units
none ppm
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
This table is exactly analogous to Table-type NIT-SVALPM.
FORPFG= 1 in Table-type PHOS-FLAGS.
It is only used if
396
-------
PERLNO -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1).12.8 Table-type PHOS-STOR1 -- Initial phosphorus storage in the surface,
upper, lower or groundwater layer
*******************************************^
12345678
iH!55I?901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************^^
Layout
PHOS-STOR1
<-range>< phos-storl ->
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END PHOS-STOR1
*******
Example
*******
PHOS-STOR1
Initial phosphorus in upper layer (Ib/ac)
# - # ORGP P4AD P4SU PLTP
1 3 50. 2000. 200.
END PHOS-STOR1
***
***
*************************************************
*******************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ORGP,P4AD,
P4SU,PLTP
Format Def
4F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units
Ib/ac
kg/ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-STORl.
397
-------
PERLND -- Section PHOS Input
4.4(1).12.9 Table-type PHOS-STOR2 -- Initial storage of phosphate in upper
layer transitory (interflow) storage
*****************************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PHOS-STOR2
<-rangex--phos-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHOS-STOR2'
*******
Example
*******
PHOS-STOR2
Phosphate in interflow (kg/ha) ***
# - I IP4SU ***
1 6 100.
END PHOS-STOR2
********************************************************************************
„,»
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
IP4SU
Format Def
F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
o.o
Max
none
none
.Units
Ib/ac
kg/ ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is analogous to Table-type NIT-STOR2.
'". 4.
398
-------
1
PERLND -- Section TRACER Input
4. 4(1). 13 PERLND BLOCK -- Section TRACER input
************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^^
Layout
Table-type TRAC-ID
Table- type TRAC-TOPSTOR
Table-type TRAC-SUBSTOR
***********************************************^^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Note that if all the fields in a table have default values, the table can be
omitted from the User's Control Input. Then, the defaults will be adopted.
399
-------
PERLND -- Section TRACER Input
4.4(1).13.1 Table-type TRAC-ID -- Name of conservative (tracer) substance
****************************************************************************
1 2 3 ' " 4 '"V '" :;; '"'''6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
TRAC-ID
<-range>< trac-id >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END TRAC-ID
,1 ' , • . 'I,, I V HI , llM1 ,11 » ,, ,„ " ,1, '"
*******
Example
*******
TRAC-ID
Name of tracer ***
% _ # ***
1 10 Chloride
END TRAC-ID
********************************************************************************
Details
H •» H •» K,— »•« »™««*«»»»«««»™™»««»«" — —»•"" — ™~ ™~™~~~™ — — ..•••,«•• — — — —••-••- — — — -•'••••
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
____«..».•.».. ...»..._ « « « « _ _ — — (— — — — •.•.• — — — — — — «. — — — — — —^— — — — «- — — — — — ^— -— — — — -•
TRACID(*) 5A4 none none none
Explanation
Any 20 character string can be supplied as the name of the tracer substance.
400
-------
1
PERLND -- Section TRACER Input
4. 4(1). 13. 2 Table-type TRAC-TOPSTOR -- Initial quantity of tracer in topsoil
storages
*******************************^
1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
TRAC-TOPSTOR
<-range>< --------- trac-topstor ------- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END TRAC-TOPSTOR ...........
*******
Example
*******
TRAC-TOPSTOR
Initial storage of chloride in topsoil (kg/ha) ***
# - # STRSU UTRSU ITRSU ***
1 200.
END TRAC-TOPSTOR
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
STRSU, UTRSU,
ITRSU
Format Def
3F10.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
Units
Ib/ac
kg/ha
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table specifies the initial storage of tracer (conservative) in the surface
upper principal and upper transitory storages.
401
-------
PERLD -- Section TRACER Input
4.4(1).13.3 Table-type TRAC-SUBSTOR -- Initial quantity of tracer
in lower and groundwater storages
12345678
12345678901234567890^345678901234567890123456789012345678901p
***'******************'***********************:fc**^
Layout ' " " '"' ! ' "
******
TRAC-SUBSTOR
<-range><—trac-substor--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END TRAC-SUBSTOR
1 , . ' ' 'i: • ('!"•''"' fc'.tf' • •" :" ...!r •• • ii
******* ' ' ' ' ; " ,T , „';; . ',; '
Example
******* ..,....'
TRAC-SUBSTOR
Initial storage of chloride in subsoil layers (Ib/ac) ***
£ - * LTRSU ATRSU ***
1 300. 500.
END TRAC-SUBSTOR
t*****
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s)
LTRSU,ATRSU 2F10.0 0.0 0.0 none Ib/ac Engl
0.0 0.0 none kg/ha Metric
Explanation
This table specifies the initial storage of conservative (tracer) material in the
lower and active groundwater layers.
402
i, >!!.•» ; i' M',
-------
IMPLND Block
4.4(2) IMPLND Block
1 2 3 4 56 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******v
Layout
******
IMPLND
General input
[section ATEMP input]
[section SNOW input]
[section IWATER input]
[section SOLIDS input]
[section IWTGAS input]
[section IQUAL input]
END IMPLND
Explanation
This block contains the data which are "domestic" to all the Impervious Land-
segments in the RUN. The "General input" is always relevant: other input is only
required if the module section concerned is active.
4.4(2).l IMPLND BLOCK -- General input
1 2 3 4 56 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.
403
-------
IMPLND -- General Input
4.4(2).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
ACTIVITY
<-range>< a-s-vector >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ACTIVITY
*******
Example
*******
ACTIVITY
Active Sections ***
#- I ATMP SNOW IWAT SLD IWG IQAL ***
17111
90001
END ACTIVITY
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ASVEC(6)
Format
615
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Explanation
'I • ;"„, ; '!:, •'" . .' ' . , , . ., ,"'" . „ ,}t | ..
The IMPLND module is divided into 6 sections. The values supplied in this table
specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation involving
the IMPLND module. A value of 0 means "inactive" and 1 means "active". Any
meaningful subset of sections may be active.
404
-------
1
IMPLND -- General Input
4.4(2).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
PRINT- INFO
<-range>< -------- print-flags---- ..... >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PRiNT-INFO .................
*******
Example
*******
PRINT- INFO
******** Print-flags ******** piVL PYR
# - # ATMP SNOW I WAT SLD IW6 IQAL *********
17246 10 12
END PRINT- INFO
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PFLAG(6)
PIVL
PYREND
Format
615
15
15
Def
4
1
9
Min
2
1
1
Max
6
1440
12
405
-------
IMPLND -- General Input
Explanation
HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value for
PFLAGQ is:
2 means every PIVL intervals
3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never
In the example above, output from Impervious Land-segments 1 thru 7 will occur as
fol1ows:
Section Max frequency
ATEMP 10 intervals
SNOW month
IWATER never
SOLIDS —
thru | month (defaulted)
IQUAL
A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that is,
every PDELT=PIVL*DELT mins). PIVL must be chosen such that there are an integer no.
of PDELT periods in a day.
HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified minimum interval. In the above example, output for section
ATEMP will be printed at the end of each 10 intervals, day, month and year.
PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.
406
i1"5*1""'1 . ,'• ::'. ..r. " ii ': • j '"!.• > . " ii " • ,. • '" 'i i. '••;]
ii!!i;gi .''Ji1: a;,, I h.; „ I],, ! ,„:i,,:, ,, '"I!;!:,,ill.- '" ' iiir;,, "11 ' H. ,',:,„",.!': 4 ;„ - 'IJ!'..;,' " i Ai ,„,.: ''I.; liifli I .11
-------
IMPLND -- General Input
4.4(2).1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information
***************************************************^
1234567a
i?*f5H8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^
Layout
><--unit-syst--x-printu->
GEN-INFO
<-rangex---ILS-id
(repeats until all operations of this type are'covered)
END GEN-INFO * ' '
*******
Example
*******
GEN-INFO
# - #
Name
1 Chicago loop
2 Astrodome
END GEN-INFO
Unit-systems Printer***
User t-series Engl Metr***
in out ***
1
1
23
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LSID(5)
UUNITS.IUNITS,
OUNITS
Format
5A4
315
Def
none
1
Min
none
1
Max
none
2
PUNIT(2)
215
99
407
-------
:"''""1*!'^ .:;'".IMPLND'-- General'Input"
Explanation
Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as thV identifier for an ILS.
The values supplied for indicate thesystem of units for data in the
UCI, input time series and output time series respectively: 1 means English units,
2 means Metric units.
The values supplied for indicate the destinations of printout in English
and Metric units respectively. A value 0 means no printout is required in that
system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that system and and the
value is the Fortran unit no. of the file to which the printout is to be written.
Note that printout for each Impervious Land Segment can be obtained in either the
English or Metric systems, or both (irrespective of the system used to supply the
inputs).
4.4(2).2 IMPLND BLOCK -- SECTION ATEMP INPUT
This section, ATEMP, is common to the PERLND and IMPLND modules. See Section
4.4(1).2 for documentation.
4.4(2).3 IMPLND BLOCK -- SECTION SNOW INPUT
This section, SNOW, is common to the PERLND and IMPLND modules. See Section
4.4(1).3 for documentation.
4.4(2).4 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section IWATER input
*******************************************************************************
1 2 345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type IWAT-PARM1 ]
Table-type IWAT-PARM2
[Table-type IWAT-PARM3 ]
[Table-type MON-RETN ] only required if the relevant quantity
[Table-type MON-MANNING]
varies through the year
[Table-type IWAT-STATE1]
********************************************************************************
.. ' .,' • •'' ?". f:1:.'• ' ' •• '>, .< , ' .;•;• . i " "\ i, '
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] above are not always required; for example, because
all the values can be defaulted.
408 ' \ ;
'i. , '. " ' .' .'Vr •'. ,:ii,!! • ! n" •. :. .. ' , ' ' v, i. : I1'1,;1 "'ill:1,,1,,. "':' iii; ft^,... •';*$
", . • ",:.i ' „ ,"•' •" ' . ' ! ''• "'• "i.1" i "" '''ii. •>'!!ih':.^'HHf'i ||l!l!|!!jy'";;"1 i;" '"il|li'"|is
-------
1
IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input
4.4(2).4.1 Table-type IWAT-PARM1 -- First group of IWATER parms (flags)
**********************************************************************ieie^^ie^4;
1 23 45 6 7 8
H!!5S78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************************°*^
Layout
******
IWAT-PARM1
<-range>< iwatparml -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END IWAT-PARMl
*******
Example
*******
IWAT-PARM1
Flags ***
# - # CSNO RTOP VRS VNN RTLI ***
1711
END IWAT-PARM1
CSNOFG,RTOPFG, 515 0 0 I"
VRSFG,VNNFG,
RTLIFG
409
-------
IMPLND -- Section"IWATER Input
Explanation
If CSNOF6 is 1, section IWATER assumes that snow accumulation and melt is being
considered. It will, therefore, expect that the time series produced by section
SNOW are available, either internally (produced in this RUN) or from external
sources (produced in a previous RUN). If CSNOFG is 0, no such time series are
expected. See the functional description for further information.
•• • '•' : .' ' ! '•• I- '•: l',f'-«m^\: ; ! ':':•! •:;!: .M-'':':!f>, p.1
If RTOPFG is 1, routing of overland flow is done in exactly the same way as in NPS,
A value of 0 results in a new algorithm being used.
The flags beginning with "V" indicate whether or not certain parameters will be
assumed to vary through the year: 1 means they do vary, 0 means they do not. The
quantities concerned are:
VRSF6 retention storage capacity
VNNFG Manning's n for the overland flow plane
If either of these flags are on, monthly values for the parameter concerned must
be supplied (see Table-types MON- , documented later).
If RTLIFG is 1, any lateral surface inflow to the ILS will be subject to retention
storage; if it is 0, it will not.
•; r, ""!" •
410
-------
1
IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input
4.4(2).4.2 Table-type IWAT-PARM2 -- Second group of IWATER parms
************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
IH!S8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************^^
Layout
******
IWAT-PARM2
<-range><--
•iwatparm2-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END IWAT-PARM2 ' '
*******
Example
*******
IWAT-PARM2
# - # LSUR
1 7 400.
END IWAT-PARM2
SLSUR
.001
NSUR
RETSC
***
***
****************************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LSUR
SLSUR
NSUR
RETSC
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
none
0.1
0.0
0.0
Min
1.0
0.3
.000001
0.001
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
10.
1.0
10.0
250.
Units
ft
m
none
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
Explanation
LSUR is the length of the assumed overland flow plane, and SLSUR is the slope.
NSUR is Manning's n for the overland flow plane.
RETSC is the retention (interception) storage capacity of the surface.
411
-------
IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input
4.4(2).4.3 Table-type IWAT-PARM3 -- Third group of IWATER parms
***********************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** ' ' ' " ["" ' '' _
IWAT-PARMS
<-range>< iwatparmS >
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END IWAT-PARM3*
*******
Example
*******
IWAT-PARM3
***
f _ #*** PETMAX PETMIN
1 7
9 39 33
END IWAT-PARMS
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PETMAX
PETMIN
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
40.
4.5
35.
1.7
Min
none
none
none
none
Max
none
none
none
none
Units
degF
degC
degF
degC
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
..L-'af-L.'--'-''^'1!
Explanation
PETMAX is the air temp below which E-T will arbitrarily be reduced below the value
obtained from the input time series, and PETMIN is the temp below which E-T will
be zero regardless of the value in the input time series. These values are only
used if snow is being considered (CSNOFG= 1).
In the above example, both parameters will be suppplied default values for Land-
segments 1 through 7, but the user has over-ridden the defaults for Land-segment
9.
•• 412 '':' ' " : "'" " ' " ' ':"
-------
1
IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input
4.4(2).4.4 Table-type. MON-RETN -- Monthly retention storage capacity
**^********«*****^^
iHSHS^™
Layout
******
MON-RETN
<-range><
---mon-retn
*************••••*•••«•
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END MON-RETN ' ' ' *
*******
Example
*******
MON-RETN
ilLS J ™,!;enrrSn .S.tora9e capacity at start of each month
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .02 .03 .03 .04 .05 .08 .12 .15 .12 .05 .03 .01
END MON-RETN
*************************************************^^
***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
RETSCM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
10.
250.
Units
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
Only required if VRSFG in Table-type IWAT-PARM1 is 1.
•n H IT* monthly values apply to the f1rst day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly valued
413
-------
IMPTND-- Section IWATER Input
1 •' "' ' liSi"1 •'• ',-•• ' •'' '•• ••' . .. ' i
4.4(2).4.5 Table-type MON-MANNING -- Monthly Manning's n values
************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-MANNING
<-range>< mon-Manning >
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-MANNING "
*******
Example
*******
MON-MANNING ......
Manning's n at start of each month ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC ***
1 7 .23 .34 .34 .35 .28 .35 .37 .35 .28 .29 .30 .30
END MON-MANNING
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
NSURM(12) 12F5.0 .10 .001 1.0 complex Both
Explanation
This table is only required if VNNFG in Table-type IWAT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
414
-------
IMPLND -- Section IWATER Input
4.4(2).4.6 Table-type IWAT-STATE1 -- IWATER state variables
****************************************
****************************************
JSSSZsi
Layout
******
IWAT-STATE1
<-range>< iwat-statel--->
(repeats until ail operations of this type are covered)
END iwAT-STATEl
*******
Example
*******
IWAT-STATE1
IWATER state variables***
# - #*** RETS SURS
1 7 0.05 0.10
END IWAT-STATE1
**********************************
*****************************************
*****
Details
Symbol
Fortran
natne(s)
RETS
SURS
Format Def
2F10.0 .001
.025
.001
.025
Min
.001
.025
.001
.025
Max
100
2500
100
2500
Units
inches
mm
inches
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
This table is used to specify the initial water storages.
RETS is the retention storage.
SURS is the surface (overland flow) storage.
415
-------
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section SOLIDS input
***************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** : , , . ,„ „,
i ,, ' • ;: '. / • 1".::,!';'.;,• ,',•;' i.';J"';i'.:* /'^'i ' 1
[Table-type SLD-PARM1] Tables in brackets Ue are
Table-type SLD-PARM2 not always required.
[Table-type MON-SACCUM]
[Table-type MON-REMOV]
[Table-type SLD-STOR ]
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
416
-------
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5.1 Table-type SLD-PARM1 -- First group of SOLIDS parms
**************************^
JHfisfes^^
Layout
******
SLD-PARM1
<-rangex--sld-parml-->
• • • " ' '
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SLD-PARM!
*******
Example
*******
SLD-PARM1
***
# - # VASD VRSD SDOP***
17010
END SLD-PARM1
*****************************************
***************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
VASDF6
VRSDF6
SDOPFG
Format Def
315 0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
Max
1
1
1
Explanation
^^
417
-------
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5.2 Table-type SLD-PARM2 -- Second group of SOLIDS parms
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
i*****i**********^
Layout
******
SLD-PARM2
<-range>< sld-parm2 >
(repeats'until'all'operations of this type are covered)
END SLD-PARM2 '
Example
*******
SLD-PARM2
***
KEIM
0.08
JEIM
1.90
ACCSDP
0.01
REMSDP***
0.5
****S***S**J********************************************************************
Details
it
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
KEIM
JEIM
ACCSDP
REMSDP
Format Def
4F10.0 0.0
none
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
none
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
:' •
none
1.0
Units Unit
system
complex Both
complex Both
tons Engl
/ac.day
tonnes Metric
/ha. day
/day Both
Explanation
KEIM is the coefficient in the solids washoff equation.
JEIM is the exponent in the solids washoff equation.
ACCSDP is the rate at which solids are placed on the land surface.
REMSDP is the fraction of solids storage which is removed each day; when there is
no runoff, for example, because of street sweeping.
If monthly values for the accumulation and unit removal rates are being supplied,
values supplied for these variables in this table are not relevant.
418
-------
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5.3 Table-type MON-SACCUM -- Monthly solids accumulation rates
*«****^^
12S22S!2^^
Layout
******
MON-SACCUM
<-range><--
-mon-accum--
(repeats until ail operations of'this type 'are 'covered) '•••
END MON-SACCUM ..........
*******
Example
*******
MON-SACCUM
r LS I ™Mth^DVaI«nS for So11ds accumulation (tonnes/ha. day) ***
# - * JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ACCSDM(12)
Format Def
12F5.0 0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max Units
none tons/
ac.day
none tonnes/
ha. day
Unit
system
Engl
Metr
Explanation
This table is only required if VASDFG in Table-type SLD-PARM1 is 1.
419
-------
I
"- '•' i*'1"* V! "'"Ill1"
. • ,. i i.'i' Id .in: , ft..;
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5.4 Table-type MON-REMOV -- Monthly solids unit removal rates
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***i*2********************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-REMOV
<-range>< ......... — — mon-remov
(repeats'until*all'operations of this type are covered)
END MON-REMOV
*******
Example
*******
MON-REMOV
Monthly solids unit . _. . „._„,„.....
* # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .05 .05 .07 .15 .15 .20 .20 .20 .20 .10 .05 .05
END MON-REMOV
********************************************************************************
Details
__________' — —; •' - • --------
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s)
REMSDM(12) 12F5.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 /day Both
Explanation
This table is only required if VRSDFG in Table-type StD-PARMl is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
420
-------
IMPLND -- Section SOLIDS Input
4.4(2).5.5 Table-type SLD-STOR -- Solids storage
*******************************************^^
12222Si2!^^
Layout
SLD-STOR
<-rangexsld-stor>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SLD-STOR'
*******
Example
*******
SLD-STOR
Solids storage (tons/acre) ***
# - # ***
1 7 0.2
END SLD-STOR
******************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min""~Max Units~~~Unit "
n_m_e_(_S_>_ system
SLDS "Fio"o""i:i""""S:i"""Mne"""iws/ic"Engl
°-° 0.0 none tonnes Metric
/ha
Explanation
SLDS is the initial storage of solids.
421
-------
IMP'LND -- Section IWTGAS Input
4.4(2).6 IMPLND BLOCK — Section IWTGAS input
*********************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type IWT-PARM1]
[Table-type IWT-PARM2] Tables in brackets [] are not
[Table-type MON-AWTF] always required
[Table-type MON-BWTF]
[Table-type IWT-INIT]
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
422
-------
IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input
4.4(2).6.1 Table-type IWT-PARM1 -- Flags for section IWTGAS
i£££S2iH2222J2££22^
~*x****************************************************
Layout
******
IWT-PARMI
<-rangexiwtparml>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END IWT-PARM1
*******
Example
*******
IWT-PARMI
Flags for section IWTGAS***
# - # WTFV CSNO ***
1700
END IWT-PARMI
***************************************
*****************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
WTFVFG
CSNOFG
Format Def
215 0
0
Min
0
0
Max
1
1
Explanation
il ™™FG;l' the effe,cts T°J snow accumulation and melt are being considered- if it
hLf8™'.they ff not' If Sect1on IWATER is active the value of CSNOFG sUD
here is ignored because it was first supplied in the input for that Section
423
-------
IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input
4.4(2).6.2 Table-type IWT-PARM2 -- Second group of IWTGAS parms
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
IWT-PARM2
<-range><-- --iwt-parm2 >
(repeats'until"all operations of this type are covered)
END IWT-PARM2
******* " ' ' ' ' ' '" '
Example
*******
IWT-PARM2
Second group of IWTGAS parms***
| - # ELEV AWTF BWTF***
1 7 1281. 40.0 0.8
END IWT-PARM2
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ELEV
AWTF
BWTF
Format Def
3F10.0 0.6
0.0
32.
0.0
1.0
1.0
Min
-1000.
-300.
0.0
-18.
0.001
0.001
Max
30000.
9100.
100.
38.
2.0
2.0
Units
ft
m
DegF
DegC
DegF/F
DegC/C
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metr
Engl
Metr
Explanation
ELEV is the elevation of the ILS above sea level (used to adjust saturation
concentrations of dissolved gases in surface outflow).
AWTF is the surface water temperature, when the air teperature is 32 degrees F (0
degrees C). It is the intercept of the surface water temperature regression
equation. BWTF is the slope of the surface water temperature regression equation.
424
-------
IMPLND --Section IWTGAS Input
4.4(2).6.3 Table-type MON-AWTF -- Monthly values for AWTF
**********************************************^
iisbsbs
Layout
******
MON-AWTF
<-range><- mon-awtf ___>
(repeats until all operations of'th'is type'are'covered)
END MON-AWTF'
*******
Example
*******
MON-AWTF
Value of AWTF at start of each month (deg F) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
END
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max "~~Units~~~Unir~""
n_™e_(_s_l ____ system
AWTFM(12) ~~~12F5~0~~32~~""o~ioo"""deg~F~"Engr~~~"
0- -18. 38. deg C Metric
Explanation
This table is only required if WTFVFG in Table-type IWT-PARM1 is 1.
values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
425
-------
IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input
4. 4(2). 6. 4 Table-type MON-BWTF -- Monthly values for BWTF
:'
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout ' ' "'
******
MON-BWTF
< -rangex mon - bwt f >
i1 , ,!•,':« I" , ' ',,"i;,'i,ii, '" • •'" i ' - , - V . i'.'1!
(repeats until ail operations of this type are covered)
END MON-BWTF*
*******
Example
*******
MON-BWTF
Value of BWTF at start of each month (deg F/F) ***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY OUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .3 .3 .3 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .4 .4 .4 .3
END MON-BWTF
Details _ i ,
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Ma'x Units Unit
name(s) system
BWTFM(12) 12F5.0 1.0 0.001 2.0 deg F/F Engl
1.0 0.001 2.0 deg C/C Metric
«««,-._ — — — -. — — — — — - — — — — — — — — — — — — — — - — — — -- — ---------- - ----- - - -------------- - -~~~ — -~~~""-~
I . ' . " " : f,:".,' ;;;,, . '«:' ' • *• ,6 !i,.' >;\ .'•': . I
Explanation
This table is only required if WTFVFG in Table-type IWT-PARM1 is 1.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
426
;;., (-"HI f -i ,
-------
1
IMPLND -- Section IWTGAS Input
4. 4(2). 6. 5 Table-type IWT-INIT -- Initial conditions for section IWTGAS
*************************^^
1 23 4 56 7 a
lHi5!Z8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************************^^
Layout
IWT-INIT
<-range>< --------- iwt-init- .......... >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END IWT-iNIT .............
*******
Exampl e
*******
IWT-INIT
SOTMP
# - # DegC
17 16.
END IWT-INIT
SODOX
mg/1
SOC02***
mg C/l***
***********************************************
*********************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SOTMP
SODOX
SOC02
Format Def
3F10.0 60.0
16.0
0.0
0.0
Min
32.
.01
0.0
0.0
Max
100.
38.0
20.0
1.0
Units
Deg F
Deg C
mg/1
mg C/l
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Explanation
of the
427
-------
IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input
4.4(2).7 IMPLND BLOCK -- Section IQUAL input
*********************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type NQUALS]
Table-type QUAL-PROPS
[Table-type QUAL-INPUT]
[Table-type MON-POTFW]
[Table-type HON-ACCUM]
[Table-type MON-SQOLIM]
repeat for each
quality constituent
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows or in the documentation for the PERLND module.
Tables enclosed in brackets [] are not always required;for example, because all tne
values can be defaulted.
11
4.4(2).7.1 Table-type NQUALS -- Total number of quality constituents simulated
i
This table is identical to the corresponding table for the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8.1 for documentation.
428
-------
1
IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input
4. 4(2). 7. 2 Table-type QUAL-PROPS -- Identifiers and Flags
for a quality constituent
*******************************************
***^^
££SS22£
Layout
******
QUAL-PROPS
<-rangex-qualid---> < flags-- >
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END QUAL-PROPS
*******
Example
*******
QUAL-PROPS
Identifiers and Flags ***
# - # QUALID QTID QSD VPFW QSO VQO***
17 BOD kg 0 0 1 1
END QUAL-PROPS
*********************************y,
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
QUALID
QTYID
QSDFG
VPFWFG
QSOF6
VQOFG
Format
3A4
A4
415
Def
none
none
0
0
0
0
Min
none
none
0
0
0
0
Max
none
none
1
1
1
1
429
-------
IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input
Explanation
QUALID is a string of up to 10 characters which identifies the quality constituent.
QTYID is a string of up to 4 characters which identifies the units associated with
this constituent (e.g., kg, # (for coliforms)). These are the units referred to
as "qtyM in subsequent tables (e.g., Table-type QUAL-INPUT).
If QSDFG is 1 then:
1. This constituent is a QUALSD (sediment associated).
2. If VPFWFG is 1, the washoff potency factor may vary throughout the year.
Table-type MON-POTFW is expected.
If QSOFG is 1 then: ,.,,.,,
1. This constituent is a QUALOF (directly associated with overland flow).
2. If VQOFG is 1 then rate of accumulation and the limiting storage of QUALOF
may vary throughout the year. Table-types MON-ACCUM and MON-SQOLIM are
expected.
4. 4(2). 7. 3 Table-type QUAL-INPUT -- Storage on surface and nonseasonal parms
i1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
QUAL-INPUT
<-range>< ......... — qua!- input ..... ----------- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END QUAL-INPUT ............
******* _ ., ........... ^ M| , , , , ; ..... . ..... i ;
Exampl e
*******
QUAL-INPUT
Storage on surface and nonseasonal parameters***
# - * SQO POTFW ACQOP SQOLIM WSQOP ***
1 7 1.21 .172 0.02 2.0 1.70
END QUAL-INPUT
********************************************************************************
430
-------
IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SQO
POTFW
ACQOP
SQOLIM
WSQOP
Format Def Min Max
5F8.0 0.0 0.0 none
0.0 0.0 none
0.0 0.0 none
0.0 0.0 none
0.0 0.0 none
0.0 0.0 none
.000001 .000001 none
.000002 .000002 none
1.64 0.01 none
41.7 0.25 none
Units Unit
system
qty/ac Engl
qty/ha Metric
qty/ton Engl
qty Metric
/tonne
qty Engl
/ac.day
qty Metric
/ha. day
qty/ac Engl
qty/ha Metric
in/hr Engl
mm/hr Metric
Explanation
The following variable is applicable only if the constituent is a QUALSD:
1. POTFW, the washoff potency factor.
A potency factor is the ratio of constituent yield to sediment outflow.
The following variables are applicable only if the constituent is a QUALOF:
1. SQO, the initial storage of QUALOF on the surface of the ILS.
ACQOP, the rate of accumulation of QUALOF.
SQOLIM, the maximum storage of QUALOF.
WSQOP, the rate of surface runoff which will remove 90 percent of stored
QUALOF per hour.
2.
3.
4.
If monthly values are being supplied for any of these quantities, the value in this
table is not relevant; instead,the system expects and uses values supplied in
Table-type MON-XXX.
431
-------
IMPLND -- Section IQUAL Input
4.4(2).7.4 Table-type MON-POTFW -- Monthly washoff potency factor
This table is identical to the corresponing table in for the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8.4 for documentation.
4.4(2).7.5 Table-type MON-ACCUM -- Monthly accumulation rates of QUALOF
This table is identical to the corresponding table for the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8.6 for documentation.
4.4(2).7.6 Table-type MON-SQOLIM -- Monthly limiting storage of QUALOF
This table is identical to the corresponding table for the PERLND module. See
Section 4.4(1).8.7 for documentation.
432 " ' ''
-------
RCHRES Block
4.4(3) RCHRES Block
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
RCHRES
General input
[section HYDR input]
[section ADCALC input]
[section CONS input]
[section HTRCH input]
[section SEDTRN input]
[section GQUAL input]
[input for RQUAL sections]
[section OXRX input]
[section NUTRX input]
[section PLANK input]
[section PHCARB input]
END RCHRES
********************************************************************************
Explanation
This block contains the data which are "domestic" to all RCHRES processing units
in the RUN. The "General input" is always relevant: other input is only required
if the module section concerned is active.
4.4(3).l RCHRES BLOCK -- General input
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
Table-type ACTIVITY
[Table-type PRINT-INFO]
Table-type GEN-INFO
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows. Tables enclosed in brackets [], above, are not always
required; for example, because all values can be defaulted.
433
-------
RCHRES -- General Input
4.4(3).1.1 Table-type ACTIVITY -- Active Sections Vector
*******************************************"***^
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout:
ACTIVITY
<-range><- —a-s-vectoi >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ACTIVITY
I
Example:
ACTIVITY
RCHRES Active sections***
# - # HYFG ADFG CNFG HTFG SDFG GQFG OXFG NUFG PKFG PHFG ***
1 7 1 1 11 11 10 0 0
END ACTIVITY
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
HYDRFG , ADFG , CONSFG , HTFG , SEDFG
GQALFG,OXFG,NUTFG,PLKFG
PHFG
Format
915
15
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
1
3
Explanation
The RCHRES module is divided into eleven sections. The values supplied in this
table specify which sections are active and which are not, for each operation
involving the RCHRES module. A value of 0 means "inactive" and 1 means "active"
(see below). Any meaningful subset of sections may be active, with the following
provisos: 1) Section ADCALC must be active if any "quality" sections (CONS thru
PHCARB) are active. 2) If any section in the RQUAL group (Section OXRX thru
PHCARB) is active, all preceding RQUAL sections must also be active.
434
\it.;, la 'iiii.•,' lit!., • lii'ti.,,•!. '„; it i:,., .• I''.i!8»'. i.' \'l . • ,' i,'! >' • ill'ii',:. I.il'i i '""'.iiii 3.
-------
1
RCHRES -- General Input
4.4(3).1.2 Table-type PRINT-INFO -- Printout information
********************************************************************^
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************^*^A^^A^^^^^^^^^^^^^A^^^^^^^^^AAAA^^A^
Layout
******
PRINT- INFO
<-range>< --------------- print-flags--- ......... -------- -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PRINT-iNFO ...................... .....
*******
Example
*******
PRINT- INFO
RCHRES Printout level flags***
# - # HYDR ADCA CONS HEAT SED GQL OXRX NUTR PLNK PHCB PIVL PYR***
1722255233 10 12
END PRINT- INFO
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def
PFLAG(IO) 1015 4
PIVL 15 1
PYREND 15 9
Min
2
1
1
Max
6
1440
12
435
-------
RCHRES -- General Input
Explanation
HSPF permits the user to vary the printout level (maximum frequency) for the
various active sections of an operation. The meaning of each permissible value for
PFLAG( ) is:
2 means every PIVL intervals
3 means every day
4 means every month
5 means every year
6 means never
In the example above, output from RCHRESs 1 through 7 will occur as follows:
Section Max frequency
HYDR 10 intervals
ADCALC 10 intervals
CONS 10 intervals
HTRCH year
SEDTRN year
GQUAL 10 intervals
OXRX day
NUTRX day
PLANK month (defaulted)
PHCARB month (defaulted)
ACIDPH month (defaulted)
A value need only be supplied for PIVL if one or more sections have a printout
level of 2. For those sections, printout will occur every PIVL intervals (that is,
every PDELT=PIVL*DELT mins). PIVL must be chosen such that there are an integer
no. of PDELT periods in a day.
HSPF will automatically provide printed output at all standard intervals greater
than the specified minimum interval. In the above example, output for section
NUTRX will be printed at the end of each day, month, and year.
PYREND is the calendar month which will terminate the year for printout purposes.
Thus, the annual summary can reflect the situation over the past water year or the
past calendar year, etc.
i- •
436
ifr'"!!'!:.!;'!1 ...Wi,'.,., , Jii ,
-------
RCHRES -- General Input
4. 4(3). 1.3 Table-type GEN-INFO -- Other general information
*********************************************************^^
1 23 4 5 6 78
1234567890123456789012345678.9012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
GEN- INFO
^ i auycxv icn lu -><«nex.><.--unn,-sysT;--><-printu->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GEN- INFO
*******
Example
*******
GEN-INFO
RCHRES
# - #
4 East
END GEN- INFO
**************?
Details
Symbol
Name
Nexits
Unit
Systems
user t-series
River-mile 4
leie "$(•& •fcicit'jc'fe •%<&•&•& •&
Fortran
name(s)
RCHID(5)
NEXITS
UUNITS
IUNITS
OUNITS
PUNIT(2)
LKFG
2
•kick •%•&•}; $;•}:
Format
5A4
15
15
15
15
215
15
1
******j
Def
none
1
1
1
1
0
0
in out
1
t********
Min
none
1
1
1
1
0
0
Printer
Engl Metr
23
t*********<
Max
none
5
2
2
2
99
1
***
LKFG***
***
0
*-t--4"4-«l**t--4-«I-'J
• ^ Tt iK TCffjf fC *
437
-------
RCHRES -- General Input
Explanation
Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the identifier for a RCHRES.
NEXITS is the no. of exits from the RCHRES. A maximum of 5 exits may be handled.
The values supplied for indicate the system of units for data in the
UCI, input time series, and output time series, respectively. 1 means English
units, 2 means metric units.
I' , „ "V ,'! ' vlfj ' ' , I ,i,'i|!" " ' ' , ', !, It,'',
The values supplied for indicate the destinations of printout in English
and metric units, respectively. A value of 0 means no printout is required in that
system. A non-zero value means printout is required in that system and is the
Fortran unit no. of the file to which printout is to be written.
indicates whether the RCHRES is a lake (1) or a stream/river (0). This
affects the method of calculating bed shear stress (in Section HYDR) and the
reaeration coefficient (Section OXRX).
4.4(3).2 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section HYDR input
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
Table-type HYDR-PARM1
Table-type HYDR-PARM2
[Table-type MON-CONVF]
[Table-type HYDR-INIT]
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables mentioned above is detailed in the
documentation which follows.
Tables enclosed in brackets [], above, are not always required.
438
-------
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
4.4(3).2.1 Table-type HYDR-PARM1 -- Flags for HYDR section
^
********************************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
HYDR-PARM1
<-range> <2><3> <---odfvfg > <---odgtfg > < funct >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END HYDR-PARMl '
*******
Example
*******
HYDR-PARM1
RCHRES Flags for HYDR section***
# - # VC Al A2 A3 ODFVFG for each *** ODGTFG for each FUNCT for each
FG FG FG FG possible exit *** possible exit possible exit
1 70111 00001 11111 33333
END HYDR-PARM1
****************************************************
Details
Symbol
<1>
<2>
<3>
Fortran
name(s)
VCONFG
AUX1FG
AUX2FG
AUX3FG
ODFVFG (5)
ODGTFG (5)
FUNCT(5)
Format
13
13
13
13
513
513
513
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Min
0
0
0
0
-5
0
1
Max
1
1
1
1
8
5
3
439
-------
1 .'"(• ..'; frflii1'"!'1. 'i;!*!1;
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
Explanation
A value of 1 for VCONFG means that F(VOL) outflow demand components are multiplied
by a factor which is allowed to vary through the year. These monthly adjustment
factors are input in Table-type MON-CONVF in this section.
, . . ;_: i ,'=• IJ'i.' ,-• ',. , „ .•; ,,'i. i' li..., VjM; :,'*: I':,; .('^"''.'l' ' ''5 ,';:",": Ji!-!.' ];"• £:"', . ,,
A value of 1 for AUX1FG means subroutine AUXIL will tie called' to compute depth,
stage, surface area, average depth, and topwidth, and values for these parameters
will be reported in the printout. These are used in the calculation of
precipitation and evaporation fluxes, and simulation of most water quality
sections. A value of 0 supresses the calculation and printout of this information.
A value of 1 for AUX2FG means average velocity and average cross sectional area
will be calculated, and values for these parameters will be reported in the
printout. These are used in the simulation of oxygen. A value of 0 supresses the
calculation and printout of this information. If AUX2FG is 1, AUX1FG must also be
1.
A value of 1 for AUX3FG means the shear velocity and bed shear stress will be
calculated. These are used in the calculation of deposition and scour of sediment
(inorganic and organic). AUX3FG may only be turned ON (=1) if AUX1FG and AUX2FG
are also «1.
The value specified for ODFVFG determines the F(VOLJ component of the outflow
demand. A value of 0 means that the outflow demand does not have a volume
dependent component. A value greater than 0 indicates the column number in RCHTAB
which contains the F(VOL) component. If the value specified for ODFVFG is less
than 0, the absolute value indicates the element of array COLIND( ) which defines
a pair of columns in RCHTAB which are used to evaluate the F(VOL) component.
Further explanation of this latter option is provided in the functional description
of the HYDR section in Part E. A value of ODFVFG can be specified for each exit
from a RCHRES.
The value specified for ODGTFG determines the G(T) component of the outflow demand.
A value of 0 means that the outflow demand does not have such a component. A value
greater than 0 indicates the element number of the array OUTDGT( ) which contains
the G(T) component. A value of ODGTFG can be specified for each exit from a
RCHRES.
FUNCT determines the function used to combine the components of an outflow demand.
The possible values and their meanings are:
I *', '<) "liiii
1 means use the smaller of F(VOL) and G(T)
2 means use the larger of F(VOL) and G(T)
3 means use the sum of F(VOL) and G(T)
m • :i.'B
,. . ••; -, . , ,i • •,., • • ,
440
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
4. 4(3). 2. 2 Table-type HYDR-PARM2 -- Parameters for HYDR section
***************************************^^
1 23 4 5 6 7 Q
iH!!678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***************************^
Layout
HYDR-PARM2
<-range>< ......... - ....... ---hydr-parm2 ........... -----
(repeats until all operations of this type 'are 'covered)
END HYDR-PARM2* ' ..... ' ' ' ........
*******
Example
*******
HYDR-PARM2
RCHRES ***
# - # DSN FTBN
1 17
2 100 2
END HYDR-PARM2
LEN
2.7
1.5
DELTH
120.
60.
STCOR
3.2
1.
KS***
.5
.5
DB50
0.2
0.2
*******************************************^
Details
r*****
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
FTBDSN
FTABNO
LEN
DELTH
STCOR
KS
DB50
Format
F5.0
F5.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0
none
none
none
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.01
.25
Min
0
1
0.01
0.016
0.0
0.0
none
none
0.0
.0001
.0025
Max
999
999
none
none
none
none
none
none
.99
100.
2500.
Units
none
none
miles
km
ft
m
ft
m
none
in
mm
Unit
system
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Engl
Metric
441
-------
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
Explanation
FTBDSN is the WDM table dataset number containing the F-Table. If FTBDSN is
greater than zero, the system searchs the WDM file for the F-Table.
If FTBDSN - 0, FfABNO is the user's number for the F-Table (located in the RABIES
Block) which contains the geometric and hydraulic properties of the RCHRES. If
FTBDSN > 0, FTABNO is the WDM table indicator specifying which table (within the
WDM dataset given by FTBDSN) contains the F-Table.
LEN is the length of the RCHRES.
DELTH is the drop in water elevation from the upstream to the downstream
extremities of the RCHRES. (It is used if section OXRX is active and reaeration
Is being computed using the Tsivoglou-Wallace equation; or if section SEDTRN is
active and sandload transport capacity is being computed using either the Toffaleti
or Colby method).
STCOR is the correction to the RCHRES depth to calculate stage. (Depth + STCOR =
Stage)
KS is the weighting factor for hydraulic routing. Choice of a realistic KS value
is discussed in the functional description of the HYDR section in Part E.
DB50 is the median diameter of the bed sediment (assumed constant throughout the
run). This value is used to:
1. Calculate the bed shear stress if the RCHRES is a lake.
2. Calculate the rate of sand transport if the Colby or Toffaleti methods are
used. i
In the HSPF code, it is in no way connected with the value for sand particle
diameter supplied in Table-type SAND-PM (for Section SEDTRN).
•!,i r .'iiv'ii11!!!"1 .
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
4. 4(3). 2. 3 Table-type MON-CONVF --Monthly F(VOL) adjustment factors
************************************************^^
1.2 34 5 6 78
IH!5S!8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^
Layout
MON-CONVF
<-range><
..... --mon-convf-- ....... ---------------- ........ >
(repeats until all operations of this type are'coveredj
END MON-CONVF ...........................
*******
Exampl e
*******
MON-CONVF
RCHRES Monthly F(VOL) adjustment factors***
# - # JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC***
1 7 .97 .89 .89 .91 .93 .93 .94 .95 .95 .98 98 97
END MON-CONVF
****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CONVFM(12)
Format
12F5.0
Def
0.0
Min
0.0
Max
none
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
443
-------
RCffRES -- Section HYDR Input
4.4(3).2.4 Table-type HYDR-INIT -- Initial conditions for HYDR section
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
HYDR-INIT
<-range><—
•-colind-
-outdgt-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END HYDR-INIT
*******
Example
*******
HYDR-INIT
RCHRES Initial conditions for HYDR section***
$ _ #*** VOL Initial value of COLIND
*** ac-ft for each possible exit
5 3245. 4.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.2
END HYDR-INIT
initial value of OUTDGT
for each possible exit
2.1 1.2 .5 1.2 1.8
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
VOL
COLIND(5)
OUTDGT(5)
Format
F10.0
5F5.0
5F5.0
Def
0.0
0.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
4.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
8.0
none
none
Units
acre-ft
Mm3
none
ft3/s
m3/s
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Engl
Metric
444
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section HYDR Input
Explanation
VOL is the initial volume of water in the RCHRES.
The value of COLIND( ) for an exit indicates the pair of columns used to evaluate
the mitlal value of the F(VOL) component of outflow demand for the exit
1n1tU1
. ^ only meaningful if the outflow from exit I has an
'" OUTDGT^) is -my -aningful if
4. 4(3). 3 RCHRES BLOCK --Section ADCALC input
i!?S!~E^S^
Layout
******
[Table-type ADCALC-DATA]
Explanation
' Tabie ADCALC-DATA is not
445
-------
RCHRES -- Section ADCALC Input
4. 4(3). 3.1 Table-type ADCALC-DATA -- Data for section ADCALC
*******************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
ADCALC-DATA
<-range>< — adcalc-data ---- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ADCALC-DATA
******* ' ' " ...... '"' ' "':! ' ' ' :•-:••,• .".
Exampl e
*******
ADCALC-DATA
RCHRES Data for section ADCALC***
# - # CRRAT VOL***
5 1.7 324.
END ADCALC-DATA
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
CRRAT
VOL
Format Def
2F10.0 1.5
0.0
0.0
Min
1.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
none Both
acre-ft Engl
Mm3 Metric
Explanation
,, . . , . :f \
CRRAT is the ratio of maximum velocity to mean velocity in the RCHRES cross section
under typical flow conditions.
VOL is the volume of water in the RCHRES at the start of the simulation. Input of
this value is not necessary if section HYDR is active.
446
-------
RCHRES -- Section CONS Input
4.4(3).4 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section CONS input
*****************************************************^^
12 345 6 7 a
I?34567890123456789°123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
^*^*^********^^
Layout
******
[Table-type NCONS]
Table-type CONS-DATA
| repeat for each conservative constituent
************************************************^^
Explanation
The exact formats of these tables are detailed below. Table-type NCONS is not
required if only one conservative constituent is being simulated (default value).
447
-------
i : ]" " •
';• li ' y : p ; ; '"> ;|f i'ij1:;, i $y ;;,
RCHRES -- Section CONS Input
4.4(3).4.1 Table-type NCONS -- Number of conservative constituents simulated
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 '" ' ""::! """ 6 ' " " '" 7 "8™
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
NCONS
<-rangexncn>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
.; i.
END NCONS '
*******
Example
*******
NCONS
RCHRES ***
# - #NCONS***
174
END NCONS
^.fc^**
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
.....•^•••••ii. — »•• — —••»• — — — ""•• — — — B,^^^..-.-. — -. — — — — — ^— — — — — ••-• — -• — — — —
NCONS 15 1 1 10
'! 4 ' . lit'
448
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section CONS Input
4.4(3).4.2 Table-type CONS-DATA - Information about one conservative substance
***********
8
*.****^*****.**^^
1222521222^^
Layout
******
CONS-DATA
<-range>< conid ><—con-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
...,0
END CONS-DATA ' ' *
*******
Example
*******
CONS-DATA
RCHRES Data for conservative constituent No. 3***
# - # Substance-id Cone ID CONV
1 7 Total Diss Solids 251.3 mq/1 1000
END CONS-DATA 9/ U'
QTYID ***
kg
*************************************************
*******************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CONID(5)
CON
CONCID
CONV
QTYID
Format
5A4
F10.0
2A4
F10.0
2A4
Def
none
0.0
none
none
none
Min
none
0.0
none
l.OE-30
none
Max
none
none
none
none
none
Units
Unit
system
none Both
concid Both
none Both
see below
none Both
449
-------
RCHRES -- Section CONS Input
•.. •„,*!
Explanation
Any string of up to 20 characters may be supplied as the name of the conservative
constituent (CONID).
CON 1s the initial concentration of the conservative.
CONCID is a string of up to 8 characters which spec!fies the concentration units
for the conservative constituent. If the constituent provides the alkalinity time
series for section PHCARB, CONCID must be mg/1 as CaCOS.
CONV is the conversion factor from QTYID/VOL to the desired concentration units
(CONCID): CONC = CONV*(QTY/VOL). If UUNITS is 1, VOL is in ft3; if it is 2, VOL
is in m3. For example, if:
CONCID is mg/1
QTYID is kg
VOL is in m3,
then CONV=1000.
QTYID is a string of up to 8 characters which specifies the units in which the
total flow of constituent into, or out of, the RCHRES will be expressed, e.g.,
Hkg.M
450
*,! ,' , • fl
-------
RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input
4. 4(3). 5 RCHRES BLOCK -- Section HTRCH input
**********************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
iH!*S!??21234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************
Layout
******
[Table- type HEAT-PARM]
[Table-type HEAT-INIT]
**************************************************^
Explanation
T°Mat °f lach ,of thf tables above is detailed in the documentation which
^ alWayS be SUPplied; '«• -ample, because
4. 4(3). 5.1 Table-type HEAT-PARM -- Parameters for section HTRCH
*******************************************^
12345678
IH45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
~***********************^^
Layout
******
HEAT-PARM
<-range><--elev--><--eldat-><--cfsx--><--ktrd--x--kcnd--><--kevp-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are'coveredj
•
END HEAT-PARM
*******
Example
*******
HEAT-PARM
RCHRES ELEV
# - # ft
1 7 2000.
END HEAT-PARM
***********************************************^^
451
ELDAT
ft
1500.
CFSAEX
.5
KATRAD
6.5
KCOND
11.
KEVAP ***
***
4.
-------
'll
RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ELEV
ELDAT
CFSAEX
KATRAD
KCOND
KEVAP
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
0.6
0.0
1.0
9.37
6.12
2.24
Min
0.0
0,0
none
none
0.001
1.00
1.00
1.00
Max
30000.
10000.
none "
none
2.0
20.
20.
10.
Units
ft
m
ft
m
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
ELEV is the mean RCHRES elevation.
ELDAT is the difference in elevation between the RCHRES and the air temperature
gage (positive if RCHRES is higher than the gage).
CFSAEX is the correction factor for solar radiation (it includes fraction of RCHRES
surface exposed to radiation).
KATRAD is the longwave radiation coefficient.
KCOND is the conduction-convection heat transport coefficient.
KEVAP is the evaporation coefficient.
452
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section HTRCH Input
4.4(3).5.2 Table-type HEAT-INIT -- Initial conditions
****************************^
^™™
Layout
******
HEAT-INIT
^
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END HEAT-INIT
*******
Example
*******
HEAT-INIT
RCHRES TW AIRTMP ***
# - # degF degF ***
1 7 62. 70.
END HEAT-INIT
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
TW
AIRTMP
Format Def Min Max Units
F10.0 60. 32. 200. degF
15.5 0.0 95. degC
F10.0 60. -90. 150. degF
15.5 -70.0 65. degC
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
rt
temperature and AIRTMP <
Initial air
453
-------
RCHRES"-- Section SEDTRN Input
4.4(3).6 RCHRES-BLQCK -- Section SEDTRN input
********************************************************************************
I 2 '3 ' 4' " '" 5 :"":':"" ''6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************************************
Layout
******
[Table-type SANDFG]
Table-type SED-GENPARM
Table-type SED-HYDPARM -- only if Section HYDR is inactive
Table-type SAND-PH n ^ c
Table-type SILT-CLAY-PM -- repeat twice, 1st for silt, 2nd for clay
[Table-type SSED-INIT]
[Table-type BED-INIT]
********************************************************************************
Explanation
;, , , ; '^i;,. i !• ,; ' ,.| "i'';i ,i, • ,''•!"' ,'i!',';ii, '••••• ' • ' '>;''LV;'A
The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which!
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.
454
-------
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
4.4(3).6.1 Table-type SANDFG -- Sandload method flag
********************************************^^
1 2 3 45 67 a
1H!56789012345678901234567890123456789°1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***************************************************^
Layout
******
SANDFG
<-rangexsfg>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SANDFG'
*******
Example
*******
SANDFG
RCHRES ***
# - # SDFG ***
2 2
END SANDFG
******************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
SANDFG 15 3 1 3""
""™™™~™*~™™"~™™™""~™""™~"~™"™*™~'"~™*™"' — — •—•— — — — •• — — — — •. — — -, — «.»••,__
Explanation
SANDFG indicates the method that will be used for sandload simulation-
1 = Toffaleti method
2 = Colby method
3 - user-specified power function method.
455
-------
,,' : !!,i!"'l!l, IB liKHU;,'1"
'••'iii: , '•.'•:' K .i'i'",!! ft 1|l||lill' •' IWIilir Dill I1,:;!1"™"1:1 • ' .C4i i
RCHRES -- Section SEDfRN input
4.4(3).6.2 Table-type SED-GENPARM -- General sediment related parameters
****************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************************************
Layout
******
";' ' • ••>!•,.•.:, :'• »' " " :? , : • - ••' ': it;f-
SED-GENPARH
<-range>< gen-parm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
: 1 •„> i •• " ' '-; iif'1,"1""!!111"11 i';1 ' '.'.I1 , ' "» ' . ,
END SED-GENPARM
*******
Example
*******
SED-GENPARM
RCHRES BEDWID BEDWRN
# - # (m) (m)
3 10 30. 2.
END SED-GENPARM
POR***
***
0.4
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BEDWID
BEDWRN
POR
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
100.
30.5
0.5
Min
1.0
0.3
.001
.0003
0.1
Max
none
none
none
none
0.9
Units
ft
m
ft
m
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
, ' I!'.,!' :,M
Explanation
• • . : i iii1,''. !.ei" ,,' , , , ',;, :, (",. • i i'
BEDWID is the width of the cross-section over which HSPF will assume bed
sediment is deposited regardless of stage, top-width, etc. It is used to
estimate the depth of bed sediment (BEDDEP).
BEDWRN is the bed depth which, if exceeded (e.g., through deposition) will cause
a warning message to be printed.
POR is the porosity of the bed (volume voids/total volume). It is used to estimate
bed depth.
456
-------
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
4.4(3).6.3 Table-type SED-HYDPARM - Parameters normally read in Section HYDR
*********p****************************^
ispssias^^
******
SED-HYDPARM
<-range>< sed-hydparm >
(repeats until all operations of'this type are covered)
END SED-HYDPARM
*******
Example
*******
SED-HYDPARM
RCHRES LEN
# - # (km)
2 5.0
5 20.0
END SED-HYDPARM
DELTH
(m)
4.0
5.0
DB50***
(mm)***
0.5
0.3
*************************************
*************************************
******
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
LEN
DELTH
DB50
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
0.0
On
.U
.01
.25
Min
0.01
0.016
0.0
.0
.0001
.0025
Max
none
none
none
none
100.
2500.
Units
miles
km
ft
m
in
mm
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
457
-------
RCHRES --Section SEDTRN Input
4.4(3).6.4 Table-type SAND-PM -- Parameters relatedto sand
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 ' ' 4"' "5 ' 6'" ' 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
SAND-PM
<-range><-
- sand-parms-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
, . . . • i- . . .• . .' ; .". .• /' '. • . '. t-:iv V
END SAND-PM
*******
Example
*******
SAND-PM
RCHRES
I - #
3
END SAND-PM
D W ***
(in) (in/sec) ***
.01 1.2
********************************************************************************^B
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
D
W
RHO
KSAND
EXPSND
Format
FfO.O
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
none
none
2.65
0.0
0.0
Min
looi
.025
.02
.5
1.0
0.0
0.0
Max
loo.
2500.
500.
12500.
4.0'
none
none
Units Unit
system
in Engl
mm Metric
in/sec Engl
mm/sec Metric
gm/cm3 Both
complex Both
complex Both
1 1'A « lili
Explanation
D is the effective diameter of the transported sand particles, and W is the
corresponding fall velocity in still water. Note that the sand transport
algorithms do not actually use D; they use DB50, supplied in Table-type HYDR-PARM2.
D is included here for consistency with the input data supplied for cohesive
sediment.
RHO is the density of the sand particles.
' " ., i" ,'-," ,;'. • : '. :: • i ' ':''!,,,:, ' ; «\ ' ^' -'W',: " 'V "'j^-\', tJiil > .' ,"' : 'i-i''': \'%ij;
KSAND and EXPSND are the coefficient and exponent in the sandload power function
formula. These values should be input if SANDFG=3.
458
',,,,!li, tliililli.: :i' .iliiiii ..... iiii ..... Ifilii;;. „., ,4: ..... ,;:, il'. ...... ......... ;.„':,!..:: • ....... -J^ ..... i.1!1!:':!. • i- !./•;='. .•'.
ilijt.;; aii n I
-------
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
4. 4(3). 6. 5 Table-type SILT-CLAY-PM -- Parameters for silt or clay
********************************************^^
i2£2S2!2£2fe
Layout
******
SILT-CLAY-PM
<-range><
— silt-clay-pm
(repeats until all operations of this type"are'covered)
END SILT-CLAY-PM
*******
Example
*******
SILT-CLAY-PM
RCHRES D W RHO
f - # (mm) (mm/sec) (gm/cm3)
6 .03 .80 2.7
9 .04 1.5 2.6
END SILT-CLAY-PM
TAUCD TAUCS M ***
(kg/m2) (kg/m2) (kg/m2.d) ***
2.0 2.5 0.1
2.0 3.0 .08
*****************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
D
RHO
TAUCD
TAUCS
M
Format
F10
F10
F10
F10
F10
F10
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
Def
0.
U.
0.
0.
2.
1.
1.
1.
1.
.0.
0.
0
0
0
0
65
OE10
OLIO
OHIO
OhlO
0
0
Min
0.
0.
0.
U.
2.
1.
1.
1.
1.
0.
U.
0
0
0
0
0
OE-10
OE-10
OE-10
OE-10
0
0
Max
.003
.07
.2
5.0
4.0
none
none
none
none
none
none
Units
in
mm
in/sec
mm/sec
gm/cm3
Ib/ft2
kg/m2
Ib/ft2
kg/m2
Ib/ft2.
kg/m2.d
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Both
Engl
Metric
-Engl
Metric
dEngl,
Metric
459
-------
. , . . ...,., ,
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
Explanation
This table must be supplied twice; first for silt, then for clay.
D is the effective diameter of the particles and W is the corresponding fall
velocity in still water.
RHO is the density of the particles. • •
TAUCD is the critical bed shear stress for deposition. Above this stress, there
will be no deposition; as the stress drops below this value to zero, deposition
will gradually increase to the value implied by the fall velocity in still water.
TAUCS is the critical bed shear stress for scour.Below this value, there will be
no scour; above it, scour will steadily increase.
In general TAUCD should be less than or equal to TAUCS.
H is the erodibility coefficient of the sediment.
Note that the default values for W, TAUCD, TAUCS, and M have been set so that silt
and clay will behave as "washload"; that is, material will settle at the rate
implied by W (defaulted to zero) and there will be no scour; the material will
behave like a conservative substance.
"t'li'r
I!!' '• If .•
,:,,,„,[
460
1 ' '• ; ."' :,; •,..• ,,' • , ' : ' .:' .I!1', gi'J1-: "i!",! '.'i;,,-';
,i,v i1 ,,. iiil ...l.v.BIn i!i,iii ( ; ih1'. <.•!'!,.'Sl.tCil
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
4. 4(3). 6. 6 Table-type SSED-INIT - Initial concentrations of suspended
sediment
*******************************^^^
!2£2SiS£J^
Layout
SSED-INIT ,
<-range><-- ....... ssed-init ------ ---->
(repeats until all operations of "this type are covered)
END SSED-INIT ...... ......
*******
Example
*******
SSED-INIT
RCHRES Suspended sed cones (mq/1) ***
# - # Sand Silt Clay ***
1 5 100. 50. 20.
END SSED-INIT
**********************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min ~~Max"""units""unit~ .....
.. system
"o"o ..... 0~0 """"
Explanation
I??t!hand
"" lBU1tl ««««*"«»»« d" suspension) of sand,
461
-------
RCHRES -- Section SEDTRN Input
4.4(3).6.7 Table-type BED-INIT -- Initial fractions of bed sediment
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
BED-INIT
<-range><-bed-depxfracsandxfracsilt>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
, : .''•>. r • i i "!::" , .'iiji.' : r. •;••'• , fi; • .•.'
END BED-INIT
*******
Example
*******
BED-INIT
RCHRES BEDDEP Initial bed composition ***
I - # (m) Sand Silt Clay ***
3 1.5 0.6 0.2 0.2
END BED-INIT
********************************************************************************
'',••• 'i1 • i: ',';, i™ k
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BEDDEP
temporary
array
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
.0001
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
1.0
.9999
.9999
Units
ft
m
none
none
none
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
BEDDEP is the initial total depth (thickness) of the bed.
The three values supplied under , , and are the
initial fractions (by weight) of sand, silt, and clay in the bed material. The
default values are arranged to simulate an all-sand bed. The sum of the fractions
must be 1.00.
462
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section GQUAL input
****************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************^^
Layout
******
[Table-type GQ-GENDATA]
next 15 tables -- repeat for each qua!
Table-type GQ-QALDATA
[Table-type GQ-QALFG]
[Table-type GQ-FLG2]
Table-type GQ-HYDPM
Table-type GQ-ROXPM
only if qual undergoes hydrolysis (QALFG(1,I)=1)
only if qua! undergoes oxidation (QALFG(2,I)=1)
[Table-type GQ-PHOTPM] -- only if qual undergoes photolysis (QALFG(3,I)=1)
Table-type GQ-CFGAS -- only if qua! undergoes volatilization (QALFG(4,I)=1)
next 2 tables -- only if qual undergoes biodegradation (QALFG(5,I)=1)
Table-type GQ-BIOPM ' '
Table-type MON-BIO -- only if biomass is input monthly (GQPM2(7,I)=3)
Table-type GQ-GENDECAY -- only if qual has "general" decay (QALFG(6,I)=1)
next 5 tables -- only if qua! is sediment associated (QALFG(7,I)=1)
[Table-type GQ-SEDDECAY] '.
Table-type GQ-KD
Table-type GQ-ADRATE
[Table-type GQ-ADTHETA]
[Table-type GQ-SEDCONC]
[Table-type GQ-VALUES]
next 3 tables -- only if the data are to be read as monthly values
("Source" flag in Table-type GQ-GENDATA is ON)
[Table-type MON-WATEMP] '
[Table-type MON-PHVAL] -- only if there is hydrolysis (any QALFG(1)=1)
[Table-type MON-ROXYGEN] -- only if there is oxidation (any QALFG(2)=1)
next 8 tables -- only if there is photolysis (any QALFG(3)
Table-type GQ-ALPHA '
[Table-type GQ-GAMMA]
[Table-type GQ-DELTA]
[Table-type GQ-CLDFACT]
= 1)
463
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
next 3 tables -- only if the data are to be read as monthly values
("Source" flag in Table-type GQ-GENDATA is ON)
[Table-type MON-CLOUD]
[Table-type MON-SEDCONC]
[Table-type HON-PHYTO]
[Table-type SURF-EXPOSED] — only if Section HTRCH is inactive
(see Section PLANK for documentation)
next 7 tables -- only if there is volatilization (any QALFG(4) = 1)
[Table-type OX-FLAGS]
[Table-type ELEV]
[Table-type OX-CFOREA]
[Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU]
Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH
[Table-type OX-TCGINV]
Table-type OX-REAPARM
[Table-type GQ-DAUGHTER] -- repeat for each decay process that produces
"daughter" quals from "parents"
Explanation
A qua! is a generalized quality constituent simulated using this module section.
The exact format of each of the tables above, except those "borrowed" from Sections
OXRX and PLANK, is detailed in the documentation which follows. Tables in brackets
[] need not always be supplied; for example, because alii of the inputs have default
values.
• i .'•!'
464
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.1 Table-type GQ-GENDATA -- General input for Section GQUAL
***********************************************^^
1 2 3 4 567 8
i2!!5678901234567890123456789°12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************************^^
Layout
GQ-GENDATA
<-rangexngq>< source-fgs --->
(repeats until all operations of this type are'covered)
END GQ-GENDATA '
******* .. .
Example
*******
GQ-GENDATA
RCHRES NGQL TPFG PHFG ROFG CDFG SDFG PYFG LAT***
# - # ***
1 7 3 22 1 2 2 3 48
END GQ-GENDATA
******************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
NGQUAL
TEMPFG
PHFLAG
ROXFG
CLDFG
SDFG
PHYTFG
LAT
Format
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Def
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
Min
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-54
/
Max
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
54
Units
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
degrees
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
465
-------
Ill II II
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
Explanation
NGQUAL - number of generalized constituents (quals) being simulated.
TEMPFG - source of water temperature data. 1 means a time series - either input
or computed; 2 means a single user-supplied value; 3 means 12 user-
sUpplied values (one for each month).
PHFLAG - source of pH data. Input only if any QALFG(1)=1. Source designation
scheme same as for TEMPFG.
ROXFG - source of free radical oxygen data. Input only if any QALFG(2)=1.
Source designation scheme same as for TEMPFG.
CLDFG - source of cloud cover data. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Source
designation scheme same as for TEMPFG.
SDFG - source of total sediment concentration data. Input only if any
QALFG(3)^1. Source designation scheme same as for TEMPFG.
PHYTFG - source of phytoplankton data. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Source
designation scheme same as for TEMPFG.
LAT - latitude of the RCHRES. Input only if any QALFG(3)=1. Positive for
northern hemisphere.
466
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.2 Table-type GQ-QALDATA -- Data for a generalized quality constituent
(qual)
********************************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************************************
Layout
******
GQ-QALDATA
<-range>< ---gqid ><--dqal-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-QALDATA
*******
Example
*******
GQ-QALDATA
RCHRES ***
#-#***
1 7
END GQ-QALDATA
GQID
Coliforms
DQAL
2.0
CONCID
#
CONV
.001
QTYID
#
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
GQID
DQAL
CONCID
CONV
QTYID
Format
5A4
F10.0
A4
F10.0
2A4
Def
none
0.0
none
none
none
Min
none
0.0
none
l.OE-30
none
Max
none
none
none
none
none
Units
none
concid
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
see below
none
Both
Explanation
GQID - Name of dissolved constituent (qua!).
DQAL - Initial concentration of qual.
CONCID - Concentration units (implied that it is "per liter") eg."mg"(/l).
CONV - Factor to convert from Qty/Vol to concentration units:
Conc= CONV* Qty/Vol (in English system, Vol is in ft3)
(in Metric system, Vol is in m3).
QTYID - Name of "Qty" unit for qual.
467
-------
: if
"'IK!"'if S3 ill' ;" v' •".'"' ii'j "i'i,1 Wf.'."' 'S1, B ''"i"*1" 1 ; i V1' .1 \)E! •' !W.; " iK' • • '' it
it",'Mi f'v 'iui'-'"i-ft•" /it! is .:. w '.:. <{:>*:*» *:-'.'' .•&
1- i .:'-'• . ," . •; .' :i . ji!,,: 'i' •• ;.•,!• ,11'!,-;,," •',». ,!•:(.••:(
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
'-M ..... Ml
4.4(3).7.3 Table-type GQ-QALFG -- First set of flags for a qua!
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
GQ-QALFG
<-range>< degrad-fgs-- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-QALFG ' • • • •
' . i;!'1'1 l":li.,1!1 i
*******
Example
*******
GQ-QALFG
RCHRES HDRL OXID PHOT VOLT BIOD GEN SDAS***
# - $ ***
171100101
END GQ-QALFG
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
QALFG(l)
QALFG(2)
QALFG(3)
QALFG(4)
QALFG(5)
QALFG(6)
QALFG(7)
Format
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Max
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
Units
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
QALFG(l) - indicates whether hydrolysis is considered for dissolved qual.
QALFG(2) - indicates whether oxidation by free radical oxygen is considered for
dissolved qual.
QALFG(3) - indicates whether photolysis is considered for dissolved qual.
QALFG(4) - indicates whether volatilization is considered for dissolved qua!.
QALFG(5) - indicates whether biodegradation is considered for dissolved qua!.
QALFG(6) - indicates whether general first order decay is considered for
dissolved qual.
QALFG(7) - indicates whether or not qual is associated with sediment. If so,
adsorption/desorption of qual is considered,
468
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 4 Table-type GQ-FLG2 -- Second set of flags for a qua!
******************************************************************^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************************^
Layout
GQ-FLG2
orangex ------- daughter proc--- ..... >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-FLG2
*******
Example
*******
GQ-FLG2
RCHRES HDRL OXID PHOT VOLT BIOD GEN SBMS***
# - # ***
170010102
END GQ-FLG2
***********************************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
proc>GQPM2(l)
GQPM2(2)
GQPM2(3)
GQPM2(4)
GQPM2(5)
GQPM2(6)
GQPM2(7)
Format
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
Def
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
Min
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Max
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
Units
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
GQPM2(1) through GQPM2(6) indicate whether or not this qua! is a "daughter"
product through each of the six decay processes (1-hydrolysis, 2-oxidation,
3-photolysis, 4-reserved for future use, 5-biodegradation, 6-general first order
decay). GQPM2(7) indicates the source of biomass data for qual. Input only if
QALFG(5)=1. (1-time series 2-single value 3-twelve monthly values)
469
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
. ' iMHii"! «• nil1'1 ••!',, " , , ' '!,: "! !," ,,''• •„!! ,n! . -.'," ' ,„ ,. • , "i - NK!|I;H v
4.4(3).7.5 Table-type GQ-HYDPM -- Hydrolysis parameters
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
GQ-HYDPM
<-range><-
- hydro!-parms-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-HYDPM
*******
Example
*******
GQ-HYDPM
RCHRES KA KB KN
$ - $
1 7 5000. 50. .00004
END GQ-HYDPM
THHYD***
***
1.03
"Y-tJVJf'"
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
KA
KB
KN
THHYD
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
none
1.0
- . ;•
Min
l.OE-30
l.OE-30
l.OE-30
1.0
Max
none
none
none
2.0
. • ': ;
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.6 Table-type GQ-ROXPM -- Parameters for free radical oxidation
*********************************,v***^^^^^^^^^^^A^A^^^^A^^^^^^^^^jt^vt^itit^jt^^jk^ikA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************A**^*^^^^^^^^^A^^^^^^^^^^A^^^^^^^^^^^^it^it^Ajk
Layout
******
GQ-ROXPM
<-range>< rox-pm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-ROXPM
*******
Example
*******
GQ-ROXPM
RCHRES KOX
# - #
1 7 .000014
END GQ-ROXPM
THOX***
***
1.01
****
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
KOX
THOX
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
1.0
Min
l.OE-30
1.0
Max
none
2.0
Units
/M.sec
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Explanation
KOX - second order rate constant for oxidation by free radical oxygen
THOX - temperature correction coefficient for oxidation by free radical oxygen
471
-------
RCHRES -- Section 6QUAL Input
4.4(3).7.7 Table-type GQ-PHOTPM -- Parameters for photolysis
****************************************^***^
1 ' "! : 2 ' "r ' ' 3 "' "4 " ' ' B" 6 7 ' 81"
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******•!
Layout
******
GQ-PHOTPM
<-range><-
<-range><-
<-range><-
first-7--
second-7 ,--
-last-4 ><--phi---x-theta-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
'!> ! I' '"' . ..'••'' > .',..: »'? :i, xf
END GQ-PHOTPM .....................
f J1:;,;,iSii'-fit!
*******
Exampl e
*******
GQ-PHOTPM
* - §***
# - #***
I - #***
1 7
1 7
1 7
END GQ-PHOTPM
Kl
K8
K15
.5
.5
.5
K2
K9
K16
.5
.5
.5
K3
K10
K17
.5
.5
.5
K4
Kll
K18
.5
.5
.5
K5
K12
PHI
.5
.5
.47
K6
K13
THETA
.5
.5
1.02
K7
K14
.5
.5
Details
Symbol
Fortran
jiame(s)
PHOTPM(l-7)
PHOTPM(8-14)
PHOTPM(15-18)
PHOTPM(19)
PHOTPM(20)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
1 .0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
.0001
1 70
Max
none
none
none
10.0
2.0
Units
1/M.cm
1/M.cm
1/M.cm
M/E
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
472
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
Explanation
PHOTPM(l) through PHOTPM(18) are molar absorption coefficients for qual for 18
wavelength ranges of light (see functional description for subroutine DDECAY in
Part t.).
PHOTPM(19) is the quantum yield for the qual in air-saturated pure water.
PHOTPM(20) is the temperature correction coefficient for photolysis.
When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:
1. No blank or "comment" lines may be put between any of the lines for a
? Thn J"U™ f^'-I^ f!1 commenuts ahead of the entry. (See above example).
Z. The specification must be repeated for each line onto which the entry
-
473
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.8 Table-type GQ-CFGAS -- Ratio of volatilization to oxygen reaeration
rate
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout ' ' ' ' ' '' '
******
GQ-CFGAS ' " ''' ' ' l'-'
<-rangex--cfgas->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-CFGAS" '
*******
Example
*******
GQ-CFGAS
RCHRES CFGAS***
f - # ***
1 7 .70
END GQ-CFGAS
k******
Details
..^...^MW.*....™....™— — — — —• — — «•—«—— — — — — — ——'— — — — «— — — —— — —'— — — —'••••«••• — '- — — — — «»"•«"••«•••*" '•" — — — ""•""•"•••™~
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
CFGAS F10.0 none l.OE-30 none none Both
Explanation
i, , i1 ".I111 i
CFGAS - ratio of volatilization rate to oxygen reaeration rate
474
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.9 Table-type GQ-BIOPM -- Biodegradation parameters
******************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************************************^^
Layout
GQ-BIOPM
<-range>< bioparm-- -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-BIOPM
*******
Example
*******
GQ-BIOPM
RCHRES
# - #
1 7
END GQ-BIOPM
BIOCON
.31
THBIO
1.07
BIO***
***
.04
*********
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BIOCON
THBIO
BIO
Format
FIO.O
F10.0
FIO.O
Def
none
1. 07
none
Min
l.OE-30
l.O
0.00001
Max
none
2.0
none
Units
Unit
system
1/mg/dayBoth
none Both
mg/1 Both
Explanation
BIOCON - second order rate constant for biomass concentration causing
biodegradation of qua!
THBIO - temperature correction coefficient for biodegradation of qual
BIO - concentration of biomass causing biodegradation of qual
475
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.10 Table-type MON-BIO -- Monthly values of biomass
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-BIO
<-range>< 12-values >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-BIO
*******
Example
*******
MON-BIO
RCHRES BM1 BM2 BM3 BM4 BM5 BM6 BM7 BM8 BM9 BM10 BM11 BM12***
» u ***
1 7 .03 .035 .03 .02 .02 .03 .03 .035 .040 .060 .050 .035
END MON-BIO
********************************************************************************
Details ;
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
riame(s) system
H •»**«»««•• •»w™«**»~«*"»"«"™*"""™~~«" «"•— — » — »•••-•- — — — "••-—— — ••••••"""•••••~~~"**~™'~™""*""'"*~™ — .«.»— — — «-•••-—— — «•••••
<12-values> BIOM(1-12) F5.0 none 0.00001 none mg/1 Both
Explanation
BIOM(l) through BIOM(12) are monthly concentrations of biomass causing
biodegradation of qua!. This table must be included in the UCI only if GQPM2(7)
is assigned a value of 3 in Table-type GQ-FLG2 (4.4(3).7.4).
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
476
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.11 Table-type GQ-GENDECAY -- Parameters for "general" decay
*********************************^
1222^1212^^
Iavnnt
Layout
******
GQ-GENDECAY
<-range>< decay-pms-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-GENDECAY
Example
*******
GQ-GENDECAY
RCHRES FSTDEC
# - #
17 0.2
END GQ-GENDECAY
THFST***
***
1.05
*******************************************
*************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
FSTDEC
THFST
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
1.07
Min
.00001
1.0
Max
none
2.0
Units
/day
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Explanation
.FSTDEC - first order decay rate for qua!
THFST - temperature correction coefficient for first order decay of qual
477
-------
RCHRES --Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.12 Table-type GQ-SEDDECAY -- Parameters for decay of contaminant
adsorbed to sediment
>l'Ji ,,il i,h. '' !'l
:,T^^k
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4-5 6 7 " ' 8""
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GQ-SEDDECAY
<-range>< ads-decay >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-SEDDECAY
*******
Example
*******
GQ-SEDDECAY
RCHRES KSUSP THSUSP KBED
# - #
1 7 .01 1.06 .005
END GQ-SEDDECAY
THBED***
***
1.03
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ADDCPM(l)
ADDCPM(2)
ADDCPM(3)
ADDCPM(4)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
1.07
0.0
1.07
Min
0.0
1.0
0.0
1.0
Max
none
2.0
none
2.0
Units
/day
none
/day
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
ADDCPM(l) - decay rate for qual adsorbed to suspendedsediment
ADDCPM(2) - temperature correction coefficient for decay of qual on
suspended sediment
ADDCPM(3) - decay rate for qual adsorbed to bed sediment
ADDCPM(4) - temperature correction coefficient for decay of qual on
bed sediment
478
, '. L
. ,! I', 'I Jill,,' ,'l.r Lfiiiniiiillt i. IIIHilll'iHII
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.13 Table-type GQ-KD -- Partition coefficients
************************************************^
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
iH!S8901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************^
Layout
******
GQ-KD
<-range>< k-part >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-KD
*******
Example
******* I
GQ-KD
RCHRES ADPM1 ADPM2 ADPM3 ADPM4 ADPM5 ADPM6***
# - # ***
™i ™ L 1'° 500° 1500° -3 1000 4000
END GQ-KD
*****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ADPM(1,1)
ADPM(2,1)
ADPM(3,1)
ADPM(4,1)
ADPM(5,1)
ADPM(6,1)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
none
none
none
none
Min
l.OE-10
l.OE-10
l.OE-10
l.OE-10
l.OE-10
l.OE-10
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
Units
1/mg
1/mg
1/mg
1/mg
1/mg
1/mg
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
ADPM(1,1) through ADPM(6,1) - distribution coefficients for qual with: 1-suspended
sand, 2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand, 5-becI silt, 6-bed clay.
479
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.14 Table-type GQ-ADRATE -- Adsorption/desorption rate parameters
********************************************************************
Layout
******
GQ-ADRATE
<-range><-
-k-adsdes-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-ADRATE
*******
Example
*******
GQ-ADRATE
RCHRES ADPM1
f - #
1 7 400.
END GQ-ADRATE
ADPM2
400.
ADPM3
400.
ADPM4
.0028
ADPM5
.0028
ADPM6***
***
.0028
Details
Symbol
Explanation
!
Fortran
name(s)
ADPM(1,2)
ADPM(2,2)
ADPM(3,2)
ADPM(4,2)
ADPM(5,2)
ADPM(6,2)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
none
none
none
none
none
M'in"
.00001
.00001
.00001
.00001
.00001
.00001
, , .. |, | • , r , •
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
!* ' . ! 'i,
,,",( - , tl | . ;
, .,. . .
Units
/day
/day
/day
/day
/day
/day
' , i:lll:,1 . .!!, ,| i" ' ,i!< V",i
,, .'.j . "* '•» •' ..'-(H iv •' : ••''
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
,„ ' .'„,.' , M,I ;;;; .,,'. I",;ln1
i ''• "
; .••••,' - ;.>, ^>,, i',;:|, ' :;-'"'; •:,',:
.',::•'*: y:1^,1-^ ^'l:*::' '."''?
ADPM(1,2) through ADPM(6,2) - transfer rate between adsorbed anddesorbed states
for qua! with: 1-suspended sand, 2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand,
5-bed silt, 6-bed clay.
480
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section 6QUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 15 Table-type- GQ-ADTHETA- Adsorption/desorption temperature
correction parameters
****************************************^
i&s2di2J5£^^
Layout
GQ-ADTHETA
<-range><-- thet-adsdes
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END GQ-ADTHETA' *.•-••••
*******
Example
*******
GQ-ADTHETA
RCHRES ADPM1
# - #
1 7 1.07
END GQ-ADTHETA
*******************************************^
ADPM2
1 .07
ADPM3
1.07
ADPM4
1.04
ADPM5
1.04
ADPM6***
***
1.04
Detail
Symbol
s
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max Units Unit
system
ADPM(1,3)
ADPM(2,3)
ADPM(3,3)
ADPM(4,3)
ADPM(5,3)
ADPM(6,3)
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
1.07
1.07
1.07
1.07
1.07
1.07
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
none
none
none
none
none
none
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
thr°Uh ADPM(6>3) - temperature
correction coefficients for
ef
481
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.16 Table-type GQ-SEDCONC -- Initial concentrations on sediment
***********************************************************
1 2 ' '' ' 3 ' 4 '' '"""5 ""'" ' """e" '"""" 7 ' 8 "
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** -, • ' " i n; '; ; ,' _ :
GQ-SEDCONC
<-range>< sedconc --->
(repeats'until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-SEDCONC
******* ,, "; ; ; /; ,'",,.", " .."; . \
Example
*******
GQ-SEDCONC
RCHRES SQAL1 SQAL2 SQAL3 SQAL4 SQAL5 SQAL6***
# - # ***
1 7 1.3 8.4 8.9 1.9 8.4 9.2
END GQ-SEDCONC
****************************************
i. ' li " ',i..,, . , " -i
Details ' :" ' " ' ' ' '__
•••.••MM.*-™™.-*™ — "»•• — »»*• — — ~" — — — **~~~ — ""•"~~*-"""*""""""""~~""~~~"""'*~~~'""'"*™™""~~~*""""~™""'*"~~ — "*™*™™""™~~""""~
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
— — —— B,,,^^ ••••»»»«B™W™«»»»— — »«•••— *••"'••"•• ™"™ — ••"•"" ~'"~'" "" "" ~ ""' "*"""* "——'"— — •••• — — „'__•.•««•... — -«•••- — — —«• — — —•- — —•"•"— —
SQAL(l-6) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none concu/mgBoth
«*i»»»^aB^»«^««"»««»^""""^^^">^^^"*"~^^*""'^^^"*""~~""""""~""""""~*~""~~'P"**""~~' *"""""""" ~~"*""""~"*""™"^""**™"~^"*~~~"*"~
i . ,.,«.,, , , . . "
• • • " :"'." " . •• V ! , • • ..:-••.
Explanation
SQAL(l) through SQAL(6) - initial concentration of qua! on: 1-suspended sand,
2-suspended silt, 3-suspended clay, 4-bed sand, 5-bed silt, 6-bed clay.
••v1- '.,
482
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.17 Table-type GQ-VALUES -- Initial values for inputs which are
constant
3 4 5 678
H!!5H!901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************************************^^
Layout
******
GQ-VALUES
<-rangex--twat--><-phval--><---roc--><---cld--><--sdcnc-x--phy--->
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END GQ-VALUES
*******
Example
*******
GQ-VALUES
RCHRES
# - #
1 7
END GQ-VALUES
TWAT
22.
PHVAL
7.
ROC
.07
CLD
1.
SDCNC
11.
PHY***
***
.007
*********************************************************^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
TWAT
PHVAL
ROC
CLD
SDCNC
PHY
Format
•F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
60.0
15.5
7.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
32.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
212.0
100.0
14.0
none
10.0
none
none
Units
deg F
deg C
none
mol e/1
tenths
mg/1
mg/1
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Both
Both
Both -
Both
483
-------
RdttRES -- Section GQUAL Input
Explanation
In Table-type GQ-GENDATA (4.4(3).7.1) values for datasource flags are specified.
If any of the flags are assigned a value of 2, a single constant value for that
data type must be provided in this table. For example, if ROXFG=2 a value for free
radical oxygen concentration (ROC) must be supplied in columns 31-40 of this table.
TWAT - water temperature
PHVAL - pH
ROC - free radical oxygen concentration
CLD - cloud cover
SDCNC - total suspended sediment concentration
PHY - phytoplankton concentration (as biomass)
484
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 18 Table-type MON-WATEMP -- Monthly values of water temperature
*************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a
1H45678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***************************************************^
Layout
******
MON-WATEMP
<-range><
12-values
(repeats until all operations of this type are'covered)
END MON-WATEMP
*******
Example
*******
MON-WATEMP
RCHRES Tl
# - #
E»
T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 Til T12***
*******************************
Details
Symbol
<12-values>
Fortran
name(s)
TEMPM(1-12)
Format Def
F5.0 60.0
15.5
Min
32.0
0.0
Max
212.0
100.0
Units
degF
degC
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Explanation
5? Si?r^Pe GQ-.GEN^TA (4.4(3). 7.1) values for data source flags are specified.
oe Iuppl?edSinaStSh?snetabaieV. US °f 3' ^ ^^ ValU6S f°r water temperature must
lnflf month1^ values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
iate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
485
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
1 \ , • ,'• ' '.." /:- •:>... gifi.',*.•••: .'•• , , :• , 'I
4.4(3).7.19 Table-type MON-PHVAL -- Monthly values of pH
**********************************************************^
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-PHVAL
<-range>< 12-values -->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
; ! ' ' '.. ' : '"','• ; 'liJUB-i"1''!,!-1"1 ,;» , •• '^.; •,;<'.''jiii ''".I,1 'i "jl'f'i "I" I1!1!-: 4 Ml / .1 "["ll1
END MON-PHVAL
•, nil ' I' i, I,, '''," In" i'1''Mi,
*******
Example
*******
MON-PHVAL
RCHRES PHI PH2 PH3 PH4 PH5 PH6 PH7 PH8 PH9 PH10 PH11 PH12***
V - 1 ' ' ' "' "••" ' ***
1 7 6.8 6.8 6.4 6.1 5.9 5.6 5.6 5.9 6.1 6.4 6.8 6.8
END MON-PHVAL
********************************************************************************
Details
w •• «• •• —••••••••••••.••^••••••• — •• — — »•••••—•• — — — «— ••-•••™ — — ™ — — — — ™™~~™~ "•*"••" ™ — •"•"•*~™™~™™ — ™™~™ — — "*"*"* ™~"
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
____________________ __!_ ___j ' L_J"±"i i'-.l-li-r1 :i _i _ ^ ^ _"i - J
<12-values> PHVALM(1-12) F5.0 7.0 1.014.0 noneBoth
Explanation
In Table-type GQ-GENDATA (4.4(3).7.1) values for data source flags are specified.
If PHFLAG is assigned a value of 3, 12 monthly values for pH must be supplied in
this table.
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
486
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 20 Table-type- MON-ROXYGEN -- Monthly values of free radical oxygen
******************************************^^
!222S™dl^^
Layout
******
MON-ROXYGEN
<-range>< -------- ..... ... ....... 12-values— - ...... ________________ >
(repeats until ail operations of'th'is type 'are 'covered) ......
END MON-ROXYGEN ............... ' ..........
*******
Example
*******
MON-ROXYGEN
RCHRES 0X1 0X2 0X3 0X4 0X5 0X6 0X7 0X8 0X9 0X10 0X11 0X12***
* ***
E» '09 '10 '" -12 -12 -12 -« -12 ••" -09 •
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max Units Unit
system
'!2:!!l-!!'....ROCM(1-12) """""o""0-0 o;o"""none""""moWr"Boih""
Explanation
GQ:GEN"ATA (4-4(3).7.1) values for data source flags are specified
487
-------
(Ill PI1 ill
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 21 Table-type GQ-ALPHA -- Values of base absorbance coefficient
• • ' ' ' ' '
,
VI ..... SIT,;,:1" 1 11,1' ..... '1
******************************************************^
1234567 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
i ..... • i illn i i T< ,,i '<
<-range><
<-range><
-first-7--
-second-7-
-- last-4 >
,,, i " , ' ••"•'•"'••• • • » • • • ' * * <* '* • " * ' *
(repeats until'all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-ALPHA
*******
Example
*******
GQ-ALPHA
RCHRES***
| _ #*** Kl K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7
# - I*** K8 K9 K10 Kll K12 K13 K14
# - #*** K15 K16 K17 K18
1 7 .008 .009 .010 .011 .011 .011 .012
1 7 .013 .015 .016 .017 .018 .019 .020
1 7 .021 .022 .024 .024
END GQ-ALPHA
*****************************************************************************
I, ilHlil"!1* I" li *!i".
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ALPH(l-7)
ALPH(8-14)
ALPH(15-18)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
"Def
none
none
none
, , i M , Nlli
Min
Idobdi
.00001
.00001
, ,„ ,,
Max
none
none
none
Units
/cm
/cm
/cm
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
488
-------
1
Explanation
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
wavelengths of
When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:
1.
No blank or "comment" lines may be put between any of the lines for a
continued entry. Put all comments ahead of the entry. (See above example)
each line onto
489
-------
RCHRES"-- Section GQUAL Input
•' . . \ • • . «> i|i| i i i in "i, , ; •;:>: :>v'vi[,:;::*
4.4(3).7.22 Table-type GQ-GAMMA -- Values of sediment absorbance coefficient
... ' ! " ! I I II I I . '" i'l" :',' "sillr ':.: "I"1"!,,;!'11:1'
*********************************************************^^
1 „ ' :" L" -. ; /i : ' ' c K 7 8
Layout
******
GQ-GAMMA
<-range><
<-range><
<-range><
(repeats until
END GQ-GAMMA
*******
Exampl e
*******
GQ-GAMMA
RCHRES***
a _ $***
| _ |***
g _ #***
1 4
1 4
1 4
all
Kl
K8
K15
.001
.001
.002
1 act H
operations
K2
K9
K16
.001
.002
.002
•F-i vct-7
• -- — -Tirol//
• sGcunu-
of this type
K3
K10
K17
.001
.002
.002
. — --
>
are covered)
r" ' ' , , •' ,• ', ' " ' , '': '' i "i" ,
K4 K5 K6
Kll K12 K13
K18
.001 .001 .001
.002 .002 .002
.002
>
>
ii
K7
K14
.001
.002
***SL****5S*5*****************************************
Details
Svmbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
y name(s) !^_.____
""""GAMM(l-7) F10.0 6.0 0.0 none 1/mg.cm Both
GAMM(8-14) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none 1/mg.cm Both
GAMM(15-18) F10.0 0.0 0.0 none T/mg.cm Both
Explanation
GAMM(l) through GAMM(18) are increments to the base absorbance coefficient
(Table-type GQ-ALPHA) for light passing through sediment-laden water.
This is table necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)=1 in table-type GQ-QALFG.
See rules for continuing an entry onto more than 1 line in Explanation for
Table-type GQ-ALPHA.
490
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 23 Table-type GQ-DELTA -- Values of phytoplankton absorbance
coefficient
*******************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 678
1H!56789012345678901234567890123456789°1234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************************4*1^
Layout
******
GQ-DELTA
<-range><
<-range><
<-range><
....... — first-7 ..... -
- ........ second-7-
last-4 ------ ....... ----- >
"********"**•••*«>•••*••,»,.
(repeats until all operations of this type are'coveredj
END GQ-DELTA
*******
Exampl e
*******
GQ-DELTA
RCHRES***
# - #***
K1
K2
K3
K4
K6
1 ^
END GQ-DELTA
**************,
Details
Symbol
:ooo7 !o
*************
Fortran
DEL(l-7)
DEL(8-14)
DEL(15-18)
007 .0007
****************
Format Def
F10.0 0.0
F10.0 0.0
F10.0 0.0
.0007
Jf*Jt"Jt"4*-*"*"t*'t-«t-
^^^fffffCTflKfC
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
.0007
.0007
Max
none
none
none
.0007
.0007
***************
Units Unit
system
1/mg.cm Both
1/mg.cm Both
1/mg.cm Both
0007
0007
****
tvrnp ?n!:(T1?)h+are in?remfunts tp the base absorption. coefficient (Table-
type GQ-ALPHA) for light passing through plankton-laden water.
any
ExPlanat1o»
491
-------
RCHRES — Section GQUAL Input
r; ""':':v: : : "!'
4.4(3).7.24 Table-type GQ-CLDFACT -- Light extinction efficiency of cloud cover
**********************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************************************************
"Layout • '' ' ' '
******
GQ-CLDFACT
<-range><
<-range><
-rangex iast-f —
(repeats until all operations of
END GQ-CLDFACT
*******
Exampl e
*******
GQ-CLDFACT
RCHRES***
f _ #*** Fl F2
| - i*** F8 F9
# _ #*** F15 F16
1 4 .10 .10
1 4 .17 .17
1 4 .21 .21
END GQ-CLDFACT
**********************************
Details
4? • .--.J- "7
•*
— TI rs t-/
— seconu-/ — ^
s
this type
F3
F10
F17
.10
.17
.21
•4-«i"4--J--4--*-'i-*i"4"i:
TKTtCTCTsftfdClKTK^
Symbol Fortran Format Def
name(s)
KCLD(l-7) F10.
KCLD(8-14) F10.
KCLD(15-18) F10.
0 0.0
0 0.0
0 0.0
are covered)
F4 F5
Fll F12
F18
.15 .15
.17 .18
.21
*****************
Min Max
0.0 1.0
0.0 1.0
0.0 1.0
F6 F7
F13 F14
.15 .15
.19 .20
*******************
Units Unit
system
none Both
none Both
none Both
Explanation
i'
KCLD(l) through KCLD(18) are values of light extinction efficiency of cloud cover
for each of 18 wavelengths.
• - :: ,. ••• i, •• •• -t • .1 "l--, i '.''•?'•;.»£'•:'''*.'•, JSS',".'?••«;•'•|'-:f'.'.';';: jb&'.('|iii:>'i *).:•'.•»;'''V1'!^ "':;|
This table is necessary only when a qual undergoes photolysis; i.e., when any
QALFG(3)-1 in Table-type GQ-QALFG.
See rules for continuing an entry onto more than 1 line in Explanation
Table-type GQ-ALPHA.
• '-.492. ' :'"'" '::'.".'"': " "". ':':."'
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4. 4(3). 7. 25 Table-type MON-CLOUD -- Monthly values of cloud cover
***************************************************^^
1 234 5 6 7 ft
i?*!5S78901234567890123456789012345578901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************^
Layout
MON-CLOUD
<-range>< ............... - ..... -12-values --------------------------- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-CLOUD ................
*******
Example
*******
MON-CLOUD
RCHRES Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CIO Cll C12***
# - # ***
17334321110112
END MON-CLOUD
*********************************************^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
n™e(s}system
CLDM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 10.0 tenths Both
Explanation
CLDM(l) through CLDM(12) are monthly values of average cloud cover. This table
must be included in the UCI only if CLDFG=3 in Table-type GQ-GENDATA (4.4(3).7.1)!
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
493
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.26 Table-type MON-SEDCONC -- Monthly values of sediment concentration
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
MON-SEDCONC
<-range>< ---12-values ->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-SEDCONC
*******
Example
*******
MON-SEDCONC
RCHRES SCI SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6 SC7 SC8 SC9 SC10 SC11 SC12***
U H ***
1 7 2. 4. 10. 120. 75. 10. 8. 8. 6. 6. 4. 4.
END MON-SEDCONC
********************************************************************************
Details
»««.__««•»«_ — «» ••• — — — • • — — • _,•..»» — ~ — » — ^ — — — — •- — —<•-•••'•'— — — — •••-•• — — — "••'•~~~™*"'''i"~~
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
<12-values> SDCNCM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/1 Both
Explanation
SDCNCM(l) through SDCNCM(12) are monthly average suspended sediment concentration
values. This table must be included in the UCI only if SDFG=3 in Table-type
GQ-GENDATA (4.4(3).7.1).
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
494
-------
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
4.4(3).7.27 Table-type MON-PHYTO -- Monthly values of phytoplankton
concentration
*****************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1H!!H5?01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************A^^^^^^^^^^4^4^^A^^^^i^^A^»;°^^^3o/o»w
Layout
******
MON-PHYTO
<-range>< 12-values >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MON-PHYTO
*******
Example
*******
MON-PHYTO
RCHRES PI P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 Pll P12***
# - #
*************************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units"""unit
name(s) system
""""""•""•""••• — •••• — •••» — — •- — — — — — — — — — — •« — — .. — — .._....____..___.„__„
<12-values> PHYM(1-12) F5.0 0.0 ~0~0 n^ne"~~mg/l~~"Both
Explanation
PHYM(l) through PHYM(12) are monthly values of phytoplankton concentration. This
(I i?^mUT ?ix included in the UCI only if PHYTFG=3 in Table-type GQ-GENDATA
. 7.1).
Note: The input monthly values apply to the first day of the month, and values for
intermediate days are obtained by interpolating between sucessive monthly values.
495
-------
4. 4 (3). 7. 28
Table- type GQ-DAUGHTER -
"daughter" compounds
RCHRES -- Section GQUAL Input
••'l.VJ.v /'i:!-. '•'••F.;!:.'. .C:: !>, . :" " I
- Relationship between "parent" and
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GQ-DAUGHTER
<-rangeX--zero--x2-from-lx3-from-l>
<-rangex--zero--x--zero--x3-from-2>
<-rangex--zero--x--zero--x--zero-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GQ-DAUGHTER
*******
Exampl e
*******
GQ-DAUGHTER
RCHRES
# - 1
1 - #
# - #
1 7
1 7
1 7
ZERO
ZERO
ZERO
0.0
0.0
0.0
2F1 3F
ZERO 3F
ZERO ZER
.36 .0
0.0 1.2
0.0 0.
***
END GQ-DAUGHTER
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
<2-from-l>
<3-from-l>
<3-from-2>
Fortran
name(s)
0.0
C(2,l)
C(3,l)
C(3,2)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
Units
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
This table-type specifies the relationship between parent and daughter compounds.
For example, variable C(2,l) indicates the amount of qua! #2 which is produced by
decay of qua! #1 through one of the decay processes. The table must be repeated
in sequence for each decay process that produces "daughter" quals from decay of
"parent" quals. The proper sequence is: 1-hydrolysis, 2-oxidation by free radical
oxygen, 3-photolysis, 4-(reserved for future use), 5-biodeg- radation, 6-general
first order decay.
496
-------
RCHRES -- Section RQUAL Input
4.4(3).8 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Input for RQUAL sections
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** ,
[Table-type BENTH-FLAG]
[Table-type SCOUR-PARMS]
Section OXRX input
[Section NUTRX input] if NUTRX is active
[Section PLANK input] if PLANK is active
[Section PHCARB input] if PHCARB is active
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.
497
-------
RCBBES -- Section RQUAL Input
4.4(3).8.01 Table-type BENTH-FLAG -- Benthic release flag
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
BENTH-FLAG
<-rangexben>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END BENTH-FLAG
*******
Example
*******
BENTH-FLAG
RCHRES BENF***
g _ $ ***
17 ' " '' " : ' '" ' :"
END BENTH-FLAG
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BENRFG
Format
15
Def
0
Min
0
Max
1
Units Unit
system
none Both
Explanation
If BENRFG is 1, benthal influences are considered.
498
III' ! k!1 Hi.
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section RQUAL Input
4.4(3).8.02 Table-type SCOUR-PARMS -- Benthal scour parameters
********************************************************************************
1 2 34 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************************************^
Layout
SCOUR-PARMS
<-range>< scour-parms--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SCOUR-PARMS
*******
Example
*******
SCOUR-PARMS
RCHRES SCRVEL
# - # ft/sec
1 7 15.
END SCOUR-PARMS
SCRMUL***
***
3.
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SCRVEL
SCRMUL
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
10.
3.05
2.0
Min
.01
.01
1.0
Max
none
none
none
Units
ft/sec
m/sec
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
Both
Explanation
SCRVEL - The velocity above which effects of scouring on benthal
release rates is considered.
SCRMUL - Multiplier to increase benthal releases during scouring.
499
-------
. ..... Si . LiV'S l'',i ....... I
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1 RCHRES-BLOCK --Section OXRX input
_i?^********l*l*****l*********l'"ii
1 '" 2 '3 '"4 ' " 5 6 7" "' "8""
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
+[Table-type OX-FLAGS]
Table-type OX-GENPARM
-KTable-type ELEV]
[Table-type OX-BENPARM]
•l-[Table-type OX-CFOREA]
if section HTRCH is not active
if BENRFG=1 (Table-type BENTH-FLAG)
if LKFG=1 (Table-type GEN-INFO)
•{-[Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU]
+ Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH if section HYDR inactive
Jf
REAMFG=1
(Tsivoglou)
+[Table-type OX-TCGINV]
+ Table-type OX-REAPARM
[Table-type OX-INIT]
if REAMFG=2 (Owen/Churchill,etc.)
if REAMFG=3
if
LKFG=0
Note:
If any of the tables marked "+" above was supplied in your input for
Section GQUAL, it must not be repeated here (These are the tables used
to calculate the oxygen reaeration coefficient which, under certain
conditions, is also needed in Section GQUAL).
Explanation
The conditions under which data from the various tables are needed are indicated
above. REAMFG is the reaeration method flag, defined in Section 4.4(3).8.1.1
below.
The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.
500
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.1 Table-type OX-FLAGS -- Oxygen flags
*******************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**********************************^^
Layout
OX- FLAGS
<-rangexoxf>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX- FLAGS*
*******
Example
*******
OX- FLAGS
RCHRES REAM ***
#-#***
172
END OX-FLAGS
****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
REAMFG
Format
15
Def
2
Min
1
Max
3
Units Unit
system
none Both
Explanation
REAMFG indicates the method used to calculate reaeration coefficient for free-
flowing streams.
1 Means Tsivoglou method is used
2 Means Owens, Churchill, or O'Connor-Dobbins method is used dependinq on
velocity and depth of water
3 Means coefficient is calculated as a power function of velocity and/or
depth; user inputs exponents for velocity and depth and an empirical
constant (REAK)
501
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.2 Table-type OX-GENPARM -- General oxygen parms
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234!567890123456789Q1234567890
*******
Layout
******
OX-GENPARM
<-range>< ox-genparm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-GENPARM ' .
*******
Example
*******
OX-GENPARM
RCHRES KBOD20 TCBOD KODSET
f - I /hr ft/hr
1 7 0.1 1.06 8.0
END OX-GENPARM
SUPSAT***
***
1.2
! ',' -.if'i >'-, ' "'•• • is j.. ',•<",.'; • '"'"h/i '. '('!•'• :|i; '' . • ... • ;r! . Si'TJ1'
*******************************************************)*******
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
KBOD20
TCBOD
KODSET
SUPSAT
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
none
1.075
0.0
0.0
1.15
Min Max
l.OE-30 none
1.0 2.0
0.0 none
0.0 none
1.0 2.0.
Units
/hr
none
ft/hr
m/hr
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
Both
Explanation
: - . t:,; , •i''.""^'..i',;': [l ;;l•.';.:..,-i, >•"•• "<
KBOD20 - Unit BOD decay rate 6 20 degrees C
TCBOD - Temperature correction coefficient for BOD decay
KODSET - Rate of BOD settling
SUPSAT - Allowable dissolved oxygen supersaturation (expressed asa multiple
of DO saturation concentration)
502
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.3 Table-type ELEV -- RCHRES elevation above sea level
*********************************************************^^
iH!^5?°I??^67890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
****** ,
ELEV
<-rangex--elev-->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ELEV'
*******
Example
*******
ELEV
RCHRES
# - #
1 7
END ELEV
ELEV***
•f-^
2100.
************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ELEV
Format
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
Max
30000
10000
Units
ft
m
Unit
system
Engl
Metric
503
-------
;S -- Section OXRk Input
4.4(3).8.1.4 Table-type OX-BENPARM -- Oxygen benthic parameters
A***************************************'*********"*'****'*'*^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
OX-BENPARM
<-range><-
ox-benparm
(repeats until ail operations of this type are covered)
END OX-BENPARM"
Example
*******
OX-BENPARM
RCHRES BENOD TCBEN EXPOD BRBOD(l) BRBOD(2) EXPREL ***
I - # mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr ***
1 7 1.0
END OX-BENPARM
********************************************************************************
Details
, UK ; m
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BENOD
TCBEN
EXPOD
BRBOD(l)
BRBOD(2)
EXPREL
Format
F10
F10
F10
F10
F10
F10
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
Def
0.0
1.074
1.22
72.
100.
2.82
Min
0
1
0
•
*
i'
.0
.0
.1
0001
0001
0.1
Max
none
2.0
none
none
none
none
Units
mg/m2
none
none
mg/m2
mg/m2
none
.hr
.hr
.hr
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
I 111
Explanation
BENOD - Benthal oxygen demand at 20 degrees C (with unlimited DO concentration)
(demand is, thus, proportional to the water temperature)
TCBEN - Temperature correction coefficient for benthal oxygen demand
EXPOD - Exponential factor in the dissolved oxygen term of the benthal oxygen
demand equation.
BRBOD(l) - Benthal release of BOD at high oxygen concentration.
BRBOD(2) - Increment to benthal release of BOD under anaerobic conditions
EXPREL - Exponential factor in the dissolved oxygen term of the benthal BOD
release equation.4.4(3).8.1.4
504
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.5 Table-type OX-CFOREA -- Lake reaeration correction coefficient
****************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************^^
Layout
******
OX-CFOREA
<-rangex-cforea->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-CFOREA
*******
Example
*******
OX-CFOREA
RCHRES CFOREA***
# - # ***
1 7 0.8
END OX-CFOREA
*************************************************************^
Details
™"*™™™~™""™*~~"**p~~"*~~~»*--— —•" — — •--" — — — — __-»•__ _ _ — «. _ _ .. — «•.._ _ _ _ — «,«™ v _
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
CFOREA F10.0 1.0 .001 10.
Explanation
CFOREA is a correction factor in the lake reaeration equation, to account for good
or poor circulation characteristics.
505
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.6 Table-type OX-TSIVOGLOU -- Farms for Tsivoglou calculation
1 2 345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567§96i2345678901234567890i234567890
*******
Layout
******
OX-TSIVOGLOU
<-range><—ox-tsivoglou—>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
i • i', '!' > 'I . "ii'Jli' " „ , '
END OX-TSIVOGLOU' * ' ' ' '
*******
Example
*******
OX-TSIVOGLOU
RCHRES REAKT
f - # /ft
1 7 .07
END OX-TSIVOGLOU
TCGINV***
***
1.1
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
REAKT
TCGINV
Format
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.08
1.047
Min
0.001
1.0
Max
1.0
2.0
Units
/ft
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Explanation
REAKT is the empirical constant in Tsivoglou's equation for reaeration (escape
coefficient).
i • ' ; ' ' ,",',:'' '" , I11' ,;;„! ;, ,'!!",', " •'' !• ,'' ''i" ;r", •' ' :',, ',•; '
TCGINV is the temperature correction coefficient for surface gas invasion.
506
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.7 Table-type OX-LEN-DELTH -- Length of reach and fall
**************************^^
12 3.4 5 67 s
IHS78901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
************************************************************** J^
Layout
******
OX-LEN-DELTH
<-rangex---ox-l en-del th--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-LEN-DELTH
*******
Example
*******
OX-LEN-DELTH
RCHRES LEN DELTH***
# - # miles ft***
1 7 10. 200.
END OX-LEN-DELTH
*************************************************************************^^^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit"""""
name(s) system
LEN
DELTH
F10
F10
.0
.0
none
none
none
none
.01
.01
0.00001
0.00001
none
none
none
none
miles
km
ft
m
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
LEN is the length of the RCHRES and DELTH is the (energy) drop over its length.
507
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.8 Table-type OX-TCGINV -- Owen/Churchin/0''Connor-Dobbins data
(temperature correction coefficient)
1 2 3 4 5 67 8
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234r)67890123456789dl234567890
Layout
******
OX-TCGINV
<-rangex-tcginv->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-TCGINV
*******
Example
*******
OX-TCGINV
RCHRES TCGINV***
# - # ***
1 7 1.07
END OX-TCGINV
t******
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
TCGINV F10.0 1.047 1.0 2.0
Explanation
TCGINV is the temperature correction coefficient for surface gas invasion.
f •" : ' .1: -
508
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4. 4(3). 8. 1.9 Table-type OX-REAPARM -- Farms for user-supplied reaeration
f ormul a
*******************************************************^^
1 2 345 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********************************^^
Layout
OX-REAPARM
<-range><- .......... --ox-reaparm ----- ...... ---- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-REAPARM ................
*******
Exampl e
*******
OX-REAPARM
RCHRES TC6INV REAK EXPRED
# - # /hr
1 7 1.08 1.0 -2.0
END OX-REAPARM
EXPREV***
***
0.7
**********************************************^^
**********
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
TCGINV
REAK
EXPRED
EXPREV
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
1.047
none
0.0
0.0
Min Max
1.0 2.0
l.OE-30 none
none 0.0
0.0 none
Units
none
/hr
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
TCGINV - See section 4.4(3).8.1.6
REAK - Empirical constant for equation used to calculate reaeration
coefficient
rinSED " ExPonent to dePtn used in calculation of reaeration coefficient
EXPREV - Exponent to velocity used in calculation of reaeration coefficient
509
-------
RCHRES -- Section OXRX Input
4.4(3).8.1.10 Table-type OX-INIT -- Initial concentrations
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 ' 4 ' '' "5 " '"""" "" 6 " ' '"" 7 '":"" 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
OX-INIT
<-range>< --ox-init >
,,„, , I ' • »r ' 'li,,',,,r . • i' ' , : . .1 , . • , " „ n, I1
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END OX-INIT
11 i ' , , •' , ''.'i, 'iCi!,1 '"lUS1,,, : ': . i :
*******
Example
*******
OX-INIT
RCHRES DOX BOD
# - # mg/1 mg/1
17 26. 17.2
END OX-INIT
SATDO***
mg/1***
43.
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
DOX
BOD
SATDO
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
10.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.1
Max
20.0
none
20.0
Units
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
DOX - Dissolved oxygen
BOD - Biochemical oxygen demand
SATDO - Dissolved oxygen saturation concentration
510
-------
4.4(3).8.2 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section NUTRX input
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
*********************************A*A^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^A^^^^^^^4^^^AA^A^A^A^^^^^^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**********************************************^
Layout
[Table-type NUT-FLAGS]
[Table-type CONV-VAL1]
1™^^™^ " BENRFG-' 1B TaHe-tyPe BEN™-FLAG
[Table-type NUT-NH3VOLAT] if NH3 volatilization is simulated
(TAMFG=1 and AMVFG=1 in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
[Table-type MON-PHVAL] if NH3 is simulated and monthly values of PH are beinq
input (TAMFG=1 and PHFLAG=3 in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
see section GQUAL for documentation
[Table-type NUT-BEDCONC]
[Table-type NUT-ADSPARM]
[Table-type NUT-ADSINIT]
if NH3 or P04 adsorption is simulated
--- ((TAMFG=1 and ADNHFG=1) or
(P04FG=1 and ADPOFG=1) in Table-type NUT-FLAGS)
[Table-type NUT-DINIT]
*********************************^^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
BENRFG indicates whether or not benthal influences are considered. NH3FG indicates
whether or not ammonia is simulated.
511
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4. 4(3). 8. 2.1 Table-type NUT-FLAGS -- Nutrient flags
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
!! iiii, I'T ,,l, ft";1'
NUT-FLAGS
<-range>< —nut-flags --->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
'. .. ;.' . . . . . . . . '•'.''•i1' • ' 1 1! '"" '• !'
END NUT-FLAGS
*******
Example
******* ^ ,
• : , ' ,i la'/. ,'
NUT-FLAGS
RCHRES TAM N02 P04 AMV DEN ADNH ADPO PHFL ***
U Jt ***
W " n
171 1
END NUT-FLAGS
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def Min Max
TAMFG,N02FG, 715
P04FG,AMVFG,
DENFG,ADNHFG,
ADPOFG
PHFLG 15
Explanation
TAMFG
N02FG
P04FG
AMVFG
DENFG
ADNHFG - If on
If on, total ammonia is simulated
If on, nitrite is simulated
If on, ortho-phosphorus is simulated
If on, ammonia vaporization is enabled
If on, denitrification is enabled
NH4 adsorption is simulated.
ADPOFG - If on, P04 adsorption is simulated.
PHFLAG - Source of pH data (l=time series, 2=constant, 3=monthly values)
512
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.2 Table-type CONV-VAL1 -- Conversion factors
************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I2345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*************************************^
Layout
******
CONV-VAL1
<-range>< conv-vall- >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END CONV-VAL1 *•••••••• ........
*******
Example
*******
CONV-VAL1
RCHRES CVBO CVBPC CVBPN BPCNTC***
# - # mg/mg mols/mol mols/mol ***
1 7 4.0 67. 33. 77.
END CONV-VAL1
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units~"~Unit
name(s) system
CVBO
CVBPC
CVBPN
BPCNTC
F10
F10
F10
F10
.0
.0
.0
.0
1.98
106.
16.
49.
1.0
50.
10.
10.
5.0
200.
50.
100.
mg/mg
mols/mol
mol s/mol
none
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
CVBO - Conversion from milligrams biomass to milligrams oxygen
rwnoM " Conversion £rom biomass expressed as phosphorus to carbon equivalency
noSSr" C°nvers?on from biomass expressed as ph.osphorus to nitrogen equivalency
BPCNTC - Percentage, by weight, of biomass which is carbon
513
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.3 Table-type NUT-BENPARM -- Nutrient benthic parms
**********************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
NUT-BENPARM
<-range><—
•nut-benparm-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-BENPARM
*******
Example
*******
NUT-BENPARM
RCHRES BRTAM(l) BRTAM(2) BRP04(1) BRP04(2)
# - # mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr
1 7 10. 20. 1.0 4.0
END NUT-BENPARM
ANAER***
mg/1***
.001
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
BRTAM(l)
BRTAM(2)
BRP04(1)
BRP04(2)
ANAER
Format Def
5F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.005
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
.0001
Max
none
none
none
none
1.0
Units
mg/m2.
mg/m2 .
mg/m2 .
mg/m2 .
mg/1
Unit
system
hr Both
hr Both
hr Both
hr Both
Both
Explanation
BRTAM - Benthal release of total ammonia. (1) indicates aerobic rate and
(2) indicates anaerobic rate.
BRP04 - Benthal release of ortho-phosphate. Subscripts same as BRTAM.
ANAER - Concentration of dissolved oxygen below which anaerobic conditions exist
514
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
•4. 4(3). 8. 2. 4 Table-type NUT-NITDENIT -- Nitrification and denitrification
parameters.
*******************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H*!!S!?901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^
Layout
NUT-NITDENIT
<-range>< -------- nut-nitdenit
...... ... ....................
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-NITDENiT ..... ' .................. ' '
Exampl e
*******
NUT-NITDENIT
RCHRES KTAM20 KN0220 TCNIT KN0320 TCDEN DENOXT ***
f - * /hi" /hr /hr mg/l ***
EM NUT^NITDENli05 '05 ''' '°5 '•«'
********************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
KTAM20
KN0220
TCNIT
KN0320
TCDEN
DENOXT
Format Def
6F10.0 none
none
1.07
none
1.07
2.00
Min
0.001
0.001
1.0
0.001
1.0
0.0
Max
none
none
2.0
none
2.0
none
Units
/hr
/hr
/hr
mg/l
Explanation
KTAM20 and KN0220 are the nitrification rates of ammonia and nitrite,
respectively, at 20 degrees C.
KN0320 is the denitrification rate at 20 degrees C.
n Coeff1c1ent$
DENOXT is the dissolved oxygen concentration threshhold for denitrification.
515
-------
••( T";•''".v;,i ';'«tr p!'";"':''"iWi«,» |';'•;'-.i7!"«'.',.»'el1 ;•;" f"t
• • ;!, IIKIH, •. ', , •• ' ,i:t;la i1'1 ••>' '•-:• an • i :.i, :. :,:;'"is
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.5 Table-type NUT-NH3VOLAT -- Ammonia volatilization parameters
*******************************************************************************
1 2 345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
NUT-NH3VOLAT
<-range><—nut-nh3volat--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-NHSVOLAT'
*******
Example
*******
NUT-NH3VOLAT
RCHRES EXPNVG EXPNVL ***
# - f ***
5 6 0.6 0.8
END NUT-NH3VOLAT
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
EXPNVG F10.0 0.5 0.1 2.0
EXPNVL F10.0 .6667 0.1 2.0
Both
Both
Explanation
EXPNVG is the exponent in the gas layer mass transfer coefficient equation for
NH3 volatilization.
EXPNVL is the exponent in the liquid layer mass transfer coefficient equation
for NH3 volatilization.
516
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4. 4(3). 8. 2. 6 Table-type NUT-BEDCONC - Bed concentrations of adsorbed NH3 and
i22SS!222^^
Layout
******
NUT-BEDCONC
<-range>< -nut-bedconc--- __
• • • • •
(repeats until all operations of this type'are'covered)
END NUT-BEDCONC ' ' '
*******
Example
*******
NUT-BEDCONC
5CHRE* MM, Bed concentrations of NH4 & P04 (mg/kg)
# - # NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay P04-sand Pol-silt P04-clav ***
7 a n ni n "° 0.03 0.10 0.20 0.30
***
2 3 0.01
END NUT-BEDCONC
0.02
****************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def
Fortran
name(s)
Min
Max
Units
BNH4(3)
BP04(3)
3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kq
3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
Explanation
anTclay! ^ ^ C0nstant bed concentrations of NH4-N adsorbed to sand, silt,
and4claj! ^ ^ C0nstant bed concentrations of P04-P adsorbed to sand, silt,
517
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.7 Table-type NUT-ADSPARM -- Partition coefficients for NH3 and P04
*******************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***i****************************************************************************
Layout
******
NUT-ADSPARM
<-range><--
—nut-adsparm ;--- ---
(repeats'until'all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-ADSPARM *
***
******* .
Example
*******
NUT-ADSPARM
RCHRES Partition coefficients for NH4 AND P04 (ml/g)
* - # NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay P04-sand P04-s1lt P04-clay ***
2 3 0.10 0.30 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.80
END NUT-ADSPARM
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ADNHPM(3)
ADPOPM(3)
Format
3F10
3F10
.0
.0
Def
1
1
.E-10
.E-10
Min Max
1
1
.E-10 none
.E-10 none
Units
ml/g
ml/g
Explanation
ADNHPM(l-S) are the partition coefficients for NH4-N adsorbed to sand, silt,
and clay.
ADPOPM(l-S) are the partition coefficients for P04-P adsorbed to sand, silt,
and clay.
518
-------
RCHRES -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.8 Table-type NUT-DINIT -- Initial concentrations of dissolved
nutrients
********************************^^
1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345P901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************************************^
Layout
******
NUT-DINIT
<-range><- nut-dinit >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-DINIT
*******
Example
*******
NUT-DINIT
RCHRES N03 TAM N02 P04 PHVAL ***
* - # ma/1 mg/1 mg/1 mg/1 ph units ***
1 3 1.0 0.3 0.01 0.02 7
END NUT-DINIT
*****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
N03
TAM
N02
P04
PHVAL
Format Def
5F10.0 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
7.0.
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
14.0
Units
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
ph units
Explanation
N03, JAM, and N02 are the initial concentrations of nitrate, total ammonia, and
nitrite (as N).
P04 is the initial concentration of ortho-phosphorus (as P).
PHVAL is the constant (annual) or initial value of pH.
519
-------
RC.HRE3 -- Section NUTRX input
4.4(3).8.2.9 Table-type NUT-ADSINIT -- Initial concentrations of NH3 and P04
adsorbed to suspended sediment
***************************************************************
1 •" 2 ' ' 3 4" " ' " '"5' ' ' 6""" ' 7 ' 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** ^ .. :
: •', ' .,' •' • s iiS .. ,'' , ";' ' v,. ..i; "'L '. • • 'v.:
NUT-ADSINIT
<-range>< nut-adsinit >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NUT-ADSINIT
*******
Example
*******
NUT-ADSINIT
RCHRES Initial suspended NH4 and P04 concentrations (mg/kg) ***
# - * NH4-sand NH4-silt NH4-clay P04-sand P04-silt P04-clay ***
2 3 0.10 0.30 0.50 0.10 0.50 0.80
END NUT-ADSINIT
********************************************************************************
Details
•••••••••nn* — ™™*— »••••«• — — •••••• — «- — — — -•••• — — — — — — ••"-••• — ••• — — — "••••• — — — ""•"•'•"•~ — —"— — — ..«.«.'«•» — — — — —. — •-
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units
name(s)
•«•.•. — -••••• — «-•--••• — •-•- — — — •-—•••- — — — — — •• — — — — — •• — — — ~~ — — — — """• — ~~~~ — """""""""""""""""""""""^
SNH4(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
SP04(3) 3F10.0 0.0 0.0 none mg/kg
Explanation
SNH4(l-3) are the initial concentrations of NH4-N adsorbed to sand, silt, and
clay.
i "" • „ ' i" , ip'iil'p I,,11 ' ; '• • ', • "I'1 ' f • ''' "I1 '!.
SP04(l-3) are the initial concentrations of P04-P adsorbed to sand, silt, and
clay.
520
-------
RCHRES - Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section PLANK input
*******************************************
*************************************
1 23 4 5 67 8
H*i5678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******************************************************^^
Layout
******
Table-type
Table-type
Table-type
[Table-type
[Table-type
PLNK-FLAGS
SURF-EXPOSED
PLNK-PARM1
PLNK-PARM2]
PLNK-PARM3]
if section HTRCH inactive
Table-type PHYTO-PARM
Table-type ZOO-PARM1
[Table-type ZOO-PARM2]
if
ZOOF6=1
if
PHYFG=1
[Table-type BENAL-PARM] if BALFG=1
[Table-type PLNK-INIT]
**********************************************************^^
Explanation
°"at °f I*"* ,ofthe tables above i s detailed in the documentation which
PHYFG, ZOOFG and BALFG are flags which indicate whether or not phytoplankton,
SetprPL^FLTGS^below936 *" ^ SimUlat6d' They are docuintad U"d^
521
-------
iVfe if
RCHRES "— Section PLANK Input
4. 4(3). 8. 3.1 Table-type PLNK-FLAGS -- Plankton flags
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
PLNK-FLAGS
<-range>< ............. pink-flags ----- .......... >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PLNK-FLAGS ...............
******* , ..,,,,, . ' . . , , ......... ,
Exampl e
*******
PLNK-FLAGS
RCHRES PHYF ZOOF BALF SDLT AMRF DECF NSFG ZFOO***
_ ***
171
END PLNK-FLAGS
1
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PHYFG,ZOOFG,
BALFG,SDLTFG,
AMRFG.DECFG,
NSFG
ZFOOD
Format
715
15
Def
0
2
Min
0
1
Max
1
3
Explanation
The following," except for ZFOOD, are the conditions when the flag is on:
PHYFG - Phytoplankton is simulated
ZOOFG - Zooplankton are simulated
BALFG - Benthic algae are simulated
SDLTFG - Influence of sediment washload on light extinction is simulated
AMRFG - Ammonia retardation of nitrogen limited growth is enabled
DECFG - Linkage between carbon dioxide and phytoplankton growth is decoupled
NSFG - Ammonia is included as part of available nitrogen supply in nitrogen
limited growth calculations
ZFOOD - The quality of zooplankton food
522
-------
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4. 4(3). 8. 3. 2 Table-type SURF-EXPOSED -- Correction factor for solar radiation
data
1 2 3 4 5 678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********,M:**********************^^
Layout
SURF-EXPOSED
<-rangexsurf-exp>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SURF-EXPOSED'
*******
Example
*******
SURF-EXPOSED
RCHRES CFSAEX***
#.#***
1 7 .5
END SURF-EXPOSED
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max Units Unit
name(s) system
"'*™™*"™"™™">'™~**~~™™'~~""™~~'*™~ — — — — — — — — — — — — -. — — — — «._^ — — __ — _.»•_ _„•. _
CFSAEX F10.0 1.0 0.0 1.0 none"~Both"~
Explanation
Iu1snt?ftor is used to ac|Just tne 1nPut solar radiation to make it applicable to
the RCHRES; for example, to account for shading of the surface by trees or
buildings.
523
-------
RCMES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.3 Table-type PLNK-PARM1 -- General plankton parms, group 1
****
1234567
Layout
******
PLNK-PARM1
<-range><--
-plnk-parml-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PLNK-PARM1
Example
*******
PLNK-PARM1
RCHRES RATCLP
# - #
1 7 .5
END PLNK-PARMl
NONREF
.3
LITSED
ALNPR
.4
EXTB
/ft
0.1
MALGR***
/hr***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
RATCLP
NONREF
LITSED
ALNPR
EXTB
MALGR
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
.6
.5
0.0
1.0
none
none
.3
Min
.01
.01
0.0
.01
.001
.001
.001
i1 nil !i»ii;,"n Ji'1 ' ",",', '" '
Max
nil1,; '',,«, -(:"! '„. '
none
1.0
none
1.0
none
none
none
, .
Units
none
none
1/mg.ft
none
/ft
/m
/hr
• •, i :,
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
Both
Explanation
RATCLP - Ratio of chlorophyll "A" content of biomass to phosphorus content
NONREF - Nonrefractory fraction of algae and zooplankton biomass
LITSED - Multiplication factor to total sediment concentration to determine
sediment contribution to light extinction
ALNPR - Fraction of nitrogen requirements for phytoplankton growth satisfied by
nitrate
EXTB - Base extinction coefficient for light
MALGR - Maximal unit algal growth rate
524
-------
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.4 Table-type PLNK-PARM2 -- General plankton parms, group 2
**************************************^
1 2 34 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
****************************************************^^
Layout
******
PLNK-PARM2
<-range><--
-plnk-parm2-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PLNK-PARM2 .'*-''.- - '
Example
*******
PLNK-PARM2
RCHRES *** CMMLT
# - # ***ly/min
1 7 .01
END PLNK-PARM2
CMMN
mg/1
.05
CMMNP
mg/1
.04
CMMP
mg/1
TALGRH
degF
85.0
TALGRL
degF
44.0
TALGRM
degF
71.0
**************************************************************^^
Details
Symbol Fortran
name(s)
CMMLT
CMMN
CMMNP
CMMP
TALGRH
TALGRL
TALGRM
Explanation
Format Def Min Max
F10.0 .033 l.OE-6 none
F10.0 .045 l.OE-6 none
F10.0 .0284 l.OE-6 none
F10.0 .0150 l.OE-6 none
F10.0 95. 50. 212.
35. 10. 100.
F10.0 43. 32. 212.
6.1 0.0 100.
F10.0 77. 32. 212.
25. 0.0 100.
Units Unit
system
ly/min Both
mg/1 Both
mg/1 Both
mg/1 Both
degF Engl
degC Metric
degF Engl
degC Metric
degF Engl
degC Metric
CMMLT - Michael is-Menten constant for light limited growth
CMMN - Nitrate Michael is-Menten constant for nitrogen limited growth
CMMNP - Nitrate Michael is-Menten constant for phosphorus limited growth
CMMP - Phosphate Michael is-Menten constant for nhosnhnrus limitpH nvnwth
I --_.. —,— .. vvl*vw^*iiw • V I fSIIW«Jf^ll\SI M«J
TALGRH - Temperature above which algal growth ceases
TALGRL - Temperature below which algal growth ceases
TALGRM - Temperature below which algal growth is retarded
525
-------
•laifniK:^"'-;1-'1 l:fI'M;"!;l""T:r•;•;,' f •„••• •:,!,, :v":
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.5 Table-type PLNK-PARM3 -- General plankton parms, group 3
,; i" .,„ | " !r '' , • '!,!l"' !,»• '' "I1,,1' '• Ill Iliii'l I"'I. i",,,!j '.":,' i! .''"I, ,1, '''|! ,,i' 'I ' 1, . * , ' !« ' „ ," Jl!" ",',',. I 111, 4,
12345678
123456789012345678901234567890123456789pl23456789012345678J012345678901234567
*****************************************************53^
.'•; 'I ' ' "i ' ':. ' 't1 •'" ; ;. • • B:!!;.!" •':::•• 81'.*'/1'W':.••':"; : '
Layout
PLNK-PARM3
<-range><--
-plnk-parm3-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PLNK-PARM3 ', ' '
*******
Example
*******
PLNK-PARM3
RCHRES ALR2Q
I - '# /hr
1 7
END PLNK-PARMS
ALDH
/hr
.02
ALD'L
/hr
OXALD
/hr
.04
NALDH
mg/1
PALDH***
mg/1***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
ALR20
ALDH
ALDL
OXALD
NALDH
PALDH
Format
FIO.'O
F10.0
Fl'0.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
.004
.01
.001
.03
0.0
0.0
Mfn
l.OE-6
l.OE-6
l.OE-6
l.OE-6
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
Units
/hr
/hr
/hr
/hr
mg/1
mg/1
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
ALR20 - Algal unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C
ALDH - High algal unit death rate
ALDL - Low algal unit death rate
OXALD - Increment to phytoplankton unit death rate due to anaerobic conditions
NALDH - Inorganic nitrogen concentration below which high algal death rate
occurs (as nitrogen)
PALDH - Inorganic phosphorus concentration below which high algal death rate
occurs (as phosphorus)
526
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.6 Table-type PHYTO-PARM -- Phytoplankton parms
*************************************************^^
1 2 34 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*********************************************************^^
Layout
******
PHYTO-PARM
<-range><--
-phyto-parm-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PHYTO-PARM .' '
Example
*******
PHYTO-PARM
RCHRES SEED
# - # mg/1
1 7 2.0
END PHYTO-PARM
MXSTAY
mg/1
15.
OREF
ft3/s
8.0
CLALDH
ug/1
PHYSET
ft/hr
REFSET***
ft/hr***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
SEED
MXSTAY
OREF
CLALDH
PHYSET
REFSET
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
0.0001
0.0001
50.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
0.0
0.0
0.0001
0.0001
.01
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Max
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
Units
mg/1
mg/1
ft3/s
m3/s
ug/1
ft/hr
m/hr
ft/hr
m/hr
Unit
system
Both
Both
Engl
Metric
Both
Engl
Metric
Engl
Metric
Explanation
SEED
MXSTAY
OREF
CLALDH
PHYSET
REFSET
Minimum concentration of plankton not subject to advection (i e at
high flow).
Concentration of plankton not subject to advection at very low flow
Outflow at which concentration of plankton not subject to advection is
midway between SEED and MXSTAY
Chlorophyll "A" concentration above which high algal death rate occurs
Rate of phytoplankton settling
Rate of settling for dead refractory organics
527
-------
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.7 Table-type ZOO-PARMI -- First group of zboplankton parms
1 2 3 456 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
ZOO-PARM1
<-range><
zoo-parml
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ZOO-PARMi " .............
*******
Exampl e
*******
ZOO-PARMI
RCHRES MZOEAT ZFIL20
# - # rag/1.hr 1/mgzoo.hr
1 7 .098 0.2
END ZOO-PARMI
ZRES20
/hr
ZD
/hr
OXZD***
/hr***
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
MZOEAT
ZFIL20
ZRES20
ZD
OXZD
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
.055
none
.0015
.0001
.03
Min
.001
0.001
l.OE-6
l.OE-6
l.OE-6
Max
none
none
none
none
none
Units
mg phytb/
mg zoo.hr
1/mgzoo.hr
/hr
/hr
/hr
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
MZOEAT - Maximum zooplankton unit ingestion rate
ZFIL20 - Zooplankton filtering rate at 20 degrees C
ZRES20 - Zooplankton unit respiration rate at 20 degrees C
ZD - Natural zooplankton unit death rate
OXZD - Increment to unit zooplankton death rate due to anaerobic conditions
528
-------
1
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.8 Table-type ZOO-PARM2 -- Second group of zooplankton parms
**********************************************************^^
1 234 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
^^A**********************************************************^
Layout
******
ZOO-PARM2
<-range>< zoo-parm2 >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END ZOO-PARM2
*******
Example
*******
ZOO-PARM2
RCHRES TCZFIL TCZRES ZEXDEL ZOMASS***
# - # mg/org***
1 7 1.2 1.1 0.8
END ZOO-PARM2
*****************^*******************************^
Details
Symbol
•
1
Fortran
name(s)
TCZFIL
TCZRES
ZEXDEL
ZOMASS
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
1.17
1.07
0.7
.0003
Min
1.0
1.0
.001
l.OE-6
Max
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
Units
none
none
none
mg/org
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
TCZFIL and TCZRES are the temperature correction coefficients for filtering and
respiration, respectively.
ZEXDEL is the fraction of nonrefractory zooplankton excretion which is
immediately decomposed when ingestion rate > MZOEAT.
ZOMASS is the average weight of a zooplankton organism.
529
-------
RCHRES -- Section PLANK .Input
4.4(3).8.3.9 Table-type BENAL-PARM -- Benthic algae parms
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678961234567896
Layout
******
BENAL-PARM
<-range>< benal -parm >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END BENAL-PARM
*******
[''< V,
Exampl e
*******
BENAL-PARM
RCHRES
1 7
MBAL
mg/m2
520.
CFBALR
.56
CFBALG***
***
.80
END BENAL-PARM
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
MBAL
CFBALR
CFBALG
*,
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
600.
1.0
1.0
Min
.01
.01
.01
Max
none
1.0
1.0
Units
mg/m2
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
MBAL is the maximum benthic algae density (as biomass).
CFBALR and CFBALG are the ratios of benthic algal to phytoplankton respiration and
growth rates, respectively.
530
-------
RCHRES -- Section PLANK Input
4.4(3).8.3.10 Table-type PLNK-INIT -- Initial plankton conditions
1 2 3 4 • 5 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
PLNK-INIT
<-range><-
-plank-init-
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PLNK-INIT
*******
Example
*******
PLNK-INIT
RCHRES PHYTO
# - # mg/1
1 7 .0001
END PLNK-INIT
ZOO BENAL ORN ORP
org/1 mg/m2 mg/1 mg/1
.05 .002 .01 .02
ORC***
mg/1***
.01
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PHYTO
ZOO
BENAL
ORN
ORP
ORC
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
.96E-6
.03
l.OE-8
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min Max
l.OE-10 none
l.OE-6 none
l.OE-10 none
0.0 none
0.0 none
0.0 none
Units
mg/1
org/1
mg/m2
mg/1
mg/1
mg/1
Unit
system
.Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Both
Explanation
PHYTO - Phytoplankton, as biomass
ZOO - Zooplankton
BENAL - Benthic algae, as biomass
ORN - Dead refractory organic nitrogen
ORP - Dead refractory organic phosphorus
ORC - Dead refractory organic carbon
531
-------
RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input
4. 4(3). 8. 4 RCHRES-BLOCK -- Section PHCARB input
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
[Table-type PH-PARM1]
[Table-type PH-PARM2]
[Table-type PH-INIT ]
********************************************************^
Explanation
The exact format of each of the tables above is detailed in the documentation which
follows. Tables in brackets [] need not always be supplied; for example, because
all of the inputs have default values.
i
532
Jiiiiiii'iii'gii'j,1 , , ",:.<-,: ..... •• ..... •..:,[•,
1 ........ i ..... '.!!;:•« i . A ....... :: ., v:i, i
-------
RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input
4,4(3).8.4.1 Table-type PH-PARM1 -- Flags for pH simulation
********************************************************************************
1 234 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
PH-PARM1
<-rangexph-parml>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PH-PARM1*
Example
*******
PH-PARM1
RCHRES PHCN ALKC***
# - # ***
1 7 30 9
END PH-PARM1
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
PHCNT
ALKCON
Format
15
15
Def
25
1
Min
1
1
Max
100
10
Explanation
PHCNT - Maximum number of iterations to pH solution
ALKCON - Number of the conservative substance which is alkalinity
533
-------
RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input
4.4(3).8.4.2 Table-type PH-PARM2 --' Parameters for pH simulation
i, I,1! '. ''if' , ill!
liiijir
1 2 3 ' 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******
Layout
******
PH-PARM2
<-range>< ph-parm2 >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END PH-PARM2* '
*******
Example
*******
PH-PARM2
RCHRES CFCINV BRC02(1) BRC02(2)***
# - I mg/m2.hr mg/m2.hr***
1 7 .901 72.0 65.1
END PH-PARM2
i;'j
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
CFCINV
BRC02(1)
BRC02(2)
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
.913
62.
62.
Min
.001
.01
.01
, . ',«' ;i.':"1
Max
1.0
none
none
',„.„:' i
Units
none
mg/mZ.hr
mg/m2 . hr
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
,. i
ill! rl|i . lull,1,1,!
Explanation
CFCINV - Ratio of carbon dioxide invasion rate to oxygen reaeration rate
BRC02 - Benthal release of C02 (as carbon) for (1) aerobic and (2) anaerobic
conditions
534
-------
RCHRES -- Section PHCARB Input
4.4(3).8.4.3 Table-type PH-INIT -- Initial conditions for pH simulation
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
PH-INIT
(repeats unti
END PH-INIT
*******
Example
*******
PH-INIT
RCHRES
# - #
1 7
END PH-INIT
***************
Details
Symbol
1 all operations of this type are covered)
TIC C02 PH***
mg/1 mg/1 ***
2.0 .03 8.0
*********************************************
Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
TIC F10.0 0.0 0.0 none
C02 F10.0 0.0 0.0 none
PH F10.0 7.0 1.0 15.0
********************
Units Unit
system
mg/1 Both
mg/1 Both
none Both
Explanation
TIC - initial total inorganic carbon
C02 - initial carbon dioxide (as carbon)
PH - initial pH
535
-------
4.4(11) COPY Block
COPY Block
******************************************************^^
Layout
******
COPY
Table-type TIMESERIES
END COPY
Explanation
The COPY module is used to copy one or more time series from one location (source)
to another (target). See Section 4.2(11) in Part E for a detailed description of
its function.
, '] • -P',:1. ":,
536
-.'it ; :-
-------
1
COPY Block
4.4(11).! Table-type TIMESERIES -- Number of time series to be copied
***************************************************^^
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*******************************************************^^^
Layout
TIMESERIES
<-rangexnptxnmn>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END TIMESERIES'
*******
Example
*******
TIMESERIES
Copy-opn ***
# - # NPT NMN***
1 7 4
END TIMESERIES
****************************************************^^
Details
Symbol
Fortran
name(s)
NPT
NMN
Format
15
15
Def
0
0
Min
0
0
Max
20
20
Explanation
NPT is the number of point-valued time series to be copied.
NMN is the number of mean-valued time series to be copied.
537
-------
PLTGEN Block
! ,' ' • 'I ' 'Illln- '" i i. i: ' ' „ I1, I1" , '' 1" ,...,'
4.4(12) PLTGEN Block
> Mn "" „ . , / i ' , ' . ' . , ' ivii ''" "f ' [! ,:-Li Jli'll'! ,,, MS"
I .,• . . ; ,v «', ,fjf / ,-• f , ' :• • ' .;, '. ;, "":, ;;' • u •.„',, ,;;v * MM ; llVicf'i'l
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 56 7 8
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345^
******************************************************************
Layout
****** , . . . , ^i !
PLTGEN
Table-type PLOTINFO
Table-type GEN-LABELS
Table-type SCALING
Table-type CURV-DATA (repeats for each curve to be plotted)
END PLTGEN
********************************************************************************
; i»: . .>., . -t i: • •, :'"'i si ', j',1 '-I'1;. .' t * J't ' , i • ",'ii
la ', st
.i,'.> . • .1'. 'i i-"11 «".< i'-;- in
Explanation
• , , '. , . „ ^ .'; s '11 • i, •.'' '.',.,'' ", ;. •• +i". '- • ;,'j' .. ,!-ii;:"
The PLTGEN module prepares one or more time series for display on a plotter. It
writes the time series, and associated title and scaling information, to a
"plot-file" which must be input to a stand-alone program that translates the data
Into commands that drive the plotter. See Section 4.2(12) of Part E for further
details.
4.4(12).! Table-type PLOTINFO -- General plot information
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******:>
Layout
******
PLOTINFO
<-range>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
it . •. i .• . . • • • • «•'< ; '• :v -
END PLOTINFO
*******
Example
*******
PLOTINFO
Plot-opn ***
I - i FILE NPT NMN LABL PYR PIVL ***
1 3 2
END PLOTINFO
538
-------
PLTGEN Block
Details
Symbol
<.l ab>
Fortran
name(s)
PLOTFL
NPT
NMN
LABLF6
PYREND
PIVL
Format
15
15
15
15
15
15
Def
30
0
0
0
9
1
Min
30
0
0
-1
1
-2
Max
99
10
10
1
12
1440
Explanation
PLOTFL is the Fortran unit number of the plot file (output of this operation).
NPT is the number of point-valued time series to be plotted.
NMN is the number of mean-valued time series to be plotted.
LABLFG indicates how the plot will be labeled:
-1 means no labels (useful if you only want to observe the curves, and not
have to wait for plotter to add labels).
0 means standard labeling; that is, one set of X and Y axes and associated
labels will be drawn for entire plot.
1 means separate X and Y axes and labels will be drawn for each "frame" of
- the plot (e.g., each water year). Useful if a long plot is to be reproduced
on several successive pages of a report.
PYREND is the calendar month which terminates a plot frame (eg. a water year).
s t,he number of basic time intervals (DELT minutes each) to be aggregated to
9 +Ji° ^n-rV?*6™?1 Of the data written 'to the PLOTFL. A PIVL of -1 causes a
monthly PLOTFL to be written. A PIVL of -2 causes an annual PLOTFL to be written
539
-------
PLTGEN Block
4. 4(12). 2 Table-type GEN-LABELS -- General plot labels
****************************************************************
1 23 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GEN-LABELS
<-range><
title
< ylabl
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GEN-LABELS ...............
*******
Exampl e
*******
GEN- LABELS
Plot-opn ***
* - # General title
1 3 Reservoir inflow and outflow rates
END GEN- LABELS
Y-axis label ***
Flow (ft3/sec)
Details
Symbol
<yl abl >
Fortran
name(s)
TITLE
YLABL
Format Def
10A4 none
5A4 none
Min. Max
none none
none none
Explanation
TITLE is the general plot title.
YLABL is the label to be placed on the Y-axis.
540
•A ';;•*!
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
PLTGEN Block
4.4(12).3 Table-type SCALING — Scaling information
*****************************************************^
1 2 3 45 6 7 8
H?!!S!!901234557890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^
Layout
SCALING
<-rangex--ymin--x--ymax--x--ivlin-x-thresh->
(repeats until all operations of this type are'covered)
END SCALING
*******
Example
*******
SCALING
Plot-opn ***
# - # YMIN YMAX IVLIN THRESH ***
1 3 500. 48.
END SCALING
*****************^^
Details
Symbol
<ymin>
<ymax>
<thresh>
Fortran
name(s)
YMIN
YMAX
IVLIN
THRESH
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def Min
0.0 none
none none
none 0.01
-1.0E30 none
Max
none
none
none
none
Units Unit
system
See Note Both
See Note Both
ivl/in Both
See Note Both
Note: Units are defined by the user, in field YLABL of Table-type GEN-LABELS
Explanation
YMIN and YMAX are the minimum and maximum ordinate (Y axis) values.
on6 20"131 ^"^ SC^Q' that 1s' nUmber °f intervals (in Plot fi
S5Ethr«hh!!iHWrlt? VTeShh0ld.ValU(:- ^ the value for any curve is greater than
the threshhold, a full record is written to the PLOTFL.
541
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
PLTGEN Block
i..
4.4(12).4 Table-type CURV-DATA --Data for each curveon plot
(Must be repeated for each curve on the plot)
****************************************************************^
1 "": 2 ' 3' ' ...... 4 ...... 5"" ................................. "6" ............... ............................ ........... 7 ................................. 8""
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************************
Layout
CURV-DATA
<-range> < ..... label ---- ><linxintxcol> <tr>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END CURV-DATA ............
******* " ! ' ' , ',' ..... !'",", "
Example
*******
Curve label
CURV-DATA
Plot-opn
* - I
1 3 Inflow
END CURV-DATA
Line Intg Col Tran ***
type eqv code code ***
10 1 1 AVER
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
<label>
<lin>
<int>
<col>
<tr>
Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
LABEL 4A4 none none none
LINTYP 15 0 none none
INTEQ 15 0 0 13
COLCOD 15 0 0 10
TRAN A4 SUM none none
;:.;• .. - :.:*
542
: • ii i i i i i in
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
PLTGEN Block
Explanation
LABEL is the label (descriptor) for this particular curve.
CUPVi-
A zero value means points are connected by straight lines; no symbols are
drawn at individual data points.
A positive value means points are connected by straight lines; the magnitude
determines the frequency of plotted symbols (e.g., 4 means plot a symbol at
every 4th point obtained from the plot file).
A negative value means no connecting lines are drawn. Only symbols are
plotted; the absolute value determines the frequency (as above).
INTEQ is the "integer equivalent" of the symbols to be plotted for this curve
(i.e., indicates which symbol to use). It is only meaningful if LINTYP is not
zero. Value of 2 might mean a triangle, etc.
COLCOD is the color code for this curve. The meaning depends on how the stand-
alone plot program is set up; e.g., 1 might mean red pen, 2 blue pen, etc.
IRAN is the "transformation code" used to aggregate data from the basic interval
ATM 31, Ac?6 step) to the PLOTFL interval. Valid values are: SUM, AVER, MAX,
MIN, and LAST. '
Note: These data are designed with the requirements of a Calcomp plotting system
in mind, but are also useful on some other plotting systems. The stand- alone
program which reads the plot file and drives the plotter, must translate these
data into plotter commands.
543
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DISPLY Block
4.4(13) DISPLY Block
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** ' , , ;, , , ', " "
DISPLY
Table-type DISPLY-INF01
[Table-type DISPLY-INF02]
END DISPLY
Explanation
The DISPLY module summarizes a time series and presents the results in neatly
formatted tables. Data can be displayed at any HSPF-supported interval. See
Section 4.2(13) of Part E for further information.
, •»
»!' -I"1 j'jH1;,, I!!;
.1;!•",'. iiiil
544
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DISPLY Block
4.4(13).! Table-type DISPLY-INF01 -- Contains most of the information necessary
to generate data displays.
****************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**********************************************************^^
Layout
******
DISPLY-INFOl
<-range>< title > <trxpiv> d<filxpyr> d<filxynd>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END DISPLY-INFOl' '•••••••• • . .
*******
Example
*******
DISPLY-INFOl
#thrU#***< Title" > <-short-span->
*** ,.„..: ~"..~c'!?P]y"r> <annual summary ->
, . . TCP ,„ , TRAN PIVL DIGl'FILl PYR DIGz'FILz' YRND
1 Daily precip in TSS #20 (in) 1 2 20 6
END ^ ^ De9 C) MER 4 ! 21 > 1 22 6
Details
Symbol
<title>
<tr>
<piv>
d
<pyr>
d
<ynd>
Fortran
name(s)
TITLE(*)
TRAN
PIVL
DIGIT1
FILE1
PYRFG
DIGIT2
FILE2
PYREND
Format
7A4
A4
15
Al
15
15
Al
15
15
Def
none
SUM
0
0
6
0
0
6
9
Min
none
none
0
0
6
0
0
6
1
Max
none
none
1440
7
99
1
7
99
12
545
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DISPLY Block
'. ' . , . ! , ' , ' • . ' ijL'" , . : 'V',' .. '; ' "-« ^.'i'i* ,
Explanation
TITLE is the title that will be printed at the top of each page of the display.
TRAN is the "transformation code", used to aggregate data from the basic interval
(internal time step) to the various display intervals (for both short- and
long-span displays). Valid values are: SUM, AVER, MAX, MIN, LAST.
PIVL is the no. of basic time intervals (DELT mins each) to be aggregated to get
to the interval of the data printed in a short-span display (e.g., In the above
example, if DELT were 15 mins for DISPLY operation #2, then the data in the
short-span summary tables would be displayed at an interval of 1 hour (PIVL=4). If
PIVL=0, a short-span display is not produced.
- i- ,. - - i
DIGIT1 and DIGIT2 are the no. of decimal digits to be used to print data in the
short-span and long-span displays, respectively. Note that it is up to the user
to ensure that this value falls in the valid range 0-7.HSPF does not check this.
FILE1 and FILE? are the Fortran unit nos."of the files to which short-and long-
span displays will be routed.
PYRFG indicates whether or not a long-span display (annual summary of daily values)
is required. Value 1 means it is, 0 means it is not.
PYREND is the calendar month which will appear at the right-hand extremity of an
annual summary. This enables the user to decide whether the data should be
displayed on a calendar year or some other (e.g., water year) basis.
I.; iff.
,. i'!1' " J1'1,'' T'i1 ,"!:
I
&
546
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DISPLY Block
4.4(13). 2 Table-type DISPLY-INF02 -- Additional optional information for
. module DISPLY.
****************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
H?l!5!!901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
DISPLY-INF02
<-rangex--mult--><---add--><-threshlx-thresh2>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END DISPLY-INF02*
*******
Example
*******
DISPLY-INF02
#thru# Convert DegC to F Display negative data ***
Mult Add THRSH1 ***
2 5 1.8 32.0 -999.
END DISPLY-INF02
**********************^****^^
Details
Symbol
<mult>
<add>
<threshl>
<thresh2>
Fortran
name(s)
A
B
THRESH1
THRESH2
Format
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
Def
1.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
Min
none
none
none
none
Max
none
none
none
none
Units
none
none
none
none
Unit
system
Both
Both
Both
Both
547
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DISPLY Block
Explanation
This table is usually not supplied.
A and B are parameters used to convert the data from internal units to display
units:
Display value^ A*(internal value)+B
The conversion is done before any aggregation of data to larger time steps (than
DELT) is performed. Note that the default values of A and B result in no change.
THRSH1 and THRSH2 are "threshold values" for the short-span and long-span displays,
respectively (THRSH2 is not presently used). THRSH1 can be used to reduce the
quantity of printout produced in a short-span display; it functions as follows:
When the individual values in a row of the display have been aggregated to get the
"row value" (hour- or day-value, depending on the display interval), if the
row-value is greater than THRSH1 the row is printed, else it is omitted. Thus, for
example, the default of 0.0 will ensure that rows of data containing all zeros are
omitted.
III!'I'!:!,1 "1" . ' : !
548
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DURANL Block
4.4(14) DURANL Block
***************************************************^^
1 234 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************^^
Layout
DURANL
Table-type GEN-DURDATA
[Table-type SEASON]
[Table- type DURATIONS]
[Table-type LEVELS]
[Table-type LCONC]
END DURANL ,
******************************************************^^
Explanation
The DURANL module performs duration and excursion analysis on a time series. For
example, it analyzes the frequency with which N consecutive values in the time
series exceed a specified set of values, called "levels". N is the "duration" of
the excursion; up to 10 durations may be used in one duration analysis operation
The user may specify that only those data falling within a specified time in each
year (analysis season) be processed. For further details see Section 4.2(14) of
r art h .
549
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DURANL Block
4.4(14).! Table-type GEN-DURDATA -- General information for duration analysis
i
[
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
GEN-DURDATA
<-range>< - -title ><-rid><-nl><-prx-pu>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END GEN-DURDATA ' ' ' '
*******
Example
*******
GEN-DURDATA
#thru#<*** title > NDUR NLEV PRFG P- LCNU LCOU
*** ' UNIT
1 Simulated DO in Reach 40 5 2 " 2 0
END GEN-DURDATA
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
<title> TITLE(*) 10A4 none none none
<nd> NDUR 15 1 1 10
<nl> NLEV 15 1 1 20
<pr> PRFG 15 1 1 7
<pu> PUNIT 15 6 1 99
<lcn> LCNUM 15 0 0 5
<lco> LCOUT 15 0 0 1
550
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DURANL Block
Explanation
TITLE is the title which the user gives to the duration analysis operation;
usually, something which identifies the time series being analyzed.
NDUR is the no. of durations for which the time series will be analyzed.
NLEV is the no. of user-specified "levels" which will be used in analyzing the time
oci I GS •
PRFG is a flag which governs the quantity of information printed out. A value of
1 results in minimal (basic) output. Increasing the value (up to the maximum of
7) results in increased detail of output.
PUNIT is the Fortran unit no. to which the (printed) output of the duration
uni ^Fortran un?t routed. Each duration analysis operation must have a
LCNUM indicates the number of lethal concentration curves to be used in the
analysis. A zero means no LC analysis is to be performed.
(l-on)iS 3 fla9 WhlGh governs the Printout of intermediate lethal event information
4.4(14).2 Table-type SEASON -- The analysis season
*************************************************^
12345678
iH!!!!5?°1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
*****************************************************^^
Layout
******
SEASON
<-range> <---start--> < end--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END SEASON
*******
Example
*******
SEASON
*** Start End
#thru#*** mo da hr mn mo da hr mn
1 10 02 02
END SEASON
***************************^
551
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DURANL Block
'''' ' ',!'! f!
Details
Symbol
<start>
<end>
Fortran
name(s)
SESONS(2-5)
SESONE(2-5)
Format Def Min
4(1X,I2) see below
4(1X,I2) see below
Max
Explanation
This table is used if one wishes to specify an "analysis season"; that is, that
only data falling between the specified starting and ending month/day/hour/ minute
(in each year) should be considered.
Note:
1. The defaults, minima, maxima and other values for specifying the starting
and ending date/times are the same as those given in the discussion of the
GLOBAL Block (Section 4.2). Basically, if any fields in the starting
date/time are blank they default to the earliest meaningful value; for the
ending date/time they default to the latest possible values. Thus, the
analysis season in the example above includes the entire month of February.
.',''' i , i ' , v . :.'.•. . ;, SM 'i
2. Although it is not meaningful to provide for a "year" in the fields
documented above (since the analysis season applies to every year in the
run), the four spaces preceding both the <start> and <end> fields should be
left blank because the system does, in fact, read the year and expects it to
be blank or zero.
3. The defaults imply that, if this table is omitted, the analysis season
extends from January through December.
552
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
1
DURANL Block
4.4(14).3 Table-type DURATIONS -- Durations to be used in the analysis
*********************^
1 2 3 4 567 a
iHSI?201234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**************************^^
Layout
******
DURATIONS
<-rangex-dl>< others- --->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END DURATIONS
*******
Example
*******
DURATIONS
#thru#***<---Durations >
*** 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 1 10 15 20 40
3 1 20 21 22
END DURATIONS
**************************************************^
Details
Symbol
<dl>
<others>
Fortran
name(s)
DURAT(l)
DURAT(Z-IO)
Format
15
915
Def
1
2
Min
1
2
Max
1
none
Explanation
i-Vh arr*y wh1Sh f°nlains the NDUR different durations for which the time
series will be analyzed (NDUR was specified in Table-type GEN-DURDATA) The
SFmlFN?!^rV?re+-ed ln,"!ultiEles °f the internal time step specified in the OPN
SEQUENCE Block (Section 4.3). Thus, if DELT= 5 min and the duration is 3, the time
series will be analyzed with a "window" of 15 minutes. The analysis algorithm
requires that the first duration be 1 time step, but the others can have any vaue
553
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
DURANL Block
4. 4(14). 4 Table-type LEVELS -- Levels to be used in the analysis
************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678961234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
LEVELS
<-range><
<-range><
first 14
last 6 -
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END LEVELS
*******
Exampl e
*******
, •.) • ,»: (
LEVELS
#thru#*** 2
8
10 11 12 13 14 15
#thru#***16 17 18 19 20 21
1 -30. -10. 0. 10. 20. 40. 80. 100. 200.1000. 2.E3 3.E3 5.E3 1.E4
1 2.E4 3.E4
#thru#*** 2345
2 -20. 0. 20. 50.
END LEVELS
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
<first!4>
<last6>
Fortran
name(s)
Format Def
LEVEL(2-15)
LEVEL(16-21)
Min
Max
14F5.0 0.0 none none
6F5.0 0.0 none none
554
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
1
DURANL Block
Explanation
LEVEL(2 thru 21) contains the 20 possible user-specified "levels" for which the
input time series will be analyzed. (LEVEL(l) and LEVEL(22) are reserved for
system use and this does not affect the user since he can only specify LEVEL(2 thru
r™nimnflTefl aCtTU*a\,,nc»' -°f leV6ls (NLEV) was sPecif1ed by the user in Table-type
GEN-DURDATA. If NLEV is greater than 14 the entry for a given operation must be
continued to the next line; up to 2 lines may be required to cover all the levels
In the example above, operation 1 has 16 user-specified levels and thus requires
Z lines, but operation 2 only requires 1 line because it has only 4 user-specified
I"VcIS*
When an entry has to be continued onto more than 1 line:
1. No blank or "comment" lines may be put between any of the lines for a continued
entry. Put all comments ahead of the entry. (See operation 1 in above example).
2. The <range> specification must be repeated for each line onto which the entry
is continued.
that
555
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
I
DURANL Block
4.4(14).5 Table-type LCONC -- Lethal concentrations to be used in the analysis
Repeats for each lethal concentration curve-LCNUM times
1 2 3 4 56 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
&&&&&A4
Layout
******
LCONC
<-range><-
<-range><-
-first-7-
-last-3 >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END LCONC
*******
Example
*******
LCONC
# . #***
£ _ #***
1 2
1 2
END LCONC
LCI
LC8
1.
20.
LC2
LC9
3.
30.
LC3
LC10
6.
60.
LC4
8.
LC5
,15.
LC6
5.
LC7
8.
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
<first-7>
<last-3>
Fortran
name(s)
LCONC (1-7,
LCONC(8-10
I)
,D
Format
7F10.0
3F10.0
Def
0.0
0.0
Min
none
none
Max
none
none
Explanation
LCONC(*) is an array which contains the NDUR different lethal levels which are used
in a lethal concentration analysis. If no lethal analysis is being done, this table
may be omitted.
, 556
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
GENER Block
4.4(15) GENER Block
********************************************************************************
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
****** - i • . •
GENER
Table-type OPCODE
[Table-type NTERMS]
Table-type COEFFS
only required if
OPCODE=8
[Table-type PARM] only required if OPCODE = 9,10, or 11
END GENER
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The GENER module generates a time series from one or two input time series.
Usually, only Table-type OPCODE is required. However, if OPCODE=8 (power series),
you need to supply the no. of terms in the power series and the values of the
coefficients. If OPCODE = 9,10, or 11 then Table-type PARM is required to input the
constant required in the'operation.
557
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
GENER Block
4.4(15).2 Table-type NTERMS -- No. of terms in power series
:. • • • • ;• ' , : , >"' I1; •; «'.""
********************************************************************************
• ' , ' "I. . . ! " J . li > I!1 ' v '' .' * "'I- '. I ;«" '' -:' I1 »" l|l» " lh !' . ,,
1 2 3 45678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******^
Layout
******
NTERMS
<-rangex-nt>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END NTERMS'
*******
Example
*******
NTERMS
#thru#NTERMS ***
124
END NTERMS
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
<nt> NTERMS 15 2 1 7
Explanation
This table is only relevant if OPCODE=8. NTERMS is the total no. of terms in the
power series:
C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2 etc.
The default value of 2 was chosen because this option will probably be used most
often (to perform a linear transformation).
560
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
GENER Block
4.4(15).3 Table-type COEFFS --Coefficients in generating power function
********************************************************************************
1 2 345 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
******
COEFFS
<-range>< coeffs >
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END COEFFS
*******
Example
*******
COEFFS
#thru# *** Kl K2 K3
1 7 -2.0 1.5 0.2
END COEFFS
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
<coeffs> K(*) 7F10.0 0.0 none none
Explanation
This table is only relevant if OPCODE=8. K(l thru NTERMS) are the coefficients in
the power function:
C= K(1)+K(2)*A+K(3)*A**2+ etc.
561
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.4(15).4 Table-type FARM -- Constant for GENER operation
GENER Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
****** " ... .. .(
PARM
<-rangex--con--->
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END FARM
*******
Example
******* ' " ' ':
PARM
f - * *** K
1 7 ' 2.5 ' ' ' ' ' " "'
END PARM
fc*****:i
Details
Symbol Fortran Format Def Min Max
name(s)
<con> K F10.0 1.0 none none
Explanation
This table is only relevant if OPCODE is 9, 10, or 11,
K is the constant required in the operation.
562
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
MUTSIN Block
4.4(16) MUTSIN Block
********************************************************************************
12 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
********************************************************************************
Layout
MUTSIN
Table-type MUTSINFO
END MUTSIN
********************************************************************************
Explanation
The MUTSIN module is used to copy one or more time series from a HSPF-PLOTFL or its
equivalent to one or more targets. The targets may be datasets in the TSS or WDM
(specified in the EXT-TARGETS Block) or input time series in other operations
(specified in the NETWORK Block). See Section 4.2(16) in Part E for a detailed
description of MUTSIN's function.
563
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
MUTSIN Block
4.4(16).! Table-type MUTSINFO -- Information about time series to be copied
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******<
Layout
******
MUTSINFO
<-rangexmf 1 xnptxnmnxnl i xmi s>
(repeats until all operations of this type are covered)
END MUTSINFO
******* ' ,, . . ,..' . . '." .' , ' , ,:.:
Example
*******
MUTSINFO
I - # MFL NPT NMN NLI MSFG ***
1 30 1 1 25 0
END MUTSINFO
• '..:••• i':,/ . ' V->," ' ,':> : , ':, " ,,„, '.:, 4*
********************************************************************************
Details
Symbol
<mfl>
<npt>
<nmn>
<nli>
<rais>
Fortran
name(s)
MUTFL
NPT
NMN
NLINES
MISSFG
Format
15
15
15
15
15
Def
30
0
0
25
0
Min
30
0
0
1
0
Max
99
10
10
none
3
Explanation
MUTFL is the Fortran unit number of the file being input.
NPT is the number of Point-valued time series to be input.
NMN is the number of Mean-valued time series to be input.
NLINES is the number of lines to skip at the beginning of MUTFL.
MISSFG is the missing data action flag.
0 - stop on missing data
1 - fill missing data with 0.0
2 - fill missing data with -1.0E30
3 - fill with next value
564
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
FTABLES Block
4.5 FTABLES Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******4
Layout
FTABLES
FTABLE <t>
< ---- ftab-parms ---- >
< -------------- row-of-values
line above repeats until function has been described through desired range
'END'FTABLE<t>
Any number of FTABLES may appear in the block
END FTABLES
Details
Symbol
<t>
<ftab-parms>
FORTRAN
Name(s)
NUMBR
Fparms(4)
Format
13
415
Users
Up to
Comment
identifying no. for this FTABLE.
4 control parameters may be
<row-of-values> VAL(*)
supplied for an Ftable, e.g. no. of
rows, no. of cols., etc. Exact details
will depend on the FTABLE concerned.
variable Each column is dedicated to one of the
variables in the function. Each row
contains a full set of corresponding
values of these variables, e.g. depth,
surface area,volume,outflow for a RCHRES
565
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
FTABLES Block
Explanation
An FTABLE is used to specify, in discrete form, a functional relationship between
two or more variables. For example, in the RCHRES module, it is assumed that there
is a fixed relationship between depth, surface area, volume, and f(VOL) discharge
component. An FTABLE is used to document this nonanalytic function in numerical
form. Each column of the FTABLE is dedicated to one of the above variables, and
each row contains corresponding values of the set. That is, each row contains the
surface area, volume, and discharge for a given depth. The number of rows in the
FTABLE will depend on the range of depth to be covered and the desired resolution
of the function.
4.5(3) FTABLES for the RCHRES Application Module
4.5(3).l FTABLE for HYDR section
The geometric and hydraulic properties of a RCHRES are summarized in a function
table (FTABLE). Every RCHRES must be associated with one FTABLE; the association
is done in Table-type HYDR-PARM2 (Section 4.4(3).2.2 above). Usually, every RCHRES
will have its own FTABLE; however, if RCHRES's are identical they can share the
same FTABLE. FTABLE's may be included in the user's input (FTABLES Block) or they
may be stored in a WDM File.
********************************************************************************
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
**********************************************************************^^*jtitit^^
Layout
****** , ; ,
FTABLE <t> ' "" !i!!l!'"'"!"
<-nrx-nc>
<-depth--x--area--x-volume-x f( VOL)-values - >
The above row repeats until values have been supplied to cover the entire
cross section at the desired resolution
*END'FTABLE<t>
Example
*******
FTABLE 103
rows cols ***
35 , ,„ ,,;;;,, ., ;.
depth area volume outflowl outflow2 ***
(ft) (acres) (acre-ft) ( ft3/s) ( ft3/s) ***
0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
5.0 10.0 25.0 20.5 10.2
20.0 120.0 1000.0 995.0 2Q0.1
END F T A B L E 1 0 3
^A****************************************************************************^
566
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
FTABLES Block
Details
Symbol
<t>
<nr>
<nc>
<depth>
<area>
<volume>
<f(VOL)-
values>
FORTRAN
Name(s)
see Sect. 4.5
NROWS
NCOLS
Depth
Surface area
Vol ume
f(V)(NCOLS-3)
Format
15
15
F10.0
F10.0
F10.0
(NCOLS-3)
F10.0
Comment
No. of rows used to document function
No. of columns in FTABLE
Units: ft or m
Units: acres or ha
There must be at least one
volume =0.0 Units: acre. ft
Units: ft3/s or m3/s
entry with
or Mm3
Explanation
This FTABLE lists depth, surface area and, optionally, one or more other values
(typically discharge rates) as functions of volume. HSPF interpolates between the
specified values to obtain the geometric and hydraulic characteristics for
intermediate values of volume.
The FTABLE must satisfy the following conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(NCOLS*NROWS) must not exceed 100
NCOLS must be between 3 and 8
There must be at least one row in the FTABLE
No negative values
The depth and volume fields may not contain values which decrease as the
row no. increases
In the example given above, we have a reach with two outflows, both of which are
functions of volume. Thus, there are 5 columns in the FTABLE.
The values for this type of FTABLE can either be supplied directly by the user or
be generated by a subsidiary program from more basic information (eg. by backwater
analysis or Manning's equation for assumed uniform flow).
WDM FTABLES are stored in WDM "table" data sets, and assessed directly by HSPF.
These data sets may be created and modified through the use of the ANNIE program
WDM FTABLES follow the same structure, and must satisfy the same conditions as
FTABLES contained in the user's input.
567
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6 TIME SERIES LINKAGES
4.6.1 General Discussion
In the EXTERNAL SOURCES, NETWORK, EXTERNAL TARGETS, and SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK blocks,
the user specifies those time series which are to be passed between pairs of
operations in the same INGRP or between individual operations and external sources/
targets (TSS Data sets, WDM Data sets, or sequential files). The blocks are
arranged in the form of tables, each containing one or more entries (rows). Each
entry contains source information, a multiplication factor, a transformation
function, and target information.
The entries in these blocks may be in any order.
When time series associated with data sets in the TSS or WDM File are referred to,
the user supplies the data set number and the data set name. This information must
agree with data supplied when the data set was created (see Section 2.0 for TSS
data set creation). WDM data sets and associated attributes are created using the
interactive program ANNIE. The user should refer to the ANNIE and WDM
documentation for additional information.
The user specifies time series which are input to, or output from, an operating
module by supplying a group name (<sgrp>, <tgrp>) and a member name plus one or two
subscripts (<smemxm#>, <tmemxm#>) . The member information must be compatible
with data given in the Time Series Catalog for the applicable operating module andj
group (Section 4.7).
The user may route the same source to several targets by making several separate
entries in a block, each referring to the same source, or by making use of the
"range" feature provided in the <tvol>< range> field. This latter feature does not
apply to entries in the EXT TARGETS Block. In either case the implication is that
data from the source will be used repetitively and each time will 'be multiplied by
the specified factor and added to whatever else has already been routed to the
specified target. Conversely, several sources may be routed to a single target,
except in the EXT TARGETS Block. This happens when several entries specify
different sources but the same target. Here, the " i'nipl ication is that the data
obtained from the several sources must be accumulated (added) before being used by
the target. The maximum number of entries in all three blocks must not exceed 960.
568
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.2 EXTERNAL SOURCES Block
In this block the user specifies those time series which are to be supplied to
operations in a RUN from sources external to it from TSS Data sets, WDM Data sets,
or sequential files.
****************************************************^^
12 3 4 5 6 78
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
EXT SOURCES
<svolxs#> <exsm>qf <ssxsgx-mfact--xtr> <tvolx range> <tgrp> <tmem><ni#>
or
<sfmt>f#
Above line repeats until all external sources have been specified
END 'EXT 'SOURCES .......................... * ..........
.*******
Exampl e
*******
EXT SOURCES
<-Volume-> <Member> SsysSgap<--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-6rp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # tern strg<-factor->strg <Name>
TSS 5 INFLO ENGL RCHRES
SEQ 3 HYDDAY ENGL ,1.0 RCHRES
WDM 22 PREC METRZERO SUM IMPLND
# # <Name> # # ***
1 EXTNL IVOL
1 EXTNL ICON
2 EXTNL PREC
******
569
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
Details
Symbol
<svol>
<s#>
<exsm>
<sfmt>
qf
FORTRAN
Name(s)
SVOL
SVOLNO
SMEMN
SFCLAS
QLFG
Start Format Comment
Column
1
7
12
12
12
18
A6
14
A6
A4
A6
12
External source volume. Valid values are TSS
(Time Series Store), WDM (Watershed Data
Management System File) and SEQ (sequential file).
Data set No. (if SVOL = TSS or WDM); or
Fortran unit No. (if SVOL = SEQ) .
|, . , . ' " | . ,'m If 1 |l|l | |l | i'l'^ ' ' ' ,,„• ihjll; • , • i .1 ' , h.
Data set name (if SVOL == TSS) or
Data set TSTYP attribute (if SVOL = WDM)
SFCLAS is a string indicating the class of format
used in the sequential file.
Quality-of.-data flag (if SVOL = WDM); specifies
the minimum quality of WDM data which will be
accepted by HSPF; valid values = 0-31; default = 0
fl SFNO 18 12 SFNO identifies an object-time format supplied in
the FORMATS Block. Default: use standard format.
<ss> SSYST 21 A4 Unit system of data in the source (SVOL = SEQ or
WDM); valid values = ENGL and METR; default = ENGL
<sg> SGAPST 25 A4 String indicating how missing "cards" in the
sequential file, or how WDM data having
insufficient 'quality' will be regarded. Used if
SVOL = SEQ or WDM) validvalues are ZERO (assign
value 0) and U'NDF (assign undefined value).
Defaults to UNDF. See below for explanation.
The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field) = 1.0
39 A4 String indicating which transformation function to
use in transferring timeseries from source to
target. See Section 4.6.5. for defaults.
44 A6 TVOL is the Opn-type of the target.
I ' ... '. ,• .• , i'j' if;,,;1 iiiii:\ •' , . \ •" i,;/ (: s i.::. ,;, ; ,•
51 13 TOPFST & TOPLST specify the range of operations
55 13 which are targets (e.g.,, PERLND 1 5). If
TOPLST field is blank the target is a single opn.
<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0
<tr> TRAN
<tvol> TVOL
< range> TOPFST
TOPLST
<tgrp> TGRPN
59 A6 Group to which the target time series belong(s).
570
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
<tmem> TMEMN 66 A6 Target member name. Default: all members.
<m#> TMEMSB(2) 72 212 Target member name subscripts.
Default: all member name subscripts.
Explanation
If an entry specifies the source volume as SEQ, the user is referring to a time
fe<ll «» ^rt™ unit
JLa"oen*ry sPe.c1.f1e.s. the source volume as TSS or WDM the user is referring to a
time series contained in the corresponding direct access data file, either the Time
Series Store or the Watershed Data Management System file.
9 Wlth ReleaSe " °f HSPF) a11 TSS ^nationality will be removed from
proyram.
attribute TSFILL (If present) or alternatTvely if TSFIU Is not
by
When data are read from a sequential file the user supplies:
l' l"f°7at cl!!ss CCK!eu- "fixes the nature and sequence of data in a typical
record (eg. day and hr, followed by 12 hourly values). «OT.".«H
2. The number of an object-time format, situated in the FORMATS Block. It fixes
cunnf • t?rmat f th.e datan 1n a rec°rd' A defaul* format can be selected by
supplying the number 0, or leaving the field blank.
UPP°rted in the HSPF
1 ^acter strings must be left-justified in their fields except TSS and
n h 5»lanam?Si(<^Sm>),±ch must be J'ustified ^ the same way that they were
when the data set label or WDM attribute TSTYP was created
571
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
MI,,' jii •' ("i1 : ''"' '"'i'H" ,', "' i!!!;,'1;11!.1! • :,,i, t '".nn t i '
Time Series Linkages
4.6.3 NETWORK Block
In this block the user specifies those time series which will be passed between
operations via the internal scratch pad (INPAD). If there are no such linkages the
block is omitted. For many applications, particularly large or complex watersheds
that have many entries in the NETWORK block, the use of the SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK
blocks may provide a simpler and more conceptual format for specifying the linkages
in the NETWORK block.
**************************************************¥**S^
1 ;:' 2 3 4 ' '': B'" : !" *'"*''*"& :: ''''''' "" "7°"" '"::'"" ' "8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
Layout
******
NETWORK
<svolxo#> <sgrp> <smemxm#x-mfact--xtr> <tvol>< range> <tgrp> <tmemxm#>
Above line repeats until all network entries have been made
END*NETWORK
*******
Exarnple
*******
NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-6rp> <-Member-x--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member->
<Name>
RCHRES 1 HYDR
RCHRES 2 HYDR
RCHRES 4 HYDR
END NETWORK
<Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> •# # <Name> # #
ROVOL 0.5 RCHRES 2 EXTNL IVOL
ROVOL RCHRES 5 EXTNL IVOL
ROVOL RCHRES 5 EXTNL IVOL
***
***
572
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Details
Time Series Linkages
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format
Name(s) Column
Comment
<svol>
<0#>
SVOL
SVOLNO
1
7
A6
14
SVOL is
SVOLNO i
the Operation-type
s the source Operal
of
:ior
the source opn.
i-type No.
<sgrp> SGRPN 12 A6
<smem> SMEMN 19 A6
<m#> SMEMSB(2) 25 212
<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0
<tr>
TRAN
<tvol> TVOL
39
44
A4
< range> TOPFST, 51 13
TOPLST 55 13
<tgrp> TGRPN 59 A6
<tmem> TMEMN 66 A6
<m#> TMEMSB(2) 72 212
(e.g., PERLND 5)
Group to which the source time series belong(s).
Source member name. Default: all members.
Source member name subscripts. Blank fields
mean all subscripts are implied.
The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field)= 1.0
String indicating which transformation function to
use in transferring time series from source to
target. Defaults: see Section 4.6.5.
A6 TVOL is the Opn-type of the target.
TOPFST & TOPLST specify the range of operations
which are targets (eg. PERLND 1 5). If
TOPLST field is blank the target is a single opn.
Group to which the target time series belong(s).
Target member name. Default: all members.
Target member name subscripts.
Default: all member name subscripts.
Explanation
The example above shows how this block is used to specify the connectivity of a set
of reaches of stream channel (RCHRES 1 flows to RCHRES 2, RCHRES 2 and 4 flow to
RCHRES 5). It can also be used to specify the flow of time series data from
utility operations to simulation operations and vice versa. The network can be
extremely complex, or non-existent (e.g., if the RUN involves only one operation).
Because the time series are transferred via the INPAD each source and target pair
must be in the same INGRP.
573
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
i
4.6.4 SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK Blocks
The SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK blocks work in tandem to allow the user to specify the
watershed structure and linkages in a more conceptual manner than is possible using
the NETWORK block. Another advantage of using these blocks for most model
applications is that the NETWORK block will be simplified.
The SCHEMATIC block contains global specificationsof the watershed structure,
i.e., connections of land segments to stream reaches and reach-reach connections.
This block also permits the user to input the area of a land segment that is
tributary to a stream reach in a single entry, instead of including the area in
multiple entries in the NETWORK block. Each entry in the SCHEMATIC block refers
to a table in the MASS-LINK block where the detailed time series connections for
that entry are specified.
The MASS-LINK block contains the specific time series to be transferred from one
operation to another. This block also contains any required units conversion
factors or other multiplication factors that may be needed in addition to the area.
For example, when runoff from a land segment is transferred to a stream reach, a
conversion factor of 1/12 (0.08333) is needed to convert the runoff from inches to
acre-feet if the area units are acres. (The corresponding factor for metric units
is 10"5 if the area units are hectares.) Each MASS-LINK table contains the set of
time series transfers that are to be associated with one or moreof the linkages
in the SCHEMATIC block. The HSPF program combines the schematic linkages with the
mass time series transfers and automatically generates all of the necessary time
series connections and includes them in the NETWORK block.
The example shown below illustrates the use of these blocks. In this example, the
watershed consists of three pervious land segments and two stream reaches. One of
the land segments contributes loadings to both reaches. Loadings of flow,
sediment, heat and one dissolved pesticide are being transferred from the land to
the stream, and the sediment loading from the land surface is assumed to consist
of 10% sand, 35% silt and 55% clay. The SCHEMATIC and MASS-LINK blocks to
accomplish the required connections are shown below:
574
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
1
Time Series Linkages
1 2 34 56 7
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
SCHEMATIC
<-Source->
<Name> #
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
RCHRES
1
2
2
3
1
<--Area-->
<-factor->
200.
120.
235.
360.
END SCHEMATIC
<-Target->
<Name> #
RCHRES 1
RCHRES 1
RCHRES 2
RCHRES 2
RCHRES 2
MSLK
Tbl#
1
1
1
1
2
***
***
MASS-LINK
<Volume> <-Grp> <-Member-x--Mult-->
<Name> <Name>
MASS-LINK 1
#<-factor->
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
PERLND
END MASS-LINK
PWATER PERO
SEDMNT SOSED
SEDMNT SOSED
SEDMNT SOSED
PWTGAS POHT
PEST
0.0833333
0.10
0.35
0.55
TOPST
1
<-Target> <-Grp> <-Member->***
<Name> <Name> # #***
RCHRES INFLOW IVOL
RCHRES INFLOW ISED 1
RCHRES • INFLOW ISED 2
RCHRES INFLOW ISED 3
RCHRES INFLOW IHEAT
RCHRES INFLOW IDQUAL 1
RCHRES INFLOW
MASS-LINK 2
RCHRES ROFLOW
END MASS-LINK 2
END MASS-LINK
***************************^^
The SCHEMATIC block contains the global watershed linkages, i.e., PLS 1 provides
loadings to Reach 1, PLS 2 provides loadings to Reaches 1 and 2, PLS 3 provides
loadings to Reach 2, and Reach 1 is upstream of Reach 2. The areas of PLS's 1 and
3 are 200 acres and 360 acres, respectively, and the area of PLS 2 is 355 acres,
of which 120 acres are tributary to Reach 1 and 235 acres are tributary to Reach
Cm •
The MASS-LINK block contains details of the individual time series connections that
need to be specified for each of the watershed linkages. Each of the four PLS-to-
Reach entries in the SCHEMATIC block refers to MASS-LINK Table 1, which contains
six time series connections from the PLS to the Reach. The Reach 1-to-Reach 2
entry refers to MASS-LINK Table 2; this table contains the ROFLOW-INFLOW
connection, which is automatically expanded by the program to generate all
necessary time series connections from one reach to another.
The time series connections in the MASS-LINK block are combined with the SCHEMATIC
linkages to generate the full set of connections needed in the simulation. In this
575
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
•', •'*. I
r'J'lf''
VF,,: '" '.'ft:
''i.^'Hafe it]
I
Time Series Linkages
process, the program sets up a set of connections for each [SCHEMATIC entry]/[MASS-
LINK table] pair. The multiplication factor for each connection is obtained by
combining the 'area' factor from the SCHEMATIC block and the 'units/other
conversion' factor from the MASS-LINK block. The explicit time series connections
generated by HSPF and included in the NETWORK Block for this example are shown
below:
NETWORK
**** p|_s l to RCH 1
PERLND 1 PWATER PERO
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOS ED 1
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOS ED 1
PERLND 1 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 1 PWTGAS POHT
PERLND 1 PEST TOPST
**** p|_s 2 to RCH 1
PERLND 2 PWATER PERO
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 PWTGAS POHT
PERLND 2 PEST TOPST
**** PLS 2 to RCH 2
PERLND 2 PWATER PERO
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 2 PWTGAS POHT
PERLND 2 PEST TOPST
*&** PLS 3 to RCH 2
PERLND 3 PWATER PERO
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 3 SEDMNT SOSED 1
PERLND 3 PWTGAS POHT
PERLND 3 PEST TOPST
**** RCH 1 to RCH 2 (HYDR,
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROVOL
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROHEAT
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 2
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSED 3
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW RODQAL
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 1
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 2
RCHRES 1 ROFLOW ROSQAL 3
END NETWORK
16.66 SAME RCHRES
20. SAME RCHRES
70. SAME RCHRES
110. SAME RCHRES
200. SAME RCHRES
200. SAME RCHRES
10. SAME RCHRES
12. SAME RCHRES
42. SAME RCHRES
66. SAME RCHRES
120. SAME RCHRES
120. SAME RCHRES
19.58 SAME RCHRES
23.50 SAME RCHRES
1 82.25 SAME RCHRES
129.25 SAME RCHRES
235. SAME RCHRES
235. SAME RCHRES
30. SAME RCHRES
36. SAME RCHRES
126. SAME RCHRES
198. SAME RCHRES
360. SAME RCHRES
360. SAME RCHRES
HTRCH, SEDTRN, and GQUAL
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1.0 SAME RCHRES
1 1.0 SAME RCHRES
1 1.0 SAME RCHRES
1 1.0 SAME RCHRES
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
INFLOW IVOL
INFLOW ISED 1
INFLOW ISED 2
INFLOW ISED 3
INFLOW IHEAT
INFLOW IDQUAL 1
""" '••' ' • ' ": • •'••' "' • •'•
INFLOW IVOL
INFLOW ISED 1
INFLOW ISED 2
INFLOW ISED 3
INFLOW IHEAT
INFLOW IDQUAL 1
INFLOW IVOL
INFLOW ISED 1
INFLOW ISED 2
INFLOW ISED 3
INFLOW IHEAT
INFLOW IDQUAL 1
INFLOW IVOL
INFLOW ISED 1
INFLOW ISED 2
INFLOW ISED 3
INFLOW IHEAT
INFLOW IDQUAL 1
sections are active)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
INFLOW IVOL
INFLOW IHEAT
INFLOW ISED 1
INFLOW ISED 2
INFLOW ISED 3
INFLOW IDQAL 1
INFLOW ISQAL 1 1
INFLOW ISQAL 2 1
INFLOW ISQAL 3 1
576
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.4.1 SCHEMATIC Block
In this block the user specifies the global linkages of land segments with stream
reaches and between stream reaches. Each of these linkages is combined with the
detailed time series connections specified in one of the MASS-LINK tables to
generate a complete set of time series connections for the linkage.
*********************************************************^^
1 2 3 45 67 8
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
«
Layout
******
SCHEMATIC
<svol>< #> <-afact--> <tvol>< #> <ML#>
Above line repeats until all network entries'nave'Deen'made
END* SCHEMATIC * " " " ' ° • • •
*******
Example
*******
SCHEMATIC
<-Source-> <--Mult--> <-Target > MSLK ***
<Name> # <-factor-> <Name> # Tbl# ***
PERLND ! 200. RCHRES 2 1
PERLND 2 300. RCHRES 5 1
RCHRES 4 1. RCHRES 5 2
END SCHEMATIC
**********************************^^
577
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Details
Time Series Linkages
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format
Name(s) Column
Comment
<svol> SVOL 1 A6
< #> SVOLNO 7 14
<afact> AFACTR 29 F10.0
<tvol> TVOL
< #> TVOLNO
HSLKNO
44 A6
50 14
57 14
SVOL is the Operation-type of the source opn.
SVOLNO is the source Operation-type No.
(e.g., PERLND 5)
The area factor by which data from the source
will be multiplied before being added to the
target. This factor will be combined with the
factor in the MASS-LINK Block.
Default Result (blank field)= 1.0
TVOL is the Opn-type of the target.
TVOLNO is the target Operation-type No.
(e.g., RCHRES 5)
MASS-LINK table No. that will be used to
generate the NETWORK entries for this linkage.
"il 'i"'"'
578
fii .,... :«
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.4.2 MASS-LINK Block
S^ul^,!!?^.!^1/16^^?.?^.*1'''8 fei:ies connections which will be
Block to generate a set of
*****************************************^
l^l^l^
Layout
******
MASS-LINK
MASS-LINK #
<svol> <sgrp> <smemxm#x-mfact--> <tvol> <tgrp> <tmemxm#>
Above line repeats until all* mass-iink'entries'nave'been'made '"
'END'MASS-LINK' " *# " *
END MASS-LINK
*******
Example
*******
MASS-LINK
MASS-LINK 1
Stair8"* <"Grp> <-Member-><--MuH--> <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
nrn?Mn <Name> # #<-factor-> <Name> # # <Name> # # ***
K sPS s^sR?D °'°8333 Sff M J
pErMAss.sL P?QUAL ! RCHR" K °»° *
END MASS-LINK
****************************************
579
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Details
Time Series Linkages
Symbol FORTRAN
Name(s)
<svol> SVOL
<sgrp> S6RPN
<smem> SMEMN
<m#> SMEMSBO
Start Format Comment
Column
1
12
19
>) 25
A6
A6
A6
212
SVOL is the Operation-type of the source opri.
Group to which the source time series belong(s).
Source member name. Default: all members.
Source member name subscripts. Blank fields
<mfact> MFACTR 29 F10.0
mean all subscripts are implied.
The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank field)= 1.0
<tvol>
<tgrp>
<tmem>
<m#>
TVOL 44
TGRPN 59
TMEMN 66
THEMSB(2) 72
A6
A6
A6
212
TVOL is the Opn-type of the target.
Group to which the target time series belong(s).
Target member name. Default: all members.
Target member name subscripts.
Default: all member name subscripts.
580
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.5 EXTERNAL TARGETS Block
In this block the user specifies those time series which will be output from the
operations in a RUN, to data sets in the TSS or WDM File. If there are no such
transfers the block may be omitted.
**********************************************************^^
1 2 3 4 5 678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
***********,M:******************^^
Layout
******
EXT TARGETS
<svolxo#> <sgrp> <smem><m#x-mfact--xtr> <tvolxt#> <extm>qf <ts> <ag> <am>
Above line repeats until all external* targets nave'been'specified
END* EXT'TARGETS ' '
******* •
Example
*******
EXT TARGETS
<-Volume-> .<-Grp> <-Member-x--Mult-->Tran <-Volume-> <Member> Tsys Aggr Amd ***
niS^ # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # <Name>qf tern strg strq***
RCHRES 5 HYDR OVOL 2 100. TSS 11 OUTFLO ENGL ADD
*™RES 6 GQUAL DQAL 3 1. AVER WDM 25 CONC ENGL AGGR REPL
hNU LA I IARGETS
*****************************************************^^
581
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Details
Time Series Linkages
Symbol FORTRAN Start Format
Name(s) Column
Comment
<svol> SVOL 1 A6
<o%> SVOLNO 7 14
<sgrp> SGRPN 12 A6
<smem> SMEMN 19 A6
<m#> SMEMSB(2) 25 212
<rafact> MFACTR 29 F10.0
<tr>
TRAN
<tvol> TVOL
TVOLNO
TMEMN
QLFG
TSYST
<extm>
qf
<ts>
<ag>
<am>
39 A4
44 A6
50
55
61
AGGST 69 A4
AMDST
SVOL is the Operation-type of the source opn.
SVOLNO is the source Operation-type No.
(e.g., PERLND 5)
Group to which the source time series belong(s).
Source member name. Default: all members.
Source member name subscripts. Blank fields
mean all subscripts are implied.
The factor by which data from the source will be
multiplied before being added to the target.
Default (blank fieldj= 1.0
String indicating which transformation function to
use in transferring time series from source to
target. See Section 4.6.5 for defaults.
External target volume. Valid values are TSS
(Time Series Store) and WDM (Watershed Data
Management System file)
14 Data set Number (if TVOL = TSS or WDM).
A6 Data set name (if TVOL = TSS); or
A4 data set TSTYP attribute (if TVOL - WDM).
12 Quality-of-data (if TVOL = WDM); specifies the
quality tag to be attached to data placed in a
WDM data set; valid values = 0 - 31; default = 0.
64 A4 Unit system of data to be written to WDM data set;
valid values = ENGL and METR; default = ENGL.
String indicating whether the data should be
aggregated when placed in a WDM data set having
a time step greater than the source time step;
valid value is AGGR; default is no aggregation.
74 A4 String indicating how the target data set is to be
accessed. Valid values are: ADD, INST, and REPL
for the TSS file; and ADD or REPL for a WDM file.
See below for explanation.
582
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
Explanation
This block is similar to the EXT SOURCES Block but serves the opposite purpose.
IS thP F%eTM^haRie s;mjlar <;orraats (but are ^versed;. In addition, each entry
?n I TARGETS 5lo<* has the <am> field> which indicates how the target data
6 "^ he user should be aware of the differences between these
and
ADD
For a TSS data set, this option preserves pre-existing data which precede
the starting time of the RUN. Pre-existing data subsequent to that time?
including any which goes beyond the ending time of the RUN, are destroyed
The year order option (YEAROR), specified when the TSS data set label was
created or updated, must be YES.
For a WDM data set, this option is designed to add data when no pre-
existing data are present for any period after the starting time of the
run, including times after the time span of the run.
INST This option is used to write data to the data set for calendar years for
data ™ cha"9ed «r destroyed,
This option is not available for a WDM data set.
REPL For a TSS data set, this option preserves pre-existing data both before and
after the time span of the run. Data in the data set must be in
uncompressed form (COMPRESSION= UNCOMP). Because this option is designed
tor replacement of data, some data must pre-exist for every calendar year
of the replacement period (RUN span).
For a WDM data set, this option will result in the overwriting of any
1 '8 ^
°f ^ run*
In summary, for a TSS data set, option ADD or INST must be used when time series
data are first placed in a data set. ADD will result in data for every calendar
year being Physically positioned (in the TSS data set) in chronological order; INST
will not Note however, that within each calendar year data are always stored in
chronological order. REPL must be used if the data are to be selectively changed
without affecting data outside the period of change. ^i^uiveiy cnangea,
For a WDM data set, the ADD option is used to add data when no ore-existina data
are present after the starting time of the run, while the REPL option r"esuHs1n
overwriting existing data, both during and after the time span of the run
Data placed in a WDM data set will normally have a time step equal to the time step
tJrS? Z' f +-r> th*6 US-6r may °Pt1ona11y sPecify that aggregation occur if the
target data set time step is an integer multiple (2 or greater) of the run time
IttSibut^of1^ Htetp °V T data set is "pecified ^ the 'TCODE and issrS
WDM data sets. DTsaggregation is not permitted when placing data in
583
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.6 Time Series Transform Functions
Whenever time series are transferred from a source to a target a "transformation"
takes place. The user can specify the transformation function in field <tr>; if
it is blank the default function is supplied. The range of permissible functions
is: ' ' , „' '' " ,, , '..'.. '... ""'.'"'
SDELT < TDELT
Point to Point
Mean to Mean
Point to Mean
LAST/AVER (a)
SUM
AVER
Interval
relation
SDELT - TDELT
SDELT > TDELT
(b)
Source
Type
Point
Mean
Point
Point
Mean
Point
to
to
to
to
to
to
Target
Type
Point
Mean
Mean
Point
Mean
Mean
- -
Defau
SAME
SAME
AVER
Functions
Its
INTP/AVER (a)
DIV
AVER
Others
none
none
none
none
SAME
none
none
AVER,MAX,MIN
SUM,MAX,MIN
Key: SDELT Time interval of source time series
TDELT Time interval of target time series
(a) Second default keyword applies to WDM source time series.
(b) This interval relation is invalid for WDM target; i.e., output
disaggregation is not permitted to WDM data sets
Notes:
1. See below (Note 2 and next page) for explanations of the transform keywords.
2. For WDM data sets, TDELT and SDELT refer to the time step defined by the WDM
attributes TCODE and TSSTEP; however, data may be stored in the data set at
other time steps. When data are being read from a WDM data set, the functions
AVER and SAME imply either AVER or SAME; and the functions SUM and DIV imply
either SUM or DIV, whichever is appropriate for the actual time step of the
data.
3. The type of WDM data sets is determined by the attribute TSFORM. If TSFORM =
1 or 2, the type is MEAN; if TSFORM = 3, the type is POINT.
.......
4. The type of sequential (SEQ) time series is not defined; consequently, these
time series are assumed to have the same type as the target time series.
5. Keywords less than 4 characters long must be left-justified in the field.
1 ' ' ' ' ' I
6. For further information, see Appendix V and Time Series Catalog (Section 4.7
of this part).
584
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
The time series transform functions given above are completed before the
multiplication factor given in the EXTERNAL SOURCES, EXTERNAL TARGETS and NETWORK
blocks are applied. These transform functions are defined as follows:
AVER Compute the integral of the source time series over each target time step,
divide by the target time step and assign the value to the time step in the
target time series. See Appendix V for definition of the integral of a time
wCi 1 cS •
DIV Divide each mean value of the source time series by the ratio of the source
time step to the target time step and assign the results to each of the
target time steps contained in the source time step.
INTP Interpolate linearly between adjacent point values in the source time
series and assign the interpolated values to each time point in the tarqet
time series. 3
LAST Take the value at the last time point of the source time series which
belongs to the time step of the target time series and assign the value to
the time step of the target time series. See Appendix V for a definition
or the meaning of belonging".
MAX ^ind the maximum value of the source time series for all points belonging
to the target time step (point-value time series) or find the maximum value
of the source time series for all time steps contained within the target
time step (mean-value time series). Assign the maximum value to the time
step of the target time series. The definition of "belonging" (given in
Appendix V) was motivated by the desire to make MAX and MIN unique for
point-value time series.
MIN ;;indu the minimum value of the source time series for all points belonqinq
to the target time step (point-value time series) or find the minimum value
of the source time series for all time steps contained within the target
time series (mean-value time series). Assign the minimum value to the time
step of the target time series.
SAME Take the value at each time step or time point of the source time series
and assign the value to the corresponding time point (point-value time
series), the corresponding time step (mean-value time series), or all the
contained time steps (mean-value time series with time step less than the
source time step) of the target time series.
SUM For point-value source time series: Compute the sum of the values for all
points in the source time series belonging to the target series time step
plus the value of the source time series at the initial point of the tarqet
time step and assign the sum to the target time step. For mean- value
source time series: Compute the sum of the values for all time steps in the
source time series containpd within tho t,™0+ series time step and assign
585
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Linkages
4.6.7 Warnings
1. In this block it is not permissible to route several sources to the same
external target. If you want to combine several time series and write the
result to an external target, first use a utility operation (COPY) to combine
the data and then use this block to route the result to the external target.
2. It is catastrophic to refer to the same TSS data set in both the EXT SOURCES
and EXT TARGETS Blocks. That is, you must not try to both read from and write
to the same data set in one run.
3. If the above warnings are not heeded, you may cause irreparable damage to your
TSS.
"i u" 4
586
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Catalog
4.7 Time Series Catalog
This section documents all the time series which are required by, and which can be
output by, all the operating modules in the HSPF system.
The time series are arranged in groups. Thus, to specify an operation associated
time series in the EXT SOURCES, NETWORK or EXT TARGETS Blocks; the user supplies
a group name followed, optionally, by a member name and subscripts.
The time series documented in this section can be separated into three categories:
1. Input only. Some time series can only be input to their operating module (eg
member PREC of group EXTNL in module PERLND) ..
2. Input or output. Some time series can either be input to their operating
module or output from it, depending on the options in effect. For example, if
snow accumulation and melt on a Pervious Land-segment (PLS) is being simulated
in a given RUN, time series WYIELD in group SNOW can be output to the time
Series Store (TSS) . Then, if section SNOW is inactive but section PWATER is
active in a subsequent RUN, the same time series WYIELD may be specified as an
input to the PERLND module. This feature makes it possible to calibrate an
application module in an incremental manner. First, the outputs from section
1 are calibrated to the field data; then the outputs from section 2 are
calibrated using outputs from section 1 as inputs, etc. Sections calibrated in
earlier runs need not be re-run if the needed outputs from them have been
stored.
3. Output only. Some time series can be computed by and output from their
2SS?ia*1ng modu1e> but never sen/e as inputs to it (eg. member ALBEDO of group
SNOW in module PERLND). » H
To run an operating module, the user must ensure that all the input time series
which it requires are made available to it. He does this by making appropriate
entries in the EXT SOURCES or NETWORK blocks. To ascertain which time series are
required, he should consult the Time Series Catalog for the appropriate module
For example, suppose sediment production and washoff/scour from a PLS are being
simulated using snowmelt and water budget results from a previous RUN That is
section SEDMNT is active but sections ATEMP, SNOW and PWATER are not. Then, Table
4. 7(1). 5 shows:
1. member PREC of group EXTNL is a required input time series (member SLSED is
optional)
2* cMnneifS RAINF and SNOCOV of 9™up SNOW are required inputs, because section
SNOW is inactive
3' nnSrnS.SURO and SURS of 9rouP PWATER are required inputs, because section
PWATER is inactive (SUROB and SURSB may also be required)
587
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Catalog
i
The user can obtain further details on the above time series by consulting the,
table for the appropriate group (eg. Table 4.7(l).l for group EXTNL).
table 4.7(1).5 shows which time series are computed in the SEDMNT section of the
PERLND module and may therefore be output (members DETS through SOSDB}.
Thus, in the EXT SOURCES and/or NETWORK blocks, entries must appear which specify
members PREC, RAINF, etc (groups EXTNL, SNOW, PWATER) as targets to which source
time series are routed. Also, in the NETWORK and/or EXT TARGETS blocks, entries
may appear which specify one or more of members DETS through SOSDB (of group
SEDMNT) as source time series, which are routed to other operations or to the TSS.
The tables which follow are otherwise self explanatoryj except for the abbreviation
"ivld" which appears frequently in the "Units" fields. It means "interval of the
data" (to distinguish it from the internal, or simulation interval). Thus, if a
TSS data set containing 1-hour precipitation data is input to an operation with a
DELT of two hours, ivld is 1 hour.
4.7.1 Connection of Surface and Instream Application Modules
• .. ,••:» : •, ' , :•'."• "' M ;.-''•. V*. ,,;i/r'ii;"' iiiii'i . '" '•' ^••!<*'&[: 'w^
In HSPF, the operational connection between the land surface and instream
simulation modules is accomplished through the NETWORK Block and/or the
SCHEMATIC/MASS-LINK Blocks. Time series of runoff, sediment, and pollutant
loadings generated on the land surface are passed to the receiving stream for
subsequent transport and transformation instream. This connection of the IMPL"
and/or PERLND modules with the RCHRES module requires explicit definition
corresponding time series in the linked modules. A one-to-one correspondence''
exists between several land segment outflow time series and corresponding stream
reach inflow time series (e.g. runoff, sediment, dissolved oxygen, etc.); however
in order to maintain flexibility, some of the time series are more general, and no
unique correspondence exists. Also, in some cases, a process or material simulated
in the stream will have no corresponding land surface quantity. For example, the
inflow of plankton to a stream occurs only from upstream reaches and not from a
land segment.
588
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
4.7(1) Catalog for PERLND module
The time series groups associated with this module are shown in Figure 4.7(1)-1.
The members contained within each group are documented in the following tables.
4.7(l).l Group EXTNL
<
Name
Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series always external (input only) to module PERLND:
6ATMP
PREC
DTMPG
WINMOV
SOLRAD
CLOUD
PETINP
SURLI
IFWLI
AGWLI
SLSED
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
- Deg F
- in/ivld
- Deg F
- mi/ivld
- Ly/ivld
- tenths
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- tons/ .
ac.ivld
Deg C
mm/ivld
Deg C
km/ivld
Ly/ivld
tenths
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ iv Id
tonnes/
ha.ivld
Measured air temperature
Measured precipitation
Measured dewpoint temperature
Measured wind movement
Measured solar radiation
Cloud cover (range: 0 - 10)
Input potential E-T
Surface lateral inflow
Interflow lateral inflow
Active groundwater lateral inflow
Lateral input of sediment
4.7(1).2 Group ATEMP
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section ATEMP:
AIRTMP 1 1 - Deg F Deg C
Estimated surface air temperature
over the Land-segment
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group EXTNL
GATMP
PREC
always required
589
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
PERLND Module
tg
*4 ^
H ^
+f
ft ^
H ^
-rf--
*i ^
w
w
EXTNL
ATEMP
PWATER
PSTEMP
PQUAL
PEST
^
^
KEY:
^ Group con
PHOS
> SNOW
V SEDMNT
PWTGAS
J
>\ I/ISILAY
NITR
J
^ IKACER
taining time series which are always input
taining time series which are always output
taining time series which can be input or output
590
Figure 4.7(1)-1 Groups of time series associated with the PERLND module
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).3 Group SNOW
Catalog for PERLND Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section SNOW:
PACK
PACKF
SNOCOV
*
*
in
in
PACKW
PACKI
PDEPTH
RDENPF
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
in
in
in
none
none
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
none
none
ALBEDO
PAKTMP
SNOWF
SNOWE
WYIELD
MELT
RAINF
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
* none
* Deg F
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
none
Deg C
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
Total contents of pack (water equiv)
Frozen contents of pack, ie. snow +
ice (water equivalent)
Liquid water in pack
Ice in pack (water equivalent)
Pack depth
Relative density of frozen contents
of pack (PACKF/PDEPTH)
Fraction of Land-segment covered by
pack
Albedo of the pack
Mean temperature of the pack
Snowfall, water equivalent
Evaporation from PACKF (sublimation),
water equivalent
Water yielded by the pack (released
to the land-surface)
Quantity of melt from PACKF (water
equivalent)
Rainfall
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group EXTNL always required
PREC
DTMPG
WINMOV
SOLRAD
Group ATEMP
AIRTMP
only required if section ATEMP
is inactive
591
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
4.7(1).4 Group PWATER
< Member >
Max subscr
Name val ues
1 .2
K Units
i (external )
n
d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
•, ' ":.. ";.r .I'll Hi!!!, ,, , , ! •• , < •! '."!'!
Time series computed by module section PWATER:
Land-segment-wide
PERS
CEPS
SURS
UZS
IFWS
LZS
AGWS
RPARM
SURO
IF WO
AGWO
PERO
IGWI
PET
CEPE
UZET
LZET
AGWET
BASET
TAET
IFWI
UZI
INFIL
PERC
LZI
AGWI
SURI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
',
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
values:
* in
* in
* in
* in
* in
* in
* in
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- i n/i vl d
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
1111 *
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
Total water stored in the PLS
Interception storage
Surface (overland flow) storage
Upper zone storage
Interflow storage
Lower zone storage
Active groundwater storage
Current value of maximum lower zone
E-T opportunity
Surface outflow
Interflow outflow
Active groundwater outflow
Total outflow from PLS
Inflow to inactive (deep) ground-
water, \ . ';,„, ;;; ; ; ' „„" i; ' ;
Potential E-T, adjusted for snow
cover and air temperature
Evaporation from interception storage
E-T from upper zone
E-T from "lower zone
E-T from active groundwater storage
E-T taken from active groundwater
outflow (baseflow)
Total simulated E-T
Interflow inflow (excluding any
lateral inflow)
Upper zone inflow
Infiltration to the soil
Percolation from upper to lower
zone
Lower zone inflow
Active groundwater inflow (excluding
any lateral inflow)
Surface inflow (including any
lateraJ iRl10^)
592
T )
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group EXTNL
SURLI
IFWLI
AGWLI
PETINP
PREC
Group ATEMP
AIRTMP
Group SNOW
RAINF
SNOCOV
WYIELD
PACKI
optional
optional
optional
required if snow not considered
(CSNOFG= 0)
only required if section ATEMP
inactive and CSNOFG= 1
only required if section SNOW is
inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)
only required if ICEFG= 1
593
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).5 Group SEDMNT
Catalog for PERLND Module
< Member >
Max subscr
Name values
1 2
K Units
i (external)
n
d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section SEDMNT:
Land-segment-wide
DETS
STCAP
WSSD
SCRSD
SOSED
DET
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
values:
* tons/ac
* tons/
ac.ivld
- tons/
ac.ivld
- tons/
ac.ivld
- tons/
ac.ivld
- tons/
ac.ivld
tonnes/ha
tonnes/
ha.ivld
tonnes/
ha.ivld
tonnes/
ha.ivld
tonnes/
ha.ivld
tonnes/
ha.ivld
Storage of detached sediment
Sediment transport capacity
by surface runoff
Washoff of detached sediment
Scour of matrix (attached) soil
Total removal of soil and sediment
Quantity of sediment detached from
soil matrix by rainfall impact
Input time series required to compute the above:
always required
optional
Group EXTNL
PREC
SLSED
Group SNOW
RAINF
SNOCOV
Group PWATER
SURO
SURS
only required if section SNOW
is inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)
only required if section PWATER
is inactive
"til!" "'rSli 'il!:!'1
594
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).6 Group PSTEMP
Catalog for PERLND Module
<
Name
Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section PSTEMP:
AIRTC
SLTMP
ULTMP
LGTMP
Deg F Deg C Air temperature on the PLS
Deg F Deg C Surface layer soil temperature
Deg F Deg C Upper layer soil temperature
Deg F Deg C Lower and groundwater layer
soil temperature
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group ATEMP
AIRTMP
only required if section ATEMP is
inactive
4.7(1).7 Group PWTGAS
<
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
1 2
K
i
n
d
Uni
ts
(external)
Engl
Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section PWTGAS:
SOTMP
IOTMP
AOTMP
SODOX
SOC02
IODOX
IOC02
AODOX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
* Deg F
* Deg F
* Deg F
* mg/1
* mg/1
* mg/1
* mg/1
mg/1
Deg C Temperature of surface outflow
Deg C Temperature of interflow outflow
Deg C Temperature of active groundwater
outflow
mg/1 DO concentration in surface outflow
mg/1 C02 concentration in surface outflow
mg/1 DO concentration in interflow outflow
mg/1 C02 concentration in interflow
outflow
mg/1 DO concentration in active
groundwater outflow
595
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
(continued)
AOC02
SOHT
IOHT
AOHT
PORT
SODOXM
SOC02M
IODOXM
IOC02M
AODOXM
AOC02M
PODOXH
POC02M
Input time
Group SNOW
WYIELD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
series
* mg/1
- BTU/
ac.ivld
- BTU/
ac.ivld
- BTU/
ac.ivld
- BTU/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac.ivld
- W
ac.ivld
- lb/
ac . i vl d
mg/1
Real/
ha.ivld
kcal/
ha.ivld
kcal/
ha.ivld
kcal/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
kg/
ha.ivld
required to compute the
C02 concentration in active
groundwater outflow
Heat energy in surface outflow
(relative to freezing point)
Heat energy in interflow outflow
Heat energy in active groundwater
outflow
Heat energy in total outflow from
PLS
Flux of DO in surface outflow
Flux of C02 in surface outflow
Flux of DO in interflow outflow
Flux of C02 in interflow outflow
Flux of DO in active groundwater
outflow
Flux of C02 in active groundwater
outflow
DO in total outflow from PLS
C02 in total outflow from PLS
above:
only required if section SNOW is
inactive and snow is considered
Group PWATER
SURO
IFWO
AGWO
Group PSTEMP
SLTMP
ULTMP
LGTMP
(CSNOFG= 1)
only required if section PWATER is
inactive
only required if section PSTEMP
is inactive
.•" -'!. I:
596
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).8 Group PQUAL
Catalog for PERLND Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section PQUAL:
SQO NQOF 1
WASHQS NQSD 1
SCRQS NQSD 1
SOQS NQSD 1
SOQO NQOF 1
SOQUAL NQ 1
IOQUAL NQIF 1
AOQUAL NQGW 1
POQUAL NQ 1
SOQOC NQOF 1
SOQC NQ 1
POQC NQ 1
qty/ac
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac . i vl d
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/
ac.ivld
qty/ft3
qty/ha
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/
ha.ivld
qty/i
qty/ft3
qty/ft3
qty/1
qty/1
Storage of QUALOF on the surface
Removal of QUALSD by assoc with
detached sed washoff
Removal of QUALSD by assoc with
scour of matrix soil
Total flux of QUALSD from surface
Washoff of QUALOF from surface
Total outflow of QUAL from the ,
surface
Outflow of QUAL in interflow
(QUALIF)
Outflow of QUAL in active ground-
water outflow (QUALGW)
Total flux of QUAL from the PLS
Concentration of QUALOF in surface
outflow
Concentration of QUAL (QUALSD+
QUALOF) in surface outflow
Concentration of QUAL (total) in
total outflow from PLS
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group PWATER
SURO
IFWO
AGWO
PERO
Group SEDMNT
WSSD
SCRSD
only required if PWATER is inactive
only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALOFs, or if SOQC is required
for one or more QUALs
only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALIFs
only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALGWs
only required if POQC is required
for one or more QUALs
only required if section SEDMNT
is inactive and one or more QUALs
are QUALSD's
597
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
4.7(1).9 Group MSTLAY
*!„" ''/"'I"!: "ill.
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section MSTLAY:
I • .••:
5 1 * Ib/ac kg/ha
MST
FRAC
'), , ....... '"A
8 1
/ivl
/ivl
.
Water in surface, upper princ, upper
auxiliary,, Tower and groundwater
storages
Fractional fluxes thru soil:
FSO,FSP,F!I,FUP,FIO,FLP,FLDP,FAO
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group PWATER:
SURI,LZS,IGWI,AGWI,A6WS,AGWO,
SURS,SURO,INFIL,IFWI,UZI,UZS,
PERC,IFWS,IFWO
only required if section PWATER
is inactive
598
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).10 Group PEST
1
Catalog for PERLND Module
<
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
1 2
K
i
n
d
Units
(external)
Engl
Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section PEST:
SPS
UPS
IPS
IPS
3 NPST
3 NPST
NPST 1
3 NPST
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
Ib/ac
kg/ha
kg/ha
kg/ha
kg/ha
Amount of pesticide
surface storage
Amount of pesticide
principal
Amount of
in
in upper
storage
pesticide in upper
auxiliary (interflow) storage
in lower
Amount of pesticide
layer storage
APS 3 NPST * Ib/ac kg/ha Amount of pesticide in active
groundwater layer storage'
TPS 3 NPST * Ib/ac kg/ha Total amount of pesticide in the
soil
Note: SPS,UPS,LPS,APS and TPS give the storage of each pesticide by species. The
first subscript indicates the species: crystalline, adsorbed, or solution, The
second indicates the pesticide. For example, UPS(2,3) is the quantity of adsorbed
pesticide in the upper layer principal storage, for the 3rd pesticide. The second
subscript for IPS has a maximum value of one because only solution pesticide is
modeled in the upper layer auxiliary (interflow) layer.
TOTPST NPST 1
SDPS 2 NPST
Ib/ac
kg/ha
TSPSS
SSPSS
5 NPST
3 NPST
SDEGPS NPST 1
UDEGPS NPST 1
LDEGPS NPST 1
ADEGPS NPST 1
TDEGPS NPST 1
SOSDPS NPST 1
Total amount of pesticide in the
soil (sum of all species).
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Outflow of sediment-associated
pesticide (SDPSY and SDPSA for each
pesticide)
" " Fluxes of solution pesticide for
the topsoil layers: SOPSS,SPPSS,
UPPSS,IIPSS,IOPSS
" " Fluxes of solution pesticide for
the subsoil layers: LPPSS,LDPPSS,
AOPSS
" " Amount of degradation in surf, layer
" " Amount of degradation in upper layer
" " Amount of degradation in lower layer
" " Amount of degr. in groundw. layer
" ." Total amount of degradation in soil
" " Total outflow of sediment-associated
pesticide (SDPSY + SDPSA)
599
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
POPST NPST 1
TOPST NPST 1
Catalog for PERLND Module
Total outflow of solution pesticide
from the PLS
Total outflow of pesticide from
the PLS
Note: The subscript with maximum value NPST selects the particular pesticide.
For example, POPST(2,1) is the outflow from the PLS of the second
pesticide (in solution).
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group SEDMNT
SOSED
Group PSTEHP
SLTMP
ULTMP
LGTMP
Group MSTLAY
MST
FRAC
only required if section SEDMNT
is inactive
only required if section PSTEMP
is inactive and ADOPFG = 1
only required if section MSTLAY
is inactive
600
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).11 Group NITR
Catalog for PERLND Module
<---_
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
„ 1 ' 2
K
i
n
d
Units
(external)
Engl
Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section NITR:
kg/ha N in surface layer storage
N in upper layer princ storage
" N in lower layer storage
' ]'' N in groundwater layer storage
Total N in soil, by species
In the above, the first subscript selects the species of N: 1 means organic N
2 means adsorbed ammonium, 3 means solution ammonium, 4 means nitrate, 5 means
plant N derived from this layer
SN
UN
LN
AN
TN
5
5
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
Ib/ac
"
11
"
»
IN
1
Ib/ac kg/ha
N in upper layer auxiliary
T , (interflow) storage
In the above, the first subscript selects the species of N: 1 means solution
ammonium, 2 means nitrate (only soluble species are modelled in this storage)
TOTNIT
SEDN
1
1
Ib/ac kg/ha
Total N stored in the PLS (all
species)
2 1 - Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Outflows of sediment-associated N
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux: 1 means organic N removal,
2 means adsorbed ammonium removal
SOSEDN
TSAMS
TSN03
1
5
5
1
1
1
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of sediment-associated
N (orgN + adsorbed ammonium)
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution ammonium in
the topsoil
" Fluxes of nitrate in the topsoil
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:
1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal storage to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper layer principal to upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
*
5 means outflow from PLS with water from upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
storage '
601
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
SSAMS 31- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution ammonium in
the subsoil
SSN03 31-" " Fluxes of nitrate in the subsoil
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:
1 means percolation from the lower layer to the active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from the lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS with water from the active groundwater storage
„ ' ! * " ',1 " . , , ' V ,'+ '" "' i'jijiiifl.!1! i'i ,ni»i" i"1,'1 ' . , " .' , " T"'1'' I ,"' ' ' ' ''.'"!' 1 W
PON03 1 1 Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of N03 from the PLS
PONH4 11-" " Total outflow of NH4 from the PLS
PONITR 1 1 - " " Total outflow of N (N03+NH4+ORGN)
from the PLS.
TDENIF 11-" " Total denitrification in the PLS
1 !i '•'•'••• ." ; • ,:••; ;,„;: i'iv!' ;.•'!• I* .I; t;;1 '_„ ,,' ; ' ' •'•,'''$•'..&•
Input time series required to compute the above:
Same as for section PEST. An input time series need only be supplied if section
PEST and the section which computes it (SEDMNT, PSTEMP or MSTLAY) are inactive.
602
;• [.' IB"1 '"11 JT
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(1).12 Group PROS
Catalog for PERLND Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Fame values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section PHOS:
kg/ ha
SP
UP
LP
AP
TP
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
Ib/ac
ii
n
n
n
P in surface layer storage
P in upper layer princ storage
P in lower layer storage
P in groundwater layer storage
Total P in soil, by species
In the above, the first subscript selects the species of P:
1 means organic P, 2 means adsorbed phosphate, 3 means solution phosphate, 4 means
plant P derived from this layer
IP
1
1
Ib/ac kg/ha
P in upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
. , , ._ storage (solution phosphate)
(only soluble species are modeled in this storage)
TOTPHO
SEDP
1
1
Ib/ac kg/ha Total P stored in the PLS (all
species)
2 1 - Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Outflows of sediment-associated P
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux: 1 means organic P removal,
2 means adsorbed phosphate removal
SOSEDP
TSP4S
1
1
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of sediment-associated
P (orgP + adsorbed phosphate)
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution phosphate in the
topsoil.
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:
1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal storage to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper layer principal to upper layer auxiliary (interflow)
storage
5 means outflow from PLS with water from upper layer auxiliary (interflow) storage
603
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PERLND Module
SSP4S
- Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of solution phosphate in the
subsoil.
In the above, the first subscript selects the flux:
1 means percolation from the lower layer to the active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from the lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS with water from the active groundwater storage
POPHOS
1
Total outflow of P from the PLS.
Input time series required to compute the above:
Same as for section PEST. An input time series need only be supplied if sections
PEST and NITR and the module section which computes it (SEDMNT, PSTEMP or MSTLAY)
are inactive.
604
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
1
Catalog for PERLND Module
4.7(1).13 Group TRACER
<
Name
Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section TRACER:
STRSU 1 1 * Ib/ac kg/ha Tracer in surface layer storage
™5H } } * I " Tracer in upper layer princ storage
1TRSIJ 1 1 * " n Tracer in upper layer auxiliary
storage
j-TRSU 11*" " Tracer in lower layer storage
ATRSU 11*" " Tracer in groundwater layer storage
TRSU 11*" " Total tracer stored in the PLS
TSTRS 5 1 Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Fluxes of tracer in topsoil
In the above, the first subscript indicates the flux:
1 means outflow with surface water outflow
2 means percolation from surface to upper layer principal storage
3 means percolation from upper layer principal to lower layer storage
4 means flow from upper principal to upper auxiliary (interflow) storage
5 means outflow from the PLS from upper layer transitory (interflow) storage
SSTRS
3 1 - Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha. ivld Fluxes of tracer in subsoil
In the above, the first subscript indicates the flux:
1 means percolation from lower layer to active groundwater storage
2 means deep percolation, from lower layer to inactive groundwater
3 means outflow from the PLS from the active groundwater storage
POTRS 1 1 - Ib/ac.ivld kg/ha.ivld Total outflow of tracer from the PLS
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group MSTLAY only required if MSTLAY, PEST, NITR
MST and PHOS are all inactive; else
™AC these time series will already
have been supplied
605
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
, i
"IK' ':," i! ""* • ,'ir i: "i i1 '"iii'j'!"
Catalog for IMPLND Module
4.7(2) Catalog for IMPLND module
The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
i -• ' ^ , , ,.«•»•'•' SHIM >•*'>, ' •i'.1.i:r."-w^1 :;: v ( : :;;''""<;:; ;•; i";=:
The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.
I1 " '., 'ME i'i'i " " '•'. v:,: •.',.• '• ''• ','• .v, i1:*,1":1:?; ",li ••,*
4.7(2).l Group EXTNL
< Member >
Name
Max
subscr
values
1
Time series
GATMP
PREC
DTMPG
WINMOV
SOLRAD
CLOUD
PETINP
SURLI
SLSLD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
always
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
K Units
i (external)
n
d Engl
Metr
external (input only)
- Deg F
- in/ivld
- Deg F
- mi/ivld
- Ly/ivld
- tenths
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- tons/
ac.ivld
Deg C
mm/ivld
Deg C
km/ivld
Ly/ivld
tenths
mm/ivld
mm/ivld
tonnes/
ha.ivld
Descri pti on/comment
1 ' ' ", • ' , • , , | > [,
to module IMPLND:
Measured air temperature
Measured precipitation
Measured dewpoint temperature i
Measured wind movement
Measured solar radiation
Cloud cover (range: 0-10)
Input potential E-T
Surface 1 ateral i nf 1 ow
Lateral input of solids
4.7(2).2 Group ATEMP
Identical to group ATEMP in module PERLND. See Section 4.7(1).2 for documentation.
4.7(2).3 Group SNOW
Identical to group SNOW in module PERLND. See Section 4.7(1).3 for documentation.
606
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for IMPLND Module
IMPLND Module
<
•< — >
<-
-^ ^
-4
^
EXTNL
ATEMP
IWATER
IWTGAS
** SNOW
> SOLIDS
^ IQUAL
KEY:
— Group containing time series which are always input
> Group containing time series which are always output
^ Group containing time series which can be input or output
Figure 4./(z)-i Groups of time series associated with the IMPLND module
607
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(2).4 Group IWATER
Catalog for IMPLND Module
1,,'S', ill" !'M,I'H
^« *•*•••
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
1 2
Time series
IMPS 1
RETS 1
SURS 1
SURO 1
PET 1
IHPEV 1
SURI 1
computed
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
K
n
d
by
*
*
*
Units
(external)
Engl Metr
Descri pt i on/comment
,1*
module section IWATER:
in mm Total water stored in the ILS
in mm Retention storage
in mm Surface (overland flow) storage
in/ivld mm/ivld Surface outflow
in/ivld mm/ivld Potential E-T, adjusted for snow
cover and air temperature
in/ivld mm/ivld Total simulated E-T
in/ivld mm/ivld Surface inflow (including any
lateral inflow if RTLIFG=1)
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group EXTNL
SURLI
PETINP
PREC
Group ATEMP
AIRTMP
Group SNOW
RAINF
SNOCOV
WYIELD
optional
required if snow not considered
(CSNOFG= 0)
only required if section ATEMP
is inactive andI CSNOFG= 1
. ;,; ' : S1:'";, ',:•; '• ' •• • ,'',: , .a. .••
only required if section SNOW is
inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)
608
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(2).5 Group SOLIDS
Catalog for IMPLND Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section SOLIDS:
SLDS 1 1 * tons/ac tonnes/ha Storage of solids on surface
SOSLD 1 1 - tons/ tonnes/ Washoff of solids from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
Input time series required to compute the above:
always required
optional
Group EXTNL
PREC
SLSLD
Group IWATER
SURO
SURS
only required if section IWATER
is inactive
609
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for IMPLND Module
4.7(2).6 Group IWTGAS
< Member >
Max subscr
Name values
1 2
Time series
SOTMP 1
SODOX 1
SOC02 1
SOHT 1
SOOOXM 1
SOC02M 1
computed
1
1
1
1
1
1
K
1
n
d
*
*
*
Units
(external )
Engl Metr
by module
Deg F
mg/1
mg/1
BTU/
ac.ivld
W
ac.ivld
lb/
ac.ivld
Descri pti on/comment
section IWTGAS:
Deg C Temperature of surface outflow
mg/1 DO concentration in surface outflow
mg/1 C02 concentration in surface outflow
kcal/ Heat energy in surface outflow
ha.ivld (relative to freezing point)
kg/ Flux of DO in surface outflow
ha.ivld
kg/ Flux of C02 in surface outflow
ha.ivld
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group ATEMP
AIRTMP
Group SNOW
WYIELD
Group IWATER
SURO
only required if section ATEMP
is inactive
only required if section SH6W
is inactive and snow is considered
(CSNOFG= 1)
only required if section IWATER
is inactive
610
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for IMPLND Module
4.7(2).7 Group IQUAL
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
™~"™™"™™™""™~""'"*~~*'"~~*"*"~~~™~*- — — — ••• — — — — — — -•• — — — —. — •...____ _ •••••••.
Time series computed by module section IQUAL:
cSnc 'K } * qty/!ac qty/ha Storage of QUALOF on the surface
SOQS NQSD 1 - qty/ qty/ Total flux of QUALSD from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQO NQOF 1 - qty/ qty/ Washoff of QUALOF from surface
ac.ivld ha.ivld
SOQUAL NQ 1 - qty/ qty/ Total outflow of QUAL from the
ac.ivld ha.ivld surface
SOQOC NQOF 1 - qty/ft3 qty/1 Concentration of QUALOF in surface
outflow
S°QC NQ 1 - qty/ft3 qty/1 Concentration of QUAL (QUALSD+QUALOF)
in,surface outflow
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group IWATER only required if section IWATER
is inactive
SURO only required if one or more QUALs
are QUALOFs, or if SOQC is required
for one or more QUALs
SOLIDS only required if section SOLIDS
is inactive and one or more QUALs
are QUALSDs
611
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3) Catalog for RCHRES module
The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
The members contained within each group are documented in the following tables.
4.7(3).l Group EXTNL
< Member >
Max subscr
Name values
1 2
K Units
i (external)
n
d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series external to module RCHRES (input only):
PREC
POTEV
COLIND
OUTDGT
IVOL
ICON
SOLRAD
CLOUD
DEWTMP
GATMP
WIND
PHVAL
ROC
BIO
1
1
NEXITS
NEXITS
1
NCONS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NGQUAL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
- in/ivld
- in/ivld
- none
- ft3/s
- ac.ft/
ivld
- qty/ivld
- Ly/ivld
- tenths
- DegF
- DegF
- miles/
ivld
-
- moles/
1
- mg(bio)/
mm/ivld
mm/ ivld
none
m3/s
. Mm3/
ivld
qty/ivld
Ly/ivld
tenths
DegC
DegC
km/
ivld
moles/
1
mg(bio)/
Precip on surface of the RCHRES
(requires AUX1FG = 1)
Potential evaporation from the
surface (requires AUX1FG = 1)
Time series indicating which
(pair of) columns in RCHTAB are
used to evaluate f(VOL) component
of outflow demand
g(t) component of outflow demand
Inflow to the RCHRES
Inflow of conservative constits.
Solar radiation
' ' ,. ' '• "' lll:i' * ' ' iii, ' , ' , ' " 'i ' , " i ' ,
Cloud cover (range 0 thru 10)
Dewpoint
Air temperature at met. station
Wind movement
pH (used in Section GQUAL)
Free radical oxygen concentration
(used in Section GQUAL)
Biomass active in biodegradation
1 1
(used in Section GQUAL)
612
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
RCHRES Module
^
^r
-tf
EXTNL
HYDR
HTRCH
GQUAL
NUTRX
PHCARB
<-
OFLOW
KEY:
- Group con
^| ^ Group con
*
CONS
SEDTRN
OXRX
PLANK
INFLOW
ROfiLOW
taining time series which are always input
taining time series which are always output
taining time series which can be input or output
613
Figure 4.7(3)-l Groups of time series associated with the RCHRES module
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).2 Group HYDR
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Time series computed by module
VOL 1
AUX1FG must be
to be computed:
DEP 1
STAGE 1
AVDEP 1
TWID 1
HRAD 1
SAREA 1
AUX2FG must be
to be computed:
AVVEL 1
AVSECT 1
USTAR 1
TAU 1
RO 1
0 NEXITS
PRSUPY 1
VOLEV 1
ROVOL 1
OVOL NEXITS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
* ac.ft
Descri pti on/comment
section HYDR:
Mm3
Volume of water in the RCHRES
for next 5 members
* ft
* ft
* ft
* ft
* ft
* ac
m
m
m
m
m
ha
Depth at specified location
Stage (DEP+STCOR)
Average depth (volume/surface area)
Mean topwidth (surface area/length)
Hydraulic radius
Surface area
for next 2 members
* ft/s
* ft2
* ft/s
* 1 b/f t2
* ft3/s
* ft3/s
- ac.ft/
ivld
- ac.ft/
ivld
- ac.ft/
ivld
- ac.ft/
ivld
m/s
m2
m/s
kg/m2
m3/s
m3/s
Mm3/
ivld
Mm3/
ivld
Mm3/
ivld
Mm3/
ivld
Average velocity (RO/VOL)
Cross-sectional area averaged over
length of RCHRES (VOL/length)
Shear velocity
Bed shear stress
Total rate of outflow from RCHRES
Rates of outflow through individual
exits
Volume of water contributed by
precip on surface
Volume of water lost by evap
Total volume of outflow from RCHRES
Volume of outflow through
individual exits
Input time series required to compute the above:
optional
Group INFLOW
IVOL
Group EXTNL
PREC
POTEV
COLIND
OUTDGT
optional
optional
required only if ODFVFG is negative
for one or more outflow demands
required only if ODGTFG is >0 for
one or more" outflow demands
614
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).3 Group ADCALC
1
Catalog for RCHRES Module
< ---- Member ---- > K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Time series computed by module section ADCALC:
None of the computed time series are outputtable; they are passed internally to anv
active "quality" sections of the RCHRES module
Input time series required to compute the above:
wn?UP HYDR only reciuired if section HYDR
*OL is inactive
-------------------
4. 7(3). 4 Group CONS
--------------------- . ----------------------------------------------------------
< ---- Member ---- > K Units
Max subscr i (external) Description/comment
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Time series computed by module section CONS:
CON NCONS 1 * concid concid
™ MTc Mo
OCON NEXITS NCONS
Concentration of conservative
constituents
qty/ivld Total outflow of conservatives
qty/ivld qty/ivld Outflow of conservatives through
individual exits
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group EXTNL (or INFLOW)
ICON optional
615
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).5 Group HTRCH
Catalog for RCHRES Module
<—.
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
1 2
K
i
n
d
Units
(external)
Engl
Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section HTRCH:
TW
AIRTMP
HTEXCH
ROHEAT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
_
-
DegF
DegF
BTU/ivld
"
DegC
DegC
kcal,
OHEAT NEXITS 1
Simulated water temperature
Air temperature, adjusted for elev.
difference between gage and RCHRES
Net heat exchanged with atmosphere
Total outflow of thermal energy
through active exits
Outflow of thermal energy through
individual exits
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group INFLOW
IHEAT
Group EXTNL
SOLRAD
PREC
CLOUD
DEWTMP
GATMP
WIND
Group HYDR
AVDEP
optional
optional
always required
optional
only required if section HYDR
is inactive
616
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).6 Group SEDTRN
Catalog for RCHRES Module
<
Name
Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section SEDTRN
SSED
RSED
BEDDEP
DEPSCR
ROSED
OS ED
4 1
10 1
1 1
4 1
4 1
NEXITS 4
mg/1
ton
ft
ton/ivld
mg/1
tonne
m
tonne/ivld
Suspended sediment concentrations
Sediment storages
Bed depth (thickness)
Deposition (positive) or
scour (negative)
Total outflows of sediment
from the RCHRES
Outflows of sediment through
individual exits
Note: In the above, the subscript with maximum value =4 selects the sediment
fraction - 1 for sand, 2 for silt, 3 for clay, and 4 for the sum of sand silt and
clay. The subscript with maximum value =10 selects the following: 1 suspended
sand, 2 suspended silt, 3 suspended clay, 4 bed sand, 5 bed silt 6 bed clay, 7
total sand, 8 total silt, 9 total clay, and 10 total of 7,8,9.
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group INFLOW
ISED(*)
Group HYDR
TAU
AVDEP
AVVEL
RO
HRAD
TWID
Group HTRCH
TW
inflows of sand, silt, and clay
to the RCHRES; optional
only required if Section HYDR is
inactive
| only required if SANDFG = 1 or 2
only required if Section HTRCH
inactive and SANDFG = 1 or 2
is
617
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).7 Group GQUAL
Catalog for RCHRES Module
, .„ ' .'i, if 1ll!!liw|t
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section GQUAL:
DQAL NGQUAL 1 * concu/1 concu/1
SQAL 6 NGQUAL * concu/mg concu/mg
RDQAL NGQUAL 1 * qty qty
RSQAL 12 NGQUAL * qty qty
RRQAL NGQUAL 1
PDQAL NGQUAL 1
* qty qty
- qty/ivld qty/ivld
DDQAL 7 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld
RODQAL NGQUAL 1 - qty/ivld qty/ivld
DSQAL 4 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld
ROSQAL 4 NGQUAL
qty/ivld qty/ivld
SQDEC 7 NGQUAL qty/ivld qty/ivld
ADQAL 7 NGQUAL - qty/ivld qty/ivld
Dissolved concentration of qual.
Concentration of qual on sediment.
First subscript selects:
1 susp sand 2 susp silt 3 susp clay
4 bed sand 5 bed silt 6 bed clay
Total storage of qual in dissolved
form
Storage of sediment-associated qual.
First subscript selects:
1 susp sand 2 susp silt 3 susp clay
4 susp total 5 bed sand 6 bed silt
7 bed clay 8 bed total
9 total on sand 10 total on silt
11 total onclay 12 grand total
Total storage of qual in the RCHRES
Input to this qual in this RCHRES,
from decay of parent quals
Decay of dissolved qual. First
subscript selects decay path:
1 hydrolysis 2 oxidation
3 photolysis 4 volatilization
5 biodegradation 6 general (other)
7 total of 1-6 .
Total outflow of dissolved qual
from the RCHRES
Deposition/scour of qual. First
subscript selects carrier:
1 sand 2 silt 3 clay 4 total
Total outflow of sediment-associated
qual from RCHRES.
First subscript selects carrier:
1 sand 2 silt 3 clay 4 total
Decay of sediment-associated qual
on: 1 susp sand 2 susp silt
3 susp clay 4 bed sand
5 bed silt 6 bed clay 7 total
Adsorption/desorption between
dissolved state and: 1 susp sand
2 susp silt 3 susp clay 4 bed sand
5 bed silt 6 bed clay 7 total
618
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
ODQAL NEXITS NGQUAL- qty/ivld qty/ivld
OSQAL NEXITS NGQ3 - qty/ivld qty/ivld
sand, first qual
silt, first qual
clay, first qual
sand, second qual
etc.
Input time series required to compute the above:
Outflow of dissolved qual
through individual exits.
Outflows of sediment-associated
qual through individual exits.
Second subscript selects:
1 • -
2
3 clay, first qual (NGQ3=
4 sand, second aual NGQUAL*3)
Group INFLOW
IDQAL
ISQAL(*)
Group EXTNL
PHVAL
ROC
BIO(I)
CLOUD
WIND
Group HYDR
AVDEP
AVVEL
Group HTRCH
TW
Group PLANK
PHYTO
Group SEDTRN
SSED(4)
optional
optional
if there is
and Section
if there is
and ROXFG=1
if qual no.
hydrolysis, PHFLAG=1,
PHCARB is inactive
free radical oxidation,
I undergoes
biodegradation and GQPM2(7,I)=1
if there is photolysis, and CLDFG=1
if there is volatilization and water
body is a lake (LKFG=1)
only required if Section HYDR
is inactive
See below
if volatilization
body is a flowing
is on and water
stream (LKFG=0)
only required if Section HTRCH
inactive and TEMPFG=1
only required if Section PLANK is
inactive or PHYFG=0
if there is photolysis and
PHYTFG=1
only required if Section SEDTRN is
inactive
if there is photolysis and SDFG=1
Note: AVDEP is required if Section HYDR is inactive and:
1. There is photolysis
or 2. There is volatilization and
HYDR
j is pnotoiysis
There is volatilization and
a. the water body is a lake
or b. The water body is a free-flowing stream and REAMFG>1
619
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).8.1 Group OXRX
Catalog for RCHRES Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section OXRX:
DOX
BOD
SATDO
OXCF1
*
*
*
rag/1
rag/1
mg/1
rag/1
mg/1
mg/1
Ib/ivld kg/ivld
DO concentration
BOD concentration
Saturation DO concentration
Total outflows of DO '(OXCFl"(l",l) j
and BOD (OXCF1(2,1)) from the RCHRES
OXCF2 NEXITS 2
Outflowsof DO and BOD through
individual exits
In the above, the first subscript selects the exit. The second selects the
constituent: 1 means DO, 2 means BOD.
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group INFLOW
IDOX
IBOD
Group EXTNL
WIND
Group HYDR
AVDEP
AVDEP
Group HTRCH
TW
optional
optional
only needed if LKFG=1 (lake)
• .;, • . i ' ,' v
only required if section HYDR
is inactive
only required if section HTRCH
is inactive
620
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).8.2 Group NUTRX
< Member > K Units
Max subscr 1 (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section NUTRX:
DNUST
SNH4
SP04
DNUST2
RSNH4
3
3
6
12
RSP04 12 1
NUST 4 1
NUCF1 4 1
NUCF2 4 2
NUCF3 4 2
NUCF4 6 1
mg/L
* mg/kg
* mg/kg
- Ibs
- Ibs
- Ibs
- Ibs
mg/L
mg/kg
mg/kg
kg
kg
kg
kg
lb/ivld kg/ivld
Ib/ivld kg/ivld
Ib/ivld kg/ivld
lb/ivld kg/ivld
Dissolved nutrient concentrations;
Subscript 1: 1=N03, 2=TAM, 3=N02,
4=P04, 5=NH4+, 6=NH3.
Particulate NH4-N concentrations;
Subscript 1: l=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay
Particulate P04-P concentrations;
Subscript 1: l=sand, 2=silt, 3=clay
Dissolved nutrient storages; same
subscript values as DNUST
Particulate NH4-N storages; 1-3=
suspended sand, silt, clay, 4=tota1
suspended, 5-7=bed sand, silt, clay,
8=total bed, 9-ll=total sand, total
silt, total clay, 12=grand total
Particulate P04-P storages; same
subscript values as RSNH4
Total nutrient storages in RCHRES,
(dissolved + particulate);
Subscript 1: 1=N03,2=TAM,3=N02,4=P04
Total outflow of dissolved nutrient;
Same subscript values as NUST
Total outflow of particulate NH4 and
P04; Subscript 1: l=(on) sand,
2=silt, 3=clay, 4=total;
Subscript 2: 1 = NH4, 2 = P04
Scour/deposition fluxes of
particulate NH4 and P04;
+ = scour, - = deposition;
same subscript values as NUCF2
Process fluxes for N03;
Subscript 1: l=nitrification,
2=denitrification, 3=BOD decay,
4=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
5=zooplankton death/respir.,
6=benthic algae growth/respir.
621
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
NUCF5 7 1 -Ib/ivld kg/ivld
NUCF6
NUCF7
NUCF8
NUCF9
OSNH4
OSP04
1 1
5 1
4 2
5 4
5 3
5 3
Ib/ivld
Ib/ivld
Ib/ivld
Ib/ivld
Ib/ivld
Ib/ivld
kg/ivld
kg/ivld
kg/ivld
kg/ivld
kg/ivld
kg/ivld
Catalog for RCHRES Module
Process fluxes for TAM;
Subscript 1: l=nitrification,
2=vojatiljzatipn, 3=benthal release,
4=600 decay,
5=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
6=zooplankton death/respir.,
7=benthic algae growth/respir.
Nitrification flux for N02;
(net gain (+) or loss (-) of N02)
Process fluxes for P04; Subscript 1:
l=benthal release, 2=BOD decay,
3=phytoplankton growth/respir.,
4=zooplankton death/respir.,
5=benthic algae growth/respir.
Adsorption (+} or desorption (-) of
NH4 and P04; Subscript 1: l=sand,
2-silt, 3=clay;
Subscript2: 1=NH4, 2=P04
Outflow of dissolved nutrients
through individual exits;
Subscript 1 selects exit,
same as NUCF1
particulate NH4;
selects exit,
l=sand, 2=siIt, 3=clay
particulate P04-P;
Subscript 2
Outflows of
Subscript 1
Subscript 2
Outflows of
Subscript values same as OSNH4
Input time series required to compute the above:
Group INFLOW
IN03, ITAM, IN02,
IP04, ISNH4,ISP04
Group HTRCH
TW
Group SEDTRN
RSED, SSED, OSED,
ROSED, DEPSCR
all optional
only required
is inactive
if section HTRCH
only required if Section SEDTRN is
inactive and if particulate NH4 or
P04 is simulated
NOTE: Ammonia, nitrite and ortho-phosphate may, or may not, be simulated, depending
on the values the user assigns to TAMFG, N02FG and P04FG. If a constituent is not
simulated, those time series associated with it in this list should be ignored.
622
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(3).8.3 Group PLANK
Catalog for RCHRES Module
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series computed by module section PLANK:
PKST3 7 1 * mg/1 mg/1 A group of state variables
In the above, the first subscript selects the state variable:
1 for dead refractory organic N
2 for dead refractory organic P
3 for dead refractory organic C
4 for total organic N (TORN)
5 for total organic P (TORP)
6 for total organic C (TORC)
7 for potential BOD (POTBOD)
(ORN)
(ORP)
(ORC)
PHYTO
ZOO
BENAL
PHYCLA
BALCLA
mg/1
organism/1
mg/m2
ug/1
ug/m2
mg/1
organism/1
mg/m2
ug/l
ug/m2
Phytoplankton concentration
Zooplankton population
Benthic algae
Phytoplankton as chlorophyll a
Benthic algae as chlorophyll a
PKCF1 5 1 - Ib/ivld kg/ivld Total outflows from the RCHRES
In the above, the first subscript selects the constituent:
1 for phytoplankton, 2 for zooplankton, 3 for ORN, 4 for ORP, 5 for ORC
PKCF2 NEXITS 5 - Ib/ivld kg/ivld Outflows through individual exits
In the above, the first subscript selects the exit, the second selects the
constituent -- same code as for PKCF1.
Input time series required to compute the above:
required
all are optional
Group EXTNL
SOLRAD
Group INFLOW
IPHYTO, IZOO, IORN,
IORP, IORC
Group HTRCH
TW
Group SEDTRN
SSED(2)
SSED(3)
only required if section HTRCH
is inactive
only required if section SEDTRN
is inactive
623
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
'.'if • '5
Catalog for RCHRES Module
NOTE: Phytoplankton, zooplankton and benthic algae may, or may not, be simulated,
depending on the values the user assigns to PHYFG,ZOOFG and BALFG. If a
constituent is not simulated, those time series associated with it in this list
should be ignored.
4.7(3).8.4 Group PHCARB
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series computed by module section PHCARB:
i1 , i' • : '!.„, . iM1: i , '. :i • • ' "n , mi .,:p "
PHST 3 1 * see below State varia|)tes
In the above, the first subscript selects the state variable:
1 for total inorganic carbon (TIC) -- units mg/1
2 for carbon dioxide (C02) -- units mg/1
3 for pH
PHCF1 2 1 - Ib/ivld kg/ivld Total outflows of TIC and C02
In the above, the first subscript selects the constituent:
1 for TIC, 2 for C02
PHCF2 NEXITS 2 - Ib/ivld kg/ivld Outflows of TIC and C02 through
individual exits
In the above, the first subscript selects the exit and the second the
constituent -- same code as for PHCF1
Input time series required to compute the above:
'! mil, "]' 1L1": n,! HI:
Group INFLOW
ITIC
IC02
Group CONS
CON(ALKCON)
Group HTRCH
TW
optional
optional
only required if section CONS is
inactive
concentration units must be mg/1 as
CaCQS
" .>•:• , !l *]",'•,: " ''•• •'•. , '''' "''' , '•
only required if section HTRCH
is inactive
624
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).10 Groups INFLOW, ROFLOW and OFLOW
The members in these groups represent the total inflow, total outflow and outflow
through individual RCHRES exits of every simulated constituent. These groups were
included in the catalog to make it easier for users to specify the linkages
representing time series passed from one RCHRES to another. For example, assume
the RCHRES's in a run have sections HYDR, HTRCH and OXRX active, and the NETWORK
Block contains:
NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-x--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> #. # <Name> # # ***
RCHRES
RCHRES
1 ROFLOW
2 OFLOW
RCHRES 2 INFLOW
RCHRES 3 INFLOW
These entries mean that the entire outflow from RCHRES 1 goes to RCHRES 2, and that
the outflow through exit 2 of RCHRES 2 goes to RCHRES 3. Because the "member name"
fields have been left blank, HSPF will automatically expand the above entries,
generating an entry for each member which is active in this run. In this case,
there will be 4 generated entries because 4 constituents are being simulated
(water, heat, DO and BOD). The second s,et of generated entries would be:
NETWORK
<-Volume-> <-Grp> <-Member-x--Mult-->Tran <-Target vols> <-Grp> <-Member-> ***
<Name> # <Name> # #<-factor->strg <Name> # # <Name> # # ***
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OVOL 21 1.0
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OHEAT 21 1.0
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OXCF2 2 1 1.0
RCHRES 2 OFLOW OXCF2 22 1.0
RCHRES 3 INFLOW IVOL 1 1
RCHRES 3 INFLOW IHEAT 1 1
RCHRES 3 INFLOW OXIF 1 1
RCHRES 3 INFLOW OXIF 2 1
Thus, the user can specify the linkage between two RCHRES's with a single entry,
instead of having to supply an entry for every constituent passed between them.
625
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).10.1 GROUP INFLOW
,,
P'j 'a'1'
I il
The members in this group represent the inflows to a RCHRES. Note that each member
listed below is "available" for use only if the module section to which it belongs
1s active.
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
IVOL
ICON
IHEAT
ISED
IDQAL
ISQAL
OXIF
NUIF1
NUIF2
PKIF
PHIF
1 1 - ac.ft/
ivld
NCONS 1 - qty/
ivld
1 1 - BTU/
ivld
3 1 - ton/
ivld
NGQUAL 1 - qty/
ivld
3 NGQUAL - qty/
ivld
2 1 - lb/
ivld
4 1 - lb/
ivld
3 2 - lb/'
ivld
5 1 - lb/
ivld
2 1 - lb/
ivld
Mm3/
ivld
qty/
ivld
kcal/
ivld
tonne/
ivld
qty/
ivld
qty/
ivld
kg/
ivld
kg/
ivld
kg/
ivld
kg/
ivld
kg/
ivld
Module
section
HYDR
CONS
.
HTRCH
SEDTRN
GQUAL
GQUAL
OXRX
NUTRX
NUTRX
PLANK
PHCARB
Constituent
Water
Conservatives
., . ,. , „ , . ,,.
Heat (relative to
freezing)
i' t'W ''. J' 7 ' „ ., • i, , t • •
Sand, silt, and clay
Dissolved general
quality constituents
General quality
constituent associated
with: 1 Sand, 2 Silt,
3 Cl ay
1=DO, 2=BOD
1=N03, 2=TAM, 3=N02,
4=P04
l=particulate NH4 on
sand, silt, clay and
2=particulate P04 on
sand, silt, clay
l=Phyto, 2=Zoo, 3=ORN,
4=ORP, 5=ORC
'i!|l' ,'![.•' ;, ,„,!'* n'1!"' :' " „:' ' ' ,: ,,. " i • , "' ''Hi ',
1=TIC, 2=C02
ji- -
626
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).10.2 Group ROFLOW
The members in this group represent the total outflow from a RCHRES. Note that a
member is "available" for use only if the module section to which it belongs is
active.
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Module
section
Constituent
ROVOL 1 1
ROCON NCONS I
ROHEAT 1 1
ROSED 3 1
RODQAL NGQUAL 1
ROSQAL 3 NGQUAL
OXCF1 2 1
NUCF1 4 1
NUCF2 3 2
PKCF1 5. 1
PHCF1 2 1
See data for
corresponding
member in group
INFLOW
Water
Conservatives
Heat
Sand, silt, and clay
Dissolved general qual.
Sediment-associated qual.
DO, BOD
N03, TAM, N02, P04
Particulate NH4 and P04
(sand, silt, clay)
Phyto, Zoo, ORN, ORP, ORC
TIC, C02
627
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for RCHRES Module
4.7(3).10.3 Group OFLOW
The members in this group represent the outflows through the individual exits of
a RCHRES. Note that a member is available for use only if the module section to
which it belongs is active.
For each member, the RCHRES exit is selected by the value given to the first
subscript.
< Member —•-> K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Module
section
Constituent
OVOL NEXITS 1
OCON NEXITS NCONS
CHEAT NEXITS 1
OSED NEXITS 3
ODQAL NEXITS NGQUAL
OSQAL NEXITS NGQ3*
OXCF2 NEXITS 2
NUCF9 NEXITS 4
OSNH4 NEXITS 3
OSP04 NEXITS 3
PKCF2 NEXITS 5
PHCF2 NEXITS 2
See data for
Corresponding
member in group
INFLOW
Water
Conservatives
Heat
Sand, silt, and clay
^•'••Tr-'lK^^'^'l " «'v:" '..••< • •, :'"i'
Dissolved general qua!.
Sediment-associated qual.
DO, BOD
N03, NH3, N02, P04
Particulate NH4
(sand, silt, clay)
1 "'' '! '!'";. ' i •','', . ,; ; '! »' '. ,:• t
Particulate P04
(sand, silt, clay)
Phyto, Zoo, ORN, ORP, ORC
TIC, C02
* NGQ3 - NGQUAL*3. See documentation for Group GQUAL for further
explanation of this subscript.
628
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for COPY Module
4.7(11) Catalog for COPY module
The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
4.7(11)-!.
The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.
4.7(11).! Group INPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series input to module COPY:
POINT
MEAN
NPT
NMN
anything
anything
Point-valued input time series
Mean-valued input time series
4.7(11).2 Group OUTPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series output by module COPY:
POINT
MEAN
NPT
NMN
anything
anything
Point-valued output time series
Mean-valued output time series
Input time series required to produce the above:
Group INPUT
POINT
MEAN
required if NPT> 0
required if NMN> 0
629
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for COPY Module
INPUT
OUTPUT
KEY:
• Group containing time series which are always Input
• Group containing time series which are always output
• Group containing tlm» series which can be Input or output
Figure 4.7(11)-!
Groups of time series
associated with the
COPY module
fe
J
i
3
3
-^
< J
KEY:
> Group cor
>- Group cor
EXTNL
ATEMP
IWATER
1WTGAS
talnlng time serf
talning time seri
* SNOW
w
' IQUAL
es which are always output •,
es which can be Input or output
Figure 4.7(12)-!
Groups of time series
associated with the
PLTGEN module
630
|
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for PLTGEN Module
4.7(12) Catalog for PLTGEN module
There is only one time series group associated with this module; group INPUT, which
contains all point-valued and/or mean-valued members that are to be plotted. This
module does not have an output group because all its output goes to the "plot
file", which is documented in Section 4.4(12) of Part E.
4.7(12).! Group INPUT
<
Name
Member >
Max subscr
values
1 2
K
i
n
d
Units
(external)
Engl
Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series input to module PLTGEN:
POINT
MEAN
NPT
NMN
anything
anything
Point-valued input time series
Mean-valued input time series
631
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
4.7(13) Catalog for DISPLY module
Catalog for DISPLY Module
There is only one time series group (INPUT) with one member (TIMSER) associated
with this module since the module displays only one time series at a time. This
module does not have an output group because all its output goes to the "display
file" (printed).
4.7(13).! Group INPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series input to module DISPLY:
TIMSER 1 1 - anything
A mean-valued input time series
632
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for DURANL Module
4.7(14) Catalog for DURANL module
There is only one time series group (INPUT) with one member (TIMSER) associated
with this module since the module analyzes only one time series at a time. This
module does not have an output group because all its output is printed. The format
is documented in Section 4.2(14) of Part E.
4.7(14).! Group INPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series input to module DURANL:
TIMSER 1 1 - anything
A mean-valued input time series
633
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
,'•".' . '' v. ::i:''"' :i'ii "•'• ;'*$r
Catalog for GENER Module
4.7(15) Catalog for GENER module
,,i
This module has both input and output groups, like moduleCOPY (Figure 4.7(11)-!).
t
The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.
4.7(15).! Group INPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series input to module GENER:
ONE
TWO
anything
anything
.• .r...-
First input time series
Second input time series
4.7(15).2 Group OUTPUT
< Member ----> K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Descri pti on/comment
Time series output by module GENER:
TIMSER 1 1 - anything Output time series (mean-valued)
Input time series required to produce the above:
Group INPUT
ONE always required
TWO
Only required if generation option
needs two inputs.
"J .i.5 i ',!!
634
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Catalog for MUTSIN Module
4.7(16) Catalog for MUTSIN module
The time series groups associated with this application module are shown in Figure
4.7(16)-!.
The members contained within each group are documented in the tables which follow.
4.7(16).! Group OUTPUT
< Member > K Units
Max subscr i (external)
Name values n
1 2 d Engl Metr
Description/comment
Time series output by module MUTSIN
POINT
MEAN
NPT
NMN
anything
anything
Point-valued output time series
Mean-valued output time series
OUTPUT
Figure 4.7(16)-!
Groups of time series
associated with the MUTSIN
module
635
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
FORMATS Block
4.8 FORMATS Block
Layout
12345678
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
FORMATS
***
<ft>< obj-fmt -- -
. • : . "' •.*"•''?' •' •• '<•" : '<•>'•
*** line immed above repeats until all formats have been covered
*
; ,, •, " a 'Ji'
END FORMATS
Details
Symbol
FORTRAN
Name(s)
Format
Comment
<ft>
<obj-frot>
FMTCOD
FORM(19)
14
19A4
Identifying no. which corresponds to
format no. in EXT SOURCES or TARGETS
Blocks.
'!>„]"!<
'iSi:
Standard FORTRAN object-time format.
Explanation
This block is only required if a user wishes to override the default format for
reading or recording data on a sequential file (see Section 4.9).
636
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sequential File Formats
4.9 Sequential and PLTGEN/MUTSIN File Formats
The following formats, for transfer of data to or from sequential files, are
presently supported in the HSPF system:
4.9.1 Format class HYDFIV
It is used for the input of 5-minute data. The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier (this field is not read)
2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card number 1 is for midnight to 3 am.
2 is for 3 am to 6 am.
3 is for 6 am to 9 am.
4 is for 9 am to noon.
5 is for noon to 3 pm.
6 is for 3 pm to 6 pm.
7 is for 6 pm to 9 pm.
8 is for 9 pm to midnight.
6. 36 fields for 5-minute data.
The default format is: (1X,3I2,I1,36F2.0)
4.9.2 Format class HYDFIF
It is used for the input of 15-minute data. The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station number or identifier (this field is not read).
2. Last two digits of the calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card number (same as for HYDFIV above)
6. 12 fields for 15-minute data
The default format is: (1X,3I2,I1,12F6.0)
637
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sequential File Formats
4.9.3 Format class HYDHR
It is used for input of hourly observations. The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station no. or identifier, (this field is not read)
2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Card no: 1 is for a.m. hours
2 is for p.m. hours
6. Twelve fields for hourly data
The default format is: (10X,I2,1X,I2,1X,I2,lX,Il,12F5.p)
4.9.4 Format class HYDDAY
It is used for input of daily observations. The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station no. or identifier. (This field is not read)
2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Month
4. Card no: 1 is for days 1-10
2 is for days 11-20
3 is for days 21-
5. Ten fields, for the daily data (11 fields for card no. 3)
The default format is: (7X,2I2,I1,11F6.0)
4.9.5 Format class HYDSMN
It is used for input of semi-monthly observations.
The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station no. or identifier. (This field is not read)
2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Card no: 1 for January through June
2 for July through December
4. Twelve semi-monthly fields
The default format is: (7X,I2,I1,12F5.0)
Semi-monthly values are distributed to daily values with a transformation function
of SAME.
638
: i ,„,,!.. ;;; "ii j;!i!ii:'.iii|.|. ,, .'.iiiiiimiiiiiii..;!!, ,;,,,ii.i::,... -jii I j. ' , (in .... j 'in .niHi'i .i,;, i i:1;.' i"....,,i: Hi:, In. .'it.ill1,' '.i ill'
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sequential File Formats
4.9.6 Format class HYDMON
It is used for input of monthly observations. The sequence of information is:
1. Alpha-numeric station no. or identifier. (This field is not read)
2. Last two digits of calendar year
3. Twelve monthly fields
i
The default ^ormat is: (6X,I2,12F6.0)
Monthly values are distributed to daily values with a transformation function of
SAME.
Note that the user can override the above default formats 'with his own format,
supplied in the FORMATS BLOCK. He can not, however, alter the sequence of
information within each record.
4.9.7 PLTGEN/MUTSIN File Format
Time series data can be transferred to or from ASCII files having the PLTGEN/MUTSIN
format, i.e., the format of files created by the PLTGEN module and readable by the
MUTSIN module. This file contains a header, which is 25 lines for PLTGEN and at
least one line for MUTSIN. Each line of data contains a date-time and between one
and ten data values (curves). The sequence of information for each data line is
as follows:
1. Identifier (four characters)
2. Year
3. Month
4. Day
5. Hour
6. Minute
7. Value for curve 1, for this date/time
8. Value for curve 2, for this date/time
etc (repeats until data for all curves are supplied)
Format: A4,1X,I5,4I3,10(2X,G12.5)
639
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
., ,„ „,, , „,„, ,;;, ,, , ,,,,,,,„,,,„ ,,,,„,,,,„ I • | ,„„, ,, „,,,„)
' '"" ' '" ' "' ' ''"' "" ' "I " '''"'
Sequential File Formats
4.10 SPEC-ACTIONS Block
1 2 ' 3 4" ' " " 5 " 6 7 8""
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
******v
Layout
******
SPEC-ACTIONS
<oper><fx-l>
<yr><m><d><h><m><tc> <vari><l><2><3><ax-value-->
" ." , '. or '2 ""', '.'
<ad> -•-
(repeats until all special actions have been specified)
END SPEC-ACTIONS
*******
Example
*******
'I- 'V" ," 'il-'F
SPEC-ACTIONS
***********************************************^
Date and time type- AddrKction- Quantity***
code code
Operations
"Type f to#
***
Increment surface storage of pesticide to represent field applic.
PERLND 1 1990/01/01 03 3 SPS 21 2 0.625
PERLND 1 1990/01/01 03 3 2514 2 80.0
END SPEC-ACTIONS
***
640
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Special Actions Block
Details
Symbol
<oper>
<f>
<1>
<yr>
<m>
<d>
<h>
<m>
<tc>
<vari>
<1>
<2>
<3>
<a>
<value>
Fortran
name(s)
OPTYP
TOPFST
TOPLST
DATIM(l)
DATIM(2)
DATIM(3)
DATIM(4)
DATIM(5)
TYPCOD
VNAME
NSUB(l)
NSUB(2)
NSUB(3)
ACTCOD
RVAL or
IVAL
Format
A6
13
14
14
IX, 12
IX, 12
IX, 12
IX, 12
14
A6
13
13
13
14
F10.0
110
Comment
operation type - valid values are
PERLND, IMPLND, RCHRES, or PLTGEN
first operation to act upon
last operation to act upon, 0 or blank
means use first operation only
year (see starting date field in
GLOBAL block for more information)
month
day
hour
minute
2-INTEGER, 3 -REAL, 4-DOUBLE PRECISION
variable to act upon, left- justified
first subscript for VNAME,
0 if none exists
second subscript for VNAME,
0 if none exists
third subscript for VNAME,
0 if none exists
action code: 1- reset variable,
2- increment variable
see notes below
641
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
' • I "
i
"'"'"I1 T ' '
Special Actions Block
Notes:
The <value> field contains quantitative data for the action to be taken. If the
variable or array element to be acted on is an integer (TYPCOD=2) <value> is read
as an integer (IVAL); If it is REAL (TYPCOD=3 or 4), <value> is read as a real
number (RVAL). Note that the value must be given in the units used internally for
the quantity concerned, because no conversion is performed when it is read in. You
can find the internal units by looking up the quantity in the Operations Status
Vector (for the module concerned), contained in the Programmer's Supplement. For
example:
1. Pesticide storage (module PERLND) has units of Ib/ac (English) and kg/ha
(Metric); the same units are used internally and externally.
2. Sediment storage (module PERLND) has internal units of tons/acre (in both
English and Metric systems) but the external units (English and Metric) are
tons/acre and tonnes/ha respectively.
For a discussion of the purpose of this Block, see Section 4.03 of Part E.
642
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
APPENDIX I
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
1.0 NATURE OF THE GLOSSARY
The glossary which follows is not exhaustive. Its function is to introduce terms
which may be new and to assign definite meanings to ambiguous terms. It is not a
dictionary. The goal is not to provide formally correct definitions but to supply
explanations adequate for practical purposes. Thus in some cases, the definition
of a term is followed by a further explanatory note.
2.0 GLOSSARY
The list that follows is arranged alphabetically. Any word enclosed in parentheses
( ) may optionally be omitted from a term i'n everyday use, provided that the
context ensures that its use is implied.
ACTUAL ARGUMENT
The name of an item (or set) of data which is being passed to (or retrieved from)
a subprogram via an argument list. It can be:
(1) a variable name
(2) an array or array element name
(3) any other expression
(4) the name of an external procedure
(5) a Hollerith constant
ANNIE
An interactive program designed for management of WDM files and their data. ANNIE
functions include file creation, data set management, and data analysis,
modification, and display.
APPLICATION MODULE
A module which simulates processes which occur in the real world.
BUFFER
A portion of machine memory space used for the temporary storage of input or
output-bound data.
COMPUTATIONAL ELEMENT
See "element."
CONCEPTUAL DATA STREAM
A stream of related data that are independent of any physical input-output device.
643
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
I i": »' "'"HI I liailliiif'ilij'i'ilririlEi l [.' 'j
Glossary
COPY " ' ',;;','„' ;; ; "!'',;; '.!' ',..'' "
A utility module used to copy time series data. COPY is typically used to transfer
data from a sequential file to the WDM file or time series store (TSS).
(TIME SERIES) DATA SET
A data set in the time series store, containing one or more time series.
DIRECT ACCESS FILE
A disk file whose records are read from or written to a specific location within
the file. Any record in the file may be accessed at""any time. Contrast with
sequential file.
DIRECTED GRAPH
A group of processing units arranged with unidirectional paths between them. No
bi-directional paths or cycles are allowed.
DIRECTORY
The first data set in the time series store. It contains information pointing to
other data sets.
DISPLY
A utility module used to print time series data and summaries of the data.
DUMMY ARGUMENT
The local name (in a subprogram) for an actual argument which is passed to the
subprogram.
DURANL
A utility module used to examine the behavior of a time series, computing a
variety of statistics related to its' excursions above and below certain specified
levels.
ELEMENT as used in simulation
A collection of nodes and/or zones, e.g. segment no.1,reach no. 20.
ELEMENT TYPE
A name which describes elements having a common set of attributes, for example,
Pervious Land-segment, Reach/Mixed Reservoir.
ERRFL
A formatted self documenting file which contains the text of HSPF error messages.
EXECUTABLE PROGRAM
A self contained computing procedure. It consistsof a main program and its
required subprograms.
FEEDBACK ELEMENT
An element which is situated in a loop in a network or which is connected to
another element by one or more bi-directional flux linkages.
644
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
FEEDBACK REGION
A group of connected feedback elements. Information and constituent transfers
across the boundaries of a feedback region are uni-directional, but internal fluxes
can be bi-directional.
FLOWCHART
A schematic two-dimensional representation of the logic in a program or program
unit. The level of detail in a flowchart depends on its purpose.
FLUX
The rate of transfer of fluid, particles or energy across a given surface.
FUNCTION as used in program design, not in Fortran language
A transformation which receives input and returns output in a predictable manner.
Most functions within a program can be classified into one of three types: input,
process, or output. Usually, there is a hierarchy of functions—high level
functions contain subordinate functions.
GENER
A utility module used to perform any one of several transformations on one or more
input time series.
HSPF
see Hydrological Simulation Program Fortran
Hydro!ogical Simulation Program Fortran (HSPF)
A set of computer codes that can simulate the hydrologic and associated water
quality processes on the land surface and in streams and well mixed impoundments.
IMPLND
An application module which simulates the water quantity and quality processes
which occur on an impervious land segment.
INFOFL
A formatted self documenting file which contains material used by the run
interpreter in processing the user's control input.
INGRP
A group of HSPF operations which share the same internal scratch pad (INPAD).
INPAD
see INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD
INPAD AREA
The space available in core for the storage of time series data in the INPAD. It
is the difference between the area of the common block SCRTCH and the longest OSV
in the INGRP.
645
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
!";; W1,:11!.'' Mi" "W :J"1- V!/fc1 • ill • ™* .Mil'.* -Ml
Glossary
INPAD WIDTH
The number of time intervals which are present in the INPAD during a run. This is
the INPAD area divided by the maximum number of rows of the time series data. HSPF
uses fewer disk input/output operations with longer INPAD widths.
INPUT TIME SERIES
Time series which are read in a given simulation run.
INSPAN
see INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD SPAN
INTER SECTION DATA TRANSFER (ISDT)
The movement of information from one section to another within a module.
INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD (INPAD)
The space in core where time series data is accessed by modules. It functions as
a large buffer for this data.
INTERNAL SCRATCH PAD SPAN (INSPAN)
The real world time which corresponds to the INPAD width.
IVL
See SIMULATION INTERVAL
JOB , ' ,. ,',,,'.. „,' „. . .. V ,,,' !..•'....
The work performed by HSPF in response to the instructions found in a complete set
of User's Control Input.
KIND
A descriptor which implies either point or mean with regard to a time series.
MEAN VALUED DATA
Data which represents the behavior of a time series over time intervals rather than
at specific points in time.
MIXED RESERVOIR
A water body which is assumed to be completely mixed.
.•'... i . .. " ':.<;«-I "« ' !,' "'"I ., ; ;, •:• '!' '•', , , (»" "•/I,',1" ' 'i "' "f: '' ' "''"'*
MODEL ' ' '' """ ' '": : "! ;'l!:' '"' ""'" "'":" '! ""I:::' ' "' """'" ''* lil"1' 4 S"":l
A set of algorithms, set in a logical structure, which represents a process. A
model is implemented using modules of code.
MODULE
A set of program units which performs a clearly defined function.
MODULE SECTION
A part of an Application Module which can be executed; independently of the other
parts, eg. SEDMNT in module PERLND.
646
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
MUTSIN
A "Ji^ty module used to read a sequential external file which has the same format
as the file produced by the PLTGEN module. MUTSIN makes the time series data on the
external file available for use by other modules.
NETWORK
A group of connected processing units. Information and/or constituents flow
between processing units through uni-directional linkages. That is, no processing
umt may pass output which indirectly influences itself (no feedback loops) These
constraints make it possible to operate on each processing unit separately,
considering them in an "upstream" to "downstream" order.
NODE
A point in space where the value of a spatially variable function can be
determined.
OM
see OPERATING MODULE
OPERATING MODULE (OM)
A set of HSPF program units which perform a series of process functions for a
specified time on a given set of input time series and produce a specified set of
output time series.
OPERATION
In HSPF: execution of code which transforms a set of input time series into a set
of output time series, for example, execution of a application module or a utility
module. See "simulation operation," "utility operation."
OPERATIONS STATUS VECTOR (OSV)
The data structure for an operating module. The OSV contains all the information
(parameters, state variables) needed to describe the status of an operation and to
restart it after an interruption.
OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR (OSUPER)
The HSPF program units which oversee the execution of operating modules and
related time series movement.
OSUPER
see OPERATIONS SUPERVISOR
OSUPFL
This direct access file contains instructions which the Operation Supervisor reads
to manage the operations in a run. This includes information of the configuration
of the SCRATCH PADS, EXGROUPs and INGROUPs, and locations of detailed infXt on
about each operation.
OSV
see OPERATION STATUS VECTOR
647
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
OSVFL
This direct access file contains the operation status vector for each operation in
a run. It is used to pass details of each operation from the run interpreter to
the operations supervisor and to restore the OSV in core when the operation is
resumed after interruption by the operations supervisor to process other operations
in the INGROUP.
OUTPUT TIME SERIES """'"' .Y. . + Y
Time series which are generated during a simulation run. They do not have to be
stored in the time series store.
A variable used in a function which determines the transformation of the input to
the function to the output of the function.
PARTITION (an operation)
The execution of different sections of an application module in separate runs.
Time series involved in inter section data transfers must be stored between runs.
' i | • • : • V '.'/i.::1-:?^ jj,'v: .:'•:,'I1. I rVft'tfiV' /^^IJtylr^:
PERLND ''. ".'.".""'
An application module which simulates the water quantity an quality processes which
occur on a pervious land segment.
PERVIOUS LAND SEGMENT (PLS)
A segment of land with a pervious surface.
PHYSICAL PROCESS
A process occurring in the real world.
PLS
see PERVIOUS LAND SEGMENT
H "\ . ' • . ,i ' , , ;. , .'. ••• •• . ' '•• :. ,;•• ' '•;'$'• «. •";' , ,' ' ,,!',;,;!"'' 'I1/. * '"i. " •*/ -1
A utility module used to write a sequential external file containing up to 10 time
series and related commands for a stand alone plotting program.
POINT VALUED DATA . ' :
Data which represents the behavior of a time series at specific points in time
rather than over time intervals.
PROCESS
In the real world: A continuing activity, for example, percolation, chemical
reaction. See "physical process."
• ' > , • c: . ... :; . , • :, ' -ij
PROCESSING UNIT (PU) ..,**.
An element or group of related elements which is simulated for a period of time.
Input comes from external sources or Processing Units which have completed
simulating for the given period of time. Output goes to other processing units of
external targets.
648
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
PROGRAM
A complete set of code, consisting of one or more program units, the first of which
is the "main" program unit.
PSEUDO CODE
An English-like representation of the logic in a program unit.
PU
see PROCESSING UNIT
RCHRES
An application module which simulates the water quantity and quality processes
which occur in a reach of open or closed channel or a completely mixed lake.
REACH
A free-flowing portion of a stream, simulated in HSPF using storage routing.
RUN
A set of operations which are performed serially and cover the same period of time.
RUN INTERPRETER
The HSPF module which reads and interprets the User's Control Input. It sets UD
internal information on the OSVPFL instructing the system regarding the sequence
of operations to be performed, stores parameters and state variables for each
operation on the OSVFL, writes instructions on the TSGETF and TSPUTF related to the
movement of time series data and performs other minor functions.
SECTION
see MODULE SECTION
SEGMENT
A portion of the land assured to have areally uniform properties.
SEQUENTIAL FILE
A file whose records are organized on the basis of their successive physical
positions, such as on magnetic tape or cards. A record may be accessed only after
the previous record has been accessed.
SIMPLE ELEMENT
An element which is not a feedback element.
SIMULATION
Imitation of the behavior of a prototype, using a model. We implement the model
on a computer using an application module.
SIMULATION INTERVAL
The internal time step used in an operation.
SIMULATION MODULE
See APPLICATION MODULE
649
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
SIMULATION (OPERATION)
Simulation of a specified prototype for a specified period.
SOFTWARE
A logically complete set of code and user documentation. This term is generally
reserved for code which is designed to be used by others and which conforms to a
standard language, with minor specified extensions.
' ' ' ' '' '"
. ,
SPACFL
This direct access file contains special action instructions.
specify a change to a variable on OSV at a specific time.
These instructions
STATE VARIABLE
A variable containing the current value of a storage or other measurable quantity.
It may change through time.
STRUCTURE CHART
A diagram which documents the result of structured (program) design. It indicates
the program units, their relationships (including hierarchy) and, optionally, the
data passed between them.
SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A comprehensive set of documents which enable a user to understand and use a
software product. It should include:
(1) a discussion of the underlying principles
a discussion of the mathematical relations which the code implements
documentation of the structure of the code
a listing of the code
documentation of data and file structures, including the input required
to run the program.
TIME SERIES
A series of chronologically ordered values giving a discrete representation of the
variation in time of a given entity.
(TIME SERIES) DATA SET
A data set in the time series store, containing one or more time series.
TIME SERIES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (TSMS)
The modules of HSPF which are concerned with manipulation of time series or the
files used to store time series. It includes the TSS management functions and
TSGET and TSPUT.
TIME SERIES STORE (TSS)
A direct access file used for medium/long term storage of time series. It is
recommended that WDM files be used instead of TSS whenever possible. Active
maintenance of the TSS system has ceased. TSS will be removed in Release 11.
TIME SERIES STORE MANAGEMENT (TSSM)
The HSPF module which maintains a User's Time Series Store (TSS) and performs some
housekeeping chores associated with the data sets in it. TSSM and other TSS
functions will be removed in Release 11.
650
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
TSPUT
The HSPF module which moves time series data from the INPAD to a WDM file or TSS.
TSPUTF
This direct access file contains instructions which direct module TSPUT"s movement
of time series data.
TSMS
see TIME SERIES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
TSGET
The HSPF module which moves time series data from a WDM file, TSS, or sequential
file to the INPAD.
TSGETF
This direct access file contains instructions which direct module TSGET's movement
of time series data.
TSS
see TIME SERIES STORE
TSSM or TSSMGR
see TIME SERIES STORE MANAGEMENT
UCI
see USER'S CONTROL INPUT
USER'S CONTROL INPUT
The file in which the user specifies the operations to be performed in a run, the
parameters and initial conditions for each one, and the time series to be passed
between them. HSPF reads this from a card image sequential file. It is also used
to instruct the TSSMGR section of HSPF.
UTILITY MODULE
A module which performs operations on time series which are peripheral to the
simulation of physical processes, for example, data input, plot generation,
statistical analysis.
UTILITY OPERATION
Execution of a utility module.
VOLUME
A source (WDM, TSS, sequential file or INPAD) or target (WDM or TSS) for the time
series data.
WARNFL
A formatted self documenting file which contains the text of HSPF warning messages.
651
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Glossary
Watershed Data Management (WDM) File
A direct-access, binary file containing multiple time series data sets. This file
is the primary storage file for HSPF time series data, and it is intended to
replace the TSS file system. WDM files are created and maintained by the ANNIE
program and related-software.
WDM File (see above)
WORLD VIEW
A representation of the real world which includes- simplifying assumptions of
physical processes.
ZONE
A finite portion of the real world.
a spatially variable quantity.
It is usually associated with the integral of
652
i1, nil '.„„! idiijh, :„ I/v
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sample Runs
APPENDIX II
SAMPLE RUNS
1.0 SUMMARY OF TEST RUNS
The distribution materials for HSPF supplied by EPA contains a set of 14 test runs
which exercise all the major portions of the HSPF code. Both input and output is
included on the tape. A matrix of HSPF sections and the various test runs is shown
in Figure 1. Any test run which tests a section of the HSPF code that the user
anticipates using should be executed. Output must be checked carefully for any
discrepancies. The test run may then be used as a basis for the user's input.
Listings of HSPF input sequences and other details about the mechanics of using
HSPF are found in the 'Guide to the Application of the Hydrological Simulation
Program - Fortran (HSPF)' which is available from the EPA Center for Environmental
Assessment Modeling (CEAM) in Athens, Ga.
653
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sample Runs
FIGURE 1 - TEST RUN MATRIX
TEST RUN
BLOCK SECTION 1 2 3 4 567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
NEWTSS X
TSSH X
GLOBAL
OPN SEQUENCE
PERLND
IMPLND
RCHRES
- ATEMP
SNOW
PWATER
SEDMNT
PSTEMP
PWTGAS
PQUAL
MSTLAY
PEST
NITR
PHOS
TRACER
- ATEMP
SNOW
IWATER
SOLIDS
IWTGAS
IQUAL
- HYDR
CONS
HTRCH
SEDTRN
GQUAL
RQUAL
OXRX
NUTRX
X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X
X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X X
X X
X X
: • ' x
X
X
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
654
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Sample Runs
FIGURE 1 - TEST RUN MATRIX (cont)
TEST RUN
BLOCK SECTION 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 9 10 11 12 13 14
UTILITY - COPY
PLTGEN
DURANL
GENER
MUTSIN
FTABLES
EXT SOURCES
NETWORK
EXT TARGETS
SPEC-ACTIONS
EXTERNAL - FTABLE
XX X
X
X X X X
X
x x
X
X X X X XX
X X X X
XXX
X X
X
X X
X X
x
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
AIR TEMP X
RADIATION X
655
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
r ' . ., . Hi: ' f |l>'.*i '•"!!"»""ll! "in-
Program NEWTSS
APPENDIX III
PROGRAM NEWTSS
This section has been omitted.
APPENDIX IV
GUIDE TO THE PROGRAMMERS SUPPLEMENT
This section has been omitted.
;iit t .•; Jil,
.,, ;:'rf1H'!':"x, T
: , i I",.1, „.
ill!,!;- idi.,
11 Hi .'/'''I
u ,t ill
656
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Concepts
APPENDIX V
TIME SERIES CONCEPTS
1.0 Time Series Concepts
A time series is a sequence of values ordered in time. The interval of time
between successive values is called the time step or the time increment or the time
interval of the time series. The time step for a time series is often a constant
value but may also be variable. The implementation in HSPF restricts the
variability in a manner discussed below. The values in the time series may
represent the behavior of a process at a point in time or an average over the time
step of the time series. A time series whose values represent behavior at points
in time is called a point-valued time series and is represented symbolically by
"*". Linear interpolation is used to define intermediate values in a point-valued
time series. A time series whose values represent average or aggregated behavior
over the time step are called mean-valued time series and are represented
symbolically as "-". The meaning of "average" and "mean" is taken in a wide sense
and includes any value assumed to be representative of behavior of the time series
over the time step, rather than at a specific point in time.
The following figure shows the difference between the point and mean value time
series in graphic form. It is important to note that only one value is needed to
represent the behavior of a mean-valued time series for one time step. We visualize
the value as being assigned to a time step in this case. On the other hand, two
values are needed to represent the behavior of a point-valued time series over the
same interval. We visualize the values as being assigned to the time points in this
case. Each time point at which a value of the series is given in a point-valued
time series is viewed as "belonging" to the time step which it ends. Time points
belonging to all time steps contained within a larger time step are viewed as
belonging to the larger time step also. For example, all time points in a
point-valued time series except the first time point belong to the time interval
spanning the time series duration. The first time point of a point-valued time
series is viewed as belonging to the time step immediately preceding the first time
step of the time series. This precise definition of belongingness for a time point
is needed to avoid confusion in defining operations on the time series.
A number of operations on time series, discussed in Section 4.6 of Part F, preserve
the integral of the time series between any two time points which end time steps
in the time series. The integral may be visualized as the area under the broken
line graph formed by connecting adjacent values in the point-valued time series or
the area under the histogram representing the mean-valued time series. The
trapezoidal rule applied to the point-valued time series yields the exact value of
the integral whereas the simple rectangular rule yields the exact value for the
mean-valued time series.
657
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Concepts
Point-valued time series
X
o . . .,.
o o
o
0 00
I -I——I I I- I
01 2 3 4 5 6
Time point numbers
Mean-valued time series
X
.'
/
1 1 1
Time point # --> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time step # --> 1 2 3 4 5 6
Figure 1. Comparison between point- and mean-valued time series
658
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Series Concepts
Time is given as year/month/day/hour/minute to completely specify either a time
interval or a time point. The date/time given by the internal clock uses the
"contained within" principle for all levels of the date/time. That is, each
smaller interval is contained within the next larger interval. This is the
conventional usage for year/month/day but is not conventional for the hour/ minute.
For example, the date string 1977/01/02 labels the second day of the first month
of the 1977th year. On the other hand, in conventional usage the time string 10:15
refers to the end of the 15th minute after (not within) the 10th hour of the day.
This change in meaning is eliminated in the internal date/ time clock for HSPF.
In the internal system, time string 10/15 labels the 15th minute of (ie. within)
the 10th hour of the day. A comparable time to 10:15 in the conventional sense
would be 11/15; that is, the 15th minute of the llth hour of the day.
In summary, the internal clock convention labels time intervals at all levels of
date/time whereas conventional usage labels time intervals for year/month/day but
labels time points for hour/minute. In HSPF, time points are then referenced
uniquely by the minute which ends at the time point in question.
The time steps in a time series are labelled with the minute which ends the time
step. Thus, the values in a mean-valued time series are treated logically as
having occurred at the end time point of the time step. Note that for purposes of
the internal clock and for description of internal concepts each time point has one
and only one label. This means that we refer to the instant in time forming the
boundary between two days using the label associated with the first day even though
our interest is centered on the second day. This convention is called the ending
time convention.
A starting time convention is used externally for some purposes because traditional
usage requires both conventions depending on the context of the statement about
time. Users are more comfortable using the traditional clock and both a starting
time and an ending time convention. The starting time convention is used when the
start of some time span is in mind and the ending time convention is used when the
end of some time span is in mind.
The time span associated with a time series must be defined. Logically, a time
series is of infinite length. Realistically, every time series has a finite length
and may be broken into short segments for convenience in recording the values on
some medium such as the printed page, a magnetic tape, a data card or a magnetic
disk. These shorter segments are made necessary by various software and hardware
constraints. Therefore, a time span is associated with each medium used to record
or store the time series.
659
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
Time Aeries Concepts
A further practical complication is created by the variety of representations used
for time series. The user's most likely mental image is a line drawn in some
coordinate system on the printed page. This method of'representing time series is
most convenient for the user but a series of discrete numbers is most convenient
for the digital computer. The time series of indefinite length must be subdivided
into shorter time spans to fit the card images or the records on the tape or disk.
In some cases data for the time series may be incomplete (some values not present)
or, in some cases, many of the values are zero so that not all values for the time
series are stored on the medium. In such cases a date/time indicator is given on
the record. As an example, think of the format used for data cards punched by the
National Weather Records Center. The date/time information on each record of the
medium permits the reconstruction of the complete time series (except for the
missing values) even though not all values are recordedon the medium. However,
conventions must be established so that missing records on a given recording medium
are properly interpreted. For example, are the missing data merely zeros or did
they occur because of instrument malfunction? If the data are missing, a "filler"
should be inserted when the data are placed on the WDM or TSS so that it can be
changed at a later time or so that such missing periods can be properly handled by
other parts of the HSPF system. The filler value is called an "undefined" value in
the TSS system or the TSFILL attribute in the WDM system.
The time step for a time series can vary in multiples of a basic time step
established for the time series. The basic time step for the time series must be
truly a constant value. For example, a time series at a monthly interval does not
have a constant time step. Therefore, the basic time step assigned to such a time
series is daily because a day is of constant length and is commensurable with all
months. The values for each month are stored in a compressed form so that each
day's value need not be present on the TSS. The daily time step is the longest
basic time step available for storing information on the TSS.
660
• U.S GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 1993- 750- 002/80282
•,!!,, ,, "J;1 J1 , ',!!• diiiiill1 iHIIMillil [ !i'liiil!&!'!iy' , ;, I1 oil, »
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
</pre><hr><pre>
-------
</pre><hr><pre>
------- </pre></td></tr></table></body></html>